JP7698207B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, a game starts when a start command device (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged on the outer periphery rotate. When the reels are stopped by using a reel stop device (stop button) to stop the rotation, and a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up on an active line, the machine generally transitions to a special game state (a game state in which the probability of winning a small role or the like is higher than usual) that is more profitable for the player than the normal game state. In addition to such basic games, various presentations are performed in a slot machine to improve the overall entertainment value.
In addition, when the game medals are paid out, a payout sound is output, the number of medals won is displayed, and a backlight is turned on, allowing the player to recognize that the game medals have been paid out appropriately.

JP 2019-217068 A

There is a demand for improved performance in this type of gaming machine.

A predetermined switch;
and a predetermined switch lamp;
A long press effect is provided that continuously changes the display mode while a predetermined switch is being pressed, and the long press effect is composed of a plurality of moving images.
The predetermined switch lamp can be lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the long press performance during the long press performance,
When a display state changed based on pressing a predetermined switch during display of a first moving image of a long press performance satisfies a predetermined condition, a second moving image of a long press performance is displayed;
When the pressing of the predetermined switch is interrupted during the display of the predetermined moving image for the long press effect, the display of the predetermined moving image is temporarily stopped;
When the predetermined switch continues to be pressed and the front door is opened during the display of the predetermined moving image for the long press performance, the predetermined switch lamp lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the opening of the front door, but the display of the predetermined moving image is continued without interruption , and the pressing of the predetermined switch continues to be validly accepted , and when the setting key switch reaches a predetermined state and transitions to a setting confirmation mode, the display of the predetermined moving image is interrupted even if the pressing of the predetermined switch continues.
Amusement machine.

The present invention can improve the performance of gaming machines.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the cabinet of the slot machine PS1. A diagram showing the back surface of the front panel PS2. A diagram showing the inner surface of the cabinet PS3. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing functional blocks. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start process. 11 is a flowchart showing a power-off process. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 11 is a flowchart showing a power interruption recovery process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main game progress. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. A flowchart showing the favorable zone clear counter management process. 1 is a diagram illustrating a reel arrangement in the present embodiment. 11 is a diagram illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. 11 is a diagram illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. 11 is a diagram illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a condition device in the present embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. This is an example of a push button effect. 13 is an example of a display mode of a display device when a push button effect is executed. This is an example of a step-up preview in normal presentation mode. This is an example of a dialogue preview in normal presentation mode. This is an example of a line preview during a continuous performance. This is an example of a switch image for effect when the front panel PS2 is open. 13 is an example of a switch image for effect in a demo screen. 13 is an example of a switch image for effect in a demo screen. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where the MAX bet switch is not operated to insert a coin after the payout process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where an insert operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where a settlement operation is performed using a settlement switch after the dispensing process is completed. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where no gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the case where a gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where a payout is performed normally. 13 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a payout has been normally performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program showing the prohibition and permission of interrupts. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a time chart of an 8-bit counter and a timer interrupt process. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the execution timing of a timer interrupt process. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a stage change effect. A figure showing an example of the first continuous performance. A figure showing an example of a second continuous performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a caption is displayed in a continuous performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the flow until the NEXT image is displayed in a continuous performance. A figure showing an example of a push order navigation image. A figure showing an example of a push order navigation image displayed on a liquid crystal display. A figure showing an example in which a specified error occurs while a push order navigation image is being displayed. This is a time chart for when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart for when the MAX BET switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart when a MAX BET switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart for when no gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a normal payout is not made after a cherry win (when a hopper empty error occurs). This is a time chart when a payout is not made normally after a cherry win (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a reel arrangement used to explain the correct operation challenge presentation. A figure showing a list of condition devices used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations used to explain the correct operation challenge performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations used to explain the correct operation challenge performance. A diagram showing the correspondence between condition devices and pattern combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. A diagram showing the correspondence between condition devices and pattern combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. A diagram showing the correspondence between condition devices and pattern combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of game screens when a normal mode is set and when a distribution mode is set. 2 is a diagram showing each area stored in a main control ROM; FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an interrupt initial setting area and automatic allocation according to the priority order of the interrupt initial setting area. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between power-on processing and interrupt vector addresses of timer interrupt processing; 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt vector addresses of the power-on process and the timer interrupt process and other programs. FIG. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A figure showing an example of ball output specifications that span advantageous zones. A flowchart showing the favorable zone clear counter management process corresponding to the difference counter. A flowchart showing the favorable zone clear counter management process corresponding to the difference counter. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stoppage monitoring process. A figure showing an example of the presentation of the operation advance notification state and the end notification state. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the reel arrangement in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 1. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a condition device in specification 1. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 1. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 1. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 1. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 1. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the reel arrangement in specification 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the pattern combinations in specification 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a condition device in specification 2. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 2. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 2. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 2. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 2. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 2. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in specification 2. A diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 2. A diagram explaining stop control for each game state in specification 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the liquid crystal display screen during the introduction period of specification 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the liquid crystal display screen during the introduction period of specification 2. 13 is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal screen of another presentation mode using a presentation switch. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal screen of another presentation mode using a presentation switch. FIG.

<Terminology>
"Medals (number of medals)", "game media (number of game media)", and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet", "BET", and "insertion" regarding game media are synonymous, and all are acts of betting (putting) game media. When expressing a hexadecimal number, it is written as "0x00" or "00h", and when expressing a binary number, it is written as "00000000b" or "00000000B", and if there is no special notation before or after the number, it is expressed in decimal. "Reel" may be called "rotor", and all are synonymous. "Storage means" may be called "RWM", "RAM", or "storage area", and all are synonymous. "Grant" used in "grant of game media" or "grant of points" may be called "payout" or "acquisition", and all are synonymous. The "setting/reset switch" may be referred to as a "setting change switch" or a "reset switch" depending on its function, but in both cases, it refers to the same switch. The "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may each be provided as different switches. When a small symbol with a high payout or a small symbol with a low payout stops depending on the operation mode, the small symbol with a high payout may be referred to as a high symbol (high symbol bell, high symbol small symbol are also synonymous), and the small symbol with a low payout may be referred to as a low symbol (low symbol bell, low symbol small symbol are also synonymous). When a symbol combination with no payout stops at this time, it may be referred to as a spill symbol (synonymous spill symbol).

The following describes in detail an embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as the present embodiment) with reference to the drawings.

<Explanation of Slot Machine PS1>
The components of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

The slot machine PS1 is roughly divided into a front panel PS2 side and a cabinet PS3 side, with the necessary parts and circuit boards attached to each side. The sides of the front panel PS2 and cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device, and the locking device side can be opened by inserting a lock key into the locking device provided on the front panel PS2 and rotating it in a specific direction. In other words, the front panel PS2 functions as a door to the cabinet PS3.

<Front panel PS2>
The front panel PS2 (also referred to as the front door PS2, front surface door PS2, or front door PS2) is a plate-like member with a design, and on the front side (player side) there are provided a middle panel (including a display window 4, operation indicator lamps 24, etc.), an operation panel 11 (including bet number display lamps 25, credit number display 26, number of won coins display 27, etc.), a lower panel 5 (also referred to as the lower panel 5), upper or both side performance lamps, etc., and on the back side there are provided a medal selector 34 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., and a setting display LED (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the setting value display LED, setting display device, setting value display device, or setting value display device).

<Display window 4>
The display window 4 is an area provided on the front panel PS2, and when the front panel PS2 is closed, the symbols drawn on the reels are visible. The symbols printed on the outer periphery of each reel tape fixed to each reel rim of the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are configured to be visible from the front side (the player side) through the display window 4. When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of 21 symbols (20 or 16 symbols may be freely designed depending on the specifications) are visible. That is, a total of nine symbols (3 symbols x 3 reels) are visible from the display window 4. Here, among the stop positions at which the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is called the upper row, the central stop position is called the middle row, and the lowermost stop position is called the lower row.

<Valid line>
The pay line is a symbol combination line that is the target of the winning judgment process (described later) when the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are stopped. The pay line in this embodiment is visible through the display window 4 and is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) that passes through the middle of each reel. When the winning judgment process determines that the symbol combination stopped on the pay line corresponds to any role, a process corresponding to the stopped symbol combination is performed. As an example, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a minor role such as a bell has stopped, a payout process of game medals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medals, game media, or game value) or a credit addition process is performed, and when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped, an automatic bet process is performed.

Depending on the slot machine PS1, the effective lines may be set to five lines, including an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, a line rising to the right, and a line falling to the right, or six or more lines may be set, including non-straight, roughly mountain-shaped (lower left reel 8a, upper middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), roughly valley-shaped (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, upper right reel 8c), roughly L-shaped (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), or the effective lines may be set to change depending on the number of coins bet, and may be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1. Also, straight lines other than the effective lines may be called inactive lines.

<Operation indicator lamp 24>
The operation indicator lamps 24 are provided around the display window 4, and indicate the operation sequence of the stop switches 13 (described later) to the player when the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are spinning. That is, when the left operation indicator lamp 24a is lit (the center operation indicator lamp 24b and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, when the center operation indicator lamp 24b is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the center stop switch 13b should be operated, and when the right operation indicator lamp 24c is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the center operation indicator lamp 24b are off), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

＜Bet number display lamp 25＞
The bet number display lamp 25 (also called the bet number display lamp 25, the bet number display lamp 25, the bet number display lamp 25, or the bet number display lamp 25) is provided on the operation panel 11 and has a function of displaying the number of bets made by the player's operation. It is also composed of a 1 bet lamp 25a (not shown), a 2 bet lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3 bet lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a lights up, when a total of two medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a and the 2 bet lamp 25b light up, and when a total of three medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c light up. In addition, although not shown, after the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed, when the automatic bet process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay was won is turned on, and the replay lamp is turned on. The timing of lighting the bet number display lamp 25 and the timing of lighting the replay lamp may be simultaneous, or one of them may be configured to light up first.

<Credit Number Display 26>
The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment display 26a (not shown) which is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the upper digits of the credit number, and a segment display 26b (not shown) which is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the lower digits of the credit number. The credit number means the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and can be stored up to a maximum of 50. In addition, when an error is detected and normal play cannot proceed, a display related to the error may be displayed.

<Acquired coin number display 27>
The acquired coin number indicator 27 (also called acquired coin number indicator, acquired number indicator, payout coin number indicator, or payout number indicator) is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment indicator 27a (not shown) which is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the upper digits of the acquired coin number, and a segment indicator 27b (not shown) which is composed of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the lower digits of the acquired coin number. The acquired coin number means the number of medals paid out to the player (including the number of medals stored in the credit number indicator 26) according to the results of the game in the slot machine PS1. In addition, when an error is detected and normal game play cannot proceed, a display related to the error may be displayed.

The credit number display 26 and the acquired coin number display 27 may display information other than the credit number information or the acquired coin number information depending on whether the DP is lit or not. For example, information indicating that the player is in a favorable zone (described later) or that a specific external signal is being output may be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. The acquired coin number display 27 may also have the ability to notify the player of the order of pressing using the display section for the upper digits and the display section for the lower digits. When the acquired coin number display 27 is used to notify the order of pressing, the acquired coin number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Operation panel 11>
The operation panel 11 is provided at approximately the center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped manner with a horizontal section that is approximately horizontal and a vertical section that extends approximately vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal section, and a start switch 12 and a stop switch 13, which will be described later, are provided on the vertical section, and a medal insertion slot 17, which will be described later, a plurality of bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, a settlement switch (not shown), and a performance switch (not shown) are provided on the horizontal section.

<Start switch 12>
The start switch (also called start lever) 12 is provided on the vertical part of the operation panel 11. It is a lever-shaped operation part, and the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and the mechanism is such that the start switch is determined to have been operated when the start switch sensor is OFF when operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes effective when the number of bets reaches a specified number, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process, a process related to the instruction function, a reel rotation process, or the like is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the input signal is low active, when the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, the start switch input signal is OFF, and when the start switch sensor is changed from ON to OFF when operated, the start switch input signal is ON. Not limited to this, the start switch input signal may be configured to be ON when the start switch sensor is ON. In other words, the specified number refers to the number of bets required to start a game.

In the following, when it is simply stated that "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated," it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON.

<Stop switch 13>
The stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11. In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c corresponds to the right reel 8c. When the stop switch 13 can be operated, the color of the lamp provided on the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamps around it is changed to indicate that the stop switch 13 is active. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the lamp is lit in blue, and when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated, the lamp is lit in red. When the stop switch 13 can be operated, the lamp is lit, and when the stop switch 13 cannot be operated, the lamp is turned off.

<Medal slot 17>
The medal insertion port 17 is provided on the operation panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal insertion port, and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. A number of different medal insertion ports 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of a number of different medals, but the installation standards for the various medal insertion ports 17 are made the same so that they can be installed on the operation panel 11 in a common manner.

Regarding the insertion of gaming media, the gaming media is not limited to the medals mentioned above, but may be, for example, gaming balls (so-called Parrots) used in pachinko gaming machines, or gaming medium information stored in an electrical storage medium such as a magnetic card or flash memory, which is input into the gaming machine, and the number of bets is set and added when a win is made based on the input gaming medium information.

<Bet Switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19)>
The bet switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the bet switch is operated while there are medals stored in the credit, a bet process is executed and a process of setting the number of bets is performed equivalent to the act of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 17. However, even if the bet switch is operated when there are no medals stored in the credit, the bet process is invalid (the operation of the bet switch is not accepted). The MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player, a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part, and a light-emitting part (also called a MAX bet lamp) that lights up the push-down part, and the 1 bet switch 19 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player and a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part (the 1 bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting part).

The MAX BET lamp informs the player that betting processing can be performed when the MAX BET switch is operated, and various notification modes are possible, such as lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specified color or blinking the MAX BET lamp at a specified interval. Conversely, when the MAX BET switch is operated but betting processing cannot be performed, possible modes include lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specific color or not lighting the MAX BET lamp.

Also, the slot machine PS1 is provided with a MAX bet switch 18 that allows the user to bet the maximum number of coins (3 coins in this embodiment) set for each slot machine PS1, and a 1 bet switch 19 that allows the user to bet 1 coin. The MAX bet process is executed when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, and the 1 bet process is executed when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated. The MAX bet process can be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently betted is 3 or more, and the number of bets currently betted is less than 3. The MAX bet process cannot be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently betted is less than 3 (in other words, when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the number of bets is less than 3) or when 3 bets have already been made. The 1 bet process can be executed when the number of credits is 1 or more, and the number of bets currently betted is less than 3, and cannot be executed when 3 bets have already been made.

In addition, the 1 bet switch 19 executes one bet process each time it is operated, and when no bets have been placed, operating the 1 bet switch 19 three times results in three bets, and three operations of the 1 bet switch 19 are equivalent to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18.

In addition, although an embodiment has been described in which the 1 bet switch 19 is disabled when 3 bets have been made, the system may be configured so that when 3 bets have been made and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated once, the 1 bet state is established and 2 cards are returned to the credits.

In addition, although an embodiment has been described in which the MAX bet process executed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 is not executed when the number of bets is less than 3, a process in which the maximum number that can currently be bet is betted can also be considered. In other words, a process in which 2 credits are bet when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated when no bet has been made and the number of credits is 2 can also be considered.

The maximum number of coins that can be betted may be configured to differ depending on the game state, and may be configured such that the maximum number of coins that can be betted during non-bonus play is 3 coins, and the maximum number of coins that can be betted during bonus play is 2 coins.

<Sub switch 20>
The sub-switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of a push-down part made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection part for detecting that the push-down part has been operated, and a sub-switch lamp for illuminating the push-down part of the sub-switch. This sub-switch 20 is a switch for mainly displaying a menu screen on the display device 32 described later. In addition to the sub-switch 20 as an input means managed by the sub-control board 1000, a sub-cross key switch 21 (up switch, down switch, left switch, right switch) and a performance switch (a switch operated by an instruction during a game) are provided. The sub-switch 20 can also function as a trigger for starting a linkage system with a mobile terminal (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile linkage system) described later. Although the sub-switch 20 is divided into a menu display function and the performance switch is divided into a switch for operation during a game, they may be a common switch.

The menu screen displays role configuration items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light intensity adjustment items, and items related to the mobile linkage system, and the cursor selecting an item is controlled to move up and down by operating the up switch or down switch of the sub cross key switch 21. Also, when the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on any of the items, details of that item are displayed. For example, when the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on the volume adjustment item, a volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the left switch or right switch of the sub cross key switch 21.

The menu screen can also be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 when no bets have been placed after the end of a game. The menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 regardless of whether the presentation state at this time is normal presentation, continuous presentation, AT presentation, or demo screen (a screen that appears 60 seconds after the end of a game, and which displays the manufacturer's name and a presentation introduction in the form of a moving image). However, this is not limited to the embodiment, and the menu screen may not be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous presentation or AT presentation.

<Switch for performance>
The effect switch is provided on the operation panel 11, and is composed of a push-down part made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection part for detecting that the push-down part has been operated, and an effect switch lamp for lighting up the push-down part of the effect switch. When the effect switch is operated in a situation where operation of the effect switch is valid, an effect based on the operation is executed. For example, when a continuous effect is being executed on the display device (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "liquid crystal") 32, a "success" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "successful effect") meaning that a bonus is given in the final game of the continuous effect, or a "failure" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "failure effect") meaning that a bonus is not given, the effect switch may be operated to display "success" or "failure".

In addition, when the operation of the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp lights up, making it possible to inform the player that the operation of the effect switch is valid. The lighting mode of the effect switch can be such that it is unlit when the operation of the effect switch is invalid, and is lit when the operation of the effect switch is valid. Another lighting mode when the operation of the effect switch is valid may be such that it is repeatedly lit and turned off at a fixed cycle.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the performance switch is valid, a display simulating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD to notify the user that the operation of the performance switch is valid. When a display simulating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD, it is displayed based on a command received from the main control means 100. For example, a display simulating the performance switch may be displayed based on a start switch reception command, or a display simulating the performance switch may be displayed based on a command to stop all reels.

In addition, by pressing the performance switch, the detectable piece provided on the performance switch can be moved to a detection position (on position) where it is detected by a sensor provided on the performance switch, and by moving the performance switch away (an operation in which the spring provided on the performance switch is returned to its natural length by the force of its extension) while the sensor is detecting the detectable piece, the detectable piece can be moved to a non-detection position (off position) where it is not detected by the sensor.

The performance switch has been described as a push-type switch, but it is not limited to this and may be a switch with a jog dial structure. Any other structure may also be used as long as it can detect the on and off positions.

<Settlement switch>
The settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the settlement switch is operated after the game is finished, a process (settlement process) is executed to pay out the number of game media bet and the number of game media stored in the credit to the player. Note that in this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated under a situation where a bet has been made and game media are stored in the credit, the bet game media are paid out first, and then the game media stored in the credit are paid out. However, this is not limited to this, and a process of paying out the game media stored in the credit only when the number of game media bet is 0 may be executed. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated under a situation where a bet has been made, only the bet game media are paid out, and when the settlement switch is operated again after that, the game media stored in the credit are paid out.

<Lower Panel 5>
The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. It is made of two sheets of transparent resin joined together, with a design sheet sandwiched between the two sheets of resin, and the design sheet is printed with a color characteristic of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout outlet 45>
The medal payout outlet 45 is provided below the lower panel 5. It is an outlet for discharging medals paid out from a hopper 44 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (to the tray 28). It also serves as a return port for discharging medals rejected by a medal selector 34 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Tray 28>
The tray 28 (also called the "lower tray") is provided below the lower panel 5. It has a generally concave structure so that it can receive and store the medals released from the medal payout opening 45, and is provided so as to protrude towards the player so that the player can check the stored medals.

Other functions of the tray 28 include a cigarette ashtray 29 and a seal storage section 30 with an opening that can store a resin sheet with a union license seal, patent seal, and model seal attached, and display them to the player.

<Speaker S>
The speakers S are provided at the top and bottom of the front panel PS2. They are connected to the sub-control board 1000 by a harness (not shown), and output sound effects in accordance with the performance, as well as error sounds and warning sounds that notify the user of the occurrence of an error.

<Display device 32>
The display device 32 is provided above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and displays various performance images, as well as game instruction images that indicate the order in which the stop switch 13 is pressed and the position to be pressed during a game (when only the order of pressing is displayed, it is called a push order navigation image (also called a push order image, an operation sequence image, or an operation order image), when only the position to be pressed is displayed, it may be called a push order navigation image (also called a push image or an operation position image), or when both the order of pressing and the position to be pressed are displayed and it may be called an operation mode navigation image (also called an operation mode image) as a higher concept than the order of pressing and the position to be pressed), an error image when an error occurs, etc. Also, some slot machines PS1 are not equipped with the display device 32 depending on the model.

<Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable props>
Other performance devices such as a dot display and movable accessories are provided at any position on the front panel PS2, such as around the display window 4, on the middle panel, or on the lower panel 5. The other performance devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and perform various performance images and performance operations, as well as game instruction images and operations that indicate the order of pressing the stop switch 13 and the position to press during a game, and error images and operations when an error occurs. The other performance devices are installed arbitrarily according to the type of slot machine PS1. In addition, various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can be used as other performance devices. In particular, in a gaming machine that is equipped with a liquid crystal as an auxiliary performance device, the display device 32 may be called the main display device, and the liquid crystal as the other performance device may be called the sub-display device. In this case, the main display device is configured to have a larger display area than the sub-display device.

<Medal Selector 34>
The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the rear side of the front panel PS2, and is provided in the flow passage below the medal insertion port 17. The medal selector 34 has a medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by the player using a sensor provided on the flow passage, a medal removal function that guides inserted medals that do not meet the specifications to a receiving tray 28, an ejection function that removes medals that have become stuck in the medal selector 34 when an eject switch provided on the front side of the front panel PS2 is operated, and a blocker function that removes medals inserted at times other than when medals are accepted from the flow passage using an electrically driven blocking member (also called a blocker). If a medal inserted when medals are accepted is a regular medal, the medal selector 34 discharges the medal to a hopper 44 located downstream.

The various sensors in the medal selector consist of a passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, and chute sensor. The passage sensor is the first sensor to detect medals inserted through the medal insertion port, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. Insert sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and blocker, and are provided to determine the passage time of medals passing insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 to determine whether they pass normally or abnormally. Insert sensor 2 is located downstream of insertion sensor 1. The chute sensor is located downstream of insertion sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of inserted and ejected medals. The passage sensor and chute sensor have overlapping functions, so only one of them may be provided.

When the blocker in the medal selector is ON, it allows the game medals to pass through, and when it is OFF, it does not allow the game medals to pass through. Allowing the game medals to pass through means that the game medals inserted through the medal insertion port are guided to the hopper 44, and not allowing the game medals to pass through means that the game medals inserted through the medal insertion port are not guided to the hopper 44.

The following describes the components of the cabinet PS3 in the slot machine PS1.

<Cabinet PS3>
Cabinet PS3 is configured in a rectangular box shape with an opening on one side, and inside are provided a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "reset switch" or the "setting switch"), a power supply 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, etc.

<Main control board 100>
The main control board 100 is housed in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are fitted together, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are caulked together so that they cannot be easily opened or closed (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to a main control board case bracket inside the cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6>
The reel unit 6 is mainly composed of a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a center reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 in the center of the cabinet PS3 and fixed by locking members (screws or rivets).

The reels (left reel 8a, center reel 8b, right reel 8c) are composed of a reel base, a reel tape with multiple types of patterns attached to the outer circumference of the reel base, a stepping motor axially supported by the reel base, and a motor fixing base to which the stepping motor is fixed, which is generally considered to be the reel unit. A different pattern arrangement is drawn on the reel tape for each reel.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 rotations per minute), the stepping motor moves one step each time a timer interrupt process (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as interrupt process) is executed, maintaining a constant speed rotation state (constant speed rotation), and then, in response to the player's operation of the stop switch 13, the corresponding reel is moved at a constant speed rotation to a stop position determined for each stop operation reception position, and after the reel has been moved to the stop position, the brakes are applied (a four-phase excitation signal is output), stopping the reel rotation and terminating the excitation output.

In addition, an index is provided on the spoke part provided at the reel base of each reel, and an index sensor provided on the motor fixing base of each reel detects the index to determine the position of the reference pattern (also called the initial pattern) during each rotation. In this embodiment, the stepping motor, which is the driving source of the reel, has 336 steps, and during constant speed rotation, one rotation is completed with 336 timer interrupt processes. During constant speed rotation, a rotation failure detection counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process is executed twice, and if the counter value of the rotation failure detection counter reaches 180, it is determined that there is a rotation failure. In other words, if the reel does not rotate once even after executing the timer interrupt process 360 times, it is determined that there is a rotation failure. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that if the constant speed rotation process is normal, the rotation failure detection counter will reach 0 before it reaches 180.

In this embodiment, a determination is made as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing, and a determination is not made as to whether an index has been detected during acceleration processing, but this is not limiting, and a determination as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing and acceleration processing may also be made. With this configuration, it is possible to more quickly bring the player into a state where stop acceptance is possible.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided on the motor fixing base of each reel, which is turned on to highlight the stopped symbols after the reel has stopped, and to improve the visibility of the symbols while the reel is spinning.

<Hopper 44>
The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals inserted by a player. The hopper 44 is placed by engaging with a rail provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3, and can slide back and forth along the rail. The hopper 44 is composed of a storage tank section that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 to the inside of the gaming machine, a hopper motor that is driven by a drive signal input from the hopper drive means, a turntable that is supported by the hopper motor and that aligns the medals in the storage tank section, a medal payout section that is provided with a discharge mechanism for discharging medals one by one into the tray 28 by rotating the turntable, a medal discharge port that discharges medals by the medal payout section, and a payout sensor that detects medals discharged from the medal discharge port.

<Auxiliary tank 46>
The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and medals stored in excess of the capacity of the storage tank section of the hopper 44 are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 through a downwardly inclined rail section provided in the storage tank section. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box structure, and when installed in the cabinet PS3, two full detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are provided so as to be exposed in the auxiliary tank 46 from through holes provided in at least one side, and when a certain amount or more of medals inserted from the medal insertion port are stored, the two full detection electrodes are energized through the medals, and it is determined that the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 are full. The number of full detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of full detection electrodes may be changed, for example, to three. The method of full detection is not limited to the method using full detection electrodes, and full detection may be possible by a sensor provided at a predetermined position detecting medals.

<Setting key switch 37>
The setting key switch 37 is provided in a setting key switch unit that has an opening/closing door on the front side provided inside the slot machine PS1. After opening the front panel PS2, access is possible by opening the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it 90 degrees to the right. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in a state in which medals can be accepted, the current setting value can be confirmed, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is on during the power-off recovery process (also referred to as the power-on process) when the power is turned on, a setting change process (described later) is executed.

<Power supply device 39>
The power supply unit 39 is provided at the lower left when viewed from the front of the cabinet PS3. The power supply unit 39 has a rectangular box structure, has a power switch 40 provided on the outside, and has a power supply board that generates voltage provided inside. The power supply unit 39 is individually connected to the reel device board and the sub-control board 1000 via a harness (not shown), and is further connected from the reel device board to the main control board 100 via a harness to supply power to the main control board 100.

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 is configured to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1, generate a predetermined voltage, and cause the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000 to take in the predetermined voltage, and when the power switch 40 is turned off, it is configured not to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1.

<External output terminal board 47>
The external output terminal board 47 (also called the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally attached inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and converts the signal related to the game result output from the main control board 100 into a signal of a predetermined format and transmits it to the outside of the slot machine PS1. The contents of the game result include the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (the number of big bonuses, the number of regular bonuses), a door opening signal, etc. Other conditions for transmitting a signal to the outside can be set based on predetermined information controlled by the main control board 100, such as when the AT state is reached, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, when the value of a counter related to the game reaches a predetermined value, etc.

<Function block diagram>
A functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Main control board 100>
The slot machine PS1 of this embodiment is capable of data communication by being electrically connected from a main control board 100 (also referred to as main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) that controls the general flow of the game to a sub-control board 1000 (also referred to as sub-control means 1000, sub-control board 1000, or sub-control means 1000), a door relay board (also referred to as central display board), a reel device board, a reset/setting switch 38, a setting key switch, etc. However, two-way communication is not possible between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000, and data communication is possible by one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 1000.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main control chip. The main control chip allows data communication between the main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM, etc. via a bus. The main control chip also has a main control built-in register, and the main control built-in register and the main control CPU can communicate data with each other via a bus. The main control chip also has general-purpose registers (e.g., A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that the main control CPU can use for calculations, etc., a PC register that stores the program (return address) after a return command (e.g., RET command) after executing a program by a call command (e.g., CALL command), and an interrupt register (e.g., IFF1 register, IFF2 register) that manages the enable and disable states of maskable interrupts.

By controlling the main control chip, the role selection (also called internal selection), reel drive control (also called reel control), payout control, etc. are appropriately transmitted to various boards. In addition, to the sub-control board 1000, when a selected role (also called AT role, AT target role, push order role, eye push role, or operation procedure role including both push order role and eye push role) is won as a result of the internal selection, and information regarding the display of the selected role (push order, operation timing) is notified on the main control means 100 side, the sub-control means can also notify information regarding the display of the selected role by transmitting selected role information (selected role group information, information regarding the display of the selected role). In addition, all processing related to the AT, such as transition to AT, extension of the number of AT plays, and push order notification, is sometimes referred to as processing related to the instruction function. The push order role is a condition device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the order in which the reels are stopped (push order), and the eye-pressing role is a condition device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the timing at which the stop button is operated.

The main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less", and has a usage area (also called the first program area) of "7.5 KB or less" and the rest outside the usage area (also called the second program area). The usage area has a control area (also called the first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which the programs executed by the main control board 100 are stored, and a data area (also called the first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than the programs (for example, internal lottery table information) is stored or will be stored. Outside the usage area, like the usage area, there is a control area (also called the second control area) and a data area (also called the second data area). The usage area stores programs related to the progress of the game, and outside the usage area stores programs related to anti-fraud measures and programs used for gaming machine testing.

The main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 has a memory capacity of "1024B or less," and has a usable area of "512B or less" (also called the first working area) and a non-usable area (also called the second working area). The first working area is a memory area that can be rewritten as the game progresses, and the second working area is a memory area that can be rewritten when programs for anti-fraud measures and gaming machine testing are executed.

The main control RAM built into the main control chip has storage areas for switch status flags indicating the on/off state of the play stop switch and the on/off state of the automatic settlement switch, a storage area for setting value information indicating which of 1 to 6 the value is set to, a storage area for RT status information indicating which of multiple RT statuses the RT status is in, a storage area for specific condition devices indicating the winning status of specific condition devices such as bonuses, a storage area for game information storing other information necessary to progress the game, an unused storage area, a storage area for a stack area storing data evacuated from registers, and a storage area for a temporary stack area set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized when the setting change means changes the settings, when the power is turned off and back on, and at the start of each game, and the range of the main control RAM memory area that is initialized differs depending on the case.

If power recovery cannot be performed normally or recovery is not possible during the setting change process, data 0 is set (initialized) in the RAM area excluding the storage area for the switch status flag. In other words, only the switch status flag carries over the state before the setting change; for example, the RT status and condition device flags are cleared and not carried over.

Also, during the setting change process, if the power recovery can be performed normally or if the state is not unrecoverable, that is, if the setting change process is performed normally, data 0 is set in the RAM area excluding the areas storing the switch state flag, the setting value information, the RT state information, and the specific condition device. In other words, the RT state, setting value data, and condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the setting value after the setting change while maintaining the game state before the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and a new setting value is set in the subsequent setting change process, so it is used in the sub-control board 1000 to determine whether the setting has been changed.

In addition, when the power is restored, data 0 is set to unused memory areas in the RAM area at the start of each game, and data 0 is set to memory areas in the stack area excluding the most used area when the RAM is initialized when the power is restored.

The main control internal register built into the main control chip is used to control the operation settings and functions of each peripheral circuit (e.g., timer circuit, etc.) built into the main control chip.

For example, by writing (also called setting or storing) data to a specified memory area of the main control built-in register using a program stored in the main control ROM, it is possible to make settings (timer circuit settings) related to maskable interrupt processing (e.g. timer interrupt processing), which is one of the programs stored in the main control ROM.

<Sub-control board 1000>
The sub-control board 1000 is equipped with a sub-control chip. The sub-control chip allows the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. to communicate data with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the performance control board, and transmits data specifying the performance to be output to the speaker S, LED lamps, sub-switches 20, performance switches, etc. Data for the display device 32 is transmitted to the image control board. The sub-control board 1000 is also supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Reel device board>
The reel device board is a relay board that performs data communication between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also called external centralized terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. The reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that judges whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when a protruding piece (also called an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that judges whether the front door PS2 is opened or not. The payout sensor is a sensor that judges whether the medals pass properly when being paid out from the hopper 44. The external centralized terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the gaming machine. In addition, the reel device board is directly supplied with power from the power supply board.

<Door relay board>
The door relay board receives input information from various sensors in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, shoot sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and outputs information from the selector, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board is electrically connected to the selector, bet switch, stop switch, settlement switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, and advantageous zone lamp.

<Performance control board>
The performance control board (also referred to as the performance control means) is electrically connected to the sub-switch 20, the sub-cross key switch 21, the performance switch, the movable parts, the speaker S, the back lamp, the LED lamp provided on the front panel PS2, and the image control board which controls the display content of the display device 32.

The performance control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the output of performance to the performance device based on performance commands received from the sub-control means 1000.

The performance control means selects the performance content based on the result of the lottery of the role by the internal lottery means. In this embodiment, multiple types of performance content are prepared in advance, and the performance control means selects the performance content by lottery using software random numbers after the lottery of the role is performed by the internal lottery means at the start of a game, etc.

In addition, there are multiple types of presentation content depending on not only the result of the role selection but also the result of the freeze selection and the game state (RT state, freeze state), etc. Specifically, there are multiple types of presentation content corresponding to when a bonus is won, when a small role is won, when a replay is won, when a non-win is won, etc.

The presentation content determines what kind of presentation will be output (how the lamp will be turned on, blinking, or turned off, what kind of sound will be output from the speaker S, what kind of image will be displayed on the display device 32, etc.) and at what timing (when the start switch 12 or each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) as the game progresses.

It is also possible to generate effects output by the effect control means in response to operations by the player. For example, it is possible to generate effects by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on sub-control commands transmitted from the main control board 100 in response to operation signals from the start switch 12, stop switch 13, medal slot 17, bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), settlement switch, etc., whose operation signals are input to the main control board 100, or to generate effects directly from the sub-control board 1000 in response to sub-input switch operation means, such as the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, and effect switch, whose operation signals are input to the sub-control board 1000. Also, although the sub-control board 1000 and the effect control board are separate boards, they may be configured as a single board. In this case, the sub-control board 1000 has the functions and processing of the performance control board, and the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, performance switch, movable props, speaker S, back lamp, LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and an image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32 may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000.

<Image control board>
The image control board (also referred to as image control means) is provided with an image control ROM, a sound ROM, a cooling fan, etc. for specifically displaying the performance contents on the display device 32.

<Additional information on board configuration>
The sub-control board and the performance control board may be configured as one (one) board, or the sub-control board, the performance control board, and the image control board may be configured as one board. When the sub-control board and the performance control board are configured as one board, two sub-control CPUs and two performance control CPUs may be provided, or one CPU may be provided. The same applies when the sub-control board, the performance control board, and the image control board are configured as one board.

<Power supply board>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, power is supplied from the power supply board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40. The power supplied to the reel device board is then supplied to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, which makes an electrical connection. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 is then supplied to the performance control board, which in turn supplies power to the image control board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, which makes an electrical connection.

Next, we will explain the control of the main control board 100, which controls the game on the gaming machine.

<Error type>
Errors are broadly divided into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable error>
The recoverable errors are errors related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), errors related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), door open error, harness coming loose error, etc. When a recoverable error is set, if the cause of the various recoverable errors is removed and then the reset switch is operated, the machine is configured to be able to return to play without having to turn the power back on. During a recoverable error, information about the error that has occurred is displayed on the display device 32, payout number indicator, and various lamps to inform the player of what error has occurred.

If a recoverable error is detected during play, the game may be stopped at the time of detection, or may be stopped after the game in which the recoverable error was detected ends. By stopping game progress during a recoverable error, damage to the amusement center manager can be reduced even if the recoverable error occurred due to fraud. The condition for recovering from a recoverable error state may be configured to automatically recover by removing the cause of the error, and an error that can be recovered from without turning the power back on is called a recoverable error.

<Unrecoverable error>
In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, when an irreversible error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the output of the output port is cleared, and other measures are taken to restrict the progress of the game, and the fact that an irreversible state is reached is notified by displaying a message on the credit number display 26 according to the type of error.

In addition, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is cleared when a reset switch (not shown) is operated, but once an irrecoverable error is set, the irrecoverable error cannot be cleared by simply accepting a reset switch operation or by turning the power back on. In this case, the device is configured to clear the irrecoverable error by performing a setting change process. When the power is turned back on in the event of an irrecoverable error, after part of the power outage recovery process is executed, the device is controlled so that subsequent game processing is not executed by repeatedly displaying the irrecoverable error.

Examples of unrecoverable errors include when the number of coins bet at the time of the winning combination is other than the specified number, when the value is not within the normal range in the setting value error check, when it is determined that the power cut process was not performed normally when the power was restored after a power cut (sometimes called an "RWM (RAM) abnormality" or "RWM (RAM) error"), when a random number abnormality is detected such as an abnormality in the crystal oscillator frequency, or when a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination that is not on a winning line is stopped during the winning determination process.

In addition, if an unrecoverable error occurs, game progress will be halted regardless of whether the game is in progress or on standby (from the end of one game to the start of the next).

<How to play, game flow>
To play the slot machine PS1, first, medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 17, or medals stored in advance are bet (MAX BET switch 18, 1 BET switch 19) to set a predetermined number of medals to be bet (also called a prescribed number). In this embodiment, the prescribed number is set to three medals. By setting the number of medals to be bet, the pay line is set to be valid, and the game becomes available.

When the number of medals bet is set to the upper limit and a new medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot, the number of game medals stored in the credits increases. The maximum number of medals that can be stored in the credits is limited to 50. When medals that exceed the upper limit of the number of medals bet (3 medals) and the upper limit of the number of medals stored (50 medals) are inserted through the medal insertion slot (the 54th medal), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (a state that prevents medals from being inserted into the gaming machine) and the medals are returned to the tray. In other words, when the number of medals bet is at the upper limit and the number of stored credits is at the upper limit, the blocker is turned off (a path to the hopper 44 in the selector is not formed).

When medals are inserted, the bet number is added when the bet number is less than three (less than the maximum bet number in the game state when the medals are inserted). When medals are inserted, the credits can be saved when the bet number is three (the maximum bet number in the game state when the medals are inserted) and the credits are less than 50 (less than the upper limit that can be saved in the credits). In other words, when the sum of the bet number and the saved credits is less than 53, the medals will enter the gaming machine when inserted from the medal insertion slot. In addition, a condition for a medal to enter the gaming machine when inserted is that it is in standby mode (the period from the end of a game to the start of the next game). For example, the medal insertion requirement is met even during standby mode after a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed and an automatic bet process is executed. In this case, three medals have been bet in the automatic bet, so if the saved credits are less than 50, the medal insertion requirement is met.

Next, when operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, an internal lottery process is executed, and after determining the result of the internal lottery process (also called the role lottery result or condition device number), it is determined whether or not the minimum play time (also called the wait time (period) or 4.1 second timer) has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the reels begin to spin, and if the wait time has not elapsed, the reels wait without spinning until the wait time has elapsed.

Next, when an operation (stop operation) of any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops according to the result of the role selection and the timing when the stop operation was accepted. When all reels stop (also called a full stop), it is determined whether or not each of the stopped symbols determined at the time of acceptance of the stop of each reel is abnormal, and if they are not abnormal, a search is performed to determine which symbol combination has stopped, and depending on the symbol combination that corresponds to the search result, processing such as the payout of medals (including addition to credits), setting of a replay (automatic bet processing), setting of a bonus state, ending of the bonus state, setting of a RT state, and ending of the RT state is performed, and one game is completed.

<Freeze processing>
The freeze process (also called freeze effect) that temporarily stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time and delays it includes, for example, temporarily stopping functions related to the progress of the game, such as the reception of game media, the reception of the operation of the bet switch for determining the number of game media to be bet on credited in advance, the reception of the operation of the start switch 12 for starting the game, or the reception of the operation to stop the reels. The freeze process (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100.

The freeze effect may temporarily halt all of the functions related to the game progress described above, or may temporarily halt only some of the functions.

Examples of ways to temporarily halt game progress include not performing control processes based on the player's operation (processing to form a path through which medals are guided to the hopper 44 using blocker control, processing to set the number of coins to bet based on the operation of the bet switch, processing to spin the reels or internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12, and processing to stop the reels based on the operation of the stop switch 13).

When an input signal based on a player's operation is issued during a period in which game progress is paused by a freeze effect, the game will not perform control processing based on the input signal, will not accept the input signal, or will delay sending the input signal until a specified period has passed, thereby delaying the timing of the end of one game compared to when the freeze effect is not performed.

The freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the start switch 12 may be performed in the following cases: when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels are not rotated for a specified period of time, and then the reels are rotated after the specified period has elapsed; when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing is performed for a specified period of time, and the reels are not rotated for a specified period of time, and then the internal drawing is performed and the reels are rotated after the specified period of time; when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing is performed for a specified period of time, but the reels are not rotated, and then the reels are rotated after the specified period of time; when the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed, a specified period is set, and the reels are rotated and stopped during the specified period; when the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed and the reels are rotated, a specified period is set, and then the stop switch 13 is disabled for the specified period of time.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the control process for the freeze effect is different between the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the freeze effect that is performed based on the stop display of a specific symbol on the reel as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13.

As an example of the control process for the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13, when the left stop switch 13a is operated to freeze while all reels are rotating, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c can be disabled after the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a stops. This means that for a specified period of time, the player cannot stop the spinning middle and right reels, but after the specified period has elapsed, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c is enabled, so the timing until the end of one game can be delayed.

Control processing for freeze effects that is performed based on a specific symbol being displayed frozen on a reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 may include disabling the acceptance of the stop of the last stop switch 13 when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13, or not performing control processing such as setting the number of bets based on the operation of a bet switch to start the next game, detecting the insertion of gaming media using a passing sensor, or automatic betting processing that is performed when a replay stops on an active line, based on the fact that a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel as a result of accepting the operation of the last stop switch 13.

During the specified period when the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily halted, but game machine operations that are not related to the progress of the game can be executed. For example, even if the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the reel rotation pattern can be set arbitrarily, such as rotating in the normal rotation pattern, or rotating at a slower or faster speed than normal.

The reel rotation patterns during a specified period of time may include rotating the reels in the opposite direction to normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), rotating the reels a specified number of times and then stopping a specific combination of symbols, stopping a specified reel among multiple reels while the other reels spin, changing the reel rotation speed, or changing the reel operation due to the player's operation.

The specified period during which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to specified conditions. Here, the specified conditions include the detection of a signal based on the operation acceptance status of various switches by the player (operation status of the start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, settlement switch, etc.) and the result of a freeze lottery. In addition, examples of changing the period include shortening or lengthening the specified period during which the freeze effect is performed, during which the game progress is temporarily stopped, and switching the rotation mode of the reels.

Examples of control processes that shorten the pause period include forcibly terminating the pause period or rewriting it to a period shorter than the pause period. Examples of control processes that lengthen the pause period include adding another period after the pause period or rewriting the pause period to a longer period. In addition, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not need to have an upper limit, and may continue until a certain result is reached based on the result of the operation reception.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set to include the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period is compared with the freeze effect period, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, the freeze effect is executed during the wait period. If the freeze effect does not end during the wait period, the freeze effect period is set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period is resumed after the freeze effect ends. Also, if the freeze effect period is longer than the wait period, it is possible to omit the process of comparing the wait period with the freeze effect period and start the freeze effect after the start switch 12 is operated (after the internal lottery process).

As a freeze effect, it is also possible to perform a freeze effect (also called pseudo play) during the acceleration process as if normal play was in progress. In pseudo play, the start switch 12 is operated, and a pseudo play period is determined during the acceleration process of the reels after the internal lottery is performed. During the pseudo play period, reel rotation control is performed as in normal play (reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start switch based on the start of the pseudo play), and reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13. It may also be configured so that the reels are rotated again by operating the start switch 12 during the pseudo play period. However, internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12 and winning determination processing or payout control processing based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In addition, in pseudo-games, when the reels stop as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13, or when the reels stop automatically as a reel effect, the stopped reels are made to swing up and down (so-called swing fluctuation). This allows the player to determine whether they are playing a normal game or a pseudo-game when they operate the stop switch 13.

<Pattern combinations that do not require technical intervention>
A symbol combination that does not require technical intervention means a symbol combination that can always stop and display the winning symbol combination on the pay line, no matter when the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are spinning. For example, when bell symbols are arranged every three symbols on all reels, bell-bell-bell always stops (100% pull rate), so it can be said to be a symbol combination that does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, a pull rate of 100% will be referred to as PB=1, and a winning symbol combination with a pull rate of 100% for all reels may be referred to as PB=1 symbol.

Conversely, PB ≠ 1 means that the winning symbol combination will not stop depending on the timing of when the stop switch 13 stops while the reels are spinning. For example, if there is a location within the pull-in range where there are no symbols related to a winning symbol (e.g., 5 symbols apart), then PB ≠ 1, and the winning symbol may be referred to as a PB ≠ 1 symbol.

<Small win priority control, bonus priority control>
The small prize priority control means that when a small prize and a bonus are won at the same time, or when a small prize is won within a bonus, if both a symbol related to a small prize and a symbol related to a bonus can be drawn in, the symbol related to the small prize is drawn in.

Bonus priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are both won, or when a small win within a bonus occurs, if both a symbol related to a small win and a symbol related to a bonus can be drawn in, the symbol related to the bonus is drawn in.

In addition, since replays have the highest priority and cannot be missed, when the condition device flags for replay and minor win, or replay and bonus are on at the same time, the replay-related symbols are always drawn.

<Normal section>
The normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When the push order role is won in the normal section, a process is executed to send masked information (performance group number) indicating which push order was won to the sub-control means 1000. Also, when the push order role is won in the normal section, the notification of the push order (both correct push order and incorrect push order) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in the normal section, even if the push order role is won, both the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 1000 do not notify the push order, so that even if the push order role is won in the normal section, it is not always clear whether it is correct or incorrect. In other words, it is a game section that does not enter the AT state.

<Advantageous Zone>
The advantageous zone is a zone in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and is provided to suppress excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If you win the advantageous zone transition lottery executed in the normal zone, you can transition to the advantageous zone. In the advantageous zone, a transition lottery to the AT can be held, and there are cases where the AT state can be entered, but in order to suppress the excessive medal acquisition mentioned above, the advantageous zone is designed to end based on certain conditions and transition to the normal zone.
in particular,
1) When 1500 games have been played since the next game after the transition to the first advantageous zone; 2) When more than 2400 medals have been won since the next game after the transition to the first advantageous zone; and 3) When any condition is met. These can prevent excessive medal acquisition. The 1500 games in 1) may be 3000 games, or 65535 games, which is the maximum number that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area, or the advantageous zone may be configured not to end after a predetermined number of games. In addition, the arbitrary condition in 3) may be, for example, when the first AT ends, or when a specific symbol combination is displayed.

If it is an advantageous zone, information indicating that it is an advantageous zone (also called advantageous zone type) is stored in a specified RAM area. If the value stored in the RAM area is 0 (if the advantageous zone type is 0), it indicates that it is a normal zone, and if the value stored in the RAM area is 1 (if the advantageous zone type is 1), it indicates that it is an advantageous zone.

<Advantageous Zone Lamp>
The advantageous zone lamp is provided as information indicating that the player is in the advantageous zone on the main side. This allows the player to easily determine whether or not the player is in the advantageous zone by checking whether the advantageous zone lamp is on or off. Specifically, when the DP of the credit number display 26 is on, it indicates that the player is in the advantageous zone, and when the DP of the credit number display 26 is not on, it indicates that the player is not in the advantageous zone. The advantageous zone lamp may be lit after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted by hand is detected, when the second medal inserted by hand is detected, when the third medal inserted by hand is detected, after the start switch is accepted, or after the selection role is won by the internal lottery. In addition, the condition for always lighting the lamp may be when the player is in the advantageous zone, when the operation procedure information of the selection role is announced, and when the ball payout rate (maximum ball payout rate) of the announced game exceeds 1 (when it increases).

In addition, the machine is configured to light up the advantageous zone lamp even when it is notifying the player of the push order sequence to transition to an RT where the payout rate does not exceed 1 but the replay probability is high, since the machine does not have a push order minor feature due to its specifications. This is to inform the player that the advantageous zone lamp is in an advantageous state, and to prevent players from suffering losses due to not understanding the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the conditions for turning on the favorable zone lamp as described above are not met, the timing for turning on the favorable zone lamp after moving to a new favorable zone can be arbitrary.

In addition, once the advantageous zone lamp is lit, it will remain lit until the advantageous zone ends, and will be turned off before the start switch operation for the next game after the game in which the advantageous zone ends is accepted (after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted for maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted for maintenance is detected, or when the third medal inserted for maintenance is detected).

By configuring it in this way, even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit, it may be an advantageous zone, and the player can be given a sense of expectation that the processing related to the instruction function will be executed even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit. As a result, in the past, if it was a normal zone, the game was simply waiting for the transition to the advantageous zone, but with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit, there is a possibility that an AT transition lottery or the like is being held, making it possible to maintain motivation to play.

Also, when the advantageous zone type is 1, it does not necessarily mean that the zone is advantageous. This is because in a game in which the advantageous zone type is 0 and the advantageous zone transition lottery is won and the advantageous zone type becomes 1, the advantageous zone type is 1 but the game state is still in the normal zone because it has not yet transitioned to the advantageous zone. When executing the process to send a test signal to determine whether the zone is advantageous or normal, referring to the advantageous zone type will result in sending a signal for the advantageous zone even though it is a normal zone, and a signal different from the intended state will be sent.

In order to prevent this situation, when transmitting a test signal indicating whether the zone is favorable or normal, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is referred to. When the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0, a process is executed to output a test signal indicating that the zone is normal, and when the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 1 to 1500), a process is executed to output a test signal indicating that the zone is favorable. By configuring in this way, the process for outputting the test signal can accurately specify the state by simply determining whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0 or not, thereby eliminating pressure on the program capacity and improving the program execution speed. Note that, as described above, even when the favorable zone is terminated under any termination condition, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is set to 1, so that the process for outputting the test signal can accurately output that the zone is favorable even in a game where the favorable zone ends.
<AT>
AT is an abbreviation of assist time, also called a notification period, which is a period for making it easier for a player to win a winning combination that has been selected by a combination lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). Generally, the means for notifying during the AT include the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation order of the stop switch, and the operation timing and operation order of the stop switch, which are also called operation procedures or operation modes.

<Sub-bonus>
A sub-bonus is a type of AT, and is different from the bonuses that can be won by internal lottery (Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, RB, CB, SB, described below). It is basically the same as an AT, but is characterized by the fact that the sub-bonus starting symbol combination is stopped by reel effects, pseudo play, or push order when the sub-bonus starts. It should be noted that even when it is simply called "AT", it is a concept that includes sub-bonuses.

<Grouping of options>
When a selected role is won during a non-AT, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 a performance group number indicating that the selected role has been won, and when a selected role is won during an AT, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 a performance group number and operation procedure information. In other words, since operation procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during a non-AT, the sub-control means 1000 is not able to notify the operation procedure. As a result, on the sub-control means 1000 side, it is unclear which operation procedure can be used to display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during a non-AT, and operation procedure information that can display a symbol combination advantageous to the player is transmitted during an AT, so that the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device or operation indicator lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. As a result, the player can easily recognize the operation procedure, and it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of operation procedure information during a non-AT.

<Processing related to instruction function>
The processing related to the instruction function is a concept including not only the lottery related to the AT, such as the AT transition lottery, the AT additional lottery, the update of the AT end condition (addition/subtraction of the AT play number, addition/subtraction of the AT execution notification number), and the execution of the AT (notification of the operation mode), but also the processing related to the management of the AT state. The processing related to this instruction function can be executed with a bet number predetermined for each game state, and when a plurality of bet numbers are set as a prescribed number in a certain game state, the processing is configured to be executed only when any one of the bet numbers is set. For example, when two-coin bets and three-coin bets are possible in the bonus internal state, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed only in a game with three-coin bets, and the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed in a game with two-coin bets. In other words, in a game with two-coin bets, even if the AT lottery target role is won, the AT lottery is not executed, and the AT play number is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if the SB (single bonus) or CB that ends in one game is only for two-coin bet games, and the game after the SB or CB ends with two or three-coin bets, if the replay is won in the SB or CB and the number of coins automatically bet is two, the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed in the game after the SB or CB ends (processing related to the instruction function can be executed with a three-coin bet), so the number of bets automatically inserted when the replay is won in the SB or CB is set to three. In this way, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed even in the game after the replay is won in the SB or CB, so that a game that is disadvantageous to the player can be eliminated. As described above, the processing related to the advantageous zone is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

<Instruction monitor>
During AT, when reporting information on the operation procedure of the push order role, the obtained number display may be used to report the operation procedure information. Specifically, in the case of push order role A (left, center, right correct), "1" is displayed on the indication monitor, in the case of push order role B (left, right, center correct), "2" is displayed on the indication monitor, in the case of push order role C (center, left, right correct), "3" is displayed on the indication monitor, in the case of push order role D (center, right, left correct), "4" is displayed on the indication monitor, in the case of push order role E (right, left, center correct), "5" is displayed on the indication monitor, and in the case of push order role F (right, center, left correct), "6" is displayed on the indication monitor.

With this configuration, the player can know the correct button press sequence by checking the instruction monitor. Also, because the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it can accurately notify the player of the correct button press sequence even if the sub-control board is tampered with.

In addition, if the indication monitor is also used as the number of coins won display, the lower digits may display the numbers (1 to 6) mentioned above, and the upper digits may display an "=" as an identifier. In this case, the identifier allows the player to determine whether the number of coins won display is displaying the number of coins won or the push order, so that the player's recognition is not hindered.

Also, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a three-digit seven-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. Then, in the case of push order role A (left, center, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role B (left, right, center correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role C (center, left, right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role D (center, right, left correct), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order role E (right, left, center correct), "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order role F (right, center, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, the push order on the instruction monitor becomes easier to intuitively grasp, and the player can easily grasp the correspondence between the push order and the display on the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the push order on the instruction monitor is preferably within the advantageous zone, and any time from after the push order role is selected by the internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch until the stop switch can be operated. With this configuration, the push order can be notified to the player before he or she operates the stop switch, preventing the player from performing the stop operation with an incorrect push order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)>
The role ratio monitor is a display device that switches and displays the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio (selectable according to the specifications of the gaming machine, also called the instruction-included role ratio), consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games, role ratio for the latest 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, cumulative role etc. state ratio every 4800 ms, and is capable of displaying a four-digit number by using four 7-segment LEDs (with DP). The upper two digits of the four-digit number displayed by the four 7-segment LEDs are called the identification segment, and the lower two digits are called the ratio segment.

In the role ratio, "role" refers to the first type special role (so-called RB), the second type special role (so-called CB), and the normal role (so-called SB), and the "role ratio" is the ratio calculated by payout during role operation ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during the operation of the first type special role continuous operation device (so-called BB) and the second type special role continuous operation device (so-called MB) are also included in "payouts during role operation", but payouts during general play during BB and general play during MB are not included in "payouts during role operation". Note that "payout" is a term that does not subtract the number of coins inserted, and in the case of payout number - number of coins inserted, it is called the difference number (difference number). In addition, the first type special role continuous operation device and the second type special role continuous operation device are sometimes simply called the role continuous operation device as a combined concept.

In the continuous feature ratio, "continuous feature" refers to the first type special feature (so-called RB), and the "continuous feature ratio" is the ratio calculated by: payout during operation of the first type special feature ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during operation of the first type special feature continuous operation device (so-called BB) are also included in "payouts during feature operation", but payouts during general play during BB are not included in "payouts during feature operation".

The "instruction-included role" in the instruction-included role ratio includes the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated (so-called AT) in addition to the "role" described above, and the "instruction-included role ratio" is a ratio calculated by (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) ÷ total payout × 100. Here, (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) does not refer to the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated and the role is activated, but refers to the sum of the payout number in the game in which the instruction function is activated and the payout number in the game in which the role is activated. If the game in which the instruction function is activated is a game in which the role is activated, the two payout numbers are not added together, but the payout number for that game is (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation). Note that if a player makes a mistake in the operation of the stop switch in a game in which the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained, but in this case the calculation is based on the actual payout.

The information displayed in the identification segment among the information displayed on the ratio monitor is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed among the cumulative favorable zone ratio, cumulative instructed role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games, role ratio for the latest 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. state ratio, and is displayed as "7U.", "7P.", "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", and "5H.", respectively. For example, when "7U." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the cumulative favorable zone ratio, and when "6Y." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games. Note that the "." displayed on the ratio monitor refers to decimal points.

Of the information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment is intended to allow the calculation results of various ratios to be visually confirmed, and is displayed as a two-digit number using two seven-segment LEDs. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. The calculated result is rounded down to the nearest whole number. If the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. If the cumulative number of games played is less than 400, the ratio segment displays "00."

If the cumulative number of games does not reach the reference number of games, the identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, and is 175,000 games for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 175,000 games for the cumulative instructed role ratio, 6,000 games for the consecutive role ratio among the latest 6,000 games, 6,000 games for the role ratio among the latest 6,000 games, 17,500 games for the cumulative consecutive role ratio, 17,500 games for the cumulative role ratio, and 175,000 games for the cumulative role etc. state ratio.

The ratio segment is displayed in a blinking manner if the displayed value is equal to or greater than the threshold value. The threshold value is determined according to various ratios, and is 70 for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 70 for the cumulative indicated feature ratio, 60 for the consecutive feature ratio among the latest 6000 games, 70 for the feature ratio among the latest 6000 games, 60 for the cumulative consecutive feature ratio, 70 for the cumulative feature ratio, and 50 for the cumulative feature etc. state ratio. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than 400 games and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold value but the ratio segment displays "00", the ratio segment is displayed in a lit manner.

To check whether the role ratio monitor is operating normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt process is started. The test pattern is displayed in a blinking manner by all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs that make up the role ratio monitor. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition to being displayed immediately after power is turned on, the test pattern may also be displayed when settings are being changed, settings are being confirmed, or an RWM (RAM) abnormal error occurs.

In the cases where the cumulative number of games played in the identification segment does not reach the reference number of games, where the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold value, and where a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment, the segments are displayed in a blinking mode. Specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between lighting and turning off every 300 ms, such as lighting 300 ms → turning off 300 ms → lighting 300 ms → turning off 300 ms → .... Also, when various ratio information is switched, it starts with lighting, so that the display period of various ratio information does not become longer or shorter depending on the timing of lighting and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative indicated role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. status ratio displayed on the role ratio monitor are configured to switch display contents every 4800 ms, but by setting this 4800 ms to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking, it is possible to configure it so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit, even if the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking mode when they are switched.

By configuring it in this way, the light starts off on even when various ratio information is switched, so it is possible to display the display continuously without any sense of incongruity caused by a shift in the blinking cycle.

In addition, the display period of the test pattern after the power is turned on as mentioned above is also set to 4800 ms, so when the test pattern has finished being displayed for 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED goes out, and the next timer interrupt process turns on and makes it possible to display information regarding the cumulative favorable zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio.

Next, we will explain how to control the blinking display on the role ratio monitor.

To blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is a 2-byte memory area, and executes a process of adding 1 for each timer interrupt process. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and thereafter cycles through the values 0 to 299 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. In other words, the value following 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "0", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "1". At this time, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 because a carry occurs as a result of calculating "0-299").

Example 2) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "298", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off will become "299". In this case, the carry flag will be 1 (the carry flag will be 1 because a carry occurs as a result of calculating "298-299").

Example 3) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "299", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "0". In this case, the carry flag becomes 0 (the result of calculating "299-299" is that no carry occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0).

As mentioned above, if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is a value between 0 and 298, the carry flag will be 1, and if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is 299, the carry flag will be 0. In other words, the carry flag will be 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag = 0, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is configured to be updated. The blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stores 0) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, and when 1 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag = 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, it is possible for the display mode of the role ratio monitor to be displayed (blinking display) alternately between the on mode and the off mode every 300 ms.

The display of the ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode when the cumulative number of games in the identification segment does not reach the reference number of games, when the display value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold, or when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. In other cases, the display is made in a lit mode without referring to the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, since the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between on and off regardless of whether the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referenced or not is updated for each timer interrupt process, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is also updated from time to time, and even when the state is switched from not referring to the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) to referring to it, it is possible to display the display without any deviation in the timing of turning on and off and the switching timing of the various ratio displays.

<Program start processing flow>
The program start process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings related to the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it sets the interrupt mode, sets the functions of the main CPU, and performs a RAM check process to create power-off recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAM are normal or not, and if the conditions are met, it determines that the power-off recovery data is normal, and if the conditions are not met, it determines that the power-off recovery data is abnormal.

Then, the state of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal is checked to determine whether the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power interruption recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state. If the power interruption recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, a first initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. If the power interruption recovery data is not normal or in a recoverable state, a second initialization range to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process is set, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. After the setting change process, the process proceeds to the main game progress of Figure 9.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power failure recovery data is abnormal or in an irrecoverable state, an irrecoverable error is notified and the game progress of the slot machine PS1 is stopped, and the process proceeds to an irrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if the power failure recovery data is not abnormal or in an irrecoverable state, the process proceeds to the power failure recovery process of FIG. 8. After the power failure recovery process, the process proceeds to the main game progress of FIG. 9. Note that after the power failure recovery process, the state saved when the power failure was detected is restored, so the process does not necessarily start from the beginning of the main game progress.

In addition, when processing an unrecoverable error, interrupts are prohibited and the output of the output port (output of sub-control commands, output of excitation signals to the stepping motor, etc.) is cleared. Then, the error is repeatedly displayed (announced) on the acquired number display 27.

<Power off processing>
The power-off process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned off or an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off, such as a power outage (also referred to as a power outage), the operating voltage for operating the slot machine PS1 drops, and when the operating voltage falls below a threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power outage and generates a power outage detection signal, which is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, in the determination process for determining whether or not the power outage detection signal of the timer interrupt process has been input, the power outage process is executed when it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input. When determining whether or not the power outage detection signal has been input in the timer interrupt process, the determination may be made in one timer interrupt process, or in two or more timer interrupt processes. In other words, when determining whether or not the power has been cut off in multiple timer interrupt processes, if it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input in the first process but not in the second process, the power outage process is not executed. This is to prevent the power outage process from being executed when noise or a momentary outage (a state in which the voltage falls below the threshold for just a moment, but then immediately rises above the threshold) occurs.

During power-off processing, output ports are cleared, interrupts that are executed periodically are prohibited from occurring, and the interrupt prohibited/enabled state at the time of power-off is saved. Next, the registers in use are saved, and the stack pointer is saved. Once saved, the power-off processing completed flag, which indicates that power-off processing has been performed, is turned on, and checksum data for all RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then RAM writing is prohibited, and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the saved stack pointer, the presence or absence of the power-off processing completed flag, and whether the checksums of all RAM areas are normal are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When the timer interrupt process starts, the necessary data stored in the register is compared, and when a power interruption detection signal is received, power interruption processing is executed, input ports are read to determine input from various sensors and operation switches, various timers (timers for measuring freeze periods, timers for measuring wait periods, etc.) are measured, and as reel drive control, control and update of drive states according to whether each reel is accelerating, rotating at a constant speed, starting to decelerate, decelerating, or stopped are performed. Next, port output processing is performed to create and output data to be output for each output port (excitation signals to the stepping motor, drive signals for the hopper 44, etc.), and to check whether various abnormalities have occurred. Various abnormalities include whether the current setting values are normal values, and whether the operation patterns of the input and payout sensors are normal. Next, external signal output is performed to set (control on/off) external signals such as bonus signals, ART signals, and security signals to be output to external systems such as hall computers, medal input signals, and medal payout signals.

Next, in the control command transmission process, if a sub-control command has been set, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000, control is performed regarding the lighting of various LEDs, notification data to be sent to the sub-control board such as the sound of the stop switch being operated and the sound of a medal being inserted is output, signals related to performance tests are output, the registers are restored, and the timer interrupt process is terminated by saving the interrupt permission flag on.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command issued when the start switch is operated, a winning information command indicating the result of the internal lottery, a reel spin start command issued when the reels start accelerating, a left reel stop command, a middle reel stop command, a right reel stop command, and an all reel stop command issued when the stop switches for stopping the reels while they are spinning are operated, etc.

Furthermore, timer measurement processing may be performed within the timer interrupt processing.
In timer measurement, a control process is performed to update information about the timer (time) stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, a process of updating (e.g., subtracting 1) a value stored in a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) of the RWM that monitors (manages) the minimum play time (4.1 seconds) is performed. Note that the RWM may have memory areas related to multiple timers, such as a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) of the RWM that monitors (manages) the insertion of game medals using the insertion button, and a memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area C) of the RWM that monitors (manages) the output time of an external signal, in addition to the memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area C) of the RWM that monitors (manages).
In this case, the timer measurement executes a process of subtracting 1 from a value stored in a memory area of the RWM that stores information about the timer (hereinafter also referred to as a timer area), such as a process of subtracting 1 from a value stored in timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from a value stored in timer area B, and a process of subtracting 1 from a value stored in timer area C. Also, if a timer measurement is performed when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0", the value stored in the certain timer area is configured to become "0".

Note that, although the control process for updating the information related to the timer stored in the RWM is described as subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area, it may also be a process of adding 1 to the value stored in the timer area.

Here, the monitoring (management) of the insertion of game medals using the insertion button will be described.
Monitoring (management) of the insertion of a gaming medal using the insertion button is a timer that starts counting from the time the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19, and is a timer that prevents the process of determining whether the next 1 bet switch 19 has been operated or not from being executed until the timer value reaches "0".

For example, in a predetermined situation where the number of credits is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, when the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1 bet switch 19), the value "20" is stored in the timer area B after the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19. After that, the value stored in the timer area B is subtracted by "1" by the timer measurement of the timer interrupt process. Then, when the timer interrupt process is executed 20 times, the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0". Note that if the value stored in the timer area B is not "0" (if the value stored in the timer area B is any of "1" to "20"), the game progress main process does not determine whether the 1 bet switch 19 has been operated. In other words, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in the timer area B is not "0", the bet process is not executed. After that, after the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0", the bet process can be executed when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated.

This configuration can prevent multiple bet processes from being executed due to a malfunction despite a single operation of the 1 bet switch 19. It can also prevent a malicious player from repeatedly tapping the 1 bet switch 19, which would result in multiple bet processes being executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 and commands based on the execution of bet processes being sent to the sub-control means 1000 in succession.

<Power off recovery process>
The power interruption recovery process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned on to turn on the power, the main control board 100 executes a power-off recovery process to restore various data to the state before the power was turned off.

In the power failure recovery process, the stack pointer is restored, and output data related to the sub-control command sent to the sub-control board 1000 is restored. After that, it is determined whether the set setting value data is within the normal range. If the determination results in an abnormality (value is outside the specified range), the process moves to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if the data is normal (value is within the specified range), unused RAM areas are initialized, an interrupt that is executed periodically is started, and the input port is read. After that, the power failure processing completion flag is cleared, the registers in use are restored, and the interrupt disabled/enabled state at the time of the power failure is restored, and the power failure recovery process is terminated. Note that when the power failure recovery process is terminated, the state before the power failure occurred is restored, and if it is not restored (when the settings are changed), the main control process for game progress is performed from the beginning.

In this embodiment, the interrupt is activated at a specific timing within the power failure recovery process, but the interrupt may also be activated after the power failure recovery process of the program start process.

<Main explanation of game progress>
The main control process for game progress executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The main control board 100 refers to the value of the freeze effect number saved before the previous game, and if the saved freeze effect number corresponds to the number for which a freeze effect should be executed, it executes the freeze effect, and if the saved freeze effect number does not correspond to the number for which a freeze effect should be executed, it proceeds to the next process without executing the freeze effect. It may be configured not to save the freeze effect number when a freeze effect is not to be executed, in which case it may be configured to determine whether the freeze effect number has been saved, and if it has not been saved, proceed to the next process.

Next, when a gaming medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (game value insertion process). Next, it is determined whether the number of bets that allows a game to be played has been placed, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has been operated, and if it is determined that no bet has been placed, it waits for the insertion of gaming medals, or, if the credits are stored, for the operation of the bet switch (if the credits are stored). If the number of bets that allows a game to be played has been placed and the start switch 12 has been operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on), an internal lottery process is performed, and if the start switch 12 has not been operated (the start switch signal is not determined to be on), it waits for the operation of the start switch 12.

In the internal lottery process, a random number for internal lottery is generated, and a predetermined calculation process is performed using the obtained internal lottery random number value to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After the winning combination is determined, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and preparations are made so that stop control can be executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after the acceptance of the stop switch operation after the reels have rotated.

The types of winning combinations available on the slot machine PS1 can be broadly categorized into bonuses, small combinations, and replays.

Bonus refers to a device that operates in a predetermined case. Generally, it operates when the symbol combination "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" is displayed frozen on the winning line in the display window 4. The operation of the bonus device changes the number of symbol combinations related to winning for each set number, and changes the probability of activating the condition device for the symbol combination related to winning for each set number. Bonuses are divided into RB, BB, CB, MB, and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called the first type of special role. RB is generally set as the end condition when 8 small roles are won or 12 game results are obtained, and during RB, roles are drawn using an RB role drawing table in which the probability of winning a small role is set higher than in the normal role drawing table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called a continuous operation device for the first type special role. The end condition of BB is set to the payout of more than a specified number of game medals (for example, 269 medals) related to winning a small role, and during BB, a role is drawn using a BB middle role drawing table in which the probability of winning a small role (described later) is set higher than in the normal role drawing table. Note that a BB middle role drawing table does not need to be set during BB. For example, a table that continuously operates the RB middle role drawing table described later until the BB end condition is met may be called a BB middle role drawing table.

CB is an abbreviation for Challenge Bonus, and is also called the second type special feature. In CB, at least all minor features can be set to winning status, regardless of the results of the feature selection. In addition, during CB, stopping control different from normal stopping control is performed for predetermined reels. For example, it is possible to control the left reel 8a to stop within 75 milliseconds of 190 milliseconds.

As described above, the CB may be configured such that at least all minor winning combinations are in a winning state, and therefore the symbol combination that can be displayed according to the operation procedure cannot be displayed (also called a missed opportunity). For example, during the CB, the left reel 8a may be controlled to stop within 75 milliseconds from 190 milliseconds, so that if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific symbol can be displayed on the pay line with any operation timing, but if it stops within 75 milliseconds, a specific symbol cannot be displayed with a specific operation timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operation device for the second type special role. MB is set to end when, for example, more than 153 medals are paid out for a small role win, when RB is won, or when SB, which will be described later, is won.

SB is an abbreviation for single bonus, and is also called a normal role. The end condition for SB is set to be the result of one game. During SB, roles are drawn using the SB role drawing table, which sets the probability of winning a small role higher than the normal role drawing table.

In this embodiment, the BB is performed by drawing roles using the BB middle role drawing table, but this is not limited to this. During BB, the game may be played using a BB general role drawing table in which the winning probability of a small role is set to the same probability as the normal role drawing table and the winning probability of RB is increased, and an RB middle role drawing table in which the winning probability of a small role is set higher than that of the normal role drawing table. Even in this case, the fact remains that the end condition of BB is set to a payout exceeding a predetermined number of medals related to winning a small role. Furthermore, the means that control these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means.

A small prize is a prize in which a symbol combination based on a winning small prize is displayed frozen on an active line, and when it is determined to be a winning prize by the winning prize determination process (described later), medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed frozen.

A replay (also called a replay role) is a role that grants a replay (a game in which the next game can be played by automatic betting without inserting new medals) when a symbol combination based on a winning replay is displayed frozen on an active line and the winning determination process determines that a winning combination has been won. A replay cannot be missed in a winning game, so the next game after a winning replay is always a replay.

If the result of the lottery is that the player does not win any of the bonus, small prize, or replay prizes, it is a loss and the winning process described below will not be performed. When it is a loss, a symbol combination that does not relate to any prize will be displayed on the active line.

For BB, RB, and MB among the roles that are drawn by the role lottery, if the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the valid line in the winning game, the winning flag can be carried over to the next game (special role carry-over means). While the winning flag is carried over, the role lottery may be performed using the role lottery table before the winning flag is carried over, or the role lottery may be performed using the carry-over role lottery table (also called the internal-internal lottery table or the internal-internal role lottery table) corresponding to the winning flag. When using the carry-over role lottery table, if the symbol combination based on the winning BB, RB, or MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, it is determined that the transition condition of the role lottery table is met, and a transition is made from the carry-over role lottery table to the role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

The role selection table defines the probability of winning for multiple types of roles, and multiple types of role selection tables are provided depending on the game state. For example, there is a BB role selection table used during BB, and an MB role selection table used during MB, etc.

In the role selection table, single winning roles in which one type of symbol combination can be displayed on a valid line and multiple winning roles in which multiple symbol combinations can be displayed on one or multiple valid lines are set according to the results of the role selection.

For multiple symbol combinations set as overlapping winning roles, all symbol combinations may be set to be able to display one winning role depending on the operation mode, or some symbol combinations may be set to be unable to be displayed. Among these overlapping winning roles, roles that correspond to some of the symbol combinations that cannot be displayed are sometimes called control roles.

The role of the control function is to be able to control the effective line to be displayed as stopped depending on the type of control function set as the overlapping winning role, even if the same symbol combination can be displayed as a stopped effective line as a result of multiple role selections.

The winning flag control means turns on the flag corresponding to the winning role when any role is selected as a winning role in the role selection process. Then, when the player operates all the stop switches 13 and the prize-winning process for the winning role is terminated, the flag corresponding to the winning role is turned off.

Furthermore, for the above-mentioned BB, RB, and MB, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but if the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is not displayed stopped on the winning line when all stop switches 13 are operated, the flag is carried over to the next game onwards in the on state, the above-mentioned carryover role lottery table is set, and the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is displayed stopped and the winning process for the winning role is completed, and the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off.

The role selection table also includes an RT role selection table. RT is a game state in which the probability of winning a replay in the role selection is different from that of the normal role selection table, and is an abbreviation for replay time.

As a specific example of the use of RT, the losing area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a replay to increase the probability of winning a replay, or the replay area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a losing area to decrease the probability of winning a replay.
Furthermore, the normal role selection table and the replay area may be the same, but the type of replay that is won within the replay area may be different.
The slot machine PS1 is provided with a plurality of RT role selection tables, and is configured to transition to another RT state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

The transition conditions for the RT role selection table are as follows: Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to a bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop, transition condition 2 is when a bonus is won, transition condition 3 is when BB, RB, or MB of the bonus ends, transition condition 4 is when a specified number of plays have been played since a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop, and transition condition 5 is when a specified number of plays have been played since BB, RB, or MB ends. These transition conditions for the RT role selection table can be set appropriately depending on the gameplay.

The number of entries is the number of winning entries for each lottery result defined in the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means. For example, if the total number of entries is 65,536, the winning probability is calculated by dividing each number by 65,536. For example, the winning probability of a given lottery result with a number of entries of 4 is 1/16,384.

In addition, if any of transition conditions 1 to 5 in the RT role selection table described above is met, the number of replays can be changed. For example, if the replay probability for RT1 is 1/7.3, when transitioning from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability for RT2 can be changed to 1/1.5. This makes it possible to transition to a state with a high replay probability, thereby suppressing the loss of medals and adding excitement to the game.

Next, it checks whether the minimum play time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum play time timer is 0), it sets a new minimum play time, and if it is not determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum play time timer is not 0), it decrements the value of the minimum play time timer and then checks whether the minimum play time has elapsed. This minimum play time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, and it is configured so that no other process is executed as the main game progress process between the process of determining the minimum play time and the process of setting the new minimum play time. This prevents the minimum play time from being extended by other processes, making it possible to start playing as soon as possible. In other words, it is possible to prevent the game from being prolonged without making the player wait.

However, this is not limiting, and other processing may be executed as the main game progress processing between the processing for determining the minimum play time and the processing for setting a new minimum play time. In this case, the other processing may be a processing for clearing the RWM address, a processing for storing other data in the RWM, or other commands with short processing times. These processing times are so short that the user does not feel an extension to the minimum play time. After the new minimum play time is set, a processing for preparing to start spinning the reels is executed.

The reel spin start preparation process initializes the data related to reel stops saved in the previous game, sets the stop table to be used in the current game, requests the output of the start of rotation of all reels, and sets a sub-control command (reel spin start command) that indicates the start of rotation of the reels.

The stop table is set up in accordance with the symbol control number determined by the result of the role drawing by the internal drawing means, and predetermines the reel stop positions corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13.

After the reel spin preparation process is complete, processing related to the freeze effect (for example, the reel effect before the reels spin) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are moved slightly or rotated in reverse, mainly to indicate the likelihood of a winning combination.

When a freeze effect is not executed, or after a freeze effect is executed and execution of the freeze effect has finished, a process to spin the reels (also called reel spin process, reel spin start process, or reel spin start process) is executed. There are four reel spin states: acceleration state, constant speed spin state, stop preparation state, and stopped state, and the acceleration state is set when spinning the reels. In the acceleration state, a process is executed to gradually rotate the stepping motor by timer interrupt processing.

The acceleration process executed in the accelerating state is a process executed from when the reel rotation is stopped to when the constant speed rotation process is executed. In the constant speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt process, but if the constant speed rotation process is suddenly executed when the reel is stopped, the torque will be insufficient and there is a high possibility of stepping out. For this reason, the acceleration process is necessary to gradually rotate the reel. In the acceleration process in this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved one step after 50 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 30 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 10 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 5 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 2 timer interrupt processes, and then moved one step after one timer interrupt process. This is followed by the constant speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt process.

When constant speed rotation processing is being performed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter described above is incremented for each timer interrupt processing to detect rotation failure. Note that the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, so it is incremented for each timer interrupt processing, but if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the value of the rotation failure detection counter can be decremented for each timer interrupt processing, and it can be determined that a rotation failure has been detected when it reaches 0.

In addition, in the constant speed rotation state, the stop switch is permitted to be operated and operation of the stop switch is awaited. When the stop switch is permitted to be operated, the stop switch lamp is lit blue to notify the player that the stop switch is active (when the stop switch is not permitted to be operated, the lamp is lit red). The control of the stop switch lamp illumination may be performed by the main control means 100 or the sub control means 1000. When executing the push order navigation, the stop switch lamp illumination may be controlled by flashing the stop switch lamp, for example, to make it easier for the player to recognize which stop switch to operate.

A command indicating that the reels have started to spin is also sent to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives this command, it sets a reel spin time timer that measures the reel spin time and starts counting. Then, when the value of the reel spin time timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes), it displays "Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) on the LCD screen to prompt the player to spin the reels. The reel spin time timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the operation of the stop switch is accepted), and if there are any reels that are still spinning, it starts counting again. In this way, the reel spin time timer continues to be updated until all the reels have stopped.

When the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, it is displayed in front of the push order navigation. This ensures visibility of the reel stop warning image even when the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, and clearly prompts the player to operate the stop switch. In addition, since there is a risk that the push order navigation may become difficult to see at this time and the player may not know which reel to stop, the reel stop warning image may be erased (or the reel stop warning image may be made smaller or moved) by operating a sub-switch or a switch for effects, etc., so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After the game progress main process has enabled the acceptance of the stop switch operation, the process of determining whether the stop switch operation has been accepted (reel stop acceptance check process) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches have been operated, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is stopped (also called slip control). At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch transitions from a constant speed rotation state to a stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel is rotated to the desired stop position while rotating at a constant speed. Then, when the desired stop position is reached, the state transitions to a stop state, and all four-phase excitation is turned ON to apply the brakes. The slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds of the operation of the stop switch 13. In this embodiment, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, it is possible to pull in up to four symbols ahead.

The target stop position is determined by whether the currently passing symbol number matches the symbol number stored as the stop position, and if they match, all four phase excitations are turned ON to indicate the target stop position. The currently passing symbol number is determined by the fact that the initial symbol number is set the moment the index sensor detects the index (when the index signal rises), and then when the timer interrupt process moves one symbol from there, the symbol number next to the initial symbol number is set.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it checks whether all reels are stopped. If all reels are stopped, it executes the winning determination process and then the winning process. If all reels are not stopped, it executes the process of waiting for the acceptance of the stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. Then, after all reels have stopped, it updates the display contents of the status display monitor and moves to the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Then, it executes the game end check process to update the RT status, etc., and ends the main sequence of game progress. Note that software random number update process may be performed during the period from when the reels start spinning to when the stop operation is accepted.

The winning judgment process is a process that judges whether or not the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line. Since it judges whether or not the stopped symbol determined when the operation of the stop switch is accepted is abnormal, it is not judged based on the symbol combination that actually stopped on the winning line. After it is judged by the winning judgment process that the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line, the winning process is performed, and if it is not judged by the winning judgment process that the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line, processing based on a miss is performed.

Winning processing is processing that gives a bonus to a player based on a symbol combination that stops on a winning line. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a minor win is stopped involves paying out medals based on the stopped symbol combination and shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a replay is stopped involves granting the right to replay and shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Winning processing when a symbol combination based on a bonus is stopped involves shifting the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Note that in the case of a miss, no winning processing is performed.

However, this is not the only option. When the result of the winning determination process is a miss, a winning process based on the miss may be performed, and a process may be performed in which no special prize is awarded to the player as a result of the winning process. In addition, as a winning process based on a miss, the game state may be changed according to the operation mode at the time of the miss. For example, when all stop switches 13 are operated according to a predetermined operation sequence at the time of the miss, a game state with a different probability of winning a freeze may be changed. Even in the case of an apparent miss due to a missed minor combination, a winning process such as a transition to an RT state or other game state transition control may be performed without a payout. Furthermore, as a winning process based on a bonus, a payout of medals based on the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state or the right to replay may be added.

The process of transitioning game states involves setting a role selection table according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting reel control according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be transitioned to, or a combination of these.

In the winning determination process, when a winning symbol combination is determined, winning symbol combination information (stopping result information) displayed on the pay line and role selection result information are transmitted to the sub-control board 1000. Meanwhile, when the sub-control board 1000 receives this information, it can output a performance according to the winning symbol combination information and role selection result information using the display device 32, lamp, or speaker S.

In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for all active lines, and if the result of the determination is that multiple symbol combinations based on overlapping winning roles are displayed on multiple active lines, winning processing is performed for each of the multiple symbol combinations that are displayed.

For example, when a minor win with a payout of 2 coins and a minor win with a payout of 10 coins are displayed on multiple active lines, the winning process will pay out 12 coins by adding up the payout amount based on the minor win set to 2 coins and the payout amount based on the minor win set to 10 coins.

The system also sets an upper limit on the number of coins that can be paid out at one time, and when a symbol combination based on multiple minor winning combinations is displayed on an active line, if the number of coins that can be paid out exceeds the upper limit, the system will pay out the maximum number of coins.

For example, if the upper limit of the payout number is set to 15 coins, and a minor win with a payout number of 12 coins and a minor win with a payout number of 10 coins are displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process will be as follows: if the combined value of the minor win set to 12 coins and the minor win set to 10 coins exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit of 15 coins will be paid out.

In this embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for minor winning combinations, but medals equal to the number of medals bet may be paid out as a winning process based on a replay, or a preset number of medals may be paid out as a winning process based on a bonus.

<Advantageous Zone Clear Counter Management Processing>
Among the processes executed by the game progress main in this embodiment, the advantageous zone clear counter management process for managing the advantageous zone will be explained with reference to Figure 11.

Set the advantageous zone clear counter RWM address.

Next, perform a 2-byte subtraction operation.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter before the subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter before the subtraction is 0, it proceeds to a process of determining whether the favorable zone type is 0 or not, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter before the subtraction is not 0, it is determined whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter after the subtraction is 0 or not. Note that favorable zone type = 0 means that the zone is not an advantageous zone, but a normal zone, and favorable zone type = 1 means that it is an advantageous zone.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is 0, it proceeds to the RWM initialization process, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is not 0, it proceeds to the process of obtaining the value of the MY counter.

Next, in the process of obtaining the MY counter value, the current MY counter value is obtained.

Next, after executing the process to obtain the value of the MY counter, it is determined whether or not the replay activation symbol has stopped. If it is determined that the replay activation symbol has stopped, it moves on to the process of determining whether or not the value of the MY counter has exceeded the upper limit value (2400). If it is determined that the replay activation symbol has not stopped, it moves on to the process of obtaining data from the payout number buffer. The data in the payout number buffer is data that indicates the number of coins paid out in the event of a win, or no payout (0 coins paid out) in the event of a loss or a missed minor win.

Next, in the process of obtaining data from the payout number buffer, the payout number for that game is obtained.

Next, the process executes the process of adding the data (OUT number) from the dispensed number buffer obtained to the MY counter.

Next, a process is executed to obtain data on the number of gaming medals. The data on the number of gaming medals corresponds to the number of medals inserted.

Next, the process executes a process to subtract the IN number (number of coins inserted) from the MY counter.

Next, if it is determined that the value of the MY counter is less than 0 after subtracting the IN number from the MY counter, the initial value is set to the MY counter and saved in the MY counter. Also, if it is determined that the value of the MY counter is not less than 0 after subtracting the IN number from the MY counter, the value obtained by subtracting the IN number from the MY counter is saved in the MY counter. Note that the initial value of the MY counter is 0, and if the value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, it is corrected to 0. Also, whether the value of the MY counter is less than 0 is determined by whether the carry flag is 0 or not. The carry flag is a flag that is set to 1 if the result of the subtraction process is a negative value, and is set to 0 if the result of the subtraction process is not a negative value. Note that in the case of an addition process, if the upper limit (65535 for 2 bytes) is exceeded, the flag is set to 1, and if the upper limit is not exceeded, the flag is set to 0.

Next, after saving the MY counter value, a process is executed to determine whether the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400). If the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400), an RWM initialization process is executed and the process proceeds to the favorable zone type determination process, and if the favorable zone type is 0 in the favorable zone type determination process, the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated, and if the favorable zone type is not 0, the favorable zone clear counter is set to an initial value (1500) and the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated. Also, if the MY counter value has not exceeded the upper limit (2400) in the process to determine whether the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400), the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated.

It is determined whether the value of the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction is 0 and the advantageous zone type is not 0, this process is carried out when the advantageous zone starts, and is not carried out except at the start of the advantageous zone. The 1500 stored in the advantageous zone clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of plays that can be played in the advantageous zone, and if a maximum of 1500 plays of the advantageous zone are played, the normal zone will be set from the next play. This is to prevent addiction, and prevents the number of medals from continuing to increase all day, so as not to excessively stimulate gambling instincts.

The timing for setting the advantageous zone type to 1 is during the advantageous zone transition lottery process that occurs between when the start switch is accepted and when the reels start to spin. The advantageous zone transition lottery process is a process that is run when the condition device number that is the subject of the lottery is selected, and if the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone type is set to 1, and if the advantageous zone transition lottery is not won, the advantageous zone type is set to 0 (normal zone).

In the RWM initialization process executed after the MY counter value exceeds the upper limit, all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function are updated to 0. Parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function include the number of AT games and the game status related to the AT. Then, by updating the favorable zone type to 0, it becomes a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone, and when the MY counter value is 2400 or less, this process ends while maintaining the advantageous zone. Note that if a replay is won in an advantageous zone, the MY counter update process is not executed, but the process of determining whether the MY counter exceeds 2400 is passed. In the case of a replay, the same number of coins as the number inserted is automatically bet, so OUT-IN is always 0. However, because there is a possibility that the MY counter value may be updated at a different time from the original process due to noise or fraud, it is determined whether the MY counter has reached its upper limit even during a replay.

In addition, the favorable zone can be ended at any timing for each gaming machine, other than the passage of 1500 games or exceeding MY2400. For example, this can be when the end lottery is won when a predetermined role is won, or when an arbitrary number of games (less than 1500 games) is executed. When ending the favorable zone at any ending trigger, the favorable zone clear counter is set to 1 before the favorable zone clear counter management process is executed (preferably the process related to the AT executed after all reels have stopped), so that when the favorable zone clear counter management process is executed, the favorable zone clear counter is 1 before subtraction, and the subtraction result of the favorable zone clear counter becomes 0, and the favorable zone can be ended by the favorable zone clear counter management process. In other words, by setting the favorable zone clear counter value to 1 and then subtracting 1 from the counter value, the favorable zone clear counter value becomes 0 and the favorable zone can be ended. This makes it possible to process within the same module when an arbitrary ending condition is achieved without using a separate favorable zone end module.

In addition, the advantageous zone clear counter subtraction process in the advantageous zone clear counter management process is configured to be executed for any bet number (if multiple prescribed numbers are set for the gaming machine) and any game state.

<Settings change process>
The setting change process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When the setting change mode is started (the setting change process is executed), it is determined whether the current setting value is within the normal range, and if it is within the normal range, the current setting value is obtained, and if it is outside the normal range, "1" is saved as the setting value and the setting value "1" is obtained.

After obtaining the set value, the set value display data is saved. After saving the set value display data, the lighting control is performed by referring to the set value display data every 5 interrupts using dynamic lighting control, which is a timer interrupt process.

Then, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the start switch 12 has not changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting switch has changed from off to on.

If it is determined that the setting switch has not changed from off to on, it is determined again whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, and if it is determined that the setting switch has changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is incremented; if the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is set to the initial value (0) and then incremented further. After the set value has been incremented, the updated set value is displayed and the process returns to the step of determining whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, the setting value is finalized and the system waits until it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off. When it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off, the system saves the determined setting value in the main control RAM, turns off the setting display LED, and turns on the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 (forming a passage for medals to flow down to the hopper 44), thereby ending the setting change mode.

The setting change mode is a means for determining one of the setting values from 1 to 6 (displayed as 1 to 6 setting values). After a setting value is determined, the internal lottery table (also called the role selection table) corresponding to the determined setting value continues to be set until the setting value is next changed by the setting change means. Note that role selection tables are provided for each setting value, with different probabilities of determining the result of the internal lottery (probability of winning the role).

When the setting key used for changing the settings is rotated by the manager of the game center while the slot machine PS1 is not powered on, and the slot machine PS1 is powered on with the setting key held in a rotation position where the setting key switch signal is turned on, the setting change means turns on the setting key switch signal when the slot machine PS1 is powered on. In this embodiment, the setting key switch signal is turned on when the setting key is turned on (OFF→ON), and if the setting key was on before a power outage occurred, the setting key switch signal is not detected when the power is turned on, so the setting change mode is not entered. However, the setting key switch signal may be turned on as a level on, and the setting change mode may be entered when the setting key is on when the power is turned on again, even if the setting key was on before a power outage occurred.

When the setting change means determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door open signal is on, and the setting change possible flag is on, it activates a setting change mode in which the setting value of the slot machine PS1 can be changed.

The setting change possible flag is switched on and off depending on the game status. For example, a possible mode is that the setting change possible flag is turned off during the period from when the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and is turned on during other periods. However, this is not the only mode, and the setting change possible flag may be turned off only when a specific bonus game has started or when a specific bonus is in progress, or the setting change possible flag may not be set so that the setting can be changed in any state.

When the setting change mode is activated, the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 is turned off, preventing the start of play by inserting a medal. The setting value data that can be changed in the setting change mode has six levels: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". As the setting value increases, a role selection table with a higher ball payout rate is set.

After the setting change mode is started, the setting display LED on the back of the front panel PS2 is lit to notify that the setting change mode is active. Then, setting value display data for displaying the set setting value data is set, and the credit number display 26 arranged in front of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the setting display LED (not shown) arranged on the back of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 are lit to display the setting value. When the setting value data is "1", the setting value display displays "1", when the setting value data is "2", when the setting value data is "3", when the setting value data is "4", when the setting value data is "5", when the setting value data is "6", the setting value display displays "6".

When the setting value data stored in the setting value data storage area is stored in six levels from "0" to "5", if the setting value data is "0", the setting value display will show "1", if the setting value data is "1", if the setting value data is "2", if the setting value data is "2", if the setting value data is "3", if the setting value data is "3", if the setting value data is "4", if the setting value data is "4", if the setting value data is "5", if the setting value data is "5", then the setting value display will show "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on or not, and when it is determined that the start switch 12 has been operated and the sensor signal of the start switch 12 has turned on, the setting value is determined and the current setting value is displayed on the setting display LED. In other words, if it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 has turned on during the setting change mode, the setting value will not be changed even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting switch signal is on without determining that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on, the setting switch rising data is cleared, and it is determined whether or not the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "6"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "6"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data is set to "1"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "1" to "5"), the current setting value is incremented. Note that, in the case where the setting value data is set to six levels from 0 to 5, the processing of the setting change mode is such that it is determined whether or not the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data is set to "0"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "0" to "4"), the current setting value is incremented.

When the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is determined to be on after the setting change mode is activated, the setting display LED may display the setting value in a manner different from that in which the setting can be changed, such as displaying "0" on the setting display LED to indicate that the setting value cannot be changed, or displaying "_X" on the setting display LED (where "X" is the set value after confirmation).

<Gameability using advantageous zones applicable to this embodiment>
In this embodiment, the prescribed number of coins required to start playing is only 3. In other words, the game cannot start with anything other than 3 coins, and even when a bonus is activated, the game can only start with 3 coins.

In this embodiment, the active line is one line consisting of the bottom left reel, the middle of the middle reel, and the bottom right reel. Hereinafter, when a symbol combination stops on an active line, it will be simply referred to as a symbol combination stopping.

In this embodiment, there are 10 types of symbols. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay. Note that the names and types of symbols are merely examples, and there is no problem if they are changed.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 12. As shown in FIG. 12, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in Figures 13 to 18. The "Winning symbol/Activation symbol/Pattern symbol name" item in the figures shows the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. Also, the "Specified number and game state" shows the bonus that is awarded when the symbol combination stops for each specified number. If "1 type BB" is written in the "Specified number and game state" item, it indicates that 1 type BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if it is written "Replay" it indicates that replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if a number is written, it indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops, and if it is written "-" it indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game state.

In this embodiment, the bonus is equipped with a Type 1 BB, and the end condition is the payout of more than 11 game medals. This Type 1 BB is a type in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends when either two wins or two games are met. When the end condition of the RB is met, the RB operates automatically until the end condition of the Type 1 BB (payout of more than 11 game medals) is met.

As shown in Figure 13, there are eight types of BB symbol combinations, and the rate at which symbols related to BB symbol combinations are drawn on each reel (probability that symbols related to the symbol combination will stop) is not 100%, so to display a BB symbol combination, it is necessary to carefully press each reel.

In this embodiment, the RT transition starts from non-RT (also referred to as not inside 1 type BB), and if the 1 type BB is won during non-RT and the 1 type BB pattern combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of the game) will transition to RT1 (also referred to as inside 1 type BB), and if the 1 type BB pattern combination stops during RT1, RT1 will end and the 1 type BB will be activated (also referred to as during 1 type BB) from the next game, and when the activation of the 1 type BB ends, the next game will transition to non-RT. In addition, since the setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device is activated during RT1 or 1 type BB operation, non-RT is set when the operation of the setting change device ends. Note that in a power outage where the setting change device does not operate (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and the 1 type BB operation state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, it will start from the state before the power outage. Specifically, if a power outage occurs during type 1 BB and the power is subsequently restored, the type 1 BB operating state is type 1 BB, and if a power outage occurs while the state is RT1 and the power is subsequently restored, the RT state is configured to be RT1.

The condition device in this embodiment is described in FIG. 19. In FIG. 19, the "Winning Replay" item lists the numbers corresponding to the winning numbers. In addition, the "Condition Device" item lists the condition devices that will be activated. In addition, the "Common Name" item lists the simple names of the condition devices that will be activated. For example, the common name corresponding to the Replay-H condition device is "Right Push: Strong-Battle Eye", which indicates that the Strong Battle Eye will stop when the right reel is stopped for the first time, and the common name corresponding to the Winning-A1 condition device is "Push Order Bell Group A 123", which indicates that the operation mode of the left reel stopping first, the center reel stopping second, and the right reel stopping third is the correct operation mode (in this case, the operation mode that stops the symbol combination of Winning 52 (a winning with a larger payout number than Winning 01-02, 09, 29-31)). In addition, the "Component" item shows the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device. For example, if the replay-A condition device is activated (a win), it is possible to display replay 01 or replay 02. Note that the "0" in the "Winning replay" section corresponds to a loss.

20 to 22, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the non-type BB in this embodiment are explained. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in the non-type BB are type BB, replay-A, replay-B, replay-C (+1 type BB), replay-D (+1 type BB), replay-E (+1 type BB), replay-F (+1 type BB), replay-G (+1 type BB), replay-H (+1 type BB), replay-I (+1 type BB), replay-J (+1 type BB), winning-A1, winning-A2, winning-A3, winning-A4, winning-A5, winning-A6, winning-A7, winning-A8, winning-A9, winning-B10, winning-B20, winning-B30, winning-B4, winning-B5, winning-B6, winning-B7, winning-B8, winning-B9, winning-B11, winning-B12, winning-B13, winning-B14, winning-B15, winning-B16, winning-B17, winning-B18, winning-B19, winning-B20, winning-B21, winning-B22, winning-B23, winning-B24, winning-B25, winning-B26, winning-B27, winning-B28, winning-B30, winning-B31, winning-B32, winning-B33, winning-B34, winning-B35, winning-B46, winning-B47, winning-B48, winning-B59, winning-B61, winning-B62, winning-B63, winning-B64, winning-B65, winning-B76, winning-B87, winning-B98, winning-B109, winning-B1109, winning-B121, winning-B131, winning-B142, winning The prizes are -A6, Winner -B1, Winner -B2, Winner -B3, Winner -B4, Winner -B5, Winner -B6, Winner -C1, Winner -C2, Winner -C3, Winner -C4, Winner -C5, Winner -C6, Winner -D (+1 type BB), Winner -E (+1 type BB), Winner -F (+1 type BB), Winner -G (+1 type BB), Winner -H (+1 type BB), Winner -I (+1 type BB), Winner -J (+1 type BB), Winner -K (+1 type BB), and there are no losers.

The above-mentioned description of "Replay -C (+1 type BB)" indicates that Replay -C and 1 type BB are won at the same time, and corresponds to the fact that the names of both "Bonus Condition Device" and "Winning Replay" are written in Figures 20, 21, and 22. Also, the "Internal Lottery" item in Figures 20, 21, and 22 indicates whether or not the internal lottery is subject for each game state, with "○" indicating that the internal lottery is subject and "×" indicating that the internal lottery is not subject. Also, the "Advantageous Zone Transition" item in Figures 20, 21, and 22 indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed and "×" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed. Note that in this embodiment, when the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, 100% of the time, the game is configured to transition to the advantageous zone. Also, the items "R1" to "R6" in Figures 20, 21, and 22 indicate the number of winning settings for the internal lottery corresponding to the setting value, and 65,536 settings are allocated for each game state. Note that "R1" corresponds to a setting value of "1," "R2" corresponds to a setting value of "2," "R3" corresponds to a setting value of "3," "R4" corresponds to a setting value of "4," "R5" corresponds to a setting value of "5," and "R6" corresponds to a setting value of "6."

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means within the Type 1 BB are any of the following: Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and there are no losing results.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during Type 1 BB are Winning -K, Winning -L, or Losing.

In this embodiment, the conditions for moving from the normal zone to the advantageous zone are winning any of Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; winning Replay-A or Replay-B does not move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, Win-K, you will be in the advantageous period from the next play.

In this embodiment, if any of the following is won during the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K, the player will always move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, Win-K, you will be in the advantageous period from the next play.

In this embodiment, since there are no misses in RT1 (inside the Type 1 BB) (either the replay role or the winning role is always a winning role), once you move to RT1, it is possible to stop the BB symbol combination with some of the operation modes when the push order bell group C (winning role-C1 to C6) is won. The part when the push order bell group C is won is, for example, the middle reel when the winning role-C1 is won, or some of the eye-pushing positions of the first stop of the right reel. Also, when WINNING-C1 is hit in the advantageous zone, the correct button press sequence (in this case, "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the LCD) is notified, and WINNING 38 stops and the BB symbol combination does not stop. With this configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by being notified of an operation mode in which the BB symbol combination does not stop. Also, the number of losing buttons during RT1 can be set to 4 (because the minimum winning probability designed is 1/17500 or more), and the BB symbol combination is configured not to stop for other replay roles or winning roles, so that the BB symbol combination stops only when there is a loss.

In this embodiment, the game states managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone include the general advantageous zone state, chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and AT, with transitions occurring from the general advantageous zone state to CZ, from CZ to AT, and from AT to the general advantageous zone state or CZ, respectively. Furthermore, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal zone is only the general normal zone state, and there is no transition of the game state until a transition to the advantageous zone occurs. Note that in the general advantageous zone state and the general normal zone state, the flags related to the game state managed by the main control means may be the same or different.

The normal state is when the internal lottery result is any of WINNER-A1 through WINNER-C6, and the advantageous winning button sequence is not announced.

The CZ is the state you enter when you win any of the internal lottery results from WINNER-D to WINNER-H under normal circumstances, and during the CZ, the transition to the AT is determined by the results of the internal lottery during the CZ and the lottery at the start of the CZ.

The AT is the state you enter when you win the AT lottery during the CZ, and is the state that notifies you of the advantageous operation mode (winning button sequence) when you win any of WINNING-A1 through WINNING-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for always transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone are when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 1500 times), when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, when initialization processing based on a setting change is performed, and when the RAM clear switch is enabled, and the AT end conditions and the advantageous zone end conditions do not match. However, some of the AT end conditions (such as when the ending is reached or when the number of winning coins exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2300 coins)) may also be used as the advantageous zone end conditions. In addition, a transition to the normal zone may be made when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone. In this case, whether or not to end the advantageous zone is determined depending on the situation of the advantageous zone when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone.

The CZ is determined by drawing lots when one of the winning combinations, Winning-D through Winning-H (hereafter also referred to as rare combinations), is won, and basically the less likely the internal drawing result is to win, the more likely it is to win the CZ. In this embodiment, the order of likelihood of winning the CZ is Winning-G > Winning-E > Winning-H > Winning-F > Winning-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after winning, but after winning the CZ, the CZ starts when the game moves from the advantageous zone to the normal zone and then back to the advantageous zone (the CZ always starts when the game moves to the advantageous zone in RT1). This solves the problem that when the game goes from the CZ to the AT, the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is small, and balls cannot be put out. This is particularly effective when the specification has a small net increase (the expected number of coins to be won per game, also called the gradient value). For example, in the case of a net increase of 2 coins, the maximum number of coins to be won in the advantageous zone is about 2400 coins, so 1200 games are required to win 2400 coins. However, the AT is not always performed in the advantageous zone, and since various game states such as the normal state and the CZ described above are transitioned, the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is often small (for example, 500 games) at the start of the AT. In this case, even if 500 games are played, the net increase is 2 coins, so the game ends with about 1000 coins being won, making it difficult to meet the user's expectations for winning. Therefore, by ending the advantageous zone once when the CZ is won, and starting the CZ when moving to a new advantageous zone, even if the CZ has 100 plays, the advantageous zone can be played 1,400 times, creating the expectation that the user will win 2,400 coins.

The probability of winning the CZ from the second time onwards within the same advantageous zone may also be varied depending on the number of coins won since the advantageous zone began (cumulative number of coins paid out - cumulative number of coins inserted). For example, if a CZ is started when moving to an advantageous zone and an AT is won, it is possible to vary the probability of winning the CZ in the remaining advantageous zone after the AT ends depending on whether 50 coins are won in the AT or 1000 coins are won. In this case, it is possible to make the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins higher or lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins.

If the probability of winning a CZ after winning 50 coins is made higher than the probability of winning a CZ after winning 1,000 coins, it will be easier to award the next CZ to users who have not won much in the AT, allowing them to play while maintaining a sense of anticipation.

If the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins is made lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins, since there is little remaining advantageous period after winning 1000 coins (since it is close to the end condition of the advantageous period, which is 1500 plays or winning 2400 coins), even if the CZ probability is made high, the ball payout design will not significantly increase gambling spirit, and a new sense of expectation can be created for the user.

When a CZ is won, a congratulatory performance is performed in which text such as "success" or "victory" is displayed in the game in which the CZ was won, or after a certain number of games (which can be set arbitrarily depending on the specifications of the gaming machine). This allows the user to understand that some kind of privilege has been granted, and allows the user to intuitively understand the progress of the game. Then, from the next game onwards, the display "CZ preparation" is displayed by lighting the liquid crystal or lamp, and a sense of expectation for the CZ can be created in the user. When the CZ winning game is in an advantageous zone, the CZ preparation corresponds to the state from the end of the advantageous zone to the transition to the advantageous zone again in the subsequent normal zone. Since the "CZ preparation" is internally a normal zone, it is a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform any AT lottery or AT addition, but by lowering the ball output rate during the CZ preparation compared to the AT state, balls can be allocated to the AT, and a wave of balls can be created. In addition, since the CZ preparation creates a sense of expectation for the CZ, the user is less likely to feel that he or she has lost even if the ball output rate is lowered.

In addition, the advantageous zone ends with the next play after the CZ wins, but a predetermined number of plays may be played from the play after the CZ wins until the advantageous zone ends. In this case, the game after the CZ win does not announce that the CZ has been won, and it is possible to play a predetermined number of plays to see whether the CZ has been won or not by using effects (so-called premonition effects or consecutive effects). Then, a congratulatory effect is executed at the timing when the predetermined number of plays are played, and the CZ is in preparation from the next play. This is because the advantageous zone lamp is lit during the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone lamp is turned off when the advantageous zone ends, so that it is not possible to tell whether the CZ has been won or not from the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp between the CZ win play and the announcement that the CZ has been won. Note that the advantageous zone may be switched to the normal zone during CZ preparation, and in this case, since it has already been announced that the CZ is in preparation, the result is not known in advance by the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp during CZ preparation.

In addition, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal zone, and may be set to a favorable zone. Even in this case, the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a normal zone is relatively higher than the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a favorable zone, and the condition for executing CZ preparation in a favorable zone is that the number of remaining plays in the favorable zone is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times). By configuring in this way, CZ preparation is executed when there is a margin in the number of remaining plays in the favorable zone, so even if the CZ is executed after CZ preparation and the AT is executed as a result, a sufficient feeling of winning can be created. In addition, since the normal zone is not used during CZ preparation, it is possible to create a surprise such as starting the AT immediately after CZ preparation (since information related to the AT is initialized at the end of the favorable zone, if the normal zone is used during CZ preparation, the CZ will be executed at the start of the favorable zone, and the AT cannot be started).

In addition, when executing CZ preparation during the above-mentioned advantageous zone, it may be determined by drawing lots whether or not to award an AT when any of WIN-D through WIN-H is won during CZ preparation. In this case, the order of rare roles that are likely to win the AT by AT drawing may be the same as the order that is likely to win the CZ, or may be slightly different, such as WIN-E > WIN-G > WIN-F > WIN-H > WIN-D. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the user hope of winning a rare role even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, in order to prevent users who have won a rare role but not won the AT from losing their desire to play, a bonus different from the AT may be given. Such a bonus may, for example, be displayed as a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user terminal, or a setting suggestion effect that allows the setting value to be determined. Such a bonus may be made easier to give the closer the number of plays in the advantageous zone is to the aforementioned predetermined number of plays (e.g., 1500 plays), or it may be made easier to give when the number of CZ plays is a specific number (e.g., a multiple of 5).

The process for changing settings in this embodiment is explained below.

When the setting change device is started, the RAM initialization process described above is performed at the timing when the setting change device is started or when the setting value is confirmed. If the game state immediately before this RAM initialization process is performed is RT1, the RT1 information is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in Type 1 BB, the information in Type 1 BB is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT.

In addition, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is a favorable zone, the information of the favorable zone is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes the normal zone. In other words, the game state during the favorable zone can be the normal state, CZ, or AT, but in any state, when the RAM initialization process is performed, it transitions to the normal zone.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, play will start in a non-RT and normal zone, but in this embodiment, the CZ is started when moving from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, so after the setting change, the game is in an advantageous state (a state in which the CZ can be started by moving to the advantageous zone without playing to win the CZ).

By configuring it this way, the setting becomes advantageous after it is changed, which motivates customers to visit the store in the morning, thereby increasing the number of customers attracted.

In addition, if it is possible to set an overly favorable state after changing the settings (a state in which the machine transitions to the CZ after just a few plays), this could significantly stimulate gambling instincts (the so-called morning mode). For this reason, it is possible to change the contents of the CZ depending on the situation when the machine transitions to the favorable zone.

In this case, if the RT state of the next game after it has been determined that the player will move to the favorable zone is RT1, a CZ will be started since this is the basic game flow, and if the RT state of the next game after it has been determined that the player will move to the favorable zone is non-RT, a CZ will not be started as this is after a setting change. Games that have been determined to move into the favorable zone are those that have won any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, Winning-K.

In addition, since Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K overlap with Type 1 BB, the RT state of the next play after the winning will be RT1 and CZ will start, but Winning-A1, Winner-A2, Winner-A3, Winner-A4, Winner-A5, Winner-A6, Winner-B1, Winner-B2, Winner-B3, Winner-B4, Winner-B5, Winner-B6, Winner-C1, Winner-C2, Winner-C3, Winner-C4, Winner-C5, Winner-C6 do not overlap with Type 1 BB, so the next play after the win is non-RT and CZ will not start.

This configuration allows for cases where a player transitions to a favorable zone during non-RT, and therefore suppresses morning-related specifications such as transitioning to a CZ after just a few plays after changing the settings, thereby reducing the risk of gambling.

It is also possible to reduce gambling by using a specification that changes the game state managed by the main control means in the favorable zone by referring to the RT state of the next game in which a transition to the favorable zone has been decided. In this case, the favorable zone that has transitioned to a non-RT (not inside the Type 1 BB) may not perform an AT, and the favorable zone that has transitioned to RT1 (inside the Type 1 BB) may have the possibility of performing an AT. With this configuration, if a transition to the favorable zone occurs in a non-RT after the setting change, the AT will not be performed and no balls can be earned, thereby reducing gambling. The condition for ending the favorable zone at this time may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or may be that a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games) have been played.

In addition, the transition of the CZ is controlled by referring to the RT state of the next game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery, but this is not limited to this, and the transition of the CZ may be controlled by referring to the condition device that is operating for the game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, when the prize-winning-A1 is won while inside a type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition devices for the type 1 BB and the prize-winning-A1 are operating. In addition, when the prize-winning-A1 is won while not inside a type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled not to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition device for the prize-winning-A1 is operating.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be the subject of the lottery.

<Gameplay that increases the expected value of game value gained at the start of the advantageous zone>
We will explain the gameplay that can be applied to this embodiment, which increases the expected value of game value gained at the start of the advantageous zone.
In this case, in order to increase the expected value of the game value at the start of the advantageous period, the advantageous period is configured not to end by playing a predetermined number of times. In other words, the advantageous period is configured not to end depending on the number of times of playing in the advantageous period.

When a predetermined number of premonition games are played in the general advantageous zone state after the start of one advantageous zone, the next game transitions to a predetermined AT (also referred to as AT1), a predetermined lottery is played in the AT1, and if the predetermined lottery is won, the AT1 continues until the number of wins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 (until the value of the MY counter exceeds the upper limit), and when the end condition of the advantageous zone is met, the advantageous zone ends and the normal zone starts from the next game. Then, after the normal zone is passed and a new advantageous zone is started, a predetermined number of premonition games are played in the general advantageous zone state, and the AT1 transitions, and when the predetermined lottery is won in the AT1, the AT1 continues until the number of wins in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, and when the end condition of the advantageous zone is met, the advantageous zone ends and the normal zone starts from the next game.
That is, until a predetermined lottery is not won in the AT1, the acquisition of about 2400 game values is looped. The probability of winning in the predetermined lottery can be set appropriately, but it is preferable to configure it so that the probability of winning is as high as 50% or more and less than 80%. In addition, a minimum guarantee (such as AT50 games or 100 wins) is provided during the execution period of the AT1, and even if a predetermined lottery is not won in the AT1, the AT1 is not immediately terminated but is configured to continue until the AT with the minimum guarantee is executed. The predetermined lottery may be configured to be executed at the start of the AT1, or may be configured to be executed after the AT with the minimum guarantee is executed in the AT1.

In addition, if a player does not win in a specified lottery in AT1, the game will transition to the general advantageous zone state after the end of AT1 without ending the advantageous zone, and if a player wins a specified role (such as replay-A, replay-J, winning-J, etc.) that has a low probability of winning in the role lottery (such as 1/8192, the lowest probability in the role lottery) in the general advantageous zone state, the advantageous zone will end and the normal zone will start from the next play, and after passing through the normal zone and starting a new advantageous zone, a predetermined number of premonition plays will be performed in the general advantageous zone state, and the game will transition to AT1.

The general advantageous zone state to which the player transitions after failing to win in a specified lottery at AT1 is configured to have a lower expectation for the AT than the general advantageous zone state at the start of one advantageous zone.

In addition, the advantageous zone is configured to end when a predetermined role is won in the advantageous zone general state to which the player transitions after failing to win a predetermined lottery in AT1, but the advantageous zone may also be configured to end by executing a predetermined CZ to end the advantageous zone, and then winning the lottery during that predetermined CZ.

In addition, during AT1 or during a premonition game played a predetermined number of times immediately after the start of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone is configured not to end even if the player wins the predetermined role. This configuration can improve the tempo of the game when the winning number 2400 is looping. Even if the player wins the predetermined role in a situation where it is confirmed that the player can win a predetermined lottery in AT1 and can win a game value of about 2400, AT1 will not end midway, so the risk of causing a disadvantage to the player can be prevented. Even if the player wins the predetermined role in a situation where a predetermined performance is being performed indicating that the player can win a predetermined lottery and can win a game value of about 2400, the predetermined performance will not end midway, so the risk of causing a distrust among the player can be prevented. In addition, if the player wins the predetermined role during AT2, which will be described later, the advantageous zone may be configured to end with the game in which the predetermined role was won, or the advantageous zone may be configured to end after the end of AT2.

In this way, by increasing the expected gain in game value at the start of an advantageous zone, a new type of gameplay can be created in which the aim is to end the advantageous zone. Furthermore, by requiring a certain number of premonition plays from the start of an advantageous zone until the transition to AT1, even if a certain lottery is won in AT1, the AT will not continue beyond 2,400 points, preventing excessive gambling.

In addition, even in the general advantageous zone state to which a player transitions after failing to win a predetermined lottery in AT1, an AT lottery may be held, or a ceiling may be set so that a player transitions to the AT each time a ceiling number of games (e.g., 1,000 games) have been played (these ATs other than AT1 are collectively referred to as AT2), but it is preferable to configure AT2 so that the predetermined lottery is not held. In this way, by not holding the predetermined lottery in ATs other than AT1, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling and to increase the sense of anticipation for the predetermined lottery in AT1.

Even if the expected gain in game value at the start of the favorable zone is configured to be high in this way, if a transition to the favorable zone is determined during RT1 (inside a type 1 BB) by the method described above, the game will transition to AT1 after a predetermined number of premonition plays from the start of the favorable zone, but if a transition to the favorable zone is determined during a non-RT, the AT will not be executed even after a predetermined number of plays from the start of the favorable zone; in other words, it is preferable to configure the game so that the AT will not be executed after a predetermined number of plays from the start of the favorable zone in the first favorable zone after the setting is changed. In this way, by configuring the transition to the favorable zone during RT1 to be relatively more favorable than the transition to the favorable zone during a non-RT, the specifications related to the morning can be suppressed.

In addition, if a specific number of games (e.g., 5,000 games) have been played without one advantageous period ending, the system may be configured to transition to a specific state in which the design value of the payout rate is a specific value (a value exceeding 100% and not exceeding 115%) from the next game until the advantageous period ends. Note that the specific number of games can be set as appropriate, but it is preferable to set it to the number of games that can be played within the business hours of the gaming establishment in one day.

In addition, in order to set the design value of the payout rate in a specified state to a specified value, 1) it may be configured to transition to AT2 every time a specified number of games (e.g., 100 games) are played in the general advantageous zone state, and the AT2 may always end after a specific number of games (e.g., 50 games), or 2) it may be configured to provide multiple scenarios in which the number of games to transition to AT2 and the number of games won in AT2 after the transition are predetermined so that the payout rate becomes a specified value, and to have the game proceed according to one of the scenarios.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to motivate a player to continue playing even in an unfavorable situation for the player, such as when one advantageous period continues for a long period of time.

In addition, in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantageous zone may be configured not to end even if a predetermined role is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value from being overly advantageous for the player.

In addition, even if the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, the advantageous period may be configured to end if a predetermined combination is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation when a predetermined combination is won.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be designed to be the same regardless of the set value. By doing so, in a specified state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, stable playability can be provided without any advantage/disadvantage due to the set value.

In addition, the design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured to be higher as the set value is higher, such as set value 1 < set value 2 < ... < set value 6. By doing this, the higher the set value is, the sooner the advantageous zone can end when a transition is made to a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value in an advantageous zone, and therefore the transition to a state where the expected value of the game value to be acquired is higher can be made sooner.

The design value of the payout rate in a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value may be configured to be higher than the lowest set value (set value 1 in this embodiment) and lower than the highest set value (set value 6 in this embodiment). By configuring it in this way, even if a predetermined lottery is not won during AT1 of one advantageous zone, it is possible to continue playing, thereby enhancing the significance of aiming for a predetermined state where the design value of the payout rate is a predetermined value, while also preventing the significance of playing at the highest set value from being lost.

<Control for dealing with power interruption while various switches are pressed according to this embodiment>
When the front panel PS2 is closed, a game has ended, no 3 bets have been made (including a situation where no automatic bet has been made), and a number of credits that allows a bet of 3 or more is stored as the number of credits (for example, the number of credits when no bets have been made is 3 or more, or the number of credits when 1 bet has been made is 2 or more) (hereinafter referred to as a MAX bet possible state), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed).

...

The MAX bet possible state includes a state where no bet has been made, a state where 1 bet has been made, and a state where 2 bets have been made, but when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are newly lit, this is the MAX bet possible state where no bet has been made. In the MAX bet possible state where 1 bet has been made, the 2 bet lamp and 3 bet lamp are newly lit when the 1 bet lamp is already lit, and in the MAX bet possible state where 2 bets have been made, the 1 bet lamp and 2 bet lamp are already lit and the 3 bet lamp is newly lit.

In addition, in the MAX bet enabled state, the MAX bet lamp is lit, informing the player that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. Then, when the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the MAX bet lamp is lit in the MAX bet enabled state (when the sensor that detects the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp goes out. In other words, the MAX bet lamp goes out even when the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (when the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 remains ON).

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed. Also, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, a new MAX bet process cannot be performed by pressing the MAX bet switch 18. In other words, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is on), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet process cannot be performed.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can be lit to accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid can place a MAX bet (perform MAX bet processing) by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 that he had pressed (after the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON).

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not due to a software malfunction.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again (the sensor that detects the 1 bet switch 19 turns from OFF to ON), the 1 bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp will notify the player that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated. Even in such a case, the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 is valid, so the game can continue.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, making the gaming machine unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and when the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bet lamp may be on or off after the power is turned on. If the MAX bet lamp is on after the power is turned on, it indicates that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, the state changes from 3 bets to 1 bet, and the difference "2" is returned to the credits (if the difference cannot be returned to credits in a 3 bet state and the number of credits is 50, the state does not change to 1 bet even if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, and the 3 bet state is maintained, so the MAX bet lamp does not light up after the power is turned on (it is off)). If the MAX bet lamp is off after the power is turned on, it is possible to indicate that the MAX bet process has been executed. In addition, whether the MAX BET lamp is on or off after power is turned on, it is possible to notify the user that the MAX BET process has been executed by outputting three BET sounds (three times one BET sound) when the power is turned on.

Next, when the MAX BET switch 19 is operated (pressed) in a state where a MAX BET is possible (a state where no bet has been made), the number of bets is stored as 1 and the 1 BET lamp is lit. Also, since the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is still valid, the MAX BET lamp is also lit.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (when no bets have been placed), if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and the gaming machine to become inoperable, and the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, if the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed. Also, because the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new 1 bet process by pressing the 1 bet switch 19.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp indicates that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 or 1 bet switch 19 is valid can perform a 1 bet process or a MAX bet process by releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that was pressed (after the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 goes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON) without releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that was pressed (while the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON).

In addition, when the gaming machine is in a MAX bet enabled state (when no bets have been placed) and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making it unable to operate, if the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by operating (pressing) the MAX bet switch 18 again.

As a result, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp will notify the player that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable. Even in such a case, the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, so the game can continue.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the 1 bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bet lamp is lit after power is turned on, indicating that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable, and when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the 1 bet state changes to the 3 bet state. Also, it is possible to notify that the 1 bet process has been executed by outputting a 1 bet sound when the power is turned on.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (no bet has been placed), if a power outage occurs causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and the gaming machine is unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case when the front panel PS2 is not open or may already be open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed; however, if the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed) while the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, the 1 bet process can be executed. In addition, when a power outage occurs in a state where a MAX bet is possible (when no bet has been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and making it impossible for the gaming machine to operate, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case when the front panel PS2 is not open or may already be open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 and operating (pressing) it again. In this case, even if the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, the 1 bet sound or the 3 bet sound may not be output. Alternatively, when the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, 3 bets are made and the front panel PS2 is open, when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins, but the start sound may not be output.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX BET switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX BET switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX BET lamp can be lit to accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid.

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not due to a software malfunction.

Also, by enabling 1 bet processing using the 1 bet switch 19 even when the front panel PS2 is open, it becomes possible to check whether 1 bet processing is possible normally in addition to the work performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, checking settings and setting the administrator menu). Note that when playing at an amusement arcade, playing with the front panel PS2 open is not normal, so by deliberately not outputting the 1 bet sound, it becomes possible to make the player aware that it is not normal.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible (a state where no bet has been placed), when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be a state where the front panel PS2 is not open or may already be open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp does not light up, the MAX bet process is not executed, and even if the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1 bet process is not executed, and thereafter, when the front panel PS2 is closed (the closure is detected) while the operation (pressing) of the MAX bet switch 18 is continuing, the MAX bet lamp lights up, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1 bet process becomes possible.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and by not lighting the MAX bet lamp, it is possible to make the player aware that he or she cannot continue playing. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be operated (pressed), the bet operation with the 1 bet switch 19 is enabled, making it possible to minimize the disruption of game progress.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and the gaming machine is unable to operate, and the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are being pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is still being pressed, and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed. Similarly, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, and the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still pressed, and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the 1 bet process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can be lit to accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. Also, even in such a case, the game can continue because the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and normal effects are being displayed (effects other than continuous effects or AT effects) or a demo screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as a menu screen displayable state), if the sub switch 20 is operated (pressed) (the sensor that detects the sub switch 20 goes from OFF to ON), the display process for the menu screen is executed and the menu screen is displayed on the display device 32.

In addition, when the menu screen is in a state where it can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the sub switch 20 remains ON), the sub switch lamp will light up and the menu screen will not be displayed.

As a result, even if the sub switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional menu screen is not displayed, and the lighting state of the sub switch lamp indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the sub switch 20 is valid can release the sub switch 20 that he has pressed (after the sensor of the sub switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then press the sub switch 20 again (the sensor of the sub switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), thereby allowing the menu screen to be displayed.

In addition, in a state where the menu screen can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the sub switch lamp may light up and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it can be indicated that the confirmation operation for each item on the menu screen was valid.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed in a situation where a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable while the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up, the MAX bet process will not be executed, the sub switch lamp will light up, and the menu screen will not be displayed. Also, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18. In other words, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is on), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet process cannot be performed.

This makes it possible to prevent unintentional bets from being made and the menu screen from being displayed, even if the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, and the sub switch lamp can indicate that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated.

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not due to a software malfunction.

In addition, in a situation where a MAX BET is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine is unable to operate, and if the MAX BET switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may be lit, the MAX BET process is not executed, the sub switch lamp may be lit, and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen may be displayed immediately after the power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it may be possible to indicate that the decision operation for each item on the menu screen is valid. In this case, the MAX BET lamp may continue to be lit even after the menu screen is displayed, to notify that the MAX BET process can be executed.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, a game has ended, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and the number of credits is one or more (hereinafter referred to as the settlement-enabled state), the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch is operated (pressed), and the medals stored in the credits are paid out to the tray 28.

In addition, in a situation where settlement is possible and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine unable to operate, if the settlement switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the settlement switch turns from OFF to ON) and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the settlement switch sensor is ON and the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and settlement processing will not be executed. Also, even if the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX BET process will not be executed.

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp will notify the player that medals remain in the credits, preventing the player from leaving the seat with credits remaining.

In addition, in a situation where settlement is possible and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and making the gaming machine unable to operate, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and settlement processing will not be executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX bet processing will be executed.

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when powering on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and because operation of the MAX BET switch is valid, the progress of the game will not be hindered as much as possible, so as not to reduce interest in the game.

In addition, in a state where settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and the gaming machine to become inoperable, the settlement switch may be pressed, and if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp may be lit and settlement processing may be executed.

This means that, for example, if the power is turned on before an arcade opens, and the settlement switch is operated (e.g., hand is placed on the settlement switch), the settlement process can be performed immediately after the power is turned on, simplifying the power-on process before opening and the settlement process for remaining medals on the credit.

In addition, when the settlement is possible and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the lamp of the sub-switch 20 will light up and operation of the sub-switch 20 will be valid, regardless of whether the settlement process is executed or not (the menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of the sub-switch 20).

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated when powering on after a power outage, for example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating sub switch 20, and information useful for playing, such as checking game history and adjusting the volume, can be viewed or changed on the menu screen. Also, by enabling all operations related to the progress of the game at this time, all games other than settlement can be performed. The settlement process is only used at the end of play, and since the player is not put at a disadvantage by adjusting the number of medals inserted even if the settlement process is not performed, it is possible to carry out the process without interfering with the progress of the game as much as possible.

In addition, when the gaming machine is in a state where a MAX bet is possible and settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed, and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and settlement process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is still being pressed, and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed, and if the settlement switch is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still being pressed, and the settlement switch is operated (pressed) again while the MAX bet switch 18 is still being pressed, the settlement process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed and settlement processing even if the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch) when power is turned on after a power outage, for example. Also, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp can accurately notify the user that medals remain in the credits and that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, play has ended, and three bets have been made (including when replay is activated) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotation enabled state), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed). Note that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum play time has elapsed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine unable to operate, and the start switch 12 is pressed, if the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp will light up but none of the reels will spin.

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, and it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that have been bet on. Also, even in such cases, the lighting of the start lamp can accurately notify the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

In addition, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not light up and none of the reels may spin. In such a case, it is preferable that the start lamp light up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned off).

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, preventing the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that has been bet on. Also, by not lighting the start lamp in such a case, the player can be made aware that the reels will not spin until the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated, and the start lamp lights up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated, accurately informing the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

In addition, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are rotatable, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), all of the reels may rotate.

As a result, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and then the start switch 12 is operated before the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is operated (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all the reels will spin after the power is turned on, so it is possible for the game to progress (all the reels will spin) regardless of when the player operates the start switch 12, reducing the player's workload and improving the tempo of the game.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, all reels are spinning, and the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid (hereinafter referred to as the reel stoppable state), when the stop switch 13 is operated (pressed) (when any of the sensors detecting the left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, and right stop switch 13c changes from OFF to ON), a stop control process is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to a state in which all reels are spinning, and a state in which any one reel is spinning can also be called the reel stoppable state.

When the reel can be stopped, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is lit to indicate that it is enabled, and when the reel cannot be stopped even when the stop switch 13 is operated, the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is lit to indicate that it is disabled.

Here, the state where the reels cannot be stopped may be a state where the reels are rotating but the operation of the stop switch 13 is not accepted (such as when a rotation failure is being detected or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is operated), or a state where the reels are not rotating (such as when all reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated when the left reel is stopped).

In addition, the lighting state indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is active is when it is lit in white or red, and the lighting state indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is inactive is when it is unlit (off) or when it is lit in a color (e.g. blue) different from the lighting color indicating that it is active.

In addition, in a state where the reels can be stopped, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine unable to operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (the sensor of the left stop switch 13a remains ON and the power outage recovery process is executed), the stop control process is not executed for the left reel. Also, if the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 is lit up to indicate that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch that corresponds to the final stop operation, and even if a power outage occurs while the left reel is in a stoppable state and the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on, the left stop switch 13a will not stop the rotation of the left reel, making it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as missing out on a minor role that requires careful pressing. It is also possible to prevent the stop switch 13 from accepting an operation in a push order that is different from the correct push order when an internal lottery result (the so-called push order role) in which a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player stops depending on the push order is won.

In addition, in a state where the reels can be stopped, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and making the gaming machine unable to operate, the left stop switch 13a may be pressed, and if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (if a power outage recovery process is executed), a stop control process may be executed for the left reel. Even in this case, if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 will be lit up to indicate that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, if a power outage occurs during play, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and then the left stop switch 13a is pressed before the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the left reel stops after the power is turned on, so the game can proceed (the corresponding reel stops) regardless of when the player presses the stop switch 13, reducing the player's efforts and improving the game tempo. Note that when stopping the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that is pressed after power is turned on, the reel can be stopped even if the reel is accelerating, making it possible to approach the timing that the player originally wanted to stop it. However, if multiple stop switches 13 are pressed after power is turned on, none of the reels are stopped.

<Control for Responding to Power Outage During Slip Control According to the Present Embodiment>
When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, if the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, the reel is rotated from the acceptance position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control), and the reel stops when it reaches the stop position. If the power cut process is executed during this slip control, the slip control cannot be executed, and therefore the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is performed based on the determined stop position, so when it is determined that a small win has been won based on the stop position, regardless of whether the reels are actually stopped or not, the payout of medals based on the small win is performed.

For this reason, in a game in which a small prize is won by the internal lottery process, power-off processing is executed during slip control when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small prize can be stopped, and even if the symbol corresponding to the small prize is not stopped on a winning line after the power is restored, the winning determination processing after all reels have stopped determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the small prize has been stopped, and medals are paid out according to the stopped symbol combination.

This is for the following reasons. That is, while it has the effect of preventing a situation in which a player is unable to receive a medal payout even though he or she performed a stop operation at the timing when the medal payout should be received, it also has the problem of not being able to recognize which symbol combination the medal payout is based on. To solve this problem, in a game in which a small prize has been won by the internal lottery process, a power cut process is executed during slip control (from the time the stop acceptance is accepted until the end of slip control) when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small prize can be stopped, and after the power is restored, the reel is rotated to detect the index, and based on the detected index information, the reel is rotated to the stop position and then controlled to stop at the stop position, and the medals are then paid out.

By configuring it in this way, even if the power is cut off during slip control, the reels will rotate to the intended stop position after the power is restored, allowing the player to visually confirm which symbol combination has been stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, if a power cut process is performed during slippage control, and an index is detected during re-spin processing after power is restored, the reel will move to the planned stop position even if the same symbol is present during the movement to the planned stop position. If the reel stops on the same symbol just before the planned stop position, it may result in a stop prohibition display that does not stop during play, so a process is required to determine whether or not a stop is prohibited, but the reel is moved to the planned position to reduce the processing burden during the re-spin processing.

In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and in the re-spin processing after power is restored, acceleration processing and constant speed processing are executed in the same way as the normal reel spin start processing. However, this is not limited to this, and acceleration processing and constant speed processing different from the normal processing may be executed. For example, it is possible to think of a state in which the acceleration time is shorter, the acceleration time is longer, the constant speed spin speed is slower, or the constant speed spin speed is faster. In this way, by changing the acceleration mode or constant speed mode from the normal state, it is possible to make the player aware that the spin is different from the normal state.

In addition, if the reel rotates to the same position as the stop acceptance position while rotating at a constant speed during re-spinning, the reel enters slip control as if a stop operation had been accepted, as in normal rotation processing, and when the reel rotates to the planned stop position, a full-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (in the case of a four-phase stepping motor, a four-phase excitation signal is output) to stop the re-spinning reel.

In addition, if power is cut off during slippage control, and the re-spin process is in progress after power is restored, it is possible to have the LCD display show "Re-spinning", output a voice message saying "Re-spinning", or have the error display show an error message so that the player knows that the re-spin is occurring. This allows the player to know that the re-spin is not normal.

In addition, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, a flag indicating that slip control has not been completed is stored in a specified memory area, and when power is turned on, the specified memory area is checked, and if the flag is set, re-spin processing is executed. The flag is initialized when the re-spin processing is stopped as a result of being executed, so that re-spin processing is not executed when power is turned on normally. The flag indicating that slip control has not been completed may be an error flag or a game status flag.

In addition, when a power cut process is performed during slip control, the re-rotation process may be performed automatically after the power is restored, or an error may occur after the power is restored and the re-rotation process is performed after the error is released by a reset switch. Either aspect is applicable to the re-rotation process in the following embodiments.

In addition, power-off processing may be performed during slip control, and during re-rotation processing after power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and constant speed, or during constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the above-mentioned 180), acceleration processing is performed again. Possible causes of rotation failure in this case include holding the reel by hand, loss of synchronism due to a motor malfunction, or deterioration of components over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized in the initialization process when the power is turned on, and the rotation failure detection counter starts updating (counting) as the re-spin process is executed. Then, after the index is detected for the first time after the power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter starts again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to the stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after the first index is detected in this way, even if the position of the reel stopped due to the power-off process is the position immediately after the index has passed, and the stop position is the position immediately before the index has passed, it is possible to stop the reel to the stop position without detecting a rotation failure. In other words, the reel rotates approximately two revolutions from when the power is turned on until it stops, but it is not determined that there is a rotation failure.

The timing for initializing the rotation failure detection counter is when the power is turned on, but this is not limited to the above. The rotation failure detection counter may be initialized when the stop switch 13 is received, or when the reel is in a constant speed state.

In this way, power cut processing is performed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during re-rotation processing after power is restored, making it possible to prevent the stop position from shifting due to step-out, etc., even during re-rotation, and to stop the motor at the planned stop position. Furthermore, since rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not performed if step-out, etc., occurs during normal slip control.

Next, if a power cut process is executed during slip control and an error (recoverable error) is detected during the re-spin process after the power is restored, an error is notified after the re-spin process is completed. The errors detected at this time are any of the following errors: medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error, hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error, door open error, harness disconnection error, etc. In addition to the error code displayed on the number of acquired coins display 27, the error can be notified by an LCD, a speaker, or by lighting the upper or both side performance lamps or performance switch lamps in a specified color (for example, a highly visible color such as red or blue). Note that the error can be notified by only one error notification or by a combination of multiple error notifications.

In this way, by issuing an error notification after the re-spin process has finished, it becomes possible to make it easier for players and game center personnel to recognize whether the notification is for a re-spin or an error. If a re-spin notification is issued during a re-spin, the re-spin notification is terminated after the re-spin has finished and switched to an error notification. Note that no error notifications are issued during a re-spin, and notifications related to re-spin that are not error notifications are not executed either.

The error modes during the re-spinning process described above are not limited to these, and only some errors may be detected (for example, a hopper accumulation error may be detected but a medal accumulation error may not be detected), and the mode of error notification may be such that after an error is detected, the error is notified by the acquired coin count display 27, and when the re-spinning process is completed and the reels stop, the error is notified by the LCD or speaker, or the error is notified by the acquired coin count display 27, LCD, or speaker after an error is detected.

Then, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and during the re-spin processing after the power is restored, the light of the stop switch 13 is disabled, so that the corresponding reel will not stop even if the stop switch 13 is operated.

In addition to power recovery after a power outage during slip control, situations in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on also include power recovery after a power outage during normal reel rotation. When power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation, the reel can be stopped and the illumination state of the lamp on the stop switch 13 is in an active state. Therefore, by checking the illumination state of the lamp on the stop switch 13 when the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel is undergoing re-spin processing or normal reel rotation.

Another situation in which the reels spin when the power is turned on is when the power is restored after being turned off while the reels are frozen. Types of freezes in which the reels spin include pseudo-games in which temporary stop control is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and reel effects in which the reels do not stop spinning even when the stop switch 13 is operated.

During simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 lamp is in an active state, and when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 lamp is in an active state, so when the reels spin when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel re-spin process is in progress or normal reel spinning is in progress by checking the light on the stop switch 13 lamp.

During reel performance, the light of the stop switch 13 is in an invalid state, and when power is restored after a power outage during reel performance, the light of the stop switch 13 is in an invalid state. Therefore, when the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is not possible to determine whether the reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress from the light of the stop switch 13. In this case, however, it is possible to determine this by checking a display device such as an LCD or an error display. Note that even if the light of the stop switch is in an invalid state during reel performance, when the operation of other main system switches (switches managed by the main control means 100) is enabled, the light of the other main system switches is in an valid state, so it is possible to determine whether the reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress by checking the light of the other main system switches.

In addition, when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play or reel presentation, the reels may not be rotated. In this case, since the reels do not rotate when power is restored, it is easy to determine whether or not a re-spin process is in progress based on the way the reels are spinning.

Next, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and then executed again during re-rotation processing after power is restored, the motor will rotate until the index is detected after power is restored, and then move to the planned stop position again and stop. Note that if power-off processing is executed just before the index is detected, and the index is not detected during acceleration after power is restored, the motor will rotate again until the index is detected, which can also be said to be the case.

In this way, the re-spin process can be executed even if the power is restored after a power outage during the re-spin process, making it possible to display the stopped symbols to the player even in an unstable situation where multiple power outages may occur.

The timing at which the power-off process is executed during slip control and then executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored can be either before the index is detected during the re-rotation process or after the index is detected during the re-rotation process.

<Pattern 1>
If power-off processing is executed during slip control, and the power-off processing is executed again during the re-rotation processing after the power is restored before the index is detected during the re-rotation processing, one possible mode is to rotate until the index is detected during the second re-rotation processing after the power is restored, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, the index is not detected in the first re-rotation process and the reference pattern position is not stored, so the second re-rotation process determines that the reference pattern position has not been stored and executes rotation to detect the index again, allowing the reel to stop at the planned stopping position.

<Pattern 2-1>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the timing is after the index is detected during the re-rotation process (it is sufficient that the sensor detects the index, and this also includes the timing of the moment the sensor detects the index; the same applies hereinafter), it is possible to consider a mode in which the re-rotation process is rotated to the planned stopping position based on the reference pattern position based on the index detected before the power was cut off after the power is restored, and then stopped.

In this case, since the index is detected during the first re-spin process, the reel can stop at the planned stopping position based on the stored reference symbol position, making it possible to shorten the time until gameplay can be resumed by the time it takes to detect the index.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-1, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (output of four-phase excitation), even if the timing of the power-off process is that the re-rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position, or even if the re-rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, the index will not be detected again after the power is restored and the re-rotation process or stop control will be executed based on the stored reference pattern position.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, so the process is not complicated and the program can be speeded up.

<Pattern 2-2>
In addition, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the index may be detected again after the power is restored, and then the motor may rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, taking into consideration the possibility that the reel may have moved between the second power outage and when power is restored, the reel will be rotated again until the index is detected again, making it possible to rotate the reel more accurately to the intended stopping position.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-2, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (output of four-phase excitation), even if the timing of the power-off process is that the rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position or that the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, the re-rotation process is executed to detect the index again after the power is restored, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped there.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, so the process is not complicated and the program can be speeded up.

<Pattern 2-3>
In addition, if the power off process is executed during slip control, and the power off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored as the timing when the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has not rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process or stop control is executed based on the stored reference pattern position without detecting the index again after the power is restored, and if the power off process is executed during slip control, and the power off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored as the timing when the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process to detect the index again after the power is restored is executed and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped.

In this way, the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process can be precisely controlled after the reference power source is restored, making it possible to execute appropriate processing according to the situation in which the power-off process was executed.

<Control of the performance mode using the performance switch according to this embodiment>
An example of a performance using a performance switch (sometimes called a push button performance) will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 shows the process of a performance in which the performance switch is operated through the operation of the start switch 12, the operation of the left stop switch 13a, the operation of the middle stop switch 13b, and the operation of the right stop switch 13c, and the performance is executed by operating the performance switch. Also, the part marked "PUSH" in Fig. 23 represents the performance switch (however, the "PUSH" display at the top of the middle and lower diagrams in Fig. 23 is displayed on the liquid crystal display).

In the upper left diagram of FIG. 23, the LCD displays the effect "Win at rock-paper-scissors!!" which is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 to start the game (more specifically, the reception of a start switch reception command or a reel spin start command from the main control means 100). At this point, the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the top center diagram of Figure 23, the "Ta-da!" effect is displayed on the LCD screen, which is executed based on the operation of the left stop switch 13a to stop the left reel (more specifically, the receipt of a left stop switch acceptance command from the main control means 100). At this point, the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the upper right diagram of Fig. 23, the LCD displays the "Keen!" effect, which is executed based on the operation of the middle stop switch 13b to stop the middle reel (more specifically, the receipt of a middle stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the diagram at the bottom left of Figure 23, the LCD displays the "Pop!" effect that is executed based on the operation of the right stop switch 13c to stop the right reel (more specifically, the receipt of a right stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the middle and bottom diagrams of FIG. 23, an image of a switch (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a switch image for effects, an operation prompt image, or an operation prompt effect) that imitates an effect switch that is executed based on all reels being stopped (more specifically, receiving a command to stop all reels from the main control means 100) is displayed on the liquid crystal. Also, the "Pop!" effect that is displayed when the right stop switch 13c, which is the third stop, is operated is displayed dimly (with reduced brightness). At this time, the operation of the effect switch is valid, so the effect switch is lit. When the image is displayed dimly, in addition to reducing the brightness, it may also be possible to reduce the brightness or to overlay a gray semi-transparent display on the image. In any case, when the image is displayed dimly, it is also possible to express that visibility is reduced.

Next, in the diagram at the bottom right of Fig. 23, an image that says "Victory!" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation response image or operation response effect) is displayed on the LCD screen, which is executed based on the operation of the effect switch (more specifically, an input signal related to the effect switch being input to the input port). At this time, the operation of the effect switch is invalid, so the effect switch is turned off.

As shown in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 23, when a special effect switch image is displayed on the LCD as an effect to encourage the player to operate the special effect switch, the special effect switch image is made larger than the actual size of the special effect switch. By displaying it in this way, the special effect switch can be effectively displayed on the LCD display where the player is focusing, making it possible to intuitively encourage the player to operate the special effect switch.

The performance switch image also provides an image representation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a lighting mode image) showing the lighting mode of the performance switch. When the performance switch is active, the performance switch lamp is lit (does not blink), and the lighting mode image is expressed as a blinking mode in which the lamp is turned on and off repeatedly at a predetermined cycle. With this configuration, the performance switch image repeatedly becomes brighter and darker, making the performance switch image stand out and thus effectively encouraging the operation of the performance switch.

When the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp is lit in a flashing manner in which it turns on and off repeatedly at a specific cycle, and the expression of the lighting mode image may be a flashing manner in which it turns on and off repeatedly at a predetermined cycle. In this case, it is possible to make the lighting mode image stand out by making the predetermined cycle of the lighting mode image shorter than the specific cycle of the effect switch lamp. Note that in this case, even when the effect switch lamp is off, the operation (pressing) of the effect switch is valid, and based on the operation of the effect switch at this timing, the effect is switched from a state in which a dim "Pop!" is displayed (the state in the lower center diagram of FIG. 23) to a state in which "Victory!" is displayed (the state in the lower right diagram of FIG. 23).

In addition, even if the machine is equipped with an eco mode (when the machine is set to eco mode, the brightness of the upper or side performance lamps is lowered or turned off, the brightness of the lower panel is lowered or turned off, and the brightness of the LCD display is lowered or turned off more than when the machine is not set to eco mode), the brightness of the performance switch when it is turned on to execute a push button performance during eco mode is made to be the same as the brightness of the performance switch when it is turned on to execute a push button performance when the machine is not in eco mode. This makes it possible to effectively encourage the player to operate (press) the performance switch.

Even if the error notification is performed by lighting or blinking the performance lamps on the top or both sides or the performance switch lamps in a specified color (highly visible and conspicuous colors such as red or blue), it is advisable to make the brightness of the performance lamps on the top or both sides and the performance switch lamps the same when in eco mode as when not in eco mode.

When an image showing the light-on state is displayed as the light-on state image, the brightness of the effect switch image is lowered, but the brightness is not lowered until it becomes black, making it appear slightly lit. On the other hand, when the effect switch lamp is turned off, it is not lit. By making the expression of the off state of the effect switch lamp and the light-on state image different in this way, it is possible to make the light-on state image stand out. Also, because the area around the effect switch image is brighter than the area around the effect switch, the difference in brightness with the surroundings is reduced by not lowering the brightness of the light-on state image of the effect switch image until it becomes black. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce fatigue during play while making the effect switch image stand out.

In addition, when a special effect switch image is displayed before the previous image as in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 23, the brightness of the previous image is lowered, but the brightness of the previous image is set to be lower than the lowest brightness of the lighting state image of the special effect switch image. By configuring it in this way, even when the brightness of the special effect switch image is at its lowest, it is brighter than the surrounding images, making it possible to make the special effect switch image stand out.

The diagrams in the middle and bottom of Figure 23 will be further explained with reference to Figure 24. The effect switch image changes over time until the effect switch is operated. As a mode of change, the effect showing the movement of the effect switch between its initial position and the pressed position is expressed using the effect switch image.

The leftmost image in Figure 24 shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, the second image from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the pressed position, the third image from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, and the fourth image from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the pressed position. In this way, by repeatedly showing the effect switch image in the initial position and the pressed position, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to press the effect switch.

The initial position and pressed position of the effect switch image change at a constant cycle, and the cycle representing the initial position and pressed position of the effect switch image is configured to be longer than the predetermined cycle representing the lighting and extinguishing of the lighting mode image. This configuration makes it possible to make the effect switch image stand out and to avoid evoking the idea of repeatedly hitting the effect switch. Many gaming machines currently on the market have effects that change continuously by repeatedly hitting the effect switch, and if the change in the effect switch image changes too quickly, it may be mistaken for a repeated hitting effect, which may reduce the interest of the game. For this reason, by making the cycle of the change between the initial position and the pressed position longer than the cycle of the lighting mode, it is possible to intuitively express that the effect is not being hit repeatedly while making the player aware of the fact that the effect switch is being pressed.

In addition, in a situation where an effect is displayed in which the effect switch is to be repeatedly pressed, the cycle in which the effect switch changes between the initial position and the pressed position can be made shorter than the cycle in which the effect switch is lit, thereby making it possible to intuitively convey to the player that the effect switch is to be repeatedly pressed. Note that this is not limited to this, and an effect that indicates repeated pressing may be achieved by making the cycle in which the effect switch image changes from the initial position to the pressed position shorter than the cycle in which the effect switch ends when the effect switch is operated once, without changing the position of the effect switch image.

Also, the effect switch image may not be changed between the initial position and the pressed position at a fixed interval. In this case, the display area of the liquid crystal can be made smaller, and instead, text such as "Press the PUSH button" can be displayed to indicate that the effect switch should be pressed.

When a switch image for operating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD and the switch image for operating the performance switch is operated, the switch image for performance is erased without any effects. In other words, when the switch image for performance is displayed and the switch image for performance is operated, the switch image for performance is immediately erased and the performance based on the pressing of the switch for performance is immediately executed. In this case, the switch image for performance may be erased in the drawing process immediately after the switch image for performance is accepted, or the switch image for performance may be erased in the drawing process executed a predetermined period of time after the switch image for performance is accepted.

This configuration makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in what result occurs when the effect switch is pressed, and makes it possible to make the information about whether or not the effect switch has been pressed less noticeable.

In addition, even if the front panel PS2 is opened while a switch image for operating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD, the display of the switch image for performance continues, and when the switch for performance is operated, the switch image for performance is erased without any effects, and the performance based on the pressing of the switch for performance is immediately executed. In this case, as described above, the switch image for performance may be erased in the drawing process immediately after the operation of the switch for performance is accepted, or the switch image for performance may be erased in the drawing process executed a predetermined period after the operation of the switch for performance is accepted.

In this way, by executing effects based on pressing the effect switch regardless of whether the front panel PS2 is open or closed, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being impeded even if the front panel PS2 is unintentionally opened.

In addition, the lighting state of the performance switch when the liquid crystal displays a performance switch image for operating the performance switch when the front panel PS2 is open is configured to be different from the lighting state of the performance switch when the liquid crystal displays a performance switch image for operating the performance switch when the front panel PS2 is closed. For example, the front panel PS2 may be lit when the front panel PS2 is closed and flashing or turned off when the front panel PS2 is open, or the flashing period may be faster in the closed state than in the open state, or the lighting color may be different between the open state and the closed state. In addition, when the front panel PS2 is open, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in a position overlapping at least a part of the performance switch image as shown in FIG. 28 (in addition, in order to improve the visibility of the performance switch image and the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in a position where these images do not overlap each other). Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is open, a sound (for example, "The door is open") may be output to indicate that the front panel PS2 is open. In this case, the sound effect accompanying the display of the effect switch image or the sound effect accompanying the effect based on the pressing of the effect switch may not be output. This makes it possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open. On the other hand, even when a sound is output to indicate that the front panel PS2 is open, the sound effect accompanying the display of the effect switch image or the sound effect accompanying the effect based on the pressing of the effect switch may be output. This makes it possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open without impeding the progress of the game.

Also, when a performance switch image for operating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD and the front panel PS2 is opened, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in place of the performance switch image, making pressing the performance switch invalid, and when the front panel PS2 is then closed, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be erased and the performance switch image may be displayed again. Note that the performance switch image may be made invisible by displaying an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open superimposed on the performance switch image, and when the front panel PS2 is then closed, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be erased and the performance switch image may be made visible again. In this case as well, by changing the lighting state of the performance switch before and after the opening of the front panel PS2 as described above, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open.

In addition, when an effect is executed that means that a bonus will be given to the player when the effect switch is operated (success effect), the effect switch image is erased without any effects, but when an effect is executed that means that a bonus will not be given to the player when the effect switch is operated (failure effect), the effect switch image may be erased with effects. Note that examples of effects that result in a failure effect include an explosion of the effect switch image or a state in which the brightness of the effect switch image is maintained at its darkest state (a state in which the brightness does not change periodically).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that a failure effect was displayed as a result of operating the effect switch, which fosters a sense of satisfaction in the player and prevents a decline in interest in subsequent games.

In addition, if a switch image for special effects is displayed when all reels have stopped, when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated, an image based on the operation of the start switch 12 is displayed instead of the image that is displayed when the switch for special effects is operated. Furthermore, when an image based on the operation of the start switch 12 is displayed, the switch image for special effects is erased. In this case, the switch image for special effects is erased without any effects.

This configuration makes it possible to execute appropriate effects in response to the player's operation without interfering with the effects executed based on the operation of the start switch 12. Players who skip effect switch images by operating the start switch 12 are likely to be aware of the low expectations beforehand, or to have no interest in effects that use effect switches, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by erasing the images without any effects.

In addition, when comparing the time from when the operation of the effect switch is accepted to when the effect switch image is erased when a success effect is displayed by operating the effect switch in a situation where the effect switch image is displayed, and the time from when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted to when the push order navigation image is erased when a success effect is displayed by operating the stop switch 13 corresponding to the correct push order in a situation where the push order navigation image is displayed, the time until the effect switch image is erased is made longer.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to change the time until a reaction effect is executed when various switches are operated, and different types of excitement can be provided by varying the time difference between the various switches and the execution of the reaction effect. For example, in a push order navigation image in which a player loses profits directly if they press the buttons in the wrong order, it is more interesting for the player if the next information is displayed immediately, and by allowing a short delay between the operation of the effect switch and the effect, players can anticipate whether a success effect or a failure effect will be displayed.

When the performance switch also serves as a switch for displaying a menu screen, the performance switch lamp is configured to light up after a certain period of time (e.g., T1) has elapsed after all reels have stopped. The lighting state of the performance switch lamp at this time differs from the lighting state of the performance switch lamp when a performance is executed by operating the performance switch after all reels have stopped.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to indicate whether a menu screen will be displayed or whether a successful or unsuccessful performance will be displayed when the performance switch is operated, depending on the lighting state of the performance switch lamp.

In addition, when the effect switch image is displayed as shown in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 23 after all the reels have stopped, even if T1 has elapsed, at which point the menu screen can be displayed after all the reels have stopped, the lighting state of the effect switch lamp is not the lighting state when the menu screen is displayed, but is the lighting state corresponding to the effect switch image. Then, when the effect switch is operated after T1 has elapsed after all the reels have stopped, the effect switch image is erased, a success or failure effect is executed, and the effect switch lamp remains off. And even when T1 has elapsed after the effect switch operation is accepted, the effect switch lamp remains off, and the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch is operated. Furthermore, even if T2 has elapsed after all the reels have stopped, at which point the demo screen is displayed, the demo screen is not displayed, the volume is reduced, and the effect switch lamp remains off. In this case, depending on whether the settlement process is executed by accepting the operation of the settlement switch, or whether the game is continued until the end of the next game (the end of a game in which the effect switch image is not displayed), the menu screen can be displayed T1 after all reels have stopped, and the demo screen can be displayed T2 after all reels have stopped.

By configuring it in this way, in a game in which a presentation switch image is displayed, the player does not need to worry about whether the menu screen will be displayed or whether a success or failure presentation will be displayed by operating the presentation switch, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. Note that the configuration may be such that the menu screen cannot be displayed even when the settlement process is executed, in which case it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation until a so-called revival presentation is executed, in which a failure presentation is displayed in the game but a success presentation is displayed in the next game.

In addition, when the performance switch lamp is lit in a manner that allows the menu screen to be displayed, the performance switch image is not displayed on the LCD. In other words, whether or not the menu screen is displayed can only be confirmed by the lighting state of the performance switch lamp.

By configuring it in this way, the notification of the menu screen display status, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, can be executed only by the lighting state of the effect switch lamp. Therefore, compared to if the effect switch image were displayed on the LCD, it is possible to reduce the possibility of creating anticipation for the operation of the effect switch, and it is also possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the menu screen being displayed even though the player has operated the effect switch with anticipation.

In addition, on the demo screen, where the player can easily recognize that no game is progressing, the effect switch image may be displayed in a different position and in a smaller size than the effect switch image displayed in the push button effect. In this case, the player is less likely to confuse it with the push button effect, and it is possible to effectively display the menu screen to the player. This is based on the fact that the most common timing for displaying the menu screen is when starting play, and since no game is being played at that time, there is a high possibility that the demo screen is being displayed.

The display position of the switch image for the effect is such that the switch image for the effect is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal during the push button effect, and in the edge of the liquid crystal during the demo screen (for example, as shown in FIG. 29, in a less conspicuous position such as the bottom of the liquid crystal or the bottom left of the liquid crystal). As described above, the switch image for the effect during the demo screen is displayed in a smaller size than the switch image for the effect during the push button effect. In other words, the switch image for the effect during the demo screen and the switch image for the effect during the push button effect are different in at least one of their display area and size. Furthermore, the switch image for the effect during the push button effect and the switch image for the effect during the demo screen may be displayed in different display modes (for example, the switch image for the effect during the push effect is displayed in a flashing mode that repeatedly turns on and off at a predetermined cycle, and the switch image for the effect during the demo screen is displayed in a lit mode, etc.). This allows the player to intuitively distinguish between a situation in which the switch for the effect is desired to be pressed as part of the effect and a situation in which the switch for the effect may be pressed.

The switch image for effects in the demo screen may be in a form that displays a caption such as "Press PUSH to display menu" as shown in FIG. 30.

The timing for executing the push button effect is after all the reels have stopped, but it may also be after the start switch 12 is accepted. If the effect switch image is displayed after the start switch 12 is accepted, the effect switch image may be erased by the first stop operation (operation of any of the stop switches 13), or the display of the effect switch image may be maintained even after all the reels have stopped. If the display of the effect switch image is maintained after all the reels have stopped, the valid period for the operation of the effect switch is also maintained, and when the effect switch is operated, a success or failure effect is executed. Note that the effect switch image is erased even if the effect switch is not operated because the time required to transition to the demo screen has passed, settlement processing has been executed, bet processing has been executed, or the next game has started.

In addition, whether or not an operation-responsive performance is executed as a result of the operation of the performance switch is determined by setting a predetermined timer value in a counter based on receipt of a predetermined command from the main control means 100, decrementing the counter value at predetermined intervals by timer interrupt processing or the like, and enabling operation of the performance switch when the counter value becomes 0 (an operation-responsive performance is executed as a result of the operation of the performance switch). At this time, the drawing process of the performance switch image is also executed after a period equivalent to a predetermined timer value has elapsed since receipt of the predetermined command, but due to delays in communication between the image control board that executes the drawing process and the performance control board, the performance switch may become enabled before the performance switch image is displayed. In this way, the system is configured so that a response performance can be executed even if the performance switch is operated before the performance switch image is displayed.

<Description of winning effects, settlement effects and insertion effects applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between the winning effect, the settlement effect and the insertion effect that can be applied to this embodiment will be described.

In the effects applicable to this embodiment described below, it is possible to simultaneously output both winning effects associated with the payout process of gaming medals based on the winning of minor roles such as push order roles, settlement effects associated with the settlement process, and deposit effects associated with betting operations, with the aim of preventing the player from mistakenly thinking that the settlement was not performed properly or that the deposit was not performed properly, and allowing the player to recognize that the gaming machine is functioning normally.

The configuration related to the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects that can be applied to this embodiment will be explained below.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in the present embodiment, etc., but details of the processing omitted in the description of the present embodiment will be described below.

<Processing when a gaming medal is inserted>
If game medals are ready to be inserted, when the game medals are inserted, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit, a bet (also called a bet) is set for the number inserted, and if it is set to the upper limit, the credit is increased by the number inserted. Also, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit and the number of medals that can be bet is stored in the credit, a bet is set according to the operation of the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Here, inserting game medals is equivalent to the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 17 passing through the medal selector 34 normally.
In addition, if game medals have been set for a bet or have been accumulated in the credits, settlement processing can be performed by operating the settlement switch before starting play (after the required number of medals to be bet has been set and before the start lever has been operated).
Furthermore, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000, also referred to as the presentation control means) when a gaming medal is inserted, and transmits a reserve insertion command to the sub-control means according to the number of medals set for a bet when the bet switch is operated. When credits are accumulated (added), the main control means transmits a reserve number command indicating the current number of reserved medals to the sub-control means. Based on these commands, the sub-control means can execute insertion presentations such as outputting the sound of a gaming medal being inserted.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process (hereinafter also referred to as the payout process) is a process of paying out a predetermined game medal according to the winning minor combination (the symbol combination stopped and displayed) when it is determined that the minor combination has won a prize by the winning determination process. Paying out the game medal here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on the winning (whether it is the addition of credits or the payout from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on the winning. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute a winning performance such as outputting the payout sound of the game medals and executing a back lamp performance (also referred to as a BL performance). The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and the payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a win in replay). When there is a loss or a win in replay, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, and then the payout end command is sent.

<Settlement process>
When the settlement switch is operated while no game is being played, a process of paying out (settlement) game medals to the player from the hopper 44 in a number corresponding to the set bet amount or the accumulated credit amount is executed. When the settlement process is started, the main control means transmits a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process is completed, the main control means transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. Based on the settlement start command and settlement end command, the sub-control means can execute settlement effects such as outputting a settlement sound.

<Secondary Control Means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects are executed based on the results of the lottery for the role (the result of an internal lottery), push order navigation effects are executed during the AT, and throw-in effects, winning effects, settlement effects, etc. are executed.

<Introduction>
This is a performance that is executed when a game medal is inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insertion sound is output based on a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command transmitted from the main control means. In the main control means, as the reserve insertion command, one of the reserve insertion command (1 medal), the reserve insertion command (2 medals), and the reserve insertion command (3 medals) is set according to the number of medals set to be bet, and the set reserve insertion command is transmitted to the sub-control means. When the reserve insertion command (1 medal) is received, the insertion sound A indicating that one medal has been bet is output once (for example, a "da" sound is output) to inform the player that one medal has been bet. When the reserve insertion command (3 medals) is received, the insertion sound A is output three times to inform the player that three medals have been bet. When the medal insertion command is received, if the inserted game medal is set to be bet, the insertion sound A is output once, and if it is reserved, the insertion sound B indicating that one medal has been reserved is output once (for example, a "ji" sound is output) to inform the player that it has been bet or reserved.
When a reserve input command (3 coins) is received, input sound C indicating that 3 coins have been bet may be output instead of outputting input sound A three times, or the same sound may be output when a bet is set and when the coins are reserved (for example, input sound A may be output in all states). Also, a different sound (input sound D) may be output during normal times (non-AT) and during AT.

<Winning Performance>
This is an effect executed when game medals are paid out, and is executed based on a payout start command and a payout end command, and includes output of a payout sound indicating that game medals are being paid out, and execution of a back lamp effect.

<Dispensing sound output>
There are two different sounds, payout sound A and payout sound B, for the payout sound of the game medals that are output during the execution of the payout process of the game medals. Payout sound A is a payout sound that is output when the push order role is won during normal times (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops, and an advantageous payout is performed. Payout sound B is a payout sound that is output when the push order role is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops, and an advantageous payout is performed. If the operation is not performed in the correct push order, an incorrect pattern combination may stop and an unfavorable payout may be performed, but in that case, the payout sound is not output. Payout sound A is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after the payout end command is received by repeating the output of the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second). The payout sound A is output for a first payout sound period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed), thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. Also, by outputting the payout sound for the first payout sound period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, so that when a performance based on the result of the internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to perform the performance without being canceled midway.

The payout sound B is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, repeats the output of a second sound (e.g., a "de" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then repeats the output of the second sound for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the payout end command is received and ends. That is, the payout sound B outputs a sound for a second payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the second specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, and this second payout sound period is longer than the first payout sound period of the payout sound A. In this way, the payout sound B outputs a payout sound for a longer period than the payout sound A, so that it can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded. In addition, by outputting a payout sound B different from the payout sound A during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in a favorable state different from the normal state.
In addition, the payout sound is output from the time the payout end command is received until the first specific time or the second specific time has elapsed, but when the payout start command is received, the payout sound may be output for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (the longer of the credit addition and the payout of the game medals) plus the first specific time or the second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. Also, the payout sound A during normal operation and the payout sound B during AT are different, but the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp effect>
There are two different back lamp effects, a back lamp effect A and a back lamp effect B. The back lamp effect A is a back lamp effect that is output when the push order role is won during normal times (non-AT), and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of operation in the correct push order, resulting in advantageous payout. The back lamp effect B is a back lamp effect that is executed when the push order role is won during AT, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of operation in the correct push order, resulting in advantageous payout. If the operation is not performed in the correct push order, an incorrect symbol combination may stop, in which case the back lamp effect is not executed. The back lamp effect A starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is turned on and off repeatedly in a first pattern until a payout end command is received, and after the payout end command is received, the back lamp is turned on and off repeatedly in a first pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. By executing the back lamp effect A for a first back lamp effect period (the period obtained by adding the first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. Also, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect A for a first back lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the back lamp effect A is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute the performance without canceling it midway.

The back lamp performance B starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the second pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the second pattern for a second specific time (for example, 2 seconds) and ends. In other words, the back lamp performance B is repeatedly turned on and off for a second back lamp performance period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the second specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, and this second back lamp performance period is longer than the first back lamp performance period. In this way, the back lamp performance B can be made to recognize that more game medals have been awarded by executing the back lamp performance for a longer period than the back lamp performance A. In addition, by executing the back lamp performance B, which is different from the back lamp performance A, during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in an advantageous state that is different from the normal state.

In addition, the back lamp performance is executed from the time the payout end command is received until the first specific time or the second specific time has elapsed, but when the payout start command is received, the back lamp performance may be executed for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer than the addition of credits and the payout of game medals) plus the first specific time or the second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. In addition, the back lamp performance is different during normal play and during AT, but the same back lamp performance may be executed. In addition, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a certain pattern, but a series of on and off patterns may be determined and output from the start to the end of the back lamp performance. In addition, the "first back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance A and the "first payout sound period" of the payout sound A are both the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the first specific time, and both are the same period, but these "first back lamp performance period" and "first payout sound period" may be different periods from each other. The same applies to the relationship between the "second back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance B and the "second payout sound period" of the payout sound B. In short, the "first payout sound period" and "second payout sound period" of the payout sounds A and B, and the "first back lamp performance period" and "second back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance A and B are each longer than the period during which actual payout is being performed, and as long as the relationship is "first payout sound period" < "second payout sound period" and "first back lamp performance period" < "second back lamp performance period," these periods can be set appropriately.

＜Settlement performance＞
This is an effect executed when the game medals are settled, and is executed based on a settlement start command and a settlement end command, and a settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out and a voice indicating that the settlement is completed are output. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and a sound different from the payout sound (for example, a "do" sound) is repeatedly output until the payout end command is received, and after the payout end command is received, a voice indicating that the settlement is completed, such as "settlement has been completed," is output in a third specific period (for example, 5 seconds), and ends. In other words, in the settlement effect, the sound is output over a predetermined settlement effect period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the third specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the settlement process is performed).

Below, various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be explained with reference to Figs. 31 to 35. Fig. 31 is a time chart when the insertion operation is not performed with the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed, Fig. 32 is a time chart when the insertion operation is performed with the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed, Fig. 33 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the payout process is completed, Fig. 34 is a time chart when the game medal is not inserted after the settlement process is completed, and Fig. 35 is a time chart when the game medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. Note that for convenience of explanation, ON and OFF are used in Figs. 31 to 35, but the corresponding processing and performance status are described in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/BL performance/settlement performance, ON indicates a state in which it is being executed, and OFF indicates a state in which it is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the processing etc. is started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that it is ended. For the payout sound/insertion sound, ON indicates that it is being output, and OFF indicates that it is not being output. For the MAX bet lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that it is lit, and OFF indicates that it is off. For the MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that it has been operated, and OFF indicates that it has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that no game medal has been inserted.

<If you do not insert the bet using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 31, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound A (written as payout sound in the figure, the same below) and the back lamp effect A (written as BL effect in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command. At the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means continues the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A as a winning effect for the T1 period (first specific time) based on the payout end command. After the payout process ends at the timing of time t1, the main control means performs a process such as updating the RT state (game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. The main control means turns on the MAX bet lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert game medals at the timing of time t2. The MAX bet lamp continues to be lit because the MAX bet switch was not operated. At the timing of time t5, since the T1 period has elapsed since the timing of time t1, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period and the first back lamp effect period. As described above, even if various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A and turning on the MAX BET lamp, at the timing after time t1, smooth control is possible, and by continuing the output of the payout sound A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by the MAX BET operation, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When inserting a bet using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 32, until the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is operated. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, the sub-control means ends the back lamp performance A, and outputs the insertion sound A (in the figure, it is written as the insertion sound, the same below) three times as the insertion performance from the timing of time t3 to the timing of time t4 (during the T2 period). Even if various situations such as outputting the payout sound A and outputting the insertion sound A are combined at the timing after time t3, smooth control is possible, and thus, it is possible to make the player recognize that the payout has been performed, while also making the player recognize that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been performed, and the performance of the gaming machine can be improved. At time t3, the payout sound A continues to be output, but the back lamp effect A is ended to allow the player to recognize through sound that the payout has been made and to visually recognize that the bet has been set. Note that, although the explanation has been given in the case of inserting a coin using the MAX BET switch in FIG. 32, the inserting sound can also be output when inserting a coin using the 1 BET switch or inserting a coin.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement button after the dispensing process is completed>
As shown in FIG. 33, up to the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is inserted after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the settlement button is operated instead of the operation of the MAX bet switch. At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp performance A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the lapse of the T1 period. After that, the output of the settlement sound is started as the settlement performance based on the settlement start command. At the timing of time t6, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the settlement end command, it replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed for the T3 period (third specific time). When the settlement process is started, if the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output simultaneously, it will confuse the player, so by terminating the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, when the settlement process is started, the player can be accurately made aware that a settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<If you do not insert a medal after the settlement process is complete>
As shown in FIG. 34, the main control means starts the settlement process at the timing of time t8, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the settlement start command received. Here, the back lamp effect is not executed (output) during settlement, so that the payout process and the settlement process can be visually different processes. At the timing of time t9, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the settlement end command, it outputs a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed instead of outputting the settlement sound for a period of T3. After the settlement process is completed at the timing of time t9, the main control means makes it possible to insert a game medal by turning on the blocker. At the timing of time t10, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that the game medal can be inserted. Since no medals were inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T13, since the T3 period has elapsed since time t9, the sub-control means ends the output of the sound indicating that the settlement has been completed. As described above, the settlement presentation is being executed from time t10 onwards, but it is possible to insert medals.

<When inserting a medal after the settlement process is completed>
As shown in Fig. 35, up to the timing of time t10, the situation is the same as when no gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed, and at the timing of time t11, the main control means inserts a gaming medal, sets a bet on one medal, and transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means outputs insertion sound A once as an insertion effect based on receiving the medal insertion command, and outputs the sound from the timing of time t11 to the timing of time t12. Even when various situations are combined, such as outputting a sound indicating that settlement has been completed and outputting insertion sound A at the timing after time t11, smooth control is possible, and this allows the player to recognize that the settlement process has been completed, while also recognizing that a medal has been inserted and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. 31 to 35, the payout sound is payout sound A and the BL effect is back lamp effect A. However, in these Figs. 31 to 35, the payout sound may be payout sound B and the BL effect may be back lamp effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the T1 period in Figs. 31 and 38 is to be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effect as described above is achieved.

<Changes in form>
We have explained a configuration in which the same sound is repeatedly output during the dispensing process or settlement process until it is completed, but in addition to the commands mentioned above, the main control means may send to the sub-control means a command indicating that one coin has been dispensed or a command that can identify the remaining number of coins to be dispensed each time a coin is dispensed, and the sub-control means may output a dispensing sound or settlement sound each time a coin is dispensed based on receiving these commands sent from the main control means.
Also, the settlement sound is different from the payout sound, but it may be the same as the payout sound. By making them the same sound, the amount of sound data can be reduced, leading to a reduction in data capacity. If they are the same sound, the presence or absence of a backlight effect can distinguish between the payout process and the settlement process, allowing the player to recognize that the settlement process is being performed appropriately, even if the settlement process is performed immediately after the payout process.
The settlement sound may be the same sound as the error sound. In this case, the sound data can be reduced, leading to a reduction in data capacity.
Also, during the AT, the payout sound B is output, but in addition to outputting the payout sound B from the start of the payout process, a sound such as "Get" or "Yeesss" indicating the correct push order may be output from the start of the payout process to the time when the payout process ends and the second specific time (2 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the sound indicating the correct push order, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated correctly, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct push order, the player can recognize that the game medals have also been properly paid out.
In addition, although the MAX bed lamp is turned on and off by the main control means, the main control means may transmit to the sub-control means whether or not the MAX bed switch is in an operable state, and the sub-control means may turn the lamp on and off.

In addition, although it has been explained that a sound is output as a insertion effect, in addition to outputting the insertion sound, an image indicating the insertion may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the user that the insertion has been made.
In addition, although the payout sound and the back lamp effect are executed as the winning effect, an image (e.g., displaying GET) indicating that a prize has been won may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the fact that a prize has been won. In this case, when the throw-in effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 as the winning effect or the notification by the LED lamp may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 and the notification by the LED lamp as the throw-in effect may not be executed.
In addition, as the settlement effect, a settlement sound and a voice indicating that settlement has been completed are output, but an image indicating that settlement processing is in progress (for example, a display indicating "Settlement in progress") may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify that settlement is in progress. In this case, when the insertion effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 or the notification by the LED lamp as the settlement effect may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 and the notification by the LED lamp as the insertion effect may not be executed.
In addition, although the winning performance is executed for the push order role, it may be executed for other minor roles (such as the watermelon role, the bell role or the cherry role that do not require pushing order, etc.) For other minor roles, a payout sound different from the push order role or a back lamp performance different from the push order role is executed, so that it is easy to recognize that a role different from the push order role has won.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods in this embodiment are merely examples and can be changed in various ways.

<Description of errors and winning effects related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects applicable to this embodiment will be described.

In the presentation applicable to this embodiment described below, the purpose is to allow the player to recognize the result of the game or presentation before a hopper empty error occurs when a winning presentation is performed following the start of the payout process or a presentation after the reels have stopped.

The following describes the configuration related to errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in this embodiment and in the explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects that are applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processing that are omitted in the description of this embodiment will be explained below.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The payout process is a process of paying out a game medal that is determined in advance according to the winning minor role (the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed) when it is determined by the winning determination process that a minor role has been won. Paying out the game medal here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. In order to pay out the game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal to the hopper motor (ON state), and discharges the game medals one by one by rotating the rotating disk, and when the payout sensor detects the game medal for a predetermined time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it is determined that one game medal has been paid out. Furthermore, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting a payout based on a win (whether it is adding credits or paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when it is to end the payout. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means is capable of executing winning effects such as displaying the payout number and the cumulative difference in number of medals. The payout start command includes information on the number of medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are also transmitted when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a win in a replay). When there is a loss or a win in a replay, the number of medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Error regarding hopper 44>
A hopper retention error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected as errors related to the hopper 44. The hopper retention error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the payout outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals when the game medals are paid out, the hopper empty error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the hopper is empty of game medals, and the abnormality detection error is an error that occurs when it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor of the hopper 44.
When the main control means detects an error and notifies the error, it transmits an error notification start command including information on the type of error to the sub-control means, and transmits an error recovery command when the error is released. The sub-control means, based on the error notification start command, displays error information (error screen) corresponding to the type of error detected on the display device 32, and based on the error recovery command, ends the error screen display and returns to the display before the error occurred.
In addition, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing when the abnormality detection error is detected, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality has been detected based on the error detection command.

<Hopper accumulation error>
When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor to rotate the turntable and perform the game medal dispense operation, and if the dispense sensor continues to detect a game medal for a certain period of time (201 ms) or more, it is determined that the game medals have become clogged, and a hopper retention error is set.
<Hopper empty error>
When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, even if a drive signal is input to the hopper motor to perform the game medal dispensing operation of rotating the turntable, if no game medals are detected by the dispensing sensor for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds), it is determined that the hopper 44 is empty of game medals, and a hopper empty error is set.
<Abnormality detection error>
When the payout sensor detects an abnormal input for a certain period of time (3 ms) or more when the game medal is not being paid out, it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. The error display is performed when the game is not being played (when waiting for the insertion of a game medal or waiting for the start lever to be operated).

<Secondary Control Means>
Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the results of the role selection (internal lottery results), error notifications can be executed, push order navigation effects can be executed during the AT, winning effects can be executed, a result screen can be displayed, result announcement effects can be executed, and so on.

<Winning Performance>
This is an effect that is executed when game medals are paid out, and includes an acquisition display effect that indicates that a predetermined number of game medals will be paid out, and an accumulation display effect that indicates that the game medals acquired by the player have accumulated to a predetermined number. The acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect are executed based on the sub-control means receiving a payout start command.

<Acquisition display performance>
The acquisition display effect is an effect that is executed when a push order role is won during the AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout is made. The acquisition display effect may be displayed as "GET" without specifying the game medals to be paid out, or may be displayed as "GET 12 medals" so that it is specifically specified that 12 game medals will be paid out. If a push order role is won during the AT and the correct push order is not operated, an incorrect symbol combination stops and an unfavorable payout (such as a payout of one medal, which is less than the number of game medals in the correct symbol combination) may be made, in which case the acquisition display effect is not executed.
The acquisition display effect starts when a payout start command is received, and is executed for a predetermined acquisition display effect period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). Therefore, it is executed even if all the game medals that are actually to be paid out to the player have not been paid out. This is to prevent the effect from being canceled by the start of the next game or being confused with the result of the next game if the acquisition display effect is executed after all the game medals have been paid out. In addition, by executing the acquisition display effect even if all the game medals have not been paid out, it is also possible to make the player aware of the result of the game (that a payout will be obtained) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect>
The cumulative display effect is executed when the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT (also referred to as the total number of game medals) exceeds a prescribed number for the first time (500, 1000, 1500, 2000). Specifically, the cumulative number of acquired medals is counted during one AT from the start of the AT, and the cumulative display effect is executed (started) when it is determined that the cumulative number exceeds 500 due to the payout of game medals. Thereafter, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and exceeds 500 again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. As for the form of the cumulative display effect, "GET 500 medals" or the like is displayed according to the prescribed number.
The cumulative display effect is started when a payout start command is received and it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed the specified number due to the payout, and is executed for a predetermined cumulative display effect period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). As with the acquisition display effect, it is executed even if the game medals actually paid out to the player do not exceed the specified number. This is to prevent the timing of executing the cumulative display effect from varying if the cumulative display effect is executed at the timing when the specified number is actually exceeded, causing the effect to be canceled by the start of the next game, or to be confused with the result of the next game. In addition, by executing the cumulative display effect even if the specified number is not exceeded, the player can be made aware of the result of the game (exceeding the specified number) in advance.
In addition, although the conditions for executing both the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may be satisfied in one game, in this embodiment, in a game in which the cumulative display effect can be executed, in principle, only the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. However, a case where the acquisition display effect is executed differently from the principle will be described later.

<Results screen display>
The result screen displayed in this embodiment is a screen displayed when the AT ends, and displays the total number of game medals acquired during the AT, the number of games indicating the execution period of the AT, etc. When the result screen is displayed, a display for calling attention (a display to prevent addiction) is also displayed. When the final game of the AT ends (when the all-cylinder stop command is received), the display of the result screen begins, and the display of the result screen continues until the next game begins. Note that only the acquisition display effect can be executed during the display of the result screen in the final game, and even if any of the specified numbers is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect is not executed. For example, if a push order role is won and the correct push order is operated, the correct pattern combination stops, an advantageous payout is performed, and the specified number of 500 coins is exceeded, if it is not the final game, the cumulative display effect is executed, but if it is the final game, the result screen is displayed, so the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. This is because the total number of game medals won during the AT is displayed on the result screen, and if the cumulative display effect is also executed, similar information will be displayed on top of each other, confusing the player.

<Results announcement>
The result notification effect is an effect for notifying the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and is an effect executed in the final game of the consecutive effects. Specifically, it is an effect for notifying the player whether an advantageous result has been obtained, such as winning a bonus, winning an additional number of games remaining in the AT, or winning a specialized zone that increases the chance of additional bonuses. As an example, whether an advantageous result has been obtained is notified based on the result of a battle effect or the like. If an advantageous result has been obtained, an image showing success or victory is displayed, and if an advantageous result has not been obtained, an image showing failure or defeat is displayed. In the battle effect, a screen in which a friendly character and an enemy character confront each other is displayed in response to a lever operation, and after all the reels have stopped (due to receipt of a command to stop all reels), the friendly character and the enemy character compete against each other, and after a certain time has passed and a branching timing for the effect has elapsed, an image showing success or victory or an image showing failure or defeat is displayed. The timing of the branching effect is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result notification effect ends when an image showing success or victory or an image showing failure or defeat is displayed, which is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process. This allows the result notification effect to end before an error screen is displayed when a hopper empty error occurs (is detected), and the player can check whether or not he or she has a favorable result, regardless of the occurrence of an error. Note that the all reels stop command and the payout start command are sent at approximately the same time, so the start of the payout process may be replaced with after all reels have stopped.

Various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described below with reference to Fig. 36 to Fig. 41. Fig. 36 is a time chart when payout is performed normally, Fig. 37 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), Fig. 38 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs), Fig. 39 is an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally, Fig. 40 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and Fig. 41 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs).
In addition, in Fig. 36 to Fig. 38, ON and OFF are used for convenience of explanation, but the corresponding processing and presentation status are described in parentheses. Specifically, ON of the payout processing indicates a state in which it is being executed, OFF indicates a state in which it is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the processing etc. is started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that it is finished. ON of the payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. ON of the acquisition display presentation and the accumulation display presentation indicates a state in which the presentation is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (not displayed). ON of the result notification presentation indicates a state in which it is being executed (presentation is progressing), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (presentation has ended and the display has stopped on the screen that notifies the result). ON of the error (empty hopper) and error (hopper retention) indicates a state in which an error has occurred (an error has been detected and an error has been set), and OFF indicates a state in which no error has occurred. The error display ON indicates a state in which an error has occurred and an error code is displayed by the main control means or an error screen is displayed by the sub-control means, while OFF indicates a state in which neither an error code nor an error screen is displayed.

Figures 39 to 41 show the case where the acquisition display effect is executed, and when the cumulative display effect is executed, the notation "GET 12 coins" displayed in the acquisition display effect in the figures changes to the notation "GET 500 coins" displayed in the cumulative display effect.

It is possible to combine the winning effect, settlement effect and deposit effect described above, and times t0 and t1 in Figures 31 to 33 are the same as times t0 and t1 in Figure 36. Time t5 in Figures 31 and 32 is later than time t1 in Figure 36 and earlier than time t15.

<If the payment is successful>
As shown in FIG. 36, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. One second later, at time t14, the sub-control means ends the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect. After that, at time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. The time related to the payout process is 1.5 seconds when the payout process is normally executed (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out). The acquisition display effect starts when the payout process starts and ends before the payout process ends. This allows the player to recognize that game medals will be acquired and that the cumulative number of acquired game medals will exceed a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. The result notification effect is executed from the start of the game, so it is already being executed when the payout process is started. At time t15, the result notification effect branches, and the display after this time is different, displaying an image indicating success or victory, or displaying an image indicating failure or defeat. At time t16, the result notification effect that was being executed ends. Time t15 is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<When normal dispensing is not performed (when a hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 37, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, the game medals are not paid out and the rotation of the wheel continues. Then, at the timing of time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means displays an error screen. At the other timings of time t14, t15, and t16, as in FIG. 36, at the timing of time t14, the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is ended, at the timing of time t15, the effect branching timing is reached, and at the timing of time t16, the result notification effect is ended. The period during which the winning display effect and the cumulative display effect are executed and the period until the result notification effect is ended are set shorter than the period from the start of the payout process until a hopper empty error occurs, so that it is possible to check the contents of the winning display effect, the cumulative display effect and the result notification effect before a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed.
Note that this figure shows a case in which a hopper empty error occurs without a single medal being paid out after the start of the payout process; if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper empty error occurs will be later than time t17 by the time the multiple game medals have been paid out.

<When delivery is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
As shown in Fig. 38, at the timing of time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of the game medals is not executed because the game medals are stuck in the outlet of the hopper 44. Then, at the timing of time t18, since the payout sensor of the hopper 44 has continuously detected the game medals for more than 201 ms since the start of the payout process, the main control means judges that the game medals are stuck, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. At the timing of time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of the hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the executed acquisition display effect or accumulation display effect and the executed result notification effect, and displays an error screen. The acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the start of the payout process, and is therefore executed before the payout process is started and a hopper congestion error occurs, making it possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect before the error screen is displayed.
Note that this figure shows a case in which a hopper retention error occurs when not a single medal has been paid out after the start of the payout process; if a hopper retention error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out, and the period during which the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result announcement effect are executed will be longer.

Although the execution of the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect is canceled and not displayed, the effect itself may be executed while an error screen is displayed superimposed on the effect to make it invisible. In this case, if the error is cleared during the execution of the effect, the effect being executed becomes visible from the moment the error is cleared. However, the reset switch must be operated to clear the error, and since the reset switch is located inside the cabinet, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Normally, it takes more than three seconds from the start of the payout process to the end of the result notification effect before the error can be cleared, so even if a hopper retention error occurs and the hopper retention error is cleared in the shortest time possible, the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect will not return to being executed, but will return to the screen after all effects have finished.

<Display screen when payment is successful>
FIG. 39 shows an example of a display screen when a payout has been made normally. FIG. 39 shows a scene in which a game has been played with 11 games remaining in the AT and a total of 230 game medals have been acquired, and a battle presentation (result announcement presentation) is being performed. The number of remaining games is displayed in the upper left of the screen (since the game was played with 11 games remaining, one is subtracted and 10G (games) is displayed). The total number of game medals acquired in the AT is displayed as 230 in the upper right of the screen. Friendly characters (characters with round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters with star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

Figure (a) shows the screen when all reels have stopped during the battle performance (received command to stop all reels), and the performance progresses from this point on to announce the result. Figure (b) shows the screen at time t0 in Figure 36, when the payout process has started. One medal has been paid out, increasing the total number of medals from 230 to 231, and the "GET 12 medals" display moves from the right side of the screen toward the center so that it can be specified that 12 medals will be paid out as an acquisition display. In the center of the screen, a competition between ally characters and enemy characters has begun. Figure (c) shows the time when three medals have been paid out, and the "GET 12 medals" display is displayed large in the center of the screen so that it can be specified that 12 medals will be paid out as an acquisition display. The competition between ally characters and enemy characters continues.

36(d) shows the timing when eight game medals have been paid out, and the large "12 medals GET" display in the center of the screen is moving toward the left side of the screen toward the end of the acquisition display effect. FIG. 36(e) shows the timing of time t15 in FIG. 36, when the payout of game medals has ended and the effect branching timing has occurred. Since the payout of game medals has ended, the total number of game medals is displayed as 242. In the center of the screen, the ally character and enemy character continue to compete. FIG. 36(f) shows the timing after the effect branching timing, and the process of displaying an image indicating success is displayed. The ally character is enlarged from the competition between the ally character and enemy character, and it is possible to recognize that it has been a success. FIG. 36(g) shows the timing of time t16 in FIG. 36, when the battle effect ends. "Success" is displayed in the lower right of the screen, clearly indicating that it was a success effect. The image displayed in FIG. 36(g) ends as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the next game starts. Figure (h) shows the timing after the branching point in the effect, and shows the process of displaying an image indicating failure. The enemy character is enlarged in the image of the friendly character competing with the enemy character, making it clear that this will result in failure. Figure (i) shows the timing of time t16 in Figure 36, when the battle effect ends. "Failure" is displayed in the bottom right of the screen, making it clear that the effect indicated failure. The image displayed in Figure (i) has ended as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the start of the next game.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (hopper empty error occurs)>
FIG. 40 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). In (a) to (i) of the same figure, the flow of the acquisition display effect, the accumulation display effect, and the result notification effect is the same as in FIG. 39. However, since no game medals are paid out after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and is not updated. FIG. 40 (j) is the timing of time t17 in FIG. 37, when no game medals are detected for 3.5 seconds after the start of the payout process, so that a hopper empty error is set in the main control means and an error screen indicating a hopper empty error is displayed in the sub-control means. Before the hopper empty error occurs, the same image is displayed whether an image indicating success or failure is displayed.

<Display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
FIG. 41 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). From (a) to (c) in the same figure, the flow of the acquisition display effect, the cumulative display effect, and the result notification effect is the same as in FIG. 39. However, since the payout of the game medals has not been performed after the start of the payout process, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and is not updated. (k) in the same figure is the timing of time t18 in FIG. 38, at which a hopper retention error is set in the main control means and a screen indicating the hopper retention error is displayed in the sub-control means. If the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect the error for 201 ms or more after the start of the payout process, the main control means determines that the game medals are clogged and sets a hopper retention error. When the main control means sets the hopper retention error, it transmits a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper retention error to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper retention error, it displays a screen indicating the hopper retention error on the display device 32.

<Changes in form>
The period during which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are performed is set to a shorter period (1 second) than the period (1.5 seconds) required when the payout process is normally performed, but it may be set to a longer period. Specifically, it may be set to a period longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period required to detect a hopper empty error (3.5 seconds). By setting the period longer than the period required when the payout process is performed, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect can be more easily viewed by the player.
In addition, the period required when the payout process is executed normally is set to 1.5 seconds, but the required time may be varied depending on the number of medals to be paid out and whether the payout process involves only adding credits or includes the payment of game medals from a hopper.
In addition, although only one of the acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect is executed in the above embodiment, when the conditions for executing both effects are met, the accumulation display effect may be executed after the acquisition display effect is executed. Since the acquisition display effect ends one second after the start of the payout process, and the accumulation display effect is executed for one second thereafter, the player can recognize the contents of the accumulation display effect even if a hopper empty error occurs.
In addition, the winning display effect is executed when the push order role is won during AT, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of the correct push order operation, and an advantageous payout (12 coins paid out) is performed, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order-independent role (so-called shared bell), which executes an advantageous payout (12 coins paid out) regardless of the push order, is won, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order-independent role is stopped.

The acquisition display effect may have a plurality of types when an advantageous payout (12 coins payout) is executed. Specifically, the color and font when "12 coins GET" is displayed may be different depending on the state. More specifically, the color and font may be different depending on whether or not the state is favorable for winning the AT addition, or the color and font may be different during the premonition of the occurrence of a continuous performance or during the premonition of the transition to the addition specialization zone. By varying the mode of the acquisition display effect, the player can be informed that he or she will acquire game medals, and can be made to expect that an advantageous situation may occur in the next game or later. In addition, the color and font when "12 coins GET" is displayed may be different depending on the setting value set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can be provided every time the acquisition display effect is executed.
In addition, the cumulative display effect may have a mode that can be displayed only when a specific setting value is set, other than for each specified number. Specifically, when the setting value "2", "4", or "6" is set, if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 246 for the first time, "GET 246" is displayed. When the cumulative number exceeds 246, the display may be always performed, or may be displayed only when a lottery is held and a winner is obtained. By suggesting the setting with the content displayed in the cumulative display effect, not only the cumulative number is notified to the player, but also information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can be provided. Only when the setting value "6" is set, if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 666 for the first time, "GET 666" may be displayed. In addition, multiple display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. may be provided for each specified number, and the setting value set in the gaming machine or the state may be suggested depending on the display mode displayed.

The acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect can be executed during the AT, and even if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds the specified number only while the result screen is displayed, the acquisition display effect is executed without executing the cumulative display effect, but other situations in which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are not executed may be provided. Specifically, in a situation called a pseudo bonus, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. Also, in a situation during a pseudo bonus executed during the AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, and only the cumulative display effect may be executed. Also, in a situation such as a preparation period before starting the AT, an AT start screen, a consecutive effect executed during the AT, or a premonition of a consecutive effect, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. In an ending state that can be executed before the advantageous zone ends, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. By providing cases where they are executed or not executed depending on the game state managed by the main control means and the state of the effect managed by the sub-control means, the necessary information can be appropriately notified to the player.

The cumulative display performance is determined based on the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT and the number of game medals paid out by the payout process, but may be determined using the value of the MY counter. Specifically, the main control means transmits a command indicating the value of the MY counter to the sub-control means after the game end check and when the lever is operated. The value of the MY counter after the game end check indicates the value after the payout process, and the value of the MY counter when the lever is operated indicates the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets. The number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the value of the MY counter when the payout start command is received as a result of the game, and it is determined whether the total value exceeds a specified number. If a value based on the value of the MY counter is displayed as the cumulative number during the AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be acquired until the advantageous zone ends.
The result notification effect is a battle effect executed in the final game of the consecutive effects, but it may be an effect executed in one game instead of the consecutive effects. Also, it is not limited to a battle effect in which a friendly character competes with an enemy character, but may be another effect that associates the result of the effect with an advantageous result for the player, such as whether or not the player wins first prize in a lottery or wins in a maze lottery.

Although the result notification effect is described as displaying the result after the time has elapsed since all reels stopped and after the effect branching timing, the result may also be displayed by operating a switch for the effect. Specifically, at the effect branching timing (timing of time t15), an image of a switch simulating the effect switch (also called an operation prompting image or operation prompting effect) is displayed, and when the player operates the effect switch, an image indicating success or failure is displayed. By displaying the operation prompting image at the effect branching timing, even in a situation where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, the player can recognize that the operation prompting image will be displayed before the error screen is displayed.
In addition, after all reels have stopped (after all reels have stopped), a PUSH button effect may be executed to notify the stage change of the performance or the number of added games remaining in the AT. Specifically, after all reels have stopped and before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs, an image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed, and the player operates the image to change the stage of the performance or to notify the number of added games. Before the hopper empty error occurs (an error screen is displayed), it is possible to recognize that an image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed (a PUSH button effect is executed). In addition, before the image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed, an image of the switch simulating a performance switch may be displayed, and as a result of the image simulating a performance switch being displayed before the error screen is displayed, it is possible to recognize that an image of the switch simulating a performance switch is displayed.

In addition to the result notification effect and the PUSH button effect, effects such as comment effects may be executed when the stop switch of the final reel is operated or when all reels are stopped. By executing these effects before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, at time t15 or time t1), the content of the effect can be recognized before the hopper empty error occurs.
In addition, the performance is executed when the push order role is won, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of the correct push order operation, and an advantageous payout (12 coins paid out) is performed, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order-independent role (so-called shared bell), which executes an advantageous payout (12 coins paid out) regardless of the push order, is won, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order-independent role is stopped.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

Next, various settings for executing the timer interrupt process will be described.
An interrupt mode is set in the initial settings related to the operation of the gaming machine in Fig. 5. This setting of the interrupt mode means making various settings (settings of the main control built-in register) to enable timer interrupt processing.
First, the main internal control registers for enabling timer interrupt processing will be described.

<PTC prescaler setting register>
The PTC prescaler setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation settings of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is possible to set the clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC, which will be described later. Specifically, it is possible to set "how much" the system clock (SCK) should be divided to be supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC. For example, when the system clock is 16 MHz, if "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register, 16 MHz/143 = approximately 111.8881 KHZ becomes the clock source for the 8-bit counter PTC.
The initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "250".

<PTC counter setting register>
The PTC counter setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation settings of the timer circuit of the main control chip.
By setting a value in the PTC counter setting register, the count value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set how many times the clock count from the PTC prescaler setting register is input to execute the timer interrupt process. For example, if the system clock is 16 MHz, the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143", and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", when a clock of about 111.8881 KHz (a clock with one period of about 8.9375 μs) is input 125 times (when the 8-bit counter PTC times out), an interrupt flag is set, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in an interrupt wait monitor register, which will be described later. When information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, an interrupt request notification signal can be output from the interrupt wait monitor register to the CPU, and when the interrupt is permitted (when the IFF1 register, which will be described later, is "1"), a timer interrupt can be executed.
In other words, if the system clock is 16 MHz, the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143", and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", timer interrupt processing can be executed at a period of 1/16 MHz x 143 x 125 = approximately 1.117 ms (milliseconds).
In addition, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC starts to be updated (for example, decremented by 1) based on the clock from the PTC prescaler setting register after the value is set in the PTC counter setting register.
The initial value of the 8-bit counter PTC (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0".

<Interrupt wait monitor register>
The interrupt wait monitor register is one of the main control internal registers.
The interrupt wait monitor register is a 1-byte (8-bit) storage area, and when the 8-bit counter PTC times out and receives an interrupt request signal output from the timer circuit of the main control chip, a predetermined bit (for example, the first bit) of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "1." In this way, when the predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "1," it is referred to as storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred in the interrupt wait monitor register, and when the predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register becomes "0," it is referred to as clearing the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred.

When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, it becomes possible to output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. In other words, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, the interrupt request notification signal can be output to the CPU, and when the interrupt is permitted (when the IFF1 register described below is "1"), a timer interrupt can be executed. Then, when timer interrupt processing is executed in response to the interrupt request notification signal (this can be before executing the timer interrupt processing, simultaneously with executing the timer interrupt processing, or after executing the timer interrupt processing), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is cleared.

On the other hand, even if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, if the interrupt is disabled (when the IFF1 register described later is "0"), an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, but timer interrupt processing is not executed. In this way, if the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed because the interrupt is disabled (when the IFF1 register described later is "0"), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is retained (not cleared). Also, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, the interrupt request notification signal continues to be output to the CPU. If the timer interrupt processing could not be executed because the interrupts were disabled (the IFF1 register described later is "0"), the interrupts are enabled (the IFF1 register described later is "1"), and when the timer interrupt processing is executed in response to the interrupt request notification signal (this can be immediately before executing the timer interrupt processing, simultaneously with executing the timer interrupt processing, or immediately after executing the timer interrupt processing), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred that is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared.
The initial value of the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0" (the interrupt wait monitor register does not store any information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated).

Next, we will explain the interrupt register that manages the interrupt disabled and enabled states.

<Interrupt register>
The interrupt register is a register contained in the main control chip (eg, the main control CPU).
The interrupt register manages the interrupt-related states (also called interrupt states), that is, the "interrupt disabled state (also called interrupt disabled section or interrupt disabled period)" and the "interrupt enabled state (also called interrupt enabled section or interrupt enabled period)". Specifically, the interrupt registers include the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register, and the value of the IFF1 register is used to manage the interrupt disabled state and interrupt enabled state. Therefore, a description of the IFF2 register will be omitted. Also, unless otherwise specified, the interrupt register refers to the IFF1 register.

When the IFF1 register is "0", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and when an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, timer interrupt processing can be executed.
When the IFF1 register is "1", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and timer interrupt processing is not executed even if an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU.
In other words, an interrupt disabled state means that the IFF1 register is "0," and an interrupt enabled state means that the IFF1 register is "1."

The IFF1 register becomes "0" when an instruction that disables interrupts (for example, the "DI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "1" when an instruction that permits an interrupt (for example, an "EI" instruction) is executed.
The IFF1 register becomes "0" when timer interrupt processing is executed (which may be immediately before timer interrupt processing is executed, simultaneously with timer interrupt processing, or immediately after timer interrupt processing is executed).
In other words, the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing refers to the state from the execution of an instruction to prohibit interrupts to the execution of an instruction to permit interrupts, and the interrupt prohibited state associated with the execution of timer interrupt processing refers to the state from the execution of timer interrupt processing to the execution of an instruction to permit interrupts.
The initial value of the IFF1 register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0." Therefore, the state from when the power is turned on until the execution of a command that permits interrupts can also be said to be an interrupt prohibited state.
On the other hand, the interrupt permitted state refers to a state in which the interrupt is not prohibited.

Now, let us return to the explanation of setting the interrupt mode in the initial settings for the operation of the gaming machine in Figure 5. When setting the interrupt mode, a value is stored (set) in the PTC prescaler setting register. For example, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. Next, a value is stored (set) in the PTC counter setting register. For example, "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

In this way, after "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register when the interrupt mode is set, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated cyclically from "125" to "1", as follows: "125" → "124" → ... → "2" → "1" → "125" → "124" → .... Note that after the interrupt mode is set in the initial settings for the operation of the gaming machine in FIG. 5, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is configured to continue to be updated even when other programs (processes/instructions) are being executed. Also, the timing at which the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "125" is referred to as the value of the 8-bit counter PTC having timed out.

After the interrupt mode is set, the timer interrupt process can actually be executed after a command to permit interrupts has been issued. Here, the command to permit interrupts is preferably issued after the RAM check process has determined whether the checksums of all RAM are normal (after the power failure recovery data is normal or recoverable in FIG. 5). For example, the command to permit interrupts can be executed by "Start interrupt process" in FIG. 8 or by "Lighting up the saved setting value display data on the setting value display LED" in FIG. 10.

In this way, when the 8-bit counter is configured to start updating before the RAM check process (determining whether the RAM before the power was turned off is the same as the RAM after the power is restored), the 8-bit counter can be timed out earlier (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register) than when the 8-bit counter is configured to start updating after the RAM check process, so that the timer interrupt process can be executed without delay when a command is issued to permit an interrupt that is executed after a RAM abnormality is determined.

In this embodiment, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register when setting the interrupt mode, but the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register does not have to be executed. Specifically, it is also possible to set the interrupt period by utilizing the fact that the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250" (the initial value is not "0").

For example, when the system clock is configured to be 16 MHz, the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250", so the period of the timer interrupt process can be appropriately determined by storing an arbitrary value in the PTC counter setting register. Below, examples of the period of the timer interrupt process according to the value stored in the PTC counter setting register are shown.
a) When "0" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the period of the timer interrupt process can be set to 4 ms (milliseconds).
a) When "128" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the period of the timer interrupt process can be set to 2 ms (milliseconds).
c) When "64" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the period of the timer interrupt process can be set to 1 ms (millisecond).

In this way, even if the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register is not performed, the update of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be started by executing the process of storing a value in the PTC counter setting register. In other words, if it is desired to store a value different from the initial value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is preferable to store the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. For example, if a value different from the initial value is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register after storing a value in the PTC counter setting register, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is first updated based on the frequency corresponding to the initial value (250) of the PTC prescaler setting register, and then, if a value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register is stored, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated based on the frequency corresponding to the value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. In such a case, the update period of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is not constant, which leads to a failure of the main control chip. Therefore, when executing a process to store a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, failure of the main control chip can be suppressed by storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process to store the value in the PTC counter setting register.

Next, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register will be described with reference to a simple program example using FIG.
42A shows a program for the game progress main processing. The "DI" command is a command for inhibiting a maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt inhibition command). The "EI" command is a command for permitting a maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing) (referred to as an interrupt permission command).
Additionally, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary commands (programs).

In FIG. 42A, when the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0" and interrupts are disabled.
When the instructions "AAAA", "BBBB", "..." are executed thereafter, the IFF1 register remains at "0".
Thereafter, when the "EI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "1", and the interrupt is enabled.
In other words, interrupts are disabled during the period from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction.

However, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "CCCC" instruction, which is the instruction one step ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed.
For example, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the timer interrupt process can be executed after the "CCCC" instruction is executed. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated (if the interrupt process is not started immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter continues to be updated.
With this configuration, even if an instruction "EI" that allows interrupts is executed, the instruction following the instruction "EI" that allows interrupts is not executed until the next instruction ("CCCC" in this example) is executed, so that the instruction following the instruction "EI" that allows interrupts can be executed reliably. Specifically, a return instruction (an instruction for executing a program at a return address) such as a "RET" instruction may be used as the instruction following the instruction "EI" that allows interrupts, and even if there is an instruction that allows interrupts, the timer interrupt processing is not executed until the next instruction is executed, so that the instruction following the instruction "EI" that allows interrupts can be executed reliably.

In addition, examples of commands to prohibit interrupts and commands to permit interrupts in the game progress main process include the following:
a) When sending a command from the main control means to the sub-control means, a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing the command to the RAM's memory area, etc., and then a command to permit interrupts is executed. b) When turning the blocker ON (medal acceptance permitted state), a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing information for turning the blocker ON to the RAM's memory area and a process of writing information for turning on the medal insertion permitted lamp to the RAM's memory area, etc., and then a command to permit interrupts is executed. c) When turning the blocker OFF (medal acceptance refusal state), a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing information for turning the blocker OFF to the RAM's memory area and a process of writing information for turning off the medal insertion permitted lamp to the RAM's memory area, etc., and then a command to permit interrupts is executed.
In addition, when providing an instruction to prohibit an interrupt and an instruction to permit an interrupt, the instructions are not limited to the above-mentioned a) to c), and an instruction to prohibit an interrupt and an instruction to permit an interrupt may be provided as appropriate.

Such an interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is provided to prevent, for example, the execution of a timer interrupt process while a process consisting of multiple instructions (instruction A, instruction B, ..., instruction Z) is being executed, thereby preventing the data in the RAM from being changed or the execution of a process that involves a malfunction based on the RAM data.
In addition, the interrupt prohibited state in the main game progress processing is set to the interrupt prohibited state by an instruction that prohibits interrupts (for example, a DI instruction), and set to the interrupt permitted state by an instruction that permits interrupts (for example, an EI instruction). However, interrupts may be prohibited by an instruction other than the above-mentioned DI instruction, and interrupts may be permitted by an instruction other than the above-mentioned EI instruction.

Figure 42 (B) shows a program for interrupt processing. As with Figure 42 (A), the "EI" instruction is an instruction (called an instruction to permit interrupts) for permitting maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing), and "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "..." are arbitrary instructions (programs). The "RETI" instruction is an instruction (return instruction) for ending timer interrupt processing, and corresponds, for example, to "RETURN" in Figure 7.

When timer interrupt processing is executed (when executing can be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the IFF1 register becomes "0". This makes it possible to prevent the next timer interrupt processing from being executed during timer interrupt processing. Note that the "DI" command is not required when starting timer interrupt processing.
When the timer interrupt process is finished, in order to change from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the interrupt process, i.e., immediately before the "RETI" instruction. This "EI" instruction sets the IFF1 register to "1." Note that this "EI" instruction corresponds to "save the interrupt enable flag ON" in FIG. 7.
In the "RETI" instruction following the "EI" instruction, the IFF1 register also becomes "1".
In other words, the period from the start of the timer interrupt process to the "EI" command is an interrupt disabled state.

However, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "RETI" instruction, which is the instruction one step ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed.
For example, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing during the period from the start of the timer interrupt process to the "EI" command and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable after the "RETI" command is executed. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing during the period from the start of the timer interrupt process to the "EI" command and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated (if the interrupt process is not started immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter continues to be updated.
In this way, if the interrupt waiting monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" command, the timer interrupt process can be executed, and if the interrupt waiting monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" command, the game progress main process can be executed. Therefore, even if the command "EI" that permits an interrupt is executed, the interrupt process is not executed until the next command "RETI" is executed, so that the next timer interrupt process can be prevented from being executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, using (1) of Figure 43, the relationship between the timer interrupt processing and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is no interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing will be explained.
When "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored as a value in the PTC counter setting register, "m" is stored in the 8-bit counter PTC, and then when an update period arrives, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated by 1 at a time, such as "m-1", ..., "2", "1", "m", "m-1", "m-2", .... In this way, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC cycles between "m" and "1".

At timing t1, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "m." In other words, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, based on the 8-bit counter PTC having timed out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register), the timer interrupt process can be executed. This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing the timer interrupt process (when executing may be before ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as executing, or after ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t2, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction within the timer interrupt process that allows interrupts, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

The value of the 8-bit counter PTC is also configured to be updated when the update period of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives, even while the timer interrupt process is being executed. By configuring it in this way, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated regardless of the time required for the timer interrupt process, so that the timer interrupt process can be executed at a constant cycle.

Next, using (2) in Figure 43, we will explain the relationship between the timer interrupt processing and the 8-bit counter PTC when an interrupt is prohibited in the game progress main processing.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt prohibited state, the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Also, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out in an interrupt prohibited state, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At timing t3, a command to permit interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts permitted).
Since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t3, the timer interrupt process can be executed after executing one instruction of the game progress main process based on the instruction that permits the interrupt of the game progress main process. When executing the timer interrupt process (when executing, which may be before ("before" includes "just before"), at the same time as executing, or after ("after" includes "just after")), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t4, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

As in FIG. 43 (1), the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated when the update period of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives, even while the timer interrupt process is being executed. By configuring it in this way, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated regardless of the time required for the timer interrupt process, so that the timer interrupt process can be executed at a constant cycle.

The value of the 8-bit counter PTC is also configured to be updateable when the update period for the 8-bit counter PTC arrives, even if the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-prohibited state. By configuring it in this way, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated even if the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-prohibited state, so that timer interrupt processing can be executed at a fixed cycle.

Next, using the <Example (1) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in Figure 44, we will explain the interrupt period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out while interrupts are prohibited in the game progress main processing. Note that the normal period of the timer interrupt processing (the period from when the 8-bit counter PTC times out to the next time the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T". Note that measurement of "T" (updating the 8-bit counter PTC) begins after a value is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt prohibited state, the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Also, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out in an interrupt prohibited state, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At timing t3, a command to permit interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts permitted).
Since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t3, the timer interrupt process can be executed after executing one instruction of the game progress main process based on the instruction that permits the interrupt of the game progress main process. When executing the timer interrupt process (when executing, which may be before ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as executing, or after ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t4, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

At timing t5, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, based on the 8-bit counter PTC having timed out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register), the timer interrupt process can be executed. This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing the timer interrupt process (when executing may be before ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as executing, or after ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t6, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

At timing t7, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, based on the 8-bit counter PTC having timed out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register), the timer interrupt process can be executed. This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing the timer interrupt process (when executing may be before ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as executing, or after ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t8, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

Here, the period from timing t2 to timing t5 is T. Similarly, the period from timing t5 to timing t7 is T. For example, when timing t2 is "n×T (n is a natural number)," timing t5 can be expressed as "(n+1)×T." Furthermore, timing t7 can be expressed as "(n+2)×T."
Furthermore, the timing of t3 can be expressed as "a specific timing that is after 'n×T' and before '(n+1)×T'."

First, let us look at the timer interrupt processing executed at the timing t3. The timer interrupt processing executed at the timing t3 should have been executed at t2, which is the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing. In other words, if the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing was not in effect at the timing t2, the timer interrupt processing would have been executed at the timing t2. In other words, because the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing was in effect at the timing t2, the timer interrupt processing was executed at the timing t3 when the interrupt permission state was established.

Next, attention is paid to the timer interrupt process executed at the timing of t5. The timer interrupt process executed at the timing of t5 is executed before "T" has elapsed from the timing of t3. In other words, measurement of "T", which is the interrupt period, has not started from the timing of t3. The timer interrupt process executed at the timing of t5 is configured to be executed when T has elapsed from the timing of t2. In other words, it is configured to be executed based on the timeout of the 8-bit counter PTC, which continues to update the count even when the timer interrupt process is not executed (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register).
In this way, when the timing of t2 is "n×T", the timing of t3 is "a specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T", and the timing of t4 is "(n+1)×T", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t5. In other words, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable at the timing of t5.

Similarly, the timer interrupt processing executed at timing t7 is configured to be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register).
In this way, when the timing of t2 is "n×T", the timing of t3 is "a specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T", the timing of t4 is "(n+1)×T", and the timing of t7 is "(n+2)×T", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t7. In other words, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable at the timing of t7.

As described above, even if timer interrupt processing cannot be executed at the original timer interrupt processing period (n x T) due to the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing after this timer interrupt processing can be returned to a state in which the timer interrupt processing can be executed when the original timer interrupt processing period arrives (x x T (where "x" is a natural number)). This makes it possible, for example, to reduce the impact on timer measurement executed within the timer interrupt processing (longer timing of timer measurement).

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing when the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times when the IFF1 register is 0, using <Example (2) showing the execution timing of the timer interrupt processing> in Figure 44.

In <Example (2) showing the execution timing of timer interrupt processing>, a case is shown in which the main game progress processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time while the main game progress processing is in an interrupt prohibited state. Even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated at normal intervals.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt prohibited state, the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Also, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out in an interrupt prohibited state, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At timing t3, the 8-bit counter PTC times out again. However, because the interrupt wait monitor register still stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, the interrupt wait monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred again. Even after that, the 8-bit counter continues to update.

At timing t4, a command to permit interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts permitted).
Since information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t4, the timer interrupt process can be executed after executing one instruction of the game progress main process based on the instruction that permits the interrupt of the game progress main process. When the timer interrupt process is executed (when executed, it may be before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is set to "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t5, the timer interrupt process ends and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process is terminated by the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

At timing t6, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register.
After that, based on the 8-bit counter PTC having timed out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register), the timer interrupt process can be executed. This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing the timer interrupt process (when executing may be before ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as executing, or after ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt process is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupt disabled state).

At timing t7, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

In this way, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice (multiple times) between the timings of t1 and t4, the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred once. Note that in FIG. 44, an example is given in which the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice during an interrupt disabled state, but even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out three or four times during an interrupt disabled state, the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred once. After the interrupt disabled state ends, the timer interrupt process is executed once based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times during an interrupt disabled state, the number of times it has timed out is not counted.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out "n" times ("n" is 2 or more) during an interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is configured not to be executed "n" times consecutively (repeatedly) after the interrupt disabled state changes to an interrupt enabled state.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the timer interrupt processing is repeated multiple times in succession after the interrupt permission state is changed to the interrupt permission state, and the game progress main processing cannot be executed during that time.

Note that in the <Example (2) showing the execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in Figure 44, a case is shown in which the game progress main processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time during an interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing. Similarly, even if the timer interrupt processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time during an interrupt prohibited state in the timer interrupt processing, and the 8-bit counter PTC times out "n" (where "n" is 2 or more) during an interrupt prohibited state in the timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing is configured not to be executed "n" times consecutively (repeatedly) (to be executed only once) after the state changes from the interrupt prohibited state to the interrupt permitted state.

<Program design processing time>
A program is something that is composed of multiple instructions. In this case, the designed processing time from the start of a certain program to the end of the certain program can be calculated from the types of instructions from the instruction related to the start of the certain program (e.g., instruction A) to the instruction related to the end of the certain program (e.g., instruction Z).

First, the time required to execute one command can be calculated from the number of states required to execute one command and the frequency of the system clock. Specifically, the time required to execute one command can be calculated by 1/system clock frequency x number of states. Note that the number of states can be read as the number of clocks.
In the following, the time required to execute one instruction will be explained using a specific instruction when a 16 MHZ system clock is used.
(A) DI
Content of the command: Command to disable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute the command: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(a) EI
Instruction: An instruction to enable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute an instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds)
(C) DEC (HL)
Contents of the instruction: The value stored in the address indicated by the HL register is decremented by one.
Number of states: 11 states Time required to execute an instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 11 = 0.6875 μS (microseconds)

In this way, even when the same system clock frequency is used, the time required to execute one instruction may differ depending on the type of instruction. Also, even when the instructions are different, the time required to execute one instruction may be the same. Note that the above instructions are only a part of the multiple instructions, and there are many other instructions besides the above.
The frequency of the system clock when the game progress main process is executed is the same as the number of system clocks when the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, for example, the time required to execute the "EI" command in the game progress main process is the same as the time required to execute the "EI" command in the timer interrupt process.

In other words, the designed processing time of a program can be calculated from the total number of states of multiple instructions from the start of the program to the end of the program. Specifically, it can be calculated by multiplying 1/system clock frequency by total number of states. In other words, since the system clock frequency is uniform within a single gaming machine, a program with a larger total number of states will have a longer designed processing time than a program with a smaller total number of states.

<Designed processing time for timer interrupt processing>
The design processing time of the timer interrupt processing is the time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt processing (for example, until the RETI command is executed). However, since the command to be executed differs depending on the difference in the information stored in the RWM and the difference in the progress of the game, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, the processing time of the timer interrupt processing varies to some extent. In other words, since the command to be executed in the timer interrupt processing is not necessarily the same in all timer interrupt processing, the total number of states when one timer interrupt processing is executed differs. Therefore, the average time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt processing when the timer interrupt processing is executed normally is defined as the design processing time of the timer interrupt processing. The design processing time of the timer interrupt processing may also be referred to as the time related to the timer interrupt processing.

<Maximum design time for timer interrupt processing>
The design maximum time of the timer interrupt processing is the same as the design processing time of the timer interrupt processing in that it is the time from the start to the end of the timer interrupt processing. Also, as described above, even if the timer interrupt processing is executed normally, there is some variation in the processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the design maximum processing time of the timer interrupt processing is the time required to execute the instruction with the largest total number of states from the start to the end of one timer interrupt processing. Note that the design maximum processing time of the timer interrupt processing is sometimes referred to as the maximum time related to the timer interrupt processing.

<Designed processing time for the interruption prohibited state in the game progress main processing>
In the case where there is only one interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the design processing time of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing is the time from the command to prohibit the interrupt (e.g., DI command) to the command to permit the interrupt (e.g., EI command) (also referred to as the processing time of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing) (excluding the state from when the power is turned on to when the command to permit the interrupt is executed). However, since the command to be executed differs depending on the difference in the information stored in the RAM and the difference in the progress of the game, the total number of states may differ even when the game progress main processing is normally executed. Therefore, the processing time of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing varies to some extent. In other words, the command to be executed in the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing is not necessarily the same, so the total number of states when the processing of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing is different. Therefore, the average time of the processing time of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing when the game progress main processing is normally executed is set as the design processing time of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing.

In addition, if there are at least two interrupt prohibited states in the game progress main processing, the design processing time for each of the interrupt prohibited states in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the longest design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is regarded as the design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing. Note that the design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is sometimes referred to as the time related to the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

<Maximum design processing time for the interruption prohibited state in the game progress main processing>
When there is only one interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing, the time required to execute the command with the largest total number of states from the start of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing to the end of the interrupt prohibited state is determined to be the designed maximum processing time of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

In addition, if there are at least two interrupt prohibited states in the game progress main processing, the design maximum processing time for each interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the longest design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is regarded as the design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited section in the game progress main processing. Note that the design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is sometimes referred to as the maximum time related to the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the design processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt processing (the period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress processing is "S'", it is preferable to configure it so that T >S' is satisfied.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt period from occurring multiple times while the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is being executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed becomes smaller) due to the influence of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the maximum design processing time for the interrupt disabled state in the game progress main processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt processing (the period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the interrupt disabled state in the main game progress processing is "S", it is preferable that T > S.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt period from occurring multiple times while the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing is being executed, as compared to the case where T>S'(S' is the design processing time for the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing), in order to a greater extent. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed is reduced) due to the influence of the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between timer interrupt period and timer interrupt processing design time>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the design processing time of the timer interrupt process is "t'", it is preferable that T/2>t'. In other words, it is preferable to configure the design processing time of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, when the timer interrupt processing period arrives, the timer interrupt processing is executed, and then, until the next timer interrupt processing period arrives, the game progress main processing can be executed for a period longer than T/2. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period during which the main processing can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt processing.

<Relationship between timer interrupt period and maximum design processing time of timer interrupt processing>
When the period of the timer interrupt process (the period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the maximum processing time in the design of the timer interrupt process is "t", it is preferable to make T/2>t. In other words, it is preferable to configure the maximum processing time in the design of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process.
By configuring in this way, compared to a case where T/2>t'(t' is the design processing time of the timer interrupt processing), it is possible to execute the timer interrupt processing when the timer interrupt processing period arrives, and then execute the game progress main processing for a period longer than T/2 until the next timer interrupt processing period arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main processing can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt processing.

<Types of interrupt processing>
Next, the types of interrupt processing will be described. Interrupt processing can be roughly divided into maskable interrupt processing (referred to as INT), which is not executed when an interrupt cause occurs in an interrupt disabled state, and non-maskable interrupt processing (referred to as NMI), which is executed even when an interrupt cause occurs in an interrupt disabled state.

<Non-maskable interrupt processing>
When a cause of a non-maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU is notified that a cause of the non-maskable interrupt has occurred. The CPU that has received the notification that a cause of the non-maskable interrupt has occurred suspends all processing, and executes the non-maskable interrupt processing with the highest priority. However, even if a cause of the non-maskable interrupt processing occurs, it is not executed until a CALLEX instruction used when executing a program in the second program area from a program in the first program area is executed, and then a RETEX instruction used when returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area is executed. In other words, even if a cause of a non-maskable interrupt occurs during the period when the program in the second program area is executed by the CALLEX instruction, the non-maskable interrupt processing is not executed, and the non-maskable interrupt processing is executed after the RETEX instruction is executed. The CALLEX instruction is an instruction different from a normal CALL instruction (call instruction) and is used only when a program in the second program area is executed from a program in the first program area, and is not used when a program in the first program area is called from a program in the first program area, or when a program in the second program area is called from a program in the second program area. Therefore, it is also called a special call instruction. The RETEX instruction is an instruction different from a normal RET instruction (return instruction) and is used only when a program in the second program area is executed from a program in the first program area by the CALLEX instruction, and then the program in the second program area is returned to the program in the first program area. Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned RET instruction and RETI instruction, the RETEX instruction changes from an interrupt disabled state to an interrupt enabled state, and even if a cause of a non-maskable interrupt occurs between the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction, the non-maskable interrupt processing is executed immediately after the RETEX instruction (the next instruction based on the RETEX instruction). For this reason, the RETEX instruction is also called a special return instruction. As an example of a non-maskable interrupt process, the occurrence of a power cut can be regarded as a cause of a non-maskable interrupt, and the power cut process shown in FIG.

<Maskable interrupt processing>
The main control chip used in this embodiment is capable of executing up to six types of maskable interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing described above is one of the maskable interrupt processing. For example, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register. Then, the timer interrupt processing can be executed based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. As described above, when the interrupt is prohibited, the timer interrupt processing (maskable interrupt processing) cannot be executed. In addition, even if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt wait monitor register, the timer interrupt processing (maskable interrupt processing) cannot be executed until the CALLEX instruction used when executing a program in the second program area from the program in the first program area is executed and then the RETEX instruction used when returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area is executed. In other words, even if a maskable interrupt occurs during the execution of a program in the second program area by the CALLEX instruction, the maskable interrupt processing is not executed, and the maskable interrupt processing is executed after the RETEX instruction is executed. Note that in this embodiment, an example will be described in which one type of maskable interrupt processing, timer interrupt processing, is used as the maskable interrupt processing.

<Interrupt vector address>
The interrupt vector address refers to the address (also called the start address) where the first program (instruction) of the maskable interrupt process is stored. In concrete terms, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out and executes the timer interrupt process, the address indicated by the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is first obtained, and then the timer interrupt process can be executed by jumping to the obtained address. For example, if the interrupt vector addresses of the timer interrupt process are addresses 0004h and 0005h (addresses determined by 2 bytes) and the address where the first instruction of the timer interrupt process is stored (also called the start address of the program of the timer interrupt process) is address 0050h, the address where the first instruction of the timer interrupt process is stored, 0050h, is stored by addresses 0004h and 0005h (actually, 50h is stored at address 0004h and 00h is stored at address 0005h). When executing timer interrupt processing, a jump is first made to address 0050h, which is determined by addresses 0004h and 0005h, and the instruction at address 0050h (the first instruction of the timer interrupt processing) can be executed.

The interrupt vector address is determined based on the value of the I register and the value set in the program management area (also called the program management region) mounted on the main control board 100. Specifically, the value of the upper byte of the interrupt vector address is determined by the value of the I register, and the value of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address is determined based on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area. For example, if the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing is 0004h, the upper byte 00h is determined by the value of the I register, and the lower byte 04h is determined by the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area.

<I Register>
The I register is one of the registers that the CPU has, and is also called the "interrupt page address register." The I register is a register that can store one byte of data and can set the upper 1 byte of the interrupt vector address. The value of the I register can be freely set by executing an instruction to set the value of the I register to a specific value. For example, the value of the I register can be set to 10h by executing an instruction to set the value of the I register to 10h (LD I, 10h). When the value of the I register is 10h, the upper address of the interrupt vector address is 10h, so if the lower address of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is 04h according to the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is 1004h. The initial value of the value of the I register is 00h. In other words, if the power is turned off under the condition that the value of the I register is 10h, and then the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes 00h. In addition, when the power is turned off under the condition that the value of the I register is 00h, and then the power is turned on, the value of the I register remains at 00h. In this embodiment, no instruction is executed to set the value of the I register to a value other than 00h (the value of the I register is not changed from 00h by the program of the first control area and the program of the second control area). In other words, in this embodiment, the initial value of 00h is used as the value of the I register. Therefore, compared with the case where an instruction is executed to set the value of the I register to a value other than 00h, the program capacity can be reduced. Also, since the value of the I register is 00h, the upper address of the interrupt vector address is 00h. In other words, as shown in FIG. 71, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process can be set in the control area of the use area (the above-mentioned first control area).

<Each area of the main control ROM>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing each area stored in the main control ROM in this embodiment. First, addresses 0000h to 11FEh are the control area. This control area is the control area of the use area (the first control area described above), and various instructions are stored in the control area. In addition, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is determined in the control area. However, as described above, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is an address, not a program. Therefore, when the main control chip is normally started, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is not executed as an instruction. Address 11FF is an unused area. 0 (00000000b) is stored in the unused area. Addresses 1200h to 1DF6h are the data area. This data area is the data area of the use area (the first data area described above), and the lottery table and the like used (referenced) by the program (instruction) of the first control area are stored in the data area. Addresses 1DF7h to 1FFFh are unused areas. 0 (00000000b) is stored in the unused areas. Addresses 2000h to 245Dh are control areas outside the used areas (the second control areas described above). Various instructions are stored in the control areas outside the used areas. Unlike the control areas, the control areas outside the used areas do not have interrupt vector addresses for timer interrupt processing. Addresses 245Eh to 2526h are data areas. This data area is a data area outside the used areas (the second data areas described above), and tables and the like used (referenced) by the programs (instructions) in the second control areas are stored in the data areas. Addresses 3FC0h to 3FFFh are program management areas.

<Program Management Area>
The program management area includes a designated area travel prohibition setting area, which is an area that specifies an area that is not determined to be a program runaway, an interrupt initial setting area, which is an area that specifies the lower address of the vector address, etc. The program management area is sometimes called a program management area.

After the power is turned on and before the first program (program at address 0000h) starts (before user mode starts (specifically, during security mode)), various settings of the main control chip can be made based on the values (information) stored in each area of the program management area. In other words, after setting the area specifying the prohibited area outside driving and the interrupt initial setting area, the first program (program at address 0000h) is executed. Note that security mode involves security checks of the control area and data area of the main control ROM, inspection of the program management area, and settings based on the program management area. If it is determined that there is no abnormality in security mode, it will switch to user mode. In other words, it will execute programs sequentially starting from the program (command) at address 0000h of the control area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in security mode (for example, if the value set in the program management area is abnormal), it will not switch to user mode. In other words, it will stop without executing the program (command) at address 0000h of the control area (the main control chip will stop control).

<Designated areas where driving is prohibited>
The designated area outside driving prohibition setting areas include a program code end address 1 setting area, a program code start address 2 setting area, and a program code end address 2 setting area. For example, the program code end address 1 setting area is composed of a 2-byte area at addresses 3F03h and 3F04h, the program code start address 2 setting area is composed of a 2-byte area at addresses 3F05h and 3F06h, and the program code end address 2 setting area is composed of a 2-byte area at addresses 3F07h and 3F08h.

In this embodiment, the control area is from address 0000h to 11FEh, and the control area outside the use area is from address 2000h to 245Dh. Therefore, the program code end address 1 setting area is set to 11FEh, which is the last address of the control area. The program code start address 2 setting area is also set to 2000h, which is the first address of the control area outside the use area. The program code end address 2 setting area is also set to 245Dh, which is the last address of the control area outside the use area. Note that the first address of the control area, 0000h, is not set. Even if the first address of the control area, 0000h, is not set, the program code start address 1 for the program code end address 1 will be 0000h. With the above settings, it is possible to prevent a reset from occurring when executing (fetching instructions from) addresses 0000h to 11FEh. In addition, when executing (fetching instructions) programs from address 2000h to address 245Dh, a reset can be prevented from occurring. On the other hand, when the CPU attempts to execute (fetch instructions) a program outside the area set in the designated outside driving prohibition setting area, a reset can be caused. For example, when attempting to execute (fetch instructions) a program at address 11FFh (unused area) in this embodiment, a reset occurs. When a reset occurs, the power remains on, the registers are initialized, and the process starts from before the user mode starts (specifically, the security mode), and various settings of the main control chip are performed based on the values (information) stored in each area of the program management area. After executing the security mode, if no abnormality is determined in the security mode, the programs can be executed sequentially from the first program (program (instruction) at address 0000h). In this way, the control area can be made into an area (designated area) that is not subject to resetting simply by setting the last address, and the control area outside the use area can be made into an area (designated area) that is not subject to resetting by setting the first address and the last address. In other words, instead of setting four addresses, you can set two areas (designated areas) that are not reset by setting only three addresses. By configuring it in this way, you can reduce the storage area of the program management area.

<Interrupt initial setting area>
The interrupt initial setting area is an area in which the lower address of the interrupt vector address is set. In other words, it is an area in which a part of the interrupt vector address is set. Specifically, the interrupt initial setting area is composed of a 1-byte area at address 3FDAh. The details of the interrupt initial setting address will be explained with reference to FIG. 72.

72A is a diagram for explaining the interrupt initial setting area. The interrupt initial setting area is made up of a 1-byte storage area from bit D0 to bit D7.
The interrupt priority is set using two bits, D0 bit and D1 bit. Details of the interrupt priority will be described later, but in this embodiment, 0 is set to the D1 bit and 1 is set to the D0 bit (01b is set). Then, by setting 01b as the interrupt priority, the lower 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are automatically assigned to a value corresponding to 01b (details will be described later). In other words, the lower 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address can be set simply by setting the value of two bits. Note that in this embodiment, 01b is set as the interrupt priority, but any value such as 00b, 10b, 11b, etc. can be set, and the lower 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address can be set based on the value of the two bits.
Fixed values are set for the D2 bit and the D3 bit. In this embodiment, the D2 bit is set to 0 as a fixed value, and the D3 bit is set to 0 (00b is set). If the fixed value is not set to 00b, or if a value other than 00b is set due to noise or the like, the power is turned on and the security mode before the user mode is determined to be abnormal, and the user mode is not started. If the predetermined fixed value is not set in this way, there is a high possibility that the ROM is abnormal, so by not starting the user mode (not executing the program start process in an abnormal state), it is possible to prevent disadvantages from being caused to the gaming establishment or the player.
The four bits D4 to D7 are used to set the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address. In this embodiment, the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are set to 0000b. Note that in this embodiment, the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are set to 0000b (0h), but this is not limited to this and can be set to any value, such as 1000h (8h) or 1111b (Fh).

FIG. 72B is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt priority levels and automatic allocation.
As described above, the main control chip used in this embodiment can execute up to six types of maskable interrupt processing. Specifically, it can execute six types of maskable interrupt processing, namely, "PTC0" to "PTC2", "RX0" to "RX1", and "XINT". In the case of a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality (at least two) of these maskable interrupt processing, when interrupt factors occur at the same timing, the interrupt priority determines which maskable interrupt processing is to be prioritized. As the interrupt priority, "priority A" is the highest interrupt priority, and the interrupt priority decreases from "priority A" in order. In other words, "priority F" is the lowest interrupt priority. Incidentally, "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used in the timer interrupt processing, and in particular "PTC2" corresponds to the timer interrupt processing in this embodiment. In addition, the interrupt priority levels "00b", "01b", "10b", and "11b" correspond to the values (interrupt priority levels) set in the D0 and D1 bits shown in FIG. 72(A).

For example, if 01b is set in the area for setting the interrupt priority level in the interrupt initial setting area, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), a) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC0 will be automatically assigned to 0000b, b) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC1 will be automatically assigned to 0010b, c) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC2 will be automatically assigned to 0100b, d) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of XINT will be automatically assigned to 0110b, e) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of RX0 will be automatically assigned to 1000b, and f) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of RX1 will be automatically assigned to 1010b. In other words, when PTC2 is used for timer interrupt processing, the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing can be set to 0100b (4h) by automatic allocation of the main control chip. Also, for example, when 10b is set in the area for setting the interrupt priority in the interrupt initial setting area and PTC2 is used for timer interrupt processing, the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing can be set to 1000b (8h) by automatic allocation of the main control chip.
As described above, the lowest four bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address for timer interrupt processing can be set to 0000b (0h), 0010b (2h), 0100b (4h), 0110b (6h), 1000b (8h), or 1010b (Ah).

As mentioned above, the value of the upper 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address can be set to any value between 0000b (0h) and 1111b (Fh), and the value of the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address can be set to 0000b (0h), 0010b (2h), 0100b (4h), 0110b (6h), 1000b (8h), and 1010b (Ah). In other words, the lower address of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process can be set to any value between 00h and FAh depending on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area. For example, if the value of the I register is 00h and the lower address of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is set to 04h depending on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process will be 0004h (and 0005h). Also, if the value of the I register is 00h and the lower address of the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process is set to 84h due to the value set in the interrupt initial setting area, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process will be 0084h (and 0085h). Although we will not go into details here, we should note that the interrupt vector addresses for the multiple maskable interrupt processes described above can be determined according to the value set in the interrupt initial setting area.

<Relationship between power-on processing and timer interrupt processing interrupt vector addresses>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the relationship between the power-on process and the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process. A part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored from address 0000h to address 0003h. The interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is stored at address 0004h and address 0005h. The timer interrupt process is stored at address xxxxh (xxxx is a predetermined value in hexadecimal) to address XXXXh (XXXX is a predetermined value in hexadecimal). The continuation of the power-on process is stored at address yyyyh (yyyy is a predetermined value in hexadecimal) to address YYYYh (YYYY is a predetermined value in hexadecimal). Note that the part written in the dashed line is assumed to be where other programs (instructions) are stored.

As is clear from FIG. 73, the power-on process starts from address 0000h and continues up to address 0003h. The power-on process is configured to continue from address yyyyh. Specifically, a jump command (JR yyyyh) is stored from address 0001h to address 0003h, so that the program following address 0003h is address yyyyh (since this jump command is a 3-byte command, it uses the program area from address 0001h to address 0003h). The power-on process corresponds to the program start process in FIG. 5. In addition, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is stored between address 0003h and address yyyyh. In other words, all the commands that make up the power-on process are configured not to be stored in consecutive addresses. This configuration allows the game store staff to know that the voltage is unstable when starting up. Specifically, when the power is turned on (immediately after the power is turned on), the voltage is unstable, and the program (instructions) may not be executed correctly (the main control chip does not start up normally). In such a case, if the instructions constituting the power-on process are configured as a series, for example, one instruction stored in the address next to a certain instruction may not be executed among the instructions constituting the power-on process, and the program may be executed in an abnormal manner. In other words, there is a risk that an error unexpected by the player or the game store staff may occur. However, by storing the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process between part of the power-on process and the continuation of part of the power-off process, for example, if a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) in which the program following address 0003h is at address yyyyh is not executed normally (if the instruction at address 0004h is executed), it will take longer to execute the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards (or the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards will not be executed) than if a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) in which the program following address 0003h is at address yyyyh is executed normally. In other words, for example, if there is a program (command) after address yyyyh to determine whether to switch to the setting change mode ("Setting key switch ON and door open detection switch ON?" in FIG. 5), the time to switch to the setting change mode will be longer than the designed time (or the setting change mode will not be switched to) if the jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is not executed normally, compared to the case where the jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is executed normally. Therefore, after turning on the power, the arcade staff can determine whether the voltage was unstable when the machine started up, based on whether the time it took to switch to the setting change mode was abnormal.

The addresses shown in FIG. 73 are merely examples, and a part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored from address 0000h to address 0003h. However, for example, addresses 0000h to 0007h may be stored as part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on. Similarly, the interrupt vector addresses of the timer interrupt process are stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h, but any value smaller than address yyyyh, which is the next address of the power-on process program, may be used. For example, if a part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored at addresses 0000h to 0007h, and address yyyyh is 1000h, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process may be set to address 0064h, etc. In other words, if a jump command is stored at address A as the power-on processing program, and the power-on processing program continues from address B, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing may be stored (defined) between addresses A and B. Also, although address xxxxh is set to a smaller value than address yyyyh, address xxxxh may be set to a larger value than address yyyyh. Also, although the vector address of the timer interrupt processing is set to a smaller value than address xxxxh, address xxxxh may be set to a larger value than address xxxxh. Also, although the dashed line portion has been described as another program (instruction), data that is not a program (instruction) (another interrupt vector address or unused data (data in which 00000000b is stored)) may be stored.

Furthermore, the decision to transition to setting change mode has been given as an example of processing after address yyyyh, but even with processing (not shown) for outputting an external signal (security signal) indicating that the power has been turned on as processing after address yyyyh, the designed time until the external signal is output is longer than when the program (instruction) is being executed normally (or the external signal is not output), so the game store staff can determine whether the voltage started up in an unstable state based on whether the time until the security signal was output was abnormal. Similarly, the processing after address yyyyh may be the first "interrupt permission command" (also called interrupt permission commands) out of multiple "interrupt permission commands" since the power-on process began. By configuring it in this way, the designed time until the timer interrupt process can be executed is longer than when the program (instructions) is being executed normally (or the timer interrupt process is not executed), so the gaming store staff can determine whether the voltage started up in an unstable state by whether the timing of the display of the number of credits (lighting of the credit number display) due to the timer interrupt process, the timing of the lighting of the MAX BET lamp, and the timing of the lighting of the medal insertion possible lamp were abnormal. It should be noted that, to repeat, after the interrupt mode is set, the timer interrupt process can actually be executed after a command to permit the interrupt is issued. Here, the interrupt mode can be set by processing after address yyyyh, or by processing the address before jumping to address yyyyh.

<Power-on processing, timer interrupt processing interrupt vector addresses, and relationship with other programs>
<Pattern 1> in FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt vector addresses of the power-on process and the timer interrupt process and other programs. Various explanations will be made using this <Pattern 1>. A part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored from address 0000h to address 0003h. The interrupt vector addresses of the timer interrupt process are stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h. The first process is stored from address 0008h. The second process is stored from address 0010h. The third process is stored at address 0018h. The fourth process is stored from address 0020h. The fifth process is stored from address 0028h. The sixth process is stored from address 0030h. The seventh process is stored from address 0038h. The eighth process is stored from address 0040h. The timer interrupt process is stored in addresses xxxxh (xxxx is a predetermined value in hexadecimal notation) to XXXXh (XXXX is a predetermined value in hexadecimal notation). The continuation of the power-on process is stored in addresses yyyyh (yyyy is a predetermined value in hexadecimal notation) to YYYYh (YYYY is a predetermined value in hexadecimal notation). Note that the areas enclosed by dashed lines are where other programs (commands) are stored.

Here, the first process, the second process, the third process, the fourth process, the fifth process, the sixth process, the seventh process, and the eighth process refer to processes (programs) called by a special call instruction (RST instruction). The special call instruction (RST instruction) is an instruction used to call a program (instruction) at a specific address (0008h, 0010h, 0018h, 0020h, 0028h, 0030h, 0038h, 0040h), unlike a normal call instruction (CALL instruction), and is an instruction that can call a program (instruction) with a smaller program capacity and a shorter processing time (fewer number of states) than a normal call instruction (CALL instruction). For example, the following is a comparison of the use of a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) and the use of a special call instruction (RST instruction) when calling the first process starting from 0008h.
A) When calling a program at address 0008h using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction): CALL 0008h (program size: 3 bytes, number of states: 5)
a) When calling a program at address 0008h using a special call instruction (RST instruction): RST 08h (program capacity: 1 byte, number of states: 4)
As described above, the program capacity used can be reduced to 1/2 or less when the program (instruction) at the specific address is called using the special instruction (RST instruction) compared to when the program (instruction) at the specific address is called using the normal call instruction (CALL instruction). In addition, the processing time required to call the program (instruction) at the specific address can also be shortened. Therefore, it is preferable that at least one of the first process, the second process, the third process, the fourth process, the fifth process, the sixth process, the seventh process, and the eighth process called (executed) by the special call instruction (RST instruction) is a process that is called multiple times between an operation for starting a certain game (e.g., turning on the start switch) and an operation for starting the next game of the certain game (e.g., turning on the start switch). In other words, it is preferable that at least one of the first process, the second process, the third process, the fourth process, the fifth process, the sixth process, the seventh process, and the eighth process is a process that is called frequently. In this way, by configuring processes that are called frequently to be called using a special call instruction (RST instruction), the program size can be reduced by using the special call instruction (RST instruction) rather than using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction).

In addition, the first process, the second process, the third process, the fourth process, the fifth process, the sixth process, and the seventh process, which are called (executed) by the special call instruction (RST instruction), are preferably configured as a program of 8 bytes or a program of 8 bytes or less. For example, if the first process is a program of 8 bytes, the program (instruction) of the first process is stored at addresses 0008h to 000Fh. On the other hand, if the first process is a program of 4 bytes, the program (instruction) of the first process is stored at addresses 0008h to 000Bh. If the first process is a program of 4 bytes, the addresses 000Ch to 000Fh may be defined as follows.
Example 1) Addresses 000Ch to 000Fh are designated as an unused area (storing 00000000b).
Example 2) Another process (another program) of 4 bytes or less is stored in addresses 000Ch to 000Fh. Here, the other process is called by a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) rather than a special call instruction (RST instruction).

In the above example, the first process is a 4-byte program, but the same applies when the first process is not a 4-byte program but an X-byte program (X is a number less than 8). In addition, the first process at address 0008h is shown as an example, but the above example is not limited to address 0008h and can also be applied to the second process at address 0010h, the third process at address 0018h, the fourth process at address 0020h, the fifth process at address 0028h, the sixth process at address 0030h, and the seventh process at address 0038h.

Also, for example, if the first process at address 0008h is a program with a capacity of 15 bytes from address 0008h to address 0016h, the second process called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) may not be provided. However, if the process called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it at address 0040h, which is the last address (the address with the largest value) among the addresses that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) (defined as the eighth process in this embodiment). In other words, for the process stored at address 0040h (the eighth process in this embodiment), there is no problem even if it exceeds 8 bytes, because there is no address that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) at addresses after address 0040h. By configuring in this way, eight processes (the same number of processes as the maximum number that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction)) can be stored as processes that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction).

Note that addresses 0008h, 0010h, 0018h, 0020h, 0028h, 0030h, 0038h, and 0040h are used as addresses storing processes (programs) called by the special call instruction (RST instruction), but these eight addresses are merely examples and are not limited to these. However, it is preferable that the upper byte of the addresses storing processes called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) is 00h. By configuring in this way, processes that are frequently called can be located near the top address (0000h), and during the development stage, processes that are frequently called can be designed first and other processes can be designed later. Furthermore, while a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) is an instruction that is used (stored) both within the control area and in the control area outside the use area, it is preferable that a special call instruction (RST instruction) is an instruction that is used (stored) within the control area but is not used (stored) in the control area outside the use area. By configuring it in this way, when a developer or a third party checks the program, they can tell at a glance that an area with a special call instruction (RST instruction) is a control area, and an area without a special call instruction is a control area outside the use area.

In addition, two examples of processes (programs) called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) are shown, but the processes are not limited to the following processes and can be configured as various processes.
Example 1) Command set process Contents: 1) Disable interrupts. 2) Call and execute the process of writing information to be sent to the sub-control means in the RWM area of the main control means using a normal call command (CALL command). 3) Allow interrupts.
Examples of call locations: When sending information indicating that the reels have started spinning. When sending information to the sub-control means indicating that all reels have stopped. When sending an error type. When sending a setting value. When the start lever is operated and a performance group number is sent, etc.
Example 2) Waiting for interrupt processing Contents: 1) Determine whether or not timer interrupt processing has been executed. 2-1) If it is determined that timer interrupt processing has not been executed, return to 1). 2-2) If it is determined that timer interrupt processing has been executed, end the processing.
Example of a call location: To clear the start-up data indicating that a specific switch (setting switch, 1 bet switch, etc.) has been operated.

As described above, the power-on process starts from address 0000h and continues up to address 0003h. The power-on process is configured to continue from address yyyyh. Specifically, the program following address 0003h is configured to execute a jump command (JR yyyyh) to address yyyyh (since the jump command is a 3-byte command, it uses the program area from address 0001h to address 0003h). The power-on process corresponds to the program start process in FIG. 5. In addition, between addresses 0003h and yyyyh, the process called by the special call command (RST command) and the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process are stored. In other words, all the commands that make up the power-on process are configured not to be stored in consecutive addresses. By configuring in this way, the game store staff can understand that the voltage is unstable when starting up. Specifically, when the power is turned on (immediately after the power is turned on), the voltage is unstable, and the program (instructions) may not be executed correctly (the main control chip does not start up normally). In such a case, if the instructions constituting the power-on process are configured as a series, for example, the next instruction of a certain instruction may be executed without executing another instruction among the instructions constituting the power-on process, and the program may be executed in an abnormal manner. In other words, there is a risk that an error unexpected by the player or the game store staff may occur. However, by storing the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process between part of the power-on process and the continuation of part of the power-off process, for example, if a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) in which the program following address 0003h is at address yyyyh is not executed normally (if the instruction at address 0004h is executed), it will take longer to execute the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards (or the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards will not be executed) than if a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) in which the program following address 0003h is at address yyyyh is executed normally. In other words, for example, if there is a program (command) after address yyyyh to determine whether to switch to the setting change mode ("Setting key switch ON and door open detection switch ON?" in FIG. 5), the time to switch to the setting change mode will be longer than the designed time (or the setting change mode will not be switched to) if the jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is not executed normally, compared to the case where the jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is executed normally. Therefore, after turning on the power, the arcade staff can determine whether the voltage was unstable when the machine started up, based on whether the time it took to switch to the setting change mode was abnormal.

The addresses described in <Pattern 1> of FIG. 74 are merely examples, and a part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored from address 0000h to address 0003h. However, for example, as in <Pattern 2> of FIG. 74, addresses 0000h to 0007h may be stored as a part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on. Similarly, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is stored at address 0004h, but it may be any value smaller than address yyyyh, which is the next address of the program of the power-on process. For example, if a part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored at addresses 0000h to 0007h, and address yyyyh is 1000h, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process may be set to address 0064h, etc. In other words, if a jump command is stored at address A as the power-on processing program, and the power-on processing program continues from address B, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing or the process called by a special call command (RST command) may be stored (defined) between addresses A and B. Also, although the xxxxh address is set to a value smaller than the yyyyh address, the xxxxh address may be set to a value larger than the yyyyh address. Also, although the dashed line portion is described as another program (command), data that is not a program (command) (another interrupt vector address or unused data (data in which 00000000b is stored)) may be stored. Also, although the vector address of the timer interrupt processing is set to a value smaller than the xxxxh address, the vector address of the timer interrupt processing may be set to a value larger than the xxxxh address.

Furthermore, the decision to transition to setting change mode has been given as an example of processing after address yyyyh, but even with processing (not shown) for outputting an external signal (security signal) indicating that the power has been turned on as processing after address yyyyh, the designed time until the external signal is output is longer than when the program (instruction) is being executed normally (or the external signal is not output), so the game store staff can determine whether the voltage started up in an unstable state based on whether the time until the security signal was output was abnormal. Similarly, the processing after address yyyyh may be the first "interrupt permission command" (also called interrupt permission commands) out of multiple "interrupt permission commands" since the power-on process began. By configuring it in this way, the designed time until the timer interrupt process can be executed is longer than when the program (instructions) is being executed normally (or the timer interrupt process is not executed), so the gaming store staff can determine whether the voltage started up in an unstable state by whether the timing of the display of the number of credits (lighting of the credit number display) due to the timer interrupt process, the timing of the lighting of the MAX BET lamp, and the timing of the lighting of the medal insertion possible lamp were abnormal. It should be noted that, to repeat, after the interrupt mode is set, the timer interrupt process can actually be executed after a command to permit the interrupt is issued. Here, the interrupt mode can be set by processing after address yyyyh, or by processing the address before jumping to address yyyyh.

<Stage change production>
In this embodiment, the stage change effect (sometimes called a switching effect) that switches the effect stage that can be displayed on the liquid crystal display is configured to be executable. As the effect stage, there are multiple types of effect stages such as a normal stage and a high probability stage that suggests a high probability state in which the probability of winning the AT is higher than that of the normal stage, and it is configured to be possible to execute a stage change effect when transitioning from a certain effect stage to a different effect stage. This stage change effect allows the effect stage to be switched smoothly. It is configured to have multiple types of stage change effects, and to have a different selection ratio for the effect stage to be transitioned to depending on the type of stage change effect (for example, a certain stage change effect may have a higher expectation of transitioning to a high probability stage than a specific stage change effect, or a certain stage change effect may always transition to a high probability stage). It is also possible to configure the effect to suggest a stay mode (details are omitted, but it is configured so that the probability of winning the AT and the ceiling number of games until the AT is won differ depending on the stay mode) or a setting value depending on the type of stage change effect. In addition, it is configured so that performances corresponding to the performance stage (display of a background image (still image or moving image) on the liquid crystal display, output of background music from a speaker, lighting patterns of specified lamps, or lighting colors of specified lamps, etc.) can be executed.

Figure 45 shows an example of a stage change presentation in this embodiment, which is configured to display UI image A (also referred to as the first UI image), UI image B (also referred to as the second UI image), and UI image C (also referred to as the third UI image) as UI images (sometimes referred to as UI display, UI, or game information image). A UI image is an image that can be displayed on the LCD in the same (or similar) display mode and in the same display area across multiple presentation stages, and information that allows the player to grasp the game situation is displayed as the UI image.

Here we will explain UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C in detail.

UI image A is an image showing the name of the production stage. In FIG. 45 (1), the letters "Beach Stage" are framed, but they may be composed of only the letters without a frame.

UI image B is an image that shows the current number of credits. For example, when the MAX BET switch is pressed and the MAX BET process is executed when "50" is displayed as the number of credits, UI image B is configured to display "50 → 49 → 48 → 47" updated one by one at a speed that the player can see. Note that it may also be configured to display only the number of credits after the MAX BET process, such as "50 → 47."

UI image C is an image showing the payout amount in one game. For example, when "10" is paid out in one game, the display mode of UI image C is configured so that (1) "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 9 → 10" is displayed, updated by one at a speed that is visible to the player. Note that it may be configured so that only the payout amount is displayed, such as "0 → 10". Note that it may be configured so that "0" is displayed after the payout amount is displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), or it may be configured so that "0" is displayed after the payout amount is continued to be displayed and a bet operation for the next game is performed (or when the operation of the start switch 12 for the next game is accepted).

In addition to these, various types of UI images may be displayed, such as the number of games played in one AT, the number of games remaining, a certain number of points to be used in the game (for example, configured to be accumulated according to the execution of the game or the winning combination, and when 1000 points are reached, an AT lottery is executed), the number of games played in normal play, character display, and an outline for displaying a push order navigation image during the AT.

The LCD is also configured to display a background image that corresponds to the current production stage, and in FIG. 45 (1) a background image that corresponds to the beach stage is displayed. Note that the UI image is configured to have a higher display priority (displayed in the foreground) than the background image, so the visibility of the UI image is not reduced by the background image, allowing the player to grasp the game situation at any time.

The type of UI image that can be displayed on the LCD may be changed depending on the game status (normal zone, advantageous zone, RT state, AT, non-AT, chance zone, high probability state, bonus, etc.), or the display mode of the UI image may be changed. In short, the UI image that can be displayed on the LCD may be changed appropriately depending on the game status. In this way, the current game status can be easily understood from the UI image.

The flow of the stage change performance in this embodiment will be described.
First, in (1) of FIG. 45, the current production stage is the beach stage, and the start switch 12 is operated (pressed) to execute a new game. Next, the background image and UI image are blacked out (go dark) from outside the display area of the liquid crystal from (2) → (3) → (4), and a black image is displayed in the entire display area of the liquid crystal, making the background image and UI image invisible (the background image and UI image may be made invisible by displaying a black image in front of the display, or the background image and UI image may be made invisible by displaying a black image). After that, the background image is displayed from inside the display area of the liquid crystal from (5) → (6) → (7), and a background image corresponding to the production stage after the transition (after the stage change) is displayed. Note that the UI image A displays "town stage" corresponding to the production stage after the transition. In this way, by configuring the background image and UI image to be invisible at least for a part of the period during the stage change production, the player can be made to pay attention to which production stage has been transitioned to. In addition, even if the display mode of the UI image is different before and after the stage change effect, the game can be played without any sense of incongruity. When the effect stage is switched by executing the stage change effect, the name of the effect stage after the transition may be output from the speaker. For example, in FIG. 45, the sound "town stage", which is the effect stage after the transition, is output.

In this embodiment, it is sufficient that the background image and UI image are configured to be invisible at least at some timing during the execution period of the stage change performance (the background image and UI image may be configured to be invisible at all times during the stage change performance), and various methods for making the background image and UI image invisible can be appropriately applied. In addition, during the period during which the background image and UI image are invisible (for example, the period (4) in FIG. 45), a predetermined image (for example, an image of a predetermined character or an image of a title logo) may be displayed to create a chance-up pattern stage change performance that is relatively more advantageous to the player than a normal stage change performance (high probability of winning the transition lottery to the AT, high probability of transitioning to a high probability state where the probability of winning the transition lottery to the AT is high, etc.). In addition, the chance-up pattern stage change performance and the normal stage change performance may be different types of stage change performance, or may be similar stage change performances with some differences in the performance aspects.

In this embodiment, the execution period of the stage change effect (the time required from start to finish) is configured so that the execution period of the normal stage change effect and the execution period of the chance-up pattern stage change effect are the same. By configuring in this way, the execution end timing of the effect can be the same for the normal stage change effect and the chance-up pattern stage change effect, so that the game can be played without any sense of incongruity. The execution period of the chance-up pattern stage change effect may be configured to be longer than the execution period of the normal stage change effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the chance-up pattern stage change effect from being overlooked. The execution period of the chance-up pattern stage change effect may be configured to be shorter than the execution period of the normal stage change effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity that the end timing of the effect ends relatively quickly when the chance-up pattern stage change effect is executed, and this sense of incongruity allows the player to sense that it is a chance-up pattern stage change effect.

In addition, the predetermined stage change performance may be configured to be relatively more advantageous for the player when it is executed in the second performance mode than when it is executed in the first performance mode (e.g., it is easier to transition to a favorable performance stage, there is a higher possibility of winning the AT lottery, the AT game number addition lottery, or the bonus). In addition, the predetermined stage change performance may be configured to be relatively more advantageous for the player when it is started based on a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop) than when it is started based on the operation of the start switch 12. In addition, the performance stage and the performance mode of the stage change performance may be corresponding to each other (e.g., the first performance stage executes the stage change performance in the first performance mode, and the second performance stage executes the stage change performance in the second performance mode), and the case where the correspondence is different is relatively more advantageous for the player than when the correspondence is not different.

The display mode of the UI image (color, shape, size, etc. of the UI image), the display position (display area) of the UI image, whether or not the UI image is displayed, and the type of UI image may be configured to vary depending on the game situation (game state, performance stage, etc.). For example, in game state A, UI image A and UI image B may be displayed, but in game state B, only UI image A may be displayed (or no UI image may be displayed), or in game state A, UI image A and UI image B may be displayed, but in game state B, UI image C and UI image D (not shown) may be displayed. For example, the game state A and the game state B may be an AT state and a non-AT state (or a state in which the frequency of executing the push order navigation is relatively low) as game state B, or a game state with an advantageous zone may be game state A and a game state with a normal zone may be game state B, or a state in which the standby demo screen is displayed may be game state A and a state in which the standby demo screen is not displayed may be game state B.

In FIG. 45, UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C are displayed, but the number of UI images displayed and the types of UI images displayed may be changed as appropriate. For example, the aforementioned UI image D may be added, or UI image A may not be displayed and the UI images displayed before and after the stage change performance are the same. Also, UI image A may not be displayed, and an image showing the name of the current performance stage may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the stage change performance is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 45, all UI images are configured to be invisible for at least a portion of the time period when the stage change performance is being performed, but it may also be configured so that all or part of any of the UI images are invisible for at least a portion of the time period when the stage change performance is being performed.

Next, the execution start and end timings of the stage change effect in this embodiment will be described.
Here, we will explain the case where operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted before the minimum play time has elapsed from the start of the Nth game, and a stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game.
(1) All reels start to rotate in response to the operation of the start switch 12 for the Nth game. Note that measurement of the minimum game time starts from the timing when all reels start to rotate.
(2) After that, after all the reels have reached a constant speed rotation state, the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, and all the reels are stopped by the player operating the left stop switch 13a, the center stop switch 13b, and the right stop switch 13c. During the Nth game (the period from when all the reels start to rotate until they stop), the UI image remains displayed.
(3) Next, the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is operated, but the reels do not start spinning because the minimum play time has not elapsed since the start of the reel rotation for the Nth game. In addition, a stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game. In other words, even if the minimum play time has not elapsed, a stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game. The presentation mode of the stage change effect here is the same as the presentation mode shown in FIG. 45.
(4) Thereafter, as the stage change effect progresses, the UI image becomes invisible (for example, as shown in FIG. 45(3)). Note that the UI image is continuously displayed from the Nth game until the UI image becomes invisible due to the stage change effect.
(5) Next, the minimum game time elapses from the start of reel rotation for the Nth game, and the reel rotation for the N+1th game starts.
(6) Thereafter, as the stage change performance progresses, the UI image is visibly displayed, and the state in which the UI image is visibly displayed thereafter is continued. Note that, depending on the time for executing the stage change performance, the UI image may be made visible before the minimum time has elapsed.
(7) After that, the execution of the stage change effect ends.
(8) After that, the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes valid.
Thus, in this embodiment, the stage change performance is executed based on receipt of operation of the start switch 12, and is configured to end when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed.

In this manner, in this embodiment, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted before the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the Nth game, and a stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game, the execution of the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is visibly displayed before operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. With this configuration, the stage change effect has ended and the UI image is visibly displayed at the time operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, allowing the player to properly grasp the game situation and proceed with the game without any discomfort.

In addition, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted before a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) less than the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game, and a stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game, the execution of the stage change effect may be completed and the UI image may be visibly displayed before operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective; on the other hand, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) less than the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game but before the minimum play time has elapsed, and a stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game, the execution of the stage change effect may not be completed by the time operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. If the stage change effect were to end and the UI image be visibly displayed before the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective even if the operation of the start switch for the N+1th play is received just before the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of the Nth reel spin, the execution period of the stage change effect would be extremely short, and there would be a risk that the player would miss the stage change effect. However, by configuring it in this way, the execution period of the stage change effect can be guaranteed, and the stage change effect can be executed appropriately so that the player does not miss it.

Also, even if the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of the reel rotation for the Nth game, the stage change effect may be completed and the UI image may be visibly displayed before the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. By configuring in this way, the stage change effect has ended and the UI image is visibly displayed at the time the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, allowing the player to properly grasp the game situation and proceed with the game without any discomfort.

In addition, when the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of the reel rotation for the Nth game, the stage change effect may be configured so that the execution of the stage change effect has not yet ended when the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. In this way, when the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum play time has elapsed, in other words, when the player is not in a hurry to progress with the game, the execution of the stage change effect may be configured so that the player can pay more attention to the stage change effect.

The execution timing of one stage change performance may be configured to include a case where the performance is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ends with the passage of time, a case where the performance is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ends with a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop), or a case where the performance is executed based on a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop) and ends with the passage of time. Also, the execution timing may be configured to differ depending on the type of stage change performance, such as a first stage change performance being executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ending with the passage of time, while a second stage change performance being executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ending with a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop).

Also, regarding the UI images, while the demo screen is being displayed, all UI images may be configured to be visibly displayed, or UI image A may be configured to be invisible (not displayed or given a lower display priority than the demo screen), and UI image B (an image showing the number of credits) and UI image C (an image showing the number of payouts) may be configured to be visibly displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can properly grasp the status of the game regardless of whether the demo screen is being displayed or not.
Also, all UI images may be configured to be invisible while the demo screen is being displayed, or all UI images may be displayed to be visible during a predetermined period while the demo screen is being displayed, but all UI images may be invisible during a specific period different from the predetermined period while the demo screen is being displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display of the demo screen.

In addition, the device may be configured to execute a performance A (which may be a performance that ends in one game or a continuous performance that is executed over multiple games) in which the background image corresponding to the performance stage becomes unrecognizable, and when performance A is executed under a situation in which the beach stage is set as the performance stage, at a predetermined timing after the end of the Nth game at which performance A ends (the timing at which the final stop operation ends, the timing at which the final stop operation is performed and processing related to the end of the game ends, the timing at which a bet is made for the N+1th game, the timing at which the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted, etc.), the device may be configured to display the background image corresponding to the beach stage again without executing the stage change performance, and to display an image indicating the name of the performance stage when the background image is displayed again (if the background image is a moving image, the mode in which the background image is displayed from the beginning and the mode in which the background image displayed before performance A is displayed from the continuation of the background image that was displayed before performance A is executed are conceivable). Note that the image indicating the name of the performance stage may be displayed as a UI image, or may be configured to end the display after being displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) without being a UI image. When the same background image is displayed again, the name of the production stage may be configured not to be output as audio from the speaker, or the name of the production stage may be configured to be output as audio from the speaker.

It may also be configured so that a stage change effect can be executed after the execution of effect A has finished. In this case, the stage change effect executed at a predetermined timing after the execution of effect A (the timing when the final stop operation has finished, the timing when the final stop operation has been performed and the processing related to the end of the game has finished, the timing when a bet for the next game has been made, the timing when the operation of the start switch 12 for the next game has been accepted, etc.) and the stage change effect executed under other circumstances may be configured to have a different display mode. By configuring in this way, for example, when a player starts a new game and a stage change effect that can be executed after the execution of effect A has been executed in the first game, it is possible to accurately grasp the status of the game, such as knowing that effect A had been executed up until the previous game.

Even if the image showing the name of the current performance stage is not configured as a UI image, but is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the stage change performance is executed and then hidden, if it is decided that the stage change performance and the above-mentioned performance A will be executed in one game (in this case, performance A will be executed after the execution of the stage change performance has finished), the image showing the name of the current performance stage may be configured not to be displayed. By configuring in this way, the performance can be switched appropriately.

In addition, the stage change effect may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing (such as the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the timing when a bet is made for the next game, the timing when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated (pressed)) after the final game in the advantageous zone (the game that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous zone and the next game becomes a game in the normal zone) has ended. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly indicate the transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the advantageous zone is continuing.

In addition, a stage change effect may be executed at a predetermined timing (such as the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the timing when a bet is placed for the next game, the timing when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated (pressed)) after the final game in the normal zone (a game that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone and the game will be in the advantageous zone from the next game) has ended. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly indicate the transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, and it is possible to prevent a player from ending the game even though he or she is in the advantageous zone.

In addition, the presentation stages may be a predetermined presentation stage that is set only in the normal zone, and a specific presentation stage that is set only in the advantageous zone, and when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met and a transition is made to the advantageous zone in a normal zone where the predetermined presentation stage is set (when the final stop operation is completed, when the final stop operation is performed and processing related to the end of the game is completed, when a bet is made for the next game, when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated, etc.), a stage change presentation is executed and a transition is made from the predetermined presentation stage to the specific presentation stage. With this configuration, the player can easily know whether or not a transition has been made to the advantageous zone by paying attention to the presentation stage.

The predetermined presentation stage may be configured to be set even when the power is turned off in a predetermined situation in which the game is in a favorable zone and not in an AT state, and the power is turned off and restored without changing the settings, and the stage change presentation is executed before a predetermined number of games (for example, two games) are played after the power is turned on, and the predetermined presentation stage may be transitioned to a specific presentation stage. In this embodiment, since the game is always started from the normal zone when the setting is changed, the presentation stage at the start of the game and the flow of the game until the stage change presentation is executed thereafter can be made similar between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed, so that it is possible to prevent players from easily finding out whether the setting has been changed or not. In this embodiment, the game is configured to satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the favorable zone when an average of just under two games are played in the normal zone, so that the timing at which the stage change presentation is executed for the first time after the power is turned on is almost the same timing when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed.

The stage change effects executed during play in the normal zone and the stage change effects executed during play in the advantageous zone may be configured to be of different types (or have different presentation modes). By configuring it in this way, it is easy to tell whether the zone is normal or advantageous by visually checking the stage change effects.

In addition, in a game in which a stage change effect is executed, the game may be configured so that effects other than the stage change effect are not executed. In addition, in a game in which a stage change effect is executed, the game may be configured so that effects based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not executed other than the stage change effect (effects not based on the stop operation may be executed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change effect.

The stage change performance may be configured to have stage change performance A that can be executed after the end of a specified series of consecutive performances, and stage change performance B that can be executed other than after the end of the specified series of consecutive performances. In this case, whether or not stage change performance A can be executed is determined not based on the result of the internal lottery, but whether or not stage change performance B can be executed may be determined based on the result of the internal lottery (the selection ratio for execution or non-execution differs depending on the result of the internal lottery). Note that stage change performance A and stage change performance B may be configured to have different performance aspects, or may be configured to have the same performance aspect.

Next, the volumes of the production stage background music, stage change production background music, error notification sounds, etc. will be described.
In this embodiment, the volume level is adjustable, and the volume output from the speaker is relatively louder when the volume level is high, and is relatively quiet when the volume level is low. In the following description, the volume level is set to the maximum value, but the same configuration may be used even if the volume level is set to a value other than the maximum value.
The speaker may be configured to have a sound whose volume depends on the volume level and a sound whose volume does not depend on the volume level. For example, the volume of the error notification sound that notifies the first error (recoverable error) may be configured to depend on the volume level, while the volume of the error notification sound that notifies the second error (unrecoverable error) may be configured to be independent of the volume level. The distinction between the first error and the second error is not limited to whether the error is a recoverable error or an unrecoverable error, and can be appropriately set.

First, during "non-AT", at least a beach stage and a city stage can be set as the production stage, and production stage BGM corresponding to the current production stage is output from the speaker. For example, beach stage BGM is output from the speaker during the beach stage, and city stage BGM is output from the speaker during the city stage. Production stage BGM is sound that is output continuously (repeatedly) during a period when sounds such as a specified production sound or a specified error notification sound are not being output. Note that the production stage BGM may be configured to end output when a specified time (e.g., one minute) has elapsed since the end of the game, or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, the system is configured so that stage change performance A or stage change performance B can be executed on either the beach stage or the city stage, and when the stage change performance is executed, a sound corresponding to the stage change performance is output from the speaker. The volume of the sound of the stage change performance is configured so as not to depend on the performance stage before the stage change performance is executed. The sound of the stage change performance may be configured to end output when a predetermined time (e.g., one minute) has elapsed since the end of the game or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, during "non-AT", the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change performance (stage change performance A or stage change performance B) is configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the performance stage BGM (beach stage BGM or town stage BGM). This configuration makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change performance. Also, if stage change performance B is configured to be relatively more advantageous for the player than stage change performance A, the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance B is executed may be configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance A is executed, and this configuration prevents the player from missing the execution of stage change performance B.

In addition, during "non-AT", the average volume of the sound of the stage change performance (stage change performance A or stage change performance B) is configured to be louder than the average volume of the performance stage BGM (beach stage BGM or town stage BGM). This configuration makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change performance. Furthermore, if stage change performance B is configured to be relatively more advantageous to the player than stage change performance A, it may be configured so that the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance B is executed is louder than the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance A is executed, and this configuration prevents the player from missing the execution of stage change performance B.

Next, during "AT", at least the volcano stage can be set as the production stage, and production stage BGM corresponding to the current production stage is configured to be output from the speaker. For example, during the volcano stage, volcano stage BGM is output from the speaker as the BGM for the volcano stage. Also, during "AT", a stage change production may be executed, and in this case, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change production may be configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change production in the same way as during "non-AT".

The sound that is the loudest among the sounds that are output during the AT may be configured to be the navigation voice that is output when the button press navigation is being performed (for example, a voice that guides the button press order, such as "Left!") or a conversation voice of a character talking.

Next, the "error notification sound" is output when a specific error (for example, an error related to the hopper) occurs (the gaming machine detects the error) and notifies the user of the specific error, regardless of the presentation stage or game state. When an error is notified, an image showing the content of the error is displayed on the LCD at the same (or approximately the same) timing as the output of the error notification sound.

In this embodiment, the device is configured to output error background music and an error voice as sounds when a specific error is being notified. The error voice is a voice that says something like "Please call a store clerk."

In addition, for certain errors, the maximum volume of the error voice is louder than the maximum volume of the background music during an error. If the maximum volume of the background music during an error was louder, there was a risk that the player would not be able to properly hear whether it was an error notification or a special effect, but by configuring it in this way, it is possible to properly inform the player that an error is occurring.

In addition, for certain errors, the average volume of the error voice is louder than the average volume of the background music during an error. If the average volume of the background music during an error were louder, there is a risk that the player would not be able to accurately hear whether it is an error notification or a special effect, but by configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately inform the player that an error is occurring.

Note that, although an error related to the hopper is given as an example of a specified error, this is merely one example and may be applied to other errors such as an error related to the selector, or may be applied to all errors including the first error and the second error, and is configured to satisfy the above-mentioned configuration with at least one error.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is louder than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "non-AT", and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is louder than the average volume of the production stage BGM "non-AT". In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is louder than the maximum volume of the stage change production sound "non-AT", and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is louder than the average volume of the stage change production sound "non-AT". By configuring it in this way, the game can progress without losing the sense of exhilaration during the AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during the AT" is greater than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during the AT" is greater than the average volume of the BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during the AT" is greater than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during the AT" is greater than the average volume of the voice during an error. By configuring it in this way, if a specified error occurs during the AT, the BGM during the AT will be output at a volume greater than the sound during the specified error notification after the specified error is cleared, which prevents the BGM during the AT from being difficult to hear and allows the game to proceed without losing the sense of exhilaration during the AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM during "non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the production stage BGM during "non-AT" is smaller than the average volume of the BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM during "non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the production stage BGM during "non-AT" is smaller than the average volume of the voice during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change production during "non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the sound of the stage change production during "non-AT" is smaller than the average volume of the BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change production during "non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the sound of the stage change production during "non-AT" is smaller than the average volume of the voice during an error. By configuring it this way, if a specific error occurs during non-AT, the specific error notification sound will be output at a louder volume than before the specific error was notified, making it easier to notice that a specific error has occurred.

In this embodiment, the display priority of images related to the stage change performance is set to be higher than the display priority of UI images, thereby making it possible to make the UI images invisible for at least a portion of the stage change performance; however, it is also possible to configure the display priority of images related to the stage change performance to be lower than the display priority of UI images, thereby making the UI images visible even during the stage change performance.
Also, a full-screen performance may be configured to be executed, which is a performance different from the stage change performance and displays a predetermined image on the entire surface of the liquid crystal. The full-screen performance may be, for example, a performance in which an image of a predetermined character and a famous line of the predetermined character are displayed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal, and may be executed when suggesting that a so-called rare role such as a cherry role or a watermelon role has been won, or when suggesting that a player may be given a beneficial benefit such as a lottery for transition to an AT or an addition to an AT. Note that, the full-screen performance may be configured to have a plurality of types of full-screen performance. Note that, by configuring the display priority of an image related to the full-screen performance to be higher than the display priority of a UI image, the UI image may not be visible for at least a part of the period during the full-screen performance, or by configuring the display priority of an image related to the full-screen performance to be lower than the display priority of a UI image, the UI image may be visible even during the full-screen performance.
In addition, the execution period of the stage change performance (the time required from start to finish) may be configured to be longer than the execution period of the full screen performance, or the execution period of the stage change performance may be configured to be shorter than the execution period of the full screen performance.

Furthermore, the relationship of display priority between images relating to stage change effects and UI images, and the relationship of display priority between images relating to full screen effects and UI images may be configured as follows.
(1) The display priority of an image related to a stage change effect > the display priority of a UI image, and the display priority of an image related to a full screen effect > the display priority of a UI image (i.e., the UI image is not visible during at least a portion of the stage change effect and at least a portion of the full screen effect).
(2) The display priority of an image related to a stage change effect > the display priority of a UI image, and the display priority of an image related to a full screen effect < the display priority of a UI image (i.e., the UI image is not visible during at least a part of the stage change effect, but is visible during the full screen effect).
(3) Display priority of an image related to a stage change effect < display priority of a UI image and display priority of an image related to a full screen effect > display priority of a UI image (i.e., the UI image is visible during a stage change effect, but is not visible for at least a portion of a full screen effect).
(4) The display priority of an image related to a stage change effect is less than the display priority of a UI image, and the display priority of an image related to a full-screen effect is less than the display priority of a UI image (i.e., the UI image is visible during both a stage change effect and a full-screen effect).
In addition, the system may be configured to always have one of the relationships (1) to (4) regardless of the game situation, the type of stage change presentation being executed, or the type of full-screen presentation, or it may be configured to appropriately change which of the relationships (1) to (4) is used depending on the game situation, the type of stage change presentation being executed, or the type of full-screen presentation.
By configuring in this way, each effect can be effectively drawn to the player's attention.

Note that if two-coin and three-coin bet play are possible (two-coin bet play has a lower payout rate than three-coin bet play), the stage change effect may be performed in three-coin bet play but may not be performed in two-coin bet play. This configuration prevents the player from feeling hopeful when playing two-coin bet play, and allows the player to recognize that playing three-coin bet play is more advantageous.

In addition, if two-coin and three-coin bet play are possible (two-coin bet play has a lower payout rate than three-coin bet play), the UI image may be displayed for three-coin bet play but not for two-coin bet play. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player realize that playing with three coins is more advantageous, since playing with two coins gives the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, if two-coin and three-coin bet play are possible (the payout rate is lower when playing with two coins than when playing with three coins), the UI image may be configured to be displayed for both three-coin and two-coin bet play. By configuring in this way, the same UI image as for three-coin bet is displayed when playing with two coins, so the player is not made aware of a malfunction of the gaming machine and the frequency of the effects (for example, the stage change effect is not executed when playing with two coins) does not give the player a sense of expectation, so the player can be made to recognize that playing with three coins is more advantageous and that playing with two coins is not a malfunction.

<Display form of NEXT image>
In this embodiment, when a continuous performance is executed across multiple games as a performance to notify the result of a predetermined lottery (a lottery as to whether or not to move to the AT, a lottery as to whether or not to move to a chance zone, a lottery to add to the AT, a lottery as to whether or not to move to an AT-add specialized zone (a period with a high probability of winning the lottery to add to the AT), etc.), an image (sometimes referred to as a NEXT image or a continuation image) indicating that the continuous performance will continue in the next game during one game of the continuous performance can be displayed. The display mode of the NEXT image is explained below.

Figure 46 shows an example of the flow of a continuous presentation in which the NEXT image is displayed. Figure 46 shows that the game progresses from "1" in the upper left to "7" in the lower right. If an outcome favorable to the player is to be notified after "7", "8" is displayed, and if an outcome unfavorable to the player is to be notified after "7", "9" is displayed. In addition, "S" in the figure indicates the start switch 12, and a "white circle" or "black circle" indicates the stop switch 13.

At "1" in Figure 46, the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the title of the continuous performance, "Repel the Shark!", is displayed on the LCD, and the first game of the continuous performance has started. At this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle", indicating that operation of the stop switch 13 is valid. Below, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle", this indicates that the stop switch 13 has already been operated and therefore operation of the stop switch is invalid.

At "2" in Figure 46, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a shark swimming from right to left is displayed as an effect in response to the first stop operation.

At "3" in Figure 46, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a shark swimming from left to right is displayed as an effect in response to the second stop operation.

At "4" in Figure 46, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a rippling effect is displayed as an effect in response to the third stop operation. Here, the first game of the continuous effect ends, and the continuation of the continuous effect is executed by operating the start switch 12 for the next game, so the word "NEXT" is displayed in the bottom right of the LCD as the NEXT image.

In "4" in FIG. 46, the display of "NEXT" is configured to be displayed at the bottom right of the liquid crystal after the third stop operation is accepted, but the display mode of "NEXT" may be such that the characters "NEXT" are displayed at the bottom left of the liquid crystal after the third stop operation is accepted, the characters "NEXT" slide from the bottom left of the liquid crystal to the bottom right of the liquid crystal, and the characters "NEXT" stop when they reach the bottom right position of the liquid crystal. In addition, in this configuration, when the characters "NEXT" are displayed sliding and moving from the bottom left of the liquid crystal to the bottom right of the liquid crystal (while the characters "NEXT" are moving), they may be displayed in a mode with lower visibility than when they are displayed stationary at the bottom right of the liquid crystal (such as the characters being displayed faintly, an image other than the characters "NEXT" being displayed, or an effect image with a higher display priority than the characters "NEXT" being displayed). Generally, players play in the order of start switch 12 → left reel 8a → center reel 8b → right reel 8c, so the flow up to when the NEXT image is displayed can be made to be the same as the game progress, making the game progress feel smooth. Also, the NEXT image is configured to be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds can be exemplified, but a different time can be set depending on the consecutive performance) has elapsed since the performance corresponding to the acceptance of the third stop operation is executed.

At "5" in Figure 46, the start switch 12 is operated, and the second game of the consecutive performances begins. Here, a performance is displayed in which a character on a boat confronts a shark.

At "6" in Figure 46, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a shark attacks is displayed as an effect in response to the first stop operation.

At "7" in Figure 46, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the display area of the LCD is divided into two to show a character attacking with a spear and a shark attacking as an effect in response to the second stop operation.

At "8" and "9" in FIG. 46, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image related to the result of the continuous performance (whether the specified lottery was won or not) is displayed as a performance corresponding to the third stop operation. At "8" in FIG. 46, it is notified that the specified lottery has been won, and the words "Repel!" and an image of a character are displayed, and at "9" in FIG. 46, it is notified that the specified lottery has not been won, and the words "Defeat...?" and an image of a shark are displayed.

In FIG. 46, the "NEXT" image is displayed in the bottom right of the LCD as in "4" in FIG. 46, the "Defeat!" image is displayed in the bottom left of the LCD as in "8" in FIG. 46, and the "Defeat...?" image is displayed in the top left of the LCD as in "9" in FIG. 46, so that each image is displayed in a different display area of the LCD. This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize that each image has a different meaning.

In addition, in a plurality of different consecutive performances, the images to notify that the first and second consecutive performances have won the predetermined lottery may be configured to have different display modes (different characters, different display positions, etc.), and the NEXT images of the first and second consecutive performances may be configured to have the same display mode. For example, when notifying that the first consecutive performance has won the predetermined lottery, "Repel" is displayed in the lower left of the LCD, and when notifying that the second consecutive performance has won the predetermined lottery, "Victory" is displayed in the upper right of the LCD, and it is considered that the display mode of the NEXT images of the first and second consecutive performances is the same. In the case of such a display mode, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the NEXT image indicates the continuation of the consecutive performances between different consecutive performances.

Although FIG. 46 shows an example in which the presentation changes with each stop operation by the player, the presenter may be configured to progress over time after the start switch 12 is operated to start the game. For example, even if no stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13 after "1" in FIG. 46, the presentation may progress over time, and the presentation may progress to "4" in FIG. 46.

<BGM during continuous performance>
Next, the BGM output during the continuous performance will be described based on the continuous performance described in Fig. 46. The flow of the continuous performance in Fig. 46 has been described above, so a detailed description will be omitted.

At the time indicated by "1" in FIG. 46 (when the start switch 12 is operated and the first play of the continuous performance begins), a predetermined continuous performance BGM corresponding to the continuous performance is output. Note that at the time indicated by "1" in FIG. 46, BGM corresponding to the performance at which the continuous performance begins may be output, and at the time indicated by "2" in FIG. 46 (when the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 1), BGM corresponding to the continuous performance may be output.

After that, the game progresses with the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation ("2" to "4" in FIG. 46), but the BGM during the continuous performance continues to be output. Here, if the next game start operation (insertion of the first coin, operation of the 1 bet switch, operation of the MAX bet switch, operation of the start switch 12, etc.) is not performed after the third stop operation is performed, the performance displayed in response to the third stop operation (the performance displayed in the third stop operation is looped in a situation where the performance cannot proceed any further) and the NEXT image remain displayed, and the BGM during the continuous performance also continues to be output (if the BGM during the continuous performance is played to the end, it returns to the beginning and is played in a loop). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from leaving in the middle of a continuous performance that may result in an advantageous result for the player. It is also possible to prevent another player from easily taking a seat when a player leaves the seat for a toilet break, etc.

In addition, if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the third stop operation was performed and all reels had stopped without a bet operation or settlement operation being performed and the demo screen is displayed, the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped when the demo screen is displayed and the BGM in the demo screen may be output instead, or the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped and silenced when the demo screen is displayed. In addition, if the sub-switch 20 is operated at a predetermined timing before the predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the third stop operation was performed and all reels had stopped, the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped when the menu screen is displayed and the BGM in the menu screen may be output instead, or the output of the BGM during the continuous performance may be stopped and silenced when the menu screen is displayed.

In addition, even if the demo screen is displayed immediately after the third stop operation is performed and the settlement operation is performed after all reels have stopped, the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped when the demo screen is displayed and the background music during the demo screen may be output instead, or the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped and silenced when the demo screen is displayed.

The system may also be configured so that the demo screen is not displayed during the continuous performance. In this case, if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the third stop operation was performed and all reels had stopped without a bet operation or settlement operation being performed, the volume of the background music during the continuous performance may be lowered or muted.

The system may also be configured so that the menu screen is not displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during the continuous performance. In this case, even if the sub-switch 20 is operated after the third stop operation is performed and all reels have stopped, the menu screen is not displayed and the background music played during the continuous performance continues to be output. After that, the system may be configured to display a demo screen when a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since all reels had stopped, or it may be configured not to display a demo screen.

Then, as shown at "5" in Figure 46, the start switch 12 is operated to start the second game of the consecutive performances, but the BGM continues to be output during the consecutive performances.

After that, the game progresses with the first stop operation, the second stop operation (from "6" to "7" in Figure 46) (output of BGM during consecutive performances continues), and then the third stop operation ("8" or "9" in Figure 46) is performed. When an image relating to the result of the consecutive performances (sometimes called a result image) is displayed as a performance corresponding to the third stop operation, output of the BGM during consecutive performances is stopped, and BGM or SE (sound effect) relating to the result of the consecutive performances is output. Note that once the BGM or SE relating to the result of the consecutive performances is output, it does not loop, and output ends when the playback time has elapsed. In addition, as background music or sound effects related to the results of the continuous performance, background music or sound effects indicating a win (for example, a lively, bright, flashy sound effect) are output when a specific lottery is won, and background music or sound effects indicating a non-win (for example, a disappointing, dark, dull sound effect) are output when a specific lottery is not won, and if the sound effects are set to the same volume level, the volume of the sound effects indicating a win may be configured to be louder than the volume of the sound effects indicating a non-win.

In this way, during a continuous performance, the BGM continues to be played while the NEXT image is displayed, but the BGM is stopped while the image related to the result of the continuous performance is displayed. When the result of the continuous performance is displayed in this way, unlike in the middle of the continuous performance, the sound is silenced, making it possible to clearly notify that this is the final game of the continuous performance.

<Display mode of NEXT image and image related to result of consecutive performance>
Next, the display mode of the NEXT image of each consecutive performance and the image related to the result of the consecutive performance will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 47 is a diagram showing the flow of a consecutive performance (sometimes called the second consecutive performance) different from the consecutive performance shown in Figure 46 (sometimes called the first consecutive performance). Figure 47 shows that the game progresses from "1" in the upper left to "7" in the lower right. If an outcome favorable to the player is to be announced after "7", "8" is displayed, and if an outcome unfavorable to the player is to be announced after "7", "9" is displayed. In addition, "S" in the figure indicates the start switch 12, and a "white circle" or "black circle" indicates the stop switch 13.

At "1" in Figure 47, the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the title of the continuous performance, "Make the Flowers Bloom!", is displayed on the LCD, and the first game of the continuous performance has started. At this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle", indicating that operation of the stop switch 13 is valid. Below, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle", this indicates that the stop switch 13 has already been operated and therefore operation of the stop switch is invalid.

At "2" in Figure 47, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image of the ground with nothing blooming is displayed as an effect in response to the first stop operation.

At "3" in Figure 47, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a flower bud appears as an effect in response to the second stop operation.

At "4" in Figure 47, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an effect in response to the third stop operation is displayed in which no flowers bloom but clouds flow. Here, the first play of the continuous performance ends, and the continuation of the continuous performance is executed by operating the start switch 12 for the next play, so the word "NEXT" is displayed in the bottom right of the LCD as the NEXT image.

In "4" in FIG. 47, the display of "NEXT" is configured to be displayed at the bottom right of the liquid crystal after the third stop operation is accepted, but the display mode of "NEXT" may be such that the characters "NEXT" are displayed at the bottom left of the liquid crystal after the third stop operation is accepted, the characters "NEXT" slide from the bottom left of the liquid crystal to the bottom right of the liquid crystal, and the characters "NEXT" stop when they reach the bottom right position of the liquid crystal. In addition, in this configuration, when the characters "NEXT" are displayed sliding and moving from the bottom left of the liquid crystal to the bottom right of the liquid crystal (while the characters "NEXT" are moving), they may be displayed in a mode with lower visibility than when they are displayed stationary at the bottom right of the liquid crystal (such as the characters being displayed faintly, an image other than the characters "NEXT" being displayed, or an effect image with a higher display priority than the characters "NEXT" being displayed). Generally, players play in the order of start switch 12 → left reel 8a → center reel 8b → right reel 8c, so the flow up to when the NEXT image is displayed can be made to be the same as the game progress, making the game progress feel smooth. Also, the NEXT image is configured to be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds can be exemplified, but a different time can be set depending on the consecutive performance) has elapsed since the performance corresponding to the acceptance of the third stop operation is executed.

At "5" in Figure 47, the start switch 12 is operated, and the second game of the consecutive effects begins. Here, no flowers bloom, and rain clouds are displayed.

At "6" in FIG. 47, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the effect displayed in response to the first stop operation is one in which no flowers are blooming and it is raining.

At "7" in FIG. 47, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the effect displayed in response to the second stop operation is one in which no flowers bloom, but it is raining and thundering.

At "8" and "9" in FIG. 47, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image related to the result of the continuous performance (whether the specified lottery was won or not) is displayed as a performance corresponding to the third stop operation. At "8" in FIG. 47, it is notified that the specified lottery has been won, and the words "Blooming!" and an image of a blooming flower are displayed, while at "9" in FIG. 47, it is notified that the specified lottery has not been won, and the words "Too bad?" and an image of a flower bud are displayed.

Comparing the first and second consecutive performances, the display mode of the NEXT image is configured to be the same, but the display mode of the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance (the image of "Repel!" or "Defeat...?" in the first consecutive performance, and the image of "Bloom!" or "Too bad!" in the second consecutive performance) is configured to be different.

Games that notify the results of consecutive performances often execute performances that are important to the gaming machine (i.e., the selling point of the gaming machine), so interest can be increased by changing the display mode of the image related to the result of the consecutive performance according to the type of consecutive performance in the game that notifies the results of the consecutive performance.

Although not shown, in the game following the game in which the result of the consecutive performance has been announced, if it has been announced that a specific lottery has been won, a first specific performance is performed that clearly indicates that it has been won (for example, a "Bonus Confirmed" or "Congratulations!" display, or a specific lamp on the gaming machine is illuminated in rainbow colors, etc.), and if it has been announced that the specific lottery has not been won, a second specific performance is performed that indicates that the consecutive performance has ended in failure (for example, the LCD display is darkened, a stage change performance is performed, etc.), and the background image of the normal game state is displayed. Here, the first specific performance is configured to be brighter than the second specific performance.

In addition, in Figures 46 and 47, the first and second consecutive performances are each executed over two games, and the NEXT image is displayed once each, but this is not limiting. For example, the first consecutive performance may be executed over a maximum of three games, and the NEXT image may be displayed a total of two times, after the third stop operation of the first game and after the third stop operation of the second game. In other words, the first consecutive performance may be configured to display the NEXT image a maximum of two times, and the second consecutive performance may be configured to display the NEXT image once.

When configured in this way, the first consecutive performance is configured to display the NEXT image more times than the second consecutive performance, and to have a higher probability of winning a specified lottery.

In addition, in the first consecutive performance, the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is higher when the NEXT image is displayed twice than when the NEXT image is displayed once.

In this way, the more times the NEXT image is displayed, the higher the chance of winning a given lottery. With this configuration, when the NEXT image is displayed, it not only continues the performance, but also builds anticipation for a continuous performance. Note that when a NEXT image is displayed multiple times, the first NEXT image and the second NEXT image may be the same NEXT image, the second NEXT image may be larger than the first NEXT image, or the first NEXT image and the second NEXT image may be configured with different colors for the NEXT letters and the surrounding area.

<Display priority of NEXT image and UI image>
Furthermore, when the above-mentioned UI image is configured to be displayed, the UI image and the NEXT image displayed in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display may overlap. In this case, the display priority of the NEXT image is configured to be higher than the display priority of the UI image. In this way, by emphasizing the display related to the continuous performance that affects the player's profit, the player can focus on the results of the continuous performance.

Also, the display priority of the NEXT image may be set lower than the display priority of the UI image. By configuring in this way, the player can properly grasp the game situation even during continuous effects.
In addition, the display areas of the NEXT image and the UI image may be different so that the images are not displayed overlapping each other. By configuring in this way, the player can properly grasp both the progress of the continuous performance and the game situation.

<Display area of caption and next image during continuous performance>
Next, the display area of the telop and the NEXT image during the continuous performance will be described.

In this embodiment, the term "telop" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "telop display," "telop effect," "subtitle," "subtitle effect," or "text information") refers to an effect in which the lines of characters or narration are displayed in text in accordance with the effect displayed on the LCD screen.

In the continuous performance shown in FIG. 46 or FIG. 47, a caption related to the continuous performance may be displayed during the continuous performance. The caption is displayed in accordance with the progress of the continuous performance, which changes over time. Note that if the progress of the continuous performance changes in response to the operation of the start switch 12 or the operation of the stop switch 12, the caption may be configured to be displayed in response to the operation of the start switch 12 or the operation of the stop switch.

The caption is displayed in the lower display area of the LCD, and the size of the caption display area varies depending on the number of characters to be displayed. The caption display area is also configured so that there is a display area for the NEXT image in a straight line to the left and right of the caption display area.

Here, the display of the caption and the NEXT image are configured so that their display areas do not overlap. Specifically, in a game during a continuous performance in which a NEXT image is displayed, the caption is displayed with a relatively shorter number of characters than in a game during a continuous performance in which a NEXT image is not displayed, and is configured so as not to overlap with the NEXT image. On the other hand, although not shown, in a game that notifies the result of a continuous performance, since a NEXT image is not displayed, the caption may be configured to display a relatively longer number of characters than in a game during a continuous performance in which a NEXT image is displayed. Also, if the caption has a large number of characters, the caption may be displayed over multiple lines so that the display areas of the NEXT image and the caption do not overlap. This configuration can prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image with the caption.

In Figure 48, the caption is made up of four letters, "What?", and does not overlap with the NEXT image, preventing the player from confusing the NEXT image with the caption.

When a NEXT image and a caption are displayed at the same time, the NEXT image may be configured to be displayed with effects at a predetermined interval, while the caption may be configured to be a fixed image without effects. This configuration can further prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image with the caption.

In addition, when displaying a caption in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, the NEXT image may be configured to be displayed at a specified timing after the caption is displayed.

The display of the NEXT image and the telop may be configured not to end with the passage of time. In this case, the display may be configured not to switch to the demo screen during the continuous performance even if a predetermined time (e.g., one minute) has passed since a predetermined timing after the end of the game (the timing when the third stop operation is received, the timing when all reels have stopped, the timing when the payout process is completed, etc.), and the display of the NEXT image and the telop may be continued until the start operation of the next game (betting operation, operation of the start switch 12, etc.) is performed. In addition, the display may be configured to switch to the demo screen when a predetermined time has passed since a predetermined timing after the end of the game during the continuous performance, and the display of the NEXT image and the telop may be continued until the timing of switching to the demo screen, and the display of the NEXT image and the telop may be terminated at the timing of switching to the demo screen. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image with the telop, and to make it easier to understand the situation of the game.

In addition, in games in which a NEXT image is displayed, if the number of characters in the caption is large, the caption may be displayed first, and the NEXT image may be displayed after the caption display has finished. By configuring in this way, the period during which the NEXT image is displayed can be made different from the period during which the caption is displayed, so that both the NEXT image and the caption can be displayed clearly without reducing visibility.

The display area of the NEXT image and the display area of the caption may be configured to overlap, but in this case, it is preferable to configure the display priority of the NEXT image to be higher than the display priority of the caption. By configuring it in this way, the player can properly understand that the continuous performance will continue in the next game.

<Display Mode Until the Next Image is Displayed>
Next, the flow up to the display of the NEXT image will be described with reference to FIG.
Fig. 49 shows a case where, when the NEXT image is displayed, something that cannot be recognized as a character (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a slide image) is displayed along a path moving from the bottom left to the bottom right of the liquid crystal, and the NEXT image is displayed when the slide image moves to the bottom right of the liquid crystal. Note that the slide image may be an image that cannot be recognized as a character or some other object, such as "1" to "4" in Fig. 49 (an image showing an afterimage in "1" to "4" in Fig. 49), or an image of a specific object other than a character, such as "5" to "8" in Fig. 49 (an image of a baseball in "5" to "8" in Fig. 49).

In "1" or "5" in FIG. 49, in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, after the third stop operation to the stop switch 13 is accepted, a time t1 has elapsed since the third stop operation to the stop switch 13, or a time t1 has elapsed since the start switch 12 is operated, a slide image is displayed in the lower left corner of the LCD.

In "2" or "6" in FIG. 49, in a game where the NEXT image is displayed, the slide image moves to near the center of the bottom of the LCD screen after time t2 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t2 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated. Note that t2>t1.

In "3" or "7" in FIG. 49, in a game where the NEXT image is displayed, the slide image moves to the bottom right of the LCD screen after time t3 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t3 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated. Note that t3 > t2.

In "4" or "8" in FIG. 49, in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, the display of the slide image ends and the NEXT image is displayed in the lower right corner of the LCD after time t4 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t4 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated. Note that t4>t3.

By moving the slide image from the bottom left to the bottom right of the LCD screen in this way, it is possible to attract the player's attention, and to have the player recognize the NEXT image that appears after the slide image is displayed.

The display area for the slide image and the display area for the push order navigation image may be configured to overlap at least partially. The display area for the NEXT image and the display area for the push order navigation image may be configured to overlap at least partially. In this case, however, the slide image and the NEXT image are configured to be displayed after the third stop operation.

By configuring it in this way, the push order navigation image ceases to be displayed when the third stop operation is performed, so the push order navigation image and the slide image, or the push order navigation image and the NEXT image, are not displayed overlapping each other, and the push order navigation image, slide image, and NEXT image can all be displayed without reducing visibility.

The display areas of the slide images and the subtitles are configured to overlap at least partially and may be displayed simultaneously. Depending on the importance of the displayed content, the display priority of the slide images may be set to be higher than the display priority of the subtitles, or conversely, the display priority of the subtitles may be set to be higher than the display priority of the slide images.

In addition, with regard to the timing for ending the display of the NEXT image and the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance (for example, the "Repel!" and "Defeat...?" images in FIG. 46, and the "Bloom!" and "Too bad!?" images in FIG. 47), the display is configured so that neither the NEXT image nor the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance ends depending on the amount of time that has passed since it was displayed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the player from missing important information for understanding the progress of the consecutive performance.

The NEXT image may be configured to not end its display even if a bet operation for the next game is performed (including a bet operation by operating the MAX bet switch 18, a bet operation by operating the 1 bet switch 19, or a bet operation by manually inserting medals), but to end its display when the start switch 12 is operated to start the next game, and the image relating to the result of the continuous performance may be configured to end its display when a bet operation for the next game is performed. In this way, by not ending the display of the NEXT image due to a bet operation, it is possible to emphasize that the continuous performance will continue in the next game.

The display areas for the NEXT image and the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance are configured to be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 46, the NEXT image is displayed in a specified display area at the bottom right of the LCD, and the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance is displayed in a specified display area at the bottom left or top left of the LCD. In this way, by varying the display position depending on the image to be displayed, the player's viewpoint can be appropriately guided, allowing the player to focus on the entire LCD.

As described above, the NEXT image and the image related to the result of the continuous performance may be configured to be displayed as time passes after the start switch 12 is operated to start the game, or may be configured to be displayed as time passes after the third stop operation (sometimes called the final stop operation) on the stop switch 13 is operated.

The system is designed so that the time (t2) between the operation of the start switch 12 or the third stop operation on the stop switch 13 and the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time (t1) between the operation of the start switch 12 or the third stop operation on the stop switch 13 and the display of the NEXT image.

Specifically, (1) it is designed so that the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the NEXT image is displayed. (2) it is designed so that the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the NEXT image is displayed. (3) it is designed so that the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the NEXT image is displayed. (4) it is designed so that the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the NEXT image is displayed.

This configuration creates a sense of anticipation until the image showing the result of the consecutive performance is displayed.

As mentioned above, the NEXT image is first displayed at the bottom left of the LCD screen, then moves to the bottom right of the LCD screen, where it stops and is displayed. In other words, the NEXT image is configured so that the position at which it starts to be displayed (the display area where it starts to be displayed) and the position at which it ends to be displayed (the display area where it ends to be displayed) are different. On the other hand, the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed without moving from the time it starts to the time it ends. In other words, the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is configured so that the position at which it starts to be displayed and the position at which it ends to be displayed are the same. In this way, by displaying the NEXT image while moving, it is possible to effectively convey to the player that the continuous performance will continue in the next game. Also, by displaying the image relating to the result of the continuous performance without moving its display position, it is possible to draw attention to the result of the continuous performance.

<Navigation image>
Next, the navigation image in this embodiment will be described. Note that, here, the push order navigation image (sometimes called stop operation information) will be described, but it is not limited to the push order navigation image, and may be applied to the above-mentioned eye push navigation image and operation mode navigation image.

In this embodiment, for example, during an AT or other game in which the push order bell is selected as a result of an internal lottery, information suggesting advantageous operation of the stop switch (such as awarding the maximum amount of gaming media that can be obtained in that game) can be displayed on the LCD as a push order navigation image. Specifically, the numbers "1," "2," and "3" can be used to indicate six different push orders, with "1" indicating the stop switch operated as the first stop operation, "2" indicating the stop button operated as the second stop operation, and "3" indicating the stop button operated as the third stop.

The first stop operation or the third stop operation may be configured as a two-choice push (whether to operate the stop switch at reel positions 1 to 10 or 11 to 20, for example, with the push order navigation image indicating either the image of the blue 7 or the image of the red 7), and combined with the six push order options to indicate 12 different operation modes. The push order navigation image displayed on the left side of the LCD corresponds to the left reel 8a, the push order navigation image displayed near the center of the LCD corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the push order navigation image displayed on the right side of the LCD corresponds to the right reel 8c. For example, when "123" is displayed as the push order navigation image, it indicates the push order for operating the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c. In this embodiment, a part of the push order navigation image, such as "1", may be referred to as the "push order navigation image", and the entire push order navigation image, such as "123", may be referred to as the "push order navigation image".

<Press order navigation image appearance>
Figure 50 is a diagram showing an example of the form of the push order navigation image in this embodiment. In Figure 50, the push order navigation image for the first stop operation is explained as an example, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are configured in the same way.

The push order navigation image is composed of a "navigation number image" and a "navigation background image", and is configured to have at least four display modes for the push order navigation image: a "normal mode", a "highlighted mode", a "failed mode", and a "successful mode".

The navigation number image is an image of numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed. The navigation background image is a decorative image around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed, or an image that shows an effect around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed.

First, <1> in Figure 50 is a push order navigation image in normal mode, in which a push order navigation image corresponding to a stop switch that should not currently be operated is displayed in normal mode. Note that the configuration is such that audio corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in normal mode is not output. Furthermore, among the push order navigation images in normal mode, push order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated next and push order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated last may be displayed separately. In this case, a mode can be considered in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated next is displayed larger than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated last, and smaller than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated.

Next, <2> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in an emphasized state, in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated is displayed in an emphasized state. The push order navigation image displayed in an emphasized state is configured to output a sound corresponding to the push order navigation image from the speaker S. For example, when it is time to operate the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a, a sound saying "left" is output. The push order navigation image in an emphasized state has at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" larger than the push order navigation image in a normal state, and is configured to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated. Furthermore, in addition to the size, the push order navigation image in an emphasized state may be displayed brighter than the push order navigation image in a normal state, or displayed in a color or font different from the normal state, to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, <3> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in a successful mode, and when the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated (when the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image currently displayed in a highlighted mode is operated), the push order navigation image displayed in a highlighted mode is displayed in a successful mode. In other words, when the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated in the correct operating mode, the push order navigation image displayed in a highlighted mode changes to a successful mode. In addition, when the stop switch that should currently be operated is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, a sound corresponding to the next push order is output (for example, when the stop switch corresponding to the center reel 8b should be operated next, a sound "It's the middle" is output from the speaker S), and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should next be operated is displayed in a highlighted mode. In addition, the push order navigation image in the successful mode is configured to end its display after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, when the stop switch is operated in the correct manner, a sound effect or voice (sometimes called a success sound) indicating that the pressing sequence is correct may be output from the speaker S. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated in the correct manner not only visually but also audibly.

The push order navigation image in the successful mode is configured so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" is larger than the push order navigation image in the normal mode. The push order navigation image in the highlighted mode and the push order navigation image in the successful mode are configured so that both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are approximately the same size.

Next, <4> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in a failure mode, and when a stop switch that should not be operated is operated (when a stop switch corresponding to a push order navigation image displayed in a normal mode is operated), all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failure mode. In other words, when a stop switch that should not be operated is operated in an incorrect operation mode, all currently displayed push order navigation images change to a failure mode. In addition, when a stop switch that should not be operated is operated to display the push order navigation image in a failure mode, a sound indicating that the push order is incorrect (for example, a sound such as "What are you doing?", which may be called a failure sound) may be output from the speaker S, or a sound indicating that the push order is incorrect may not be output. In addition, the push order navigation image in the failure mode is configured to end display after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). In addition, when a stop switch that should not be operated is operated, the push order navigation image in the failure mode is not displayed, and the display of all push order navigation images may be immediately ended (shorter than the predetermined time).

In addition, when a stop switch that should not currently be operated is operated and all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state, the size of the push order navigation images is configured to remain the same as it was before the stop operation. In other words, the push order navigation images that were displayed in an highlighted state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the highlighted state size, and the push order navigation images that were displayed in a normal state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the normal state size.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time from when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted to when the display of the push order navigation image in the successful mode is terminated is configured to be longer than the time from when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted to when the display of the push order navigation image in the unsuccessful mode is terminated.

This configuration gives players a sense of superiority when they succeed, and when they fail, it is less likely that other players will notice that they pressed the buttons incorrectly, which increases the player's interest in the game.

The push order navigation image may be configured to be displayed with effects for all modes, including the normal mode, the highlighted mode, the successful mode, and the unsuccessful mode, or may be configured to be displayed with effects for at least one mode of the push order navigation image.

In addition, the push order navigation image for all modes, including the normal mode, the highlighted mode, the successful mode, and the unsuccessful mode, may be configured to be displayed as moving images with movement, or the push order navigation image for all modes may be configured to be displayed as still images, or the push order navigation image for at least one mode may be configured to be displayed as a moving image and the push order navigation image for the other modes may be configured to be displayed as still images.

Also, when the start switch 12 is operated to start a game, all push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, and then when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation) may be displayed in an emphasized manner.Also, when the start switch is operated to start a game, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first may be displayed in an emphasized manner, and the other push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, but from the start of display until the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as still images, and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as moving images involving some kind of movement.

This configuration makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the operation of the stop switch has been validated, preventing the player from pressing the wrong button in the wrong order. When the operation of the stop switch is validated in this way, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, or the push order navigation image is changed from a still image to a moving image; this is sometimes referred to as a stop acceptance effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start switch 12 is operated to start a game and the push order navigation image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect (sometimes called a navigation display sound) is output from the speaker S.

At this time, the timing for outputting the sound corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (e.g., "left") from the speaker S may be immediately after the start switch 12 is operated, or when the reels start to spin, or when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. In other words, it is sufficient that the sound is configured to be output from the speaker S at any timing between when the start switch 12 is operated and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective.

By configuring it this way, even if there is a delay in the display of the push order navigation image due to a malfunction of the LCD display, the player can audibly recognize which stop switch should be operated first, which does not impede the progress of the game and prevents pushing the wrong order.

Figure 51 is an example of a case in which the push order navigation image is displayed on the LCD in this embodiment, and by displaying "123" on the LCD, it indicates that the correct push order is to operate the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a → the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b → the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c. In Figure 51, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated first, "1" is displayed in the push order navigation image in an highlighted state, and "2" and "3" are displayed in the normal state.

<Configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and power off>
Next, the display of the push order navigation image when a power outage occurs during the display of the push order navigation image and the power is restored without changing the settings will be described using an example in which the winning-A1 condition device is won during the AT and the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order "left, center, right" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Note that the configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and the power outage described below can be applied in combination with other appropriate cases where the timing of the power outage and the state of the push order navigation image are different (such as the push order navigation image "213" corresponding to the correct push order "center, left, right"). In addition, it can be applied in combination with other appropriate cases described below, such as the <configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and a specified error>.

(1) When the power is turned off before the first stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, since the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. Also, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated as the first stop operation, the voice "Go left" is output from the speaker S. Note that the voice such as "Go left" that corresponds to the stop switch that should currently be operated may be simply referred to as the navigation voice.

After that, while the first stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs and all display on the LCD is terminated (power is not turned on). After that, at a timing (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "predetermined navigation timing") such as when a drive voltage is supplied to the sub-control board after the power is restored and the drawing process can be executed, or when a drive voltage is supplied to the main control board and a command regarding the push order is sent to the sub-control board, the "123" push order navigation image is displayed again on the LCD. Note that the "1" push order navigation image is displayed in an emphasized state, and the "2" and "3" push order navigation images are displayed in a normal state. At this time, the navigation sound is not output again. At this time, the navigation display sound may be configured not to be output again, or may be configured to be output.

In this way, if the power is turned off after the push sequence navigation image is displayed but before the first stop operation, and then the power is restored, the push sequence navigation image will return but the navigation voice will not. By not outputting the navigation voice when the power is restored in this way, the processing of the sub-control board when the power is restored is reduced, and the push sequence navigation image can be displayed quickly.

The navigation voice may be output again when the power is restored. This configuration allows the player to play the game without feeling out of place between before the power was cut and after the power is restored.

In addition, if the game is configured to execute the aforementioned operation acceptance effect when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, the game may be configured to display the push order navigation image together with the stop acceptance effect when the power is restored after a power outage. By configuring the game in this way, the game can be played without any sense of incongruity between before the power outage and after the power is restored.

The push order navigation image may also be configured to be displayed without the stop acceptance effect when the power is restored after a power outage. This configuration reduces the processing on the sub-control board when the power is restored after a power outage, and allows the push order navigation image to be displayed quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation image is displayed again when the power is restored after a power outage, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation may be configured to display both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image", while the other push order navigation images may be configured to display only the "navigation number image". By configuring in this way, the processing of the sub-control board when the power is restored after a power outage can be reduced, and the push order navigation image can be displayed quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation images are displayed again when the power is restored after a power outage, both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" may be displayed for all push order navigation images that are displayed when the power is restored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play without any sense of incongruity between before the power outage and after the power is restored.

(2) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which power is not turned on). Then, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful state, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal state. In other words, the same images are displayed after a stop is accepted when the push order for the first stop on the stop switches is the correct push order.

At this time, the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output.

At this time, just as before the power failure, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in a normal mode. At this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if it was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the power failure. Note that the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" may be configured to be terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since its redisplay, or may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since its redisplay.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if the power is restored during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made aware that the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage was the correct mode.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode.

This configuration allows the player to concentrate on the stopping operations that need to be performed at the moment.

(3) When the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and the power is subsequently turned off before the second stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images is terminated. In addition, a sound saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD display is terminated (power is not turned on). After that, even if the drawing process can be executed after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is not displayed. Also, no failure sound is output at this time to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image will not be displayed again after the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

Also, as described above, if the stop switch is operated in a correct manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal manner. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored (referred to as navigation timing even if navigation is not actually performed), the push order navigation image is not displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the display after power recovery can be appropriately performed according to the game situation before the power was cut, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was cut, the player can return to play without lowering his or her expectations (without inadvertently raising his or her expectations).

If the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed again in a failed mode at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. In this case, too, no failure sound or navigation voice indicating that the push order was incorrect is output after the power is restored. In addition, when the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to be terminated when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has passed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the specified time has passed since it was displayed again.

When configured in this manner, if the stop switch is operated in a correct manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation will be displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation will be displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation will be displayed in a normal manner; on the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, all push order navigation images will be displayed in an unsuccessful manner.

This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was cut off, even if it takes several minutes for the power to be restored after the power is cut off, the push order navigation image for the failed mode will be displayed after the power is restored, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

(4) When the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and the power is then turned off before the third stop operation When the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, when the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD display ends (power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state, so that the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of both are displayed at approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image of the successful state of "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display started before the power was cut off. In addition, when the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is displayed again after the power is restored after a power outage, it may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted manner.

By configuring it this way, even if the power is turned off and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was turned off can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the pressing order. In particular, since the pressing order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can focus on the third stop.

In addition, if the first and second stop operations are performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power outage is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" may be displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in an emphasized mode. In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" in the successful mode are configured to be displayed again when the power outage is restored, even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display was started before the power outage. In addition, when the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" are displayed again after the power is restored, they may be configured to cease displaying a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) after they are displayed again, or they may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed after they are displayed again. In other words, before the power is cut off, the display mode of the push order navigation images changes with each stop operation, so the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" cease displaying at different times, but after the power is cut off, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" cease displaying at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if power is cut off and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was cut can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the wrong order. In particular, by displaying the press order navigation image corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful manner, it is possible to clearly show that only the third stop remains and that the correct press order has been followed.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed correctly and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

This configuration allows the player to concentrate on the stopping operations that need to be performed at the moment.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct mode, the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and the power is then turned off before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, a navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" ceases. In addition, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S, indicating that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, even if the specified navigation timing arrives after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is not displayed. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image is not displayed again when the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct mode, then the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful mode at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed mode. In this case, too, no failure sound is output after the power is restored to indicate that the push order was incorrect. Note that when the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, by redisplaying the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop operation in the correct mode, the player can understand which stop operation he or she performed incorrectly.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct mode, then the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed in a failed mode at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. In this case, too, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect after the power is restored. Note that the push order navigation image in the failed mode may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again after the power is restored, or to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if it takes several minutes from the power outage to the power restoration, the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed after the power is restored, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because there is no payout or only one coin is paid out despite the AT being in progress.

(6) When the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the power is turned off before the third stop operation, the third stop operation is performed after the power is restored, and the power is turned off again. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs, and all LCD displays end (state where power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful state, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. When the push order navigation image for the successful state of "2" (the push order navigation images for the successful states of "1" and "2" if the push order navigation for the successful state of "1" is also configured to be displayed), if it is displayed again after the power is restored from the power outage, it may be configured to end its display when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to immediately end its display even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

After that, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is terminated (if the push order navigation for the successful mode of "1" is also configured to be displayed, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is also terminated), and in a situation where the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, if the third stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the successful mode. Also, at this time, a specified image (sometimes called a GET image) is configured to be displayed indicating that all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode.

After that, when the stop operation is performed up to the third stop, the power is cut off again and all display on the LCD screen is terminated. After that, even after the power is restored, the push order navigation image and the GET image are not displayed. At this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation are not output.

This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, since no new stopping operation is required after the third stop, by not reproducing the push order navigation image, it is possible to effectively allow the player to understand that no new stopping operation is required.

In addition, if the operation is performed correctly up to the third stop operation and then a power outage occurs again, the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be configured to be displayed again in the successful mode at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly see that all stop operations were performed in the correct manner.

If the second power outage occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful state at the specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted state. If the second power outage occurs after the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image is not displayed at the specified navigation timing after the power is restored. In this way, the display content after the power is restored may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the power outage was before or after the payout process was executed.

<Explanation about rare role navigation images>
In addition, in this embodiment, in a game in which a so-called rare role such as a cherry role or a watermelon role is won, a navigation image (sometimes called a rare role navigation image) indicating the possibility of winning a rare role is configured to display "!!!". The navigation background image of the rare role navigation image and the navigation background image of the push order navigation image are displayed in the same or substantially the same manner. That is, the push order navigation image and the rare role navigation image are configured to be similar images, although the "number" and "!" are different. In addition, the rare role navigation image may be configured to be displayed only when any rare role is won, or may be configured to be displayed even in a game in which the result of the internal lottery is a miss or a replay, as a performance suggesting the possibility of the predetermined benefit being granted when it is determined that a predetermined benefit (for example, the first hit of the AT, the addition of the AT, the transition to the chance zone, etc.) is granted.

In addition, since there is no advantage or disadvantage to the rare role navigation image depending on the push order, it is configured to always be displayed at the same size during one game (the size does not differ between the normal mode and the highlighted mode, as with the push order navigation image).

In addition, in a game in which the rare role navigation image is displayed, a power outage occurs at any timing before the third stop operation is performed (when the start switch 12 is operated, when the first stop operation is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), and all LCD displays end (a state in which the power is not turned on). The rare role navigation image is then configured to be displayed again at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. Note that, regardless of when the power outage occurs, the rare role navigation image that is displayed again when the power is restored will be displayed in the display mode after the start switch 12 is operated, such as "!!!".

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, it allows the player to maintain a sense of hope that they may win a rare combination. It also prevents the player from missing out on a rare combination.

In addition, in a game in which a rare role navigation image is displayed, if a power outage occurs at any time before the third stop operation is performed (the time when the start switch 12 is operated, the time when the first stop operation is performed, the time when the second stop operation is performed, the time when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), the rare role navigation image may be configured not to be displayed again after the power is restored.

By configuring it in this way, players can prevent themselves from confusing the push order navigation image with the rare role navigation image.

The rare role navigation images may be configured to end display one by one in response to the stop operation, or may be configured to display all rare role navigation images at the timing when the first stop operation is performed. Also, when configured to end display of the rare role navigation images one by one for each stop operation, the display may be configured to end in response to the stop ancestor operation in the order of the left rare role navigation image, the middle rare role navigation image, and the right rare role navigation image, regardless of which stop switch 13 was operated, or the display may be configured to end in response to the stop ancestor operation of the rare role navigation image at the position corresponding to the stop switch 13 where the stop operation was performed.

<Display of push order navigation image and configuration regarding errors>
Next, a specific error (medal retention error, medal backflow error, hopper empty error, etc.) occurs during the display of the push order navigation image, and then the display of the push order navigation image after the specific error is released will be described using an example in which the winning-A1 condition device is won during the AT, the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order "left, middle, right" is displayed on the liquid crystal, and a hopper empty error occurs as a specific error. Note that the configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and the specific error described below can be applied in appropriate combination even when the timing of the occurrence of the specific error and the state of the push order navigation image are different. In addition, it can be applied in appropriate combination with the above-mentioned <Configuration regarding the display of the push order navigation image and power off>.

(1) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, and then a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation, as shown in FIG. 52, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image becomes invisible (this can be made invisible by ending the display, or by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the LCD screen), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed.

After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image of "3" displayed in a normal mode. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image of the successful mode of "1" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display was started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a specified error occurs before the second stop operation, then at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made aware that the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred was the correct mode.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode.

This configuration allows the player to concentrate on the stopping operation that they are currently performing.

The display mode of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 52 and the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 are configured to have different designs (pictures, font of numbers, color, etc.). In this way, the design of the push order navigation image may be configured to be changed appropriately depending on the game situation. For example, when the expectation degree for the addition of AT is in a normal state, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, and when it is in a high probability state, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 52. In addition, it may be configured to be possible to select a presentation mode related to the presentation tendency during the AT, and when a predetermined presentation mode is set, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, and when a specific presentation mode is set, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 52.

By configuring it in this way, players can visually grasp the current game situation through the design of the push order navigation image.

(2) When the second stop operation is performed correctly and a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation, first, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, the navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the display of the push order navigation image becomes invisible (it may be made invisible by ending the display, or may be made invisible by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the LCD screen), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state, so that the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of both are displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if it was ended because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the power was cut off.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then a specified error occurs before the third stop operation, then at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the specified error can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. In particular, since the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can focus on the third stop.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in a correct manner and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error is terminated, and the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted manner.

In this case, the navigation display sound, the success sound, and/or the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

At this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted mode, so that the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. At this time, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" are configured to be displayed again when the hopper empty error is cleared, even if they had ceased display because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since their display began before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. Note that the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" may be configured to cease display when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since their re-display, or may be configured to cease display immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since their re-display. In other words, before the hopper empty error occurs, the display mode of the push order navigation image changes with each stop operation, so the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" end displaying at different times, but after the hopper empty error is cleared, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" end displaying at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the wrong order. In particular, by displaying the press order navigation image corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful manner, it can be made clear that only the third stop remains, and that the correct press order has been followed.

Also, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, then at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" may not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" may not be displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in the normal manner. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
By configuring in this way, the player can concentrate on the stopping operation that he or she is currently performing.

(3) When the first three stop operations are performed correctly and a specific error occurs afterwards First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, the navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, when the third stop operation is performed (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c, which was the final stop operation, is operated), the push order navigation image "3" is displayed in a successful mode. At this time, all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode, so the GET image is displayed.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and the push order navigation image of "1", "2", and "3" is displayed again in the successful mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, the push order navigation images of the successful mode of "1", "2", and "3" are configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is cleared, even if the display of each of them ended because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the start of their display before the hopper empty error occurred. At this time, the GET image may be configured to be displayed again, or not displayed.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1," "2," and "3" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, after a specified error is resolved, all push order navigation images are reproduced in a successful manner, making it clear that all stop operations were performed in the correct manner.

In addition, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation images of "1" and "2" are not displayed, and the push order navigation image of "3" may be displayed in a successful mode. In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. In addition, at this time, even if the push order navigation image of the successful mode of "3" was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display started before the hopper empty error occurred, it may be configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is released, and the display may be terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be immediately terminated even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to clearly show that the third stop operation was performed as the stop operation immediately before the occurrence of the specified error, and that the third stop operation was performed in a correct manner.

Also, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed correctly and then a hopper empty error occurs, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, and none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be displayed. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.
By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize that he or she has already completed the final stopping operation.

In addition, if the specified error occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation images "1" to "3" are configured to be displayed in a successful manner at a specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, and if the specified error occurs after the payout process is executed, none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" are displayed at a specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared.In other words, the display content after the specified error is cleared may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the specified error occurred was before or after the payout process was executed.

(4) When the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and a predetermined error occurs before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice of "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images is terminated. In addition, a sound saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct mode, the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and then a predetermined error occurs before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, a navigation voice "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

If the second stop operation is then performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in a failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images ceases. In addition, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify which stop operation caused the push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed state. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify which stop operation caused the push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

(6) When the first or second stop operation is operated in an incorrect manner and a predetermined error occurs after the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed on the liquid crystal. Here, since the push order navigation image of "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice of "left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. At this time, since the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, the push order navigation image that is displayed at the time when the push order is not completed is displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the push order navigation image was displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation image is terminated. In addition, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order has been incorrect.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs after the third stop operation is performed, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

<Configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and reel stop warning image>
In addition, in a game in which the push order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery and the push order navigation image is displayed, the above-mentioned reel stop warning image (also called a stop promotion image) is displayed because a predetermined time (3 minutes) has passed since the start of reel rotation (or the first stop operation or the second stop operation) without a stop operation being performed, and then the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation image are displayed at the same time, a power outage occurs, and then at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is displayed again, but the reel stop warning image may not be displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if an unexpected situation occurs such as a power outage during a game, the player can concentrate on the push order navigation image, so that pushing order mistakes can be prevented. Note that the above-mentioned <Configuration regarding display of push order navigation image and power outage> can be appropriately applied to the display mode of the push order navigation image at this time.

<Description of errors related to the hopper 44 and winning lamp effects applicable to this embodiment>
Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects applicable to this embodiment will be described.

The presentation applicable to the present embodiment described below aims to allow the player to properly recognize that he or she has won by executing a winning lamp presentation based on the winning of a small role such as a push order role, or a winning lamp presentation based on the winning of a replay role such as a replay role.
Another object of the present invention is to allow the player to recognize the result of the game before a hopper empty error occurs after winning.

The following describes the configuration related to errors related to the hopper 44 and the winning lamp effect that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Award winning LED lamp>
It is a part (not shown) of the performance lamps (LED lamps) provided on the front panel PS2, and is a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when a prize is won. It is also a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when an error such as a door open error or a hopper empty error occurs.

<Main Control Means>
The main processing of the main control means is as described in this embodiment, the explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects that are applicable to this embodiment, and the errors and winning effects related to the hopper 44 that are applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processing that are omitted in the description of this embodiment will be described below.

＜Pushing order＞
This is a role that can be won by role lottery (internal lottery), and when a symbol combination corresponding to the winning push order role is displayed on a winning line, and a prize is awarded by the prize winning determination process, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed. The symbol combinations that can be displayed for the push order role include a correct symbol combination that is displayed when the player presses the buttons in the correct push order, and an incorrect symbol combination that is displayed when the player presses the buttons in the wrong push order. A correct symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a bell symbol, mainly consisting of yellow, such as bell-bell-bell, on a winning line, and 12 coins are paid out. An incorrect symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a blank-replay-watermelon or other symbol combination on a winning line, and 1 coin is paid out.

＜Cherry＞
This is a role that can be won by the role lottery (internal lottery), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning Cherry role is displayed on the winning line, and it is determined that a prize has been won by the winning determination process, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the Cherry role is a symbol combination that displays mainly red cherry symbols, such as Cherry-Cherry-Cherry, on the winning line, and one medal is paid out.

<Replay role>
This is a role that can be won by the role lottery (internal lottery), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning replay role is displayed on the winning line, and the winning determination process determines that the player has won, a replay is awarded based on the symbol combination that is displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is a symbol combination that displays replay symbols, mainly composed of blue, such as replay-replay-replay, on the winning line.

<Winning process (payout process)>
The winning process is a process of paying out game medals that are predetermined according to the winning minor winning combination (the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed) when it is determined that the minor winning combination has been won by the winning determination process. Paying out game medals here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on the winning (whether it is the addition of credits or the payout from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on the winning. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as output of the payout sound of the game medals, back lamp effect (also called BL effect), and execution of the winning lamp effect. The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a replay win). When there is a loss or a replay win, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by a payout end command. When a replay win is won, the sub-control means can also execute winning effects such as outputting the winning sound of the replay and backlight effects based on the payout start command and payout end command.

<Automatic input processing>
The automatic insertion process (automatic bet process) is a process executed when it is determined by the winning determination process that the replay role has won. In the automatic insertion process, a bet is automatically set to the same number of coins as the number of coins bet on the game in which the replay role won, without inserting game medals. When the automatic insertion process is executed, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits an automatic insertion command to the sub-control means according to the number of coins bet (inserted). In this embodiment, the sub-control means does not execute an insertion effect (output of an insertion sound) based on the automatic insertion command, but may execute an insertion effect such as output of an insertion sound in the same way as when a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received.

Even after the automatic insertion process, if the settlement switch is operated, settlement processing is possible in the same way as before starting play when game medals have been bet or stored in the credits (after the required bet number has been set and before the start lever has been operated). However, in the settlement processing after the automatic insertion process, the bet amount set for the bet is not paid out, and instead, a number of game medals corresponding to the amount of stored credits is paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement) processing is executed.

<Secondary Control Means>
Various effects can be executed according to the progress of the game, and effects such as those described in the explanation of the winning effect, settlement effect, and insertion effect applicable to this embodiment, and the error and winning effect related to the hopper 44 applicable to this embodiment are executed. In this embodiment, a winning lamp effect is also executed.

<Winning Performance>
This is an effect that is executed when a game medal is paid out, or when a symbol corresponding to a replay role is won (displayed), and is executed based on a payout start command, a payout end command, etc. When a game medal is paid out, a payout sound indicating that a game medal is being paid out, a back lamp effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. When a symbol corresponding to a replay role is won, a winning sound indicating that a replay has won, a back lamp effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. Note that when a push order role is won in the role lottery (internal lottery) and an incorrect symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line, it is possible to prevent the winning effect from being executed.

<Dispensing sound output>
There are two different payout sounds of game medals output during the execution of the payout process of game medals: payout sound A and payout sound C. Payout sound A is a payout sound output when a push order role is won during normal times (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops, and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 game medals) is made. Payout sound C is a payout sound output when a cherry role is won during normal times (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and a payout (payout of one game medal) is made.

The payout sound A starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after repeating the output of the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second). The payout sound A outputs the sound for a first payout sound period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the first specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is performed, e.g., about 1.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by outputting the payout sound for a predetermined payout sound period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. As a result, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to perform the performance without being canceled midway.

The payout sound C starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a third sound (e.g., a buzzing sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after repeating the output of a predetermined sound for a fourth specific time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) after the payout end command is received. That is, the payout sound C outputs a sound for a third payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the fourth specific time to the period during which actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (e.g., about 0.2 seconds), and this third payout sound period is shorter than the first payout sound period of the payout sound A because the number of game medals paid out is smaller. In this way, the payout sound C is shorter than the payout sound A, but by outputting the payout sound for a period longer than the period during which payout is performed, the player can be sure not to miss the payout, even though the number is small, and can recognize that game medals have been awarded.
The output of the payout sound is not canceled (ended) by a bet setting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Note that the output of the payout sound begins after the start payout command is received, and continues until a specified time has elapsed after the end payout command is received. However, once the start payout command is received, the payout sound may be output for a predetermined time that is the sum of the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals) plus a first specific time or a fourth specific time, without being triggered by the end payout command.
Further, although the dispensing sounds A and C are different from each other in the above embodiment, the same dispensing sound may be output.

<Winning sound output>
The winning sound output when the replay role is won is the winning sound A. The winning sound A starts when a payout start command is received, and is a winning sound that outputs a fourth sound (e.g., a "ji" sound) until a fifth specific time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the winning sound for a certain period of time, the player can ensure that he or she does not miss the sound, and can recognize that the replay role has been won.
The output of the winning sound is not cancelled (ended) by a payout end command or betting setting (reception of an automatic insertion command), but is cancelled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch acceptance command). The output time of the winning sound A may be configured to end before the automatic insertion is performed, or may be configured to end by the time the game start operation becomes possible.

<Back lamp effect>
There are three different back lamp effects: Back Lamp Effects A, Back Lamp Effects C, and Back Lamp Effects D. Back Lamp Effects A is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and 12 coins are paid out. Back Lamp Effects C is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and 1 coin is paid out. Back Lamp Effects D is a back lamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

The back lamp performance A starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The back lamp performance A is executed for a first back lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (for example, about 1.2 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance A for a first back lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which payout is performed, the player can recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the back lamp performance A is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game can be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of an internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that backlight effect A is canceled (ended) when a bet is set (a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received).

The back lamp performance C starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the third pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the third pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The back lamp performance C is executed for a third back lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (for example, about 0.2 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance C for a third back lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being performed, the player can recognize that the payout is being performed during the period during which the back lamp performance C is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game can be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. In addition, like Backlamp Performance A, Backlamp Performance C is canceled (ended) upon betting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command).

The back lamp performance D starts when a payout start command is received, and ends after repeatedly turning on and off the back lamp in the fourth pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second). By executing the back lamp performance D for the fourth back lamp performance period (the same period as the first specific time), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a replay role has been won. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance D for the fourth back lamp performance period, the player is made to recognize that a process based on a replay role is being performed during the period in which the back lamp performance D is being executed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. Furthermore, when a performance based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that the back lamp performance D is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch reception command).

<Award winning lamp effect>
There are three different winning lamp effects: winning lamp effect A, winning lamp effect C, and winning lamp effect D. Winning lamp effect A is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and 12 coins are paid out. Winning lamp effect C is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), a symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and 1 coin is paid out. Winning lamp effect D is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

The winning lamp performance A starts when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in yellow until a payout end command is received (fifth pattern), and after the payout end command is received, the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the fifth pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The winning lamp performance A is executed for a first winning lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (for example, about 1.5 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp performance A for a first winning lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which the payout is performed, the player can recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the winning lamp performance A is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect A is not cancelled (ended) by setting a bet (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is cancelled (ended) by operating to start playing (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp effect C starts when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp repeatedly turns on and off in red (sixth pattern) until a payout end command is received, and ends after the payout end command is received by repeatedly turning on and off the winning LED lamp in the sixth pattern for a sixth specific time (e.g., 2.3 seconds). The winning lamp effect C is executed for a third winning lamp effect period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the sixth specific time, which is the same length as the first winning lamp effect period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (e.g., about 0.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect C for a third winning lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which payouts are being made, the player is made to perceive the period during which the winning lamp effect C is being executed as if payouts were being made, which is expected to delay the start of the next game, and furthermore, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being executed over a certain period of time, it becomes easier to execute the effect without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect C is not canceled (ended) by betting settings (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp effect D starts when the payout start command is received, and ends by repeatedly turning on and off the winning LED lamp in blue for a seventh specific time (for example, 2.5 seconds) (seventh pattern). The winning lamp effect D is executed for the fourth winning lamp effect period (the same period as the seventh specific time and the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), making it easier for the player to recognize that the replay role has won. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect D for the fourth winning lamp effect period, the player is made to recognize that processing based on the replay role is being performed during the period in which the winning lamp effect D is being executed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and further, when an effect based on the result of the internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch reception command).

Winning lamp effects A, C, and D are configured so that the colors of the winning LED lamps when they light up are different, but the lighting and blinking patterns and the length of the execution period are the same. By making the colors different only, it becomes easier to recognize that the winning lamp effects are effects that result from winning a role. Also, by making the execution period the same as the length of winning lamp effect A, when a cherry or replay role is won, the next game can start earlier than when the correct pattern combination for the push order role is displayed, but because the winning lamp effect is being executed, it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed until the winning lamp effect ends.

In addition, the winning lamp effects A and C are executed from the time the end payout command is received until the first specific time or the sixth specific time has elapsed, but when the start payout command is received, the winning lamp effect may be executed for a predetermined time that is the sum of the first specific time or the sixth specific time and the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals) without being triggered by the end payout command.
In addition, the "first winning lamp presentation period", "third winning lamp presentation period", and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" of winning lamp presentations A, C, and D are set to the same period as the "first payout sound period" of payout sound A, but the "first winning lamp presentation period", "third winning lamp presentation period", and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" may be set to periods different from the "first payout sound period". It is preferable that the "first winning lamp presentation period", "third winning lamp presentation period", and "fourth winning lamp presentation period" are set to the same period, and may be set to a length of time longer than the time required to pay out the maximum number of game medals that can be paid out in one game.

<Error notification>
When an error such as an error related to the hopper 44 or a door open error occurs, the main control means displays an error code on the winning number display 27, and the sub-control means notifies the occurrence of the error with the liquid crystal (display device), speaker S, and winning LED lamp. The winning LED lamp lights up in red during the period when the occurrence of the error is being notified. The winning LED lamp also lights up in red when a cherry wins, but by making the lamp continue to light up in red during the error notification, the pattern is made different from when a cherry wins, making it possible to distinguish whether the lamp is notifying the occurrence of an error or a win.

＜Settlement performance＞
This is an effect that is executed when the game medals are settled, and a settlement sound (settlement effect) is output to indicate that the game medals are being paid out, and a sound is output to indicate that the settlement is complete. Since the settlement effect does not use the winning LED lamp or back lamp, even if the medals are paid out, it is easy to recognize that it is different from the effect based on the winning of a small role or a replay role.

Below, various effects that are executed according to the progress of the game will be explained with reference to Figures 53 to 62. Figure 53 is a time chart when the insertion operation is not performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, Figure 54 is a time chart when the insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, Figure 55 is a time chart when the insertion operation is not performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed, Figure 56 is a time chart when the insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed, and Figure 57 is a time chart when no game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay role is completed. FIG. 58 is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 59 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push order role is completed, FIG. 60 is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 61 is a time chart when a payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 62 is a time chart when a payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper retention error occurs).

Note that for ease of explanation, ON and OFF are used in Figs. 53 to 62, but the status of the corresponding process or presentation is written in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/prize winning lamp presentation (prize winning LED lamp)/BL presentation/settlement presentation/error notification (prize winning LED lamp), ON indicates that the process is being executed, OFF indicates that the process is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the process has started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that the process has ended. For the payout sound/insertion sound/prize winning sound, ON indicates that the game is being output, and OFF indicates that the game is not being output. For the MAX bet lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that the lamp is lit, and OFF indicates that the lamp is off. For the MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that the operation has been performed, and OFF indicates that the operation has not been performed. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 normally (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that no game medal has been inserted. For error (hopper empty) and error (hopper stuck), ON indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. For error display, ON indicates that an error code is being displayed by the main control means or an error screen is being displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates that no error code or error screen is being displayed.

It can also be combined with the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, result announcement effect, push effect, and comment effect described above, and times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 31 to 41 are the same as times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 53 to 62.

<If the MAX BET switch is not used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order is completed>
FIG. 53 shows a case where the correct symbol combination is displayed and stopped in the correct push order as a winning push order role. At the timing of time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound A (written as payout sound in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command, the winning lamp performance A (written as winning lamp performance in the figure, the same below) on the winning LED lamp, and the back lamp performance A (written as BL performance in the figure, the same below) on the back lamp. The time related to the payout process is 1.5 seconds when it is normally executed (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out). At the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means continues the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp performance A, and the back lamp performance A as the winning performance for the T1 period (first specific time) based on the payout end command.

After the payout process is completed at time t1, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. The main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert game medals at time t2. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, since the T1 period has passed since time t1, the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound A, winning lamp presentation A, and back lamp presentation A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period, the first back lamp presentation period, and the first winning lamp presentation period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing to output payout sound A, continuing winning lamp presentation A, and back lamp presentation A, while turning on the MAX BET lamp, from time t1 onwards. By continuing to output payout sound A, winning lamp presentation A, and back lamp presentation A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET, improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX BET switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order is completed>
FIG. 54 shows a case where the correct symbol combination is displayed and the correct push order is operated as the winning of the push order role, and the winning is achieved. Until the timing of time t2, it is the same as the case where the MAX bet switch is not inserted after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is inserted. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp performance A, and outputs the insertion sound A (written as the insertion sound in the figure, the same below) three times as the insertion performance from the timing of time t3 to the timing of time t4 (during the T2 period). Even if various situations such as the output of the payout sound A and the winning lamp performance A are combined at the timing after time t3, smooth control is possible, and thus the player can recognize that the payout has been performed, while also being aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been performed, and the performance of the gaming machine can be improved. At time t3, the payout sound A is output and the winning lamp effect A continues, but the back lamp effect A is ended, allowing the user to visually recognize that a bet has been set. Note that, although the explanation has been given in the case of inserting a coin using the MAX bet switch in FIG. 43, the back lamp effect A is ended and the insertion sound A is output in the same manner when an inserting operation using the 1 bet switch or inserting a coin is performed.

<If the MAX BET switch is not used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the Cherry winning combination is completed>
FIG. 55 shows a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role is displayed on the pay line and a prize is won. At the timing of time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound C (written as payout sound in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command, the winning LED lamp's winning lamp effect C (written as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same below), and the back lamp effect C (written as BL effect in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command. The time related to the payout process is 0.2 seconds when it is normally executed (in this example, one game medal is normally paid out). At the timing of time t19, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues to output the payout sound C as a winning effect for a T4 period (fourth specific time) until time t24, executes the winning lamp effect C for a T6 period (sixth specific time) until time t5, and continues to execute the back lamp effect C for a T1 period (first specific time) until time t23.

After the payout process is completed at time t19, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. The main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp at time t20 based on the fact that it is possible to insert game medals. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. (Note that this diagram assumes that there is enough credit accumulated to allow bet setting by operating the MAX BET switch. If it is not possible to set a bet by operating the MAX BET switch, the game medals will be able to be inserted at time t20, but the MAX BET lamp will not be lit.)

At time t23, a period T1 has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t23 can be considered the third back lamp effect period. At time t24, a period T4 has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound C. In other words, the period from time t0 to t24 can be considered the third payout sound period. At time t5, a period T6 has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends winning lamp effect C. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the third winning lamp effect period. As described above, from time t19 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing to output the payout sound C, continuing the winning lamp presentation C and the back lamp presentation C, and turning on the MAX BET lamp. By continuing to output the payout sound C, the winning lamp presentation C, and the back lamp presentation C, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET, improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX BET switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the Cherry winning combination is completed>
FIG. 56 shows a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the Cherry role is stopped and displayed on the pay line, and a prize is won. Until the timing of time t20, it is the same as the case where the MAX BET switch is not inserted after the payout process based on the Cherry role is completed, and at the timing of time t21, the MAX BET switch is inserted. By operating the MAX BET switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX BET lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect C, and outputs the insertion sound A (referred to as the insertion sound in the figure, the same below) three times, since three coins are bet by the insertion operation of the MAX BET switch as the insertion effect from the timing of time t21 to the timing of time t22 (during the T2 period). At the timing after time t21, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting the payout sound C and performing the winning lamp presentation C while outputting the insertion sound A, and this allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made while also being aware that the MAX BET switch has been operated and a bet has been set, improving the performance of the gaming machine. Also, at the timing of time t21, the output of the payout sound C and the winning lamp presentation C continue, but by ending the back lamp presentation C, the player can visually recognize that a bet has been set.

In FIG. 56, it is assumed that there are enough credits stored to allow a bet to be set by operating the MAX bet switch. If a bet cannot be set by operating the MAX bet switch, the machine will be in a state in which a gaming medal can be inserted at time t20, but the MAX bet lamp will not light up. Also, while an insertion operation using the MAX bet switch has been explained, inserting a medal using the 1 bet switch will also end the back lamp effect C and output insertion sound A.

<If you do not insert a medal after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed>
As shown in FIG. 57, at the timing of time t0, the main control means transmits a payout start command with the number of game medals to be paid out being 0 to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means starts output of winning sound A (written as winning sound in the figure, the same below), winning lamp effect D by the winning LED lamp (written as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same below), and back lamp effect D by the back lamp (written as BL effect in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command. The sub-control means continues output of winning sound A as a winning effect for a T5 period (fifth specific time), winning lamp effect D for a T7 period (seventh specific time), and back lamp effect D for a T1 period (first specific time) based on the payout start command. At the timing of time t25, the main control means starts automatic insertion processing and transmits an automatic throw command to the sub-control means. After the automatic insertion processing is completed at the timing of time t26, the main control means turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals.

At time t26, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert a gaming medal. As no medals are inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T29, the sub-control means ends the back lamp presentation D because a period T1 has passed since time t09. In other words, the period from time t0 to t29 can be considered the fourth back lamp presentation period. At time t5, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp presentation D because a period T7 has passed since time t0. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the fourth winning lamp presentation period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D while turning on the medal insertion possible lamp from time t26 onwards, and by continuing the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D, the player is made aware that a payout has been made and is also made aware that medals can be inserted, improving the performance of the gaming machine. Note that this diagram is based on the assumption that the credit accumulation has not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process, and if it is not possible to insert gaming medals, the medal insertion possible lamp will not be lit at time t26 (the blocker will not be turned on).

<When inserting a medal after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed>
As shown in Fig. 58, until the timing of time t26, it is the same as when the game medal is not inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay role is completed, and at the timing of time t27, the game medal is inserted, so that the main control means stores one game medal in the credit and transmits a storage number command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means ends the back lamp performance D based on receiving the storage number command, outputs the input sound B (written as the input sound in the figure, the same applies below) once as the input performance, and outputs it from the timing of time t27 to the timing of time t28. Even if various situations such as the output of the input sound B are combined while the winning lamp performance D is performed at the timing after time t27, smooth control is possible, and thus, it is possible to make the player recognize that the replay role has won, while also making the player recognize that a valuable input has been made and one medal has been stored, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Furthermore, at the timing of time t27, the winning lamp effect D continues, but by ending the back lamp effect D, it is possible to visually recognize that the points have been accumulated in the credits.
In addition, in this diagram, it is assumed that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process (the accumulated number is 48 or less), and the state in which game medals can be inserted continues even if one game medal is inserted.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed>
As shown in Figure 59, up until the timing of time t2, the operation is the same as when the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the settlement switch is operated instead of the MAX bet switch.
At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX BET lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp performance A, and the back lamp performance A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the lapse of the T1 period. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is started as the settlement performance. Note that the settlement sound is output as the settlement performance, but the performance using the back lamp and the winning LED lamp is not performed. When the settlement process is started, in order to prevent the player from being confused by the simultaneous output of the payout sound A and the output of the settlement sound, the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp performance A, and the back lamp performance A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, are ended by the start of the settlement process, and the performance using the back lamp and the winning LED lamp is not performed, so that the player can accurately recognize that the settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role has ended>
As shown in FIG. 60, up until time t26, the process is the same as when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, and at time t30, the settlement switch is operated.
At the timing of time t30, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the medal insertion possible lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp effect D at the timing of time t30 without waiting for the passage of the T7 period and the back lamp effect D at the timing of time t30 without waiting for the passage of the T7 period and the T1 period. After that, based on the settlement start command, the output of the settlement sound is started as the settlement effect. Note that the settlement sound is output, but the effects using the back lamp and the winning LED lamp are not performed. Since the settlement process has started, the winning lamp effect D and the back lamp effect D, which were scheduled to continue for the T7 period and the T1 period, are ended, and the effects using the back lamp and the winning LED lamp are not performed, so that the player can recognize that the settlement process is being performed. Note that in this figure, it is assumed that the accumulation of credits has not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process and that 19 or more coins are accumulated.

<When payout is not performed normally after winning the Cherry role (when a hopper empty error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 61, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, the game medals are not paid out and the rotation of the rotating wheel continues. Then, at the timing of time t17, the main control means judges that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, displays an error screen, and executes an error notification using the winning LED lamp. Note that the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are continuously executed until the timing of time t17. Until time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as a winning lamp effect and flashes repeatedly, but at time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as an error notification, so although it is the same red, the lighting pattern is different, so it can be recognized that the winning lamp effect has switched to an error notification. Note that this figure shows a case in which a hopper empty error occurs without a single medal being paid out after the start of the payout process, and if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper empty error occurs will be later than time t17 by the amount of medals paid out.

<If payout is not performed normally after winning the Cherry role (when a hopper retention error occurs)>
As shown in FIG. 62, the main control means starts the payout process at the timing of time t0, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After the timing of time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of the game medals is not executed because the game medals are stuck in the outlet of the hopper 44. Then, at the timing of time t18, since the payout sensor of the hopper 44 has continuously detected the game medals for 201 ms or more since the start of the payout process, the main control means judges that the game medals are stuck, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. Similarly, at the timing of time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of the hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, and displays an error screen.

The output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are executed from the start of the payout process, and are executed before the payout process starts and a hopper retention error occurs, so it is possible to check the winning effects such as the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C before the error screen is displayed. Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs when not a single medal is paid out after the start of the payout process. In a situation where multiple game medals are paid out, if a hopper retention error occurs after some of the multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of the payout of some of the game medals, and the period for executing the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C will be longer.

<Changes in form>
The time required to normally pay out 12 game medals is set to 1.5 seconds, and the time required to normally pay out one game medal is set to 0.2 seconds, but the payout time may be varied depending on the number of medals to be paid out and whether the payout process involves only adding credits or includes paying out game medals from the hopper 44. In this case, the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44 may be configured to be longer than the time required to add one game medal to credits. Conversely, the time required to add one game medal to credits may be configured to be longer than the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44.

In the winning lamp performance, the lamp is illuminated in a color according to the type of winning combination (yellow when the push order combination is won and the correct symbol combination is won, red when the cherry combination is won, and blue when the replay combination is won), but the color of the light may be a common color (e.g., white) regardless of the type of winning combination. By using a common color, it is possible to simply notify that a certain combination has been won regardless of the symbol combination (outcome) that stops on the reel. Also, the winning lamp performance can be executed regardless of the color of the symbol corresponding to the role that stops on the winning line, preventing misconception.
In addition, the common color regardless of the type of role may be the same white for all roles, or may be divided into several groups according to the type of role (white for bell roles and replay roles, purple for cherry roles and watermelon roles).

The winning lamp effect is executed for a time determined by the role after receiving the payout end command, but it may be executed for a time determined by the role after receiving the payout start command. For example, it may be executed for 2.5 seconds when the correct symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role, or the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.
The execution period of the winning lamp effect is the same as the output period of the payout sound, but it may be a different period. Also, the execution period of the winning lamp effect is the same as the output period of the back lamp effect, but it may be a different period. The execution period of the winning lamp effect can be longer than the time required for the payout process (1.5 seconds) and shorter than the time required for the hopper empty error to be set (3.5 seconds).

Although the winning lamp effect A is executed during normal times (non-AT), it may be executed during the AT as well. Also, the color may be the same, but the pattern of lighting and extinguishing or the execution time may be different. Also, it may not be executed during the AT. By not executing it during the AT, the winning lamp effect is executed each time for the correct combination of push order roles, which has increased the frequency of winning, and it is possible to prevent the player from being bothered.
Similarly, other roles (cherry role, replay role) may be configured to be executed during the AT, or may not be executed during the AT.

Although the winning lamp effect is not terminated by the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (reception of the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a game medal (reception of the reserve number command), it may be terminated by the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (reception of the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a game medal (reception of the reserve number command). After the replay combination is won, the winning lamp effect may not be terminated in the automatic bet process, but may be terminated when a game medal is inserted thereafter.
Although the back lamp effect is said to end when the MAX bet switch is inserted (received the reserve insertion command) and when a gaming medal is inserted (received the reserve number command), it may be configured so that it does not end.

Although it has been stated that the winning LED lamp will not be used as the settlement effect, it may be used. This may be the same as the error notification that is performed when an error occurs, or it may be a different effect from the winning lamp effect that is performed when an error is notified or when a winning combination is won. As a different effect, it is desirable that one of the light color, blinking pattern, or time of the winning LED lamp is different, so that it can be recognized as being different from the error notification and winning lamp effects.

When an error occurs, an error is notified using the winning LED lamp, but when the power is turned on or a door open error occurs, the winning LED lamp may also be used to notify an error in the same manner as when a hopper empty error occurs. When the power is turned on, the winning LED lamp continues for a certain period of time, and when a door open error occurs, the winning LED lamp continues until the door is closed or until a certain period of time has passed since the door was closed. In these situations, gameplay can continue, and there is a possibility that the execution of the error notification and the execution of the winning lamp presentation may overlap. In the event that they overlap, the error notification may be prioritized over the winning lamp presentation. Prioritizing the error notification may be configured to not execute the winning lamp presentation while the error notification is being executed, even if the opportunity to execute the winning lamp presentation is met. Also, when an error notification is executed while the winning lamp presentation is being executed, the winning lamp presentation may be ended and the error notification executed.

Also, giving priority to error notification can mean that the winning LED lamp will light up in a way that corresponds to the error notification when an error notification is being executed. Specifically, it can be configured so that when the trigger for executing the winning lamp effect is met, the winning lamp effect is executed, while the winning LED lamp only emits light corresponding to the error notification when it is the period for executing the error notification, and when the period for executing the error notification has ended and the period for executing the winning lamp effect is still ongoing, the winning LED lamp emits light corresponding to the winning lamp effect.

The winning lamp effect is executed when the correct symbol combination stops in a game in which the push order role is won, when the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops, but it may be configured to be executed when the push order does not matter role (so-called shared bell), which executes an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) regardless of the push order, stops a symbol combination corresponding to the push order does not matter role (correct symbol combination). It may also be configured to be executed when other roles such as watermelon role and chance role are won.
Furthermore, the times and lengths of the periods described in the above embodiments are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

<Correct operation challenge effect installed in the gaming machine in this embodiment>
The gaming machine in this embodiment is provided with an effect that notifies only that the push order role has been won without notifying the correct push order when the push order role is won, and this effect is called the push order challenge effect. In addition, when the push order role is won, the effect is provided with an effect that notifies only that the push order role has been won without notifying the correct push position, and this effect is called the push order challenge effect. In addition, when the push order + push order role is won, the effect is provided with an effect that notifies only that the push order + push order role has been won without notifying the correct push order + push position, and this effect is called the push order + push order challenge effect. Such push order challenge effect, push order challenge effect, and push order + push order challenge effect are collectively called the correct operation challenge effect. The correct operation (correct push order or push position) refers to an operation in which the high bell of the push order bell stops.

When the push order + pressing role is selected, the correct push order may be announced but not the correct pressing position, or the correct pressing position may be announced but not the correct push order. In such cases, this may be referred to as a push order + pressing challenge performance, or simply a push order challenge performance or a pressing challenge performance. In any case, these modes are all referred to as a correct operation challenge performance.

The correct operation challenge performance also includes a mode in which only the first stop is not announced when a six-choice push order role is won (in other words, the player is prompted to guess the correct push order of the three options for the first stop), and a mode in which the first stop is announced but the second stop is not announced (in other words, the player is prompted to guess the correct push order of the two options for the second stop).

The correct operation challenge performance includes a feature that notifies the player that one of the three possible pressing positions is different when the pressing position is selected (in other words, the player is prompted to guess the pressing positions of the remaining two possible pressing positions).

If the high bell symbol combination stops due to the player's operation after the correct operation challenge performance is executed (if the correct operation challenge performance is successful), a bonus according to the game status is awarded. For example, during normal play, this is an AT lottery or CZ lottery, and during the AT, this is a lottery for extending the number of AT games (a so-called additional lottery).

The correct operation challenge effect may be executed in a predetermined game state managed by the main control means, or may be executed by lottery when a role eligible for the correct operation challenge effect is won.

An example of a reel arrangement for realizing the correct operation challenge presentation will be explained based on Figure 63.

As shown in Figure 63, each reel has 20 symbols, with "Yellow Seven", "Red Seven", "Bar", and "White Seven" being large symbols that are easy to target. The "Yellow Seven", "Red Seven", "Bar", and "White Seven" are each different in color, with yellow, red, black, and white being prominent, respectively, and because they are larger in size and different in color than the other symbols, they are easy for players to recognize even when the reels are spinning. For advanced players, it is also acceptable to target "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Replay", "Bell A", "Bell B", and "Blank".

An example of a condition device for realizing a correct operation challenge presentation is explained based on Figure 64.

As shown in Figure 64, the bonus condition devices include a type 1 BB condition device, an RB-B condition device, and an RB-A condition device. In addition, the winning or replay condition devices include a replay-A condition device, a winning-A1 to A6 condition device, a winning-B1 to B4 condition device, a winning-C1 to C12 condition device, and a winning-D1 to D8 condition device. Note that the condition devices shown in Figure 64 are only a part of the system, and it goes without saying that other condition devices may be included.

In addition, in the multiple specifications described below, there are some condition devices that are not necessary, and it is not necessary to have all of the condition devices shown in Figure 64. For example, there are cases where the Winning-A1 to A6 condition devices and the Winning-B1 to B4 condition devices are necessary, but the Winning-C1 to C12 condition devices and the Winning-D1 to D8 condition devices are not necessary. In the specifications described below, only the explanation of the condition devices that are absolutely necessary is given, and condition devices not described may or may not be present.

Figures 65 and 66 are diagrams showing symbol combinations for each winning symbol or replay symbol. The left reel column in the diagram shows the symbol corresponding to the left reel in the winning symbol, the center reel column shows the symbol corresponding to the center reel in the winning symbol, and the right reel column shows the symbol corresponding to the right reel in the winning symbol.

Figures 67 to 69 are diagrams showing combinations of winning symbols or replay symbols for each condition device, and control for each stop operation. For example, in the winning-C1 condition device in Figure 67, winning symbols 01 to 04 and 09 to 104 are combined, and when the left reel stops first and the left reel's red seven symbol is pressed, the center reel stops second, and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 01 to 04 can be stopped, when the left reel stops first and the left reel's white seven symbol is pressed, when the center reel stops second and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 25 to 40 can be stopped, and when the left reel stops first, the right reel stops second, and the center reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 09 to 40 can be stopped. It indicates that if the middle reel stops at the first position, the left reel stops at the second position, and the right reel stops at the third position, any of the winning symbols 41 to 72 can be stopped; if the middle reel stops at the first position, the right reel stops at the second position, and the left reel stops at the third position, any of the winning symbols 41 to 72 can be stopped; if the right reel stops at the first position, the left reel stops at the second position, and the middle reel stops at the third position, any of the winning symbols 73 to 104 can be stopped; if the right reel stops at the first position, the middle reel stops at the second position, and the left reel stops at the third position, any of the winning symbols 73 to 104 can be stopped.

As mentioned above, if the left reel stops first and you press the red seven symbol on the left reel, the middle reel stops second, and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 01-04 can stop, but strictly speaking, as long as the stop is within the range that can pull in the bell A symbol, any of the winning symbols 01-04 can stop even if a bar symbol stops instead of the red seven symbol.

As mentioned above, if the left reel stops first and you press the white seven symbol on the left reel, the middle reel stops second, and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols from 25 to 40 can stop, but strictly speaking, as long as the stop is within the range that can pull in the bell B symbol, any of the winning symbols from 25 to 40 can stop even if the yellow seven symbol stops instead of the white seven symbol.

Also, since Figures 67 to 69 do not list all winning symbols, but only list the necessary winning symbols, some winning symbol combinations are the same even for different condition devices. For example, Winning-A1 and Winning-A2 in Figure 67 list the same winning symbol combination, but the stop control is different. Originally, in order to make the stop control of Winning-A1 and Winning-A2 different, it would be necessary to add a winning symbol with PB=1 for one payout to Winning-A2, or to create a different winning symbol combination, but this will be omitted to avoid complicating the explanation. In other words, if there is a description that the same winning symbol combination has different stop control, the addition of a winning symbol that is not listed will result in a different winning symbol combination.

In addition, the first stop symbols for the winning symbols C1 to C12 and winning symbols D1 to D8 shown in Figures 67 to 69 are either a red seven or a white seven, but this is not limiting, and the first stop symbols may be replaced with a yellow seven or a bar.

The first stop may not have a pressing pattern, and the third stop's pattern may be pressed by eye. In this case, for example, if the condition device has 12 options, such as Win-C1 to Win-C12, the first stop will have 3 options for the pressing order, the second stop will have 2 options for the pressing order, and the third stop will have 2 options for the pressing pattern, making the number of correct options 12. The second and third stops may not have a pressing pattern, and the second stop's pattern may be pressed by eye. In this case, for example, if the condition device has 12 options, such as Win-C1 to Win-C12, the first stop will have 3 options for the pressing order, the second stop will have 4 options for the pressing order and the pressing pattern, and the third stop will have 1 option, making the number of correct options 12.

In addition, in the "Note 1" column of Figures 67 to 69, "123" indicates that the left reel stops at the first position, the center reel stops at the second position, and the right reel stops at the third position, "132" indicates that the left reel stops at the first position, the right reel stops at the second position, and the center reel stops at the third position, "213" indicates that the center reel stops at the first position, the left reel stops at the second position, and the right reel stops at the third position, "231" indicates that the center reel stops at the first position, the right reel stops at the second position, and the left reel stops at the third position, "312" indicates that the right reel stops at the first position, the left reel stops at the second position, and the center reel stops at the third position, and "321" indicates that the right reel stops at the first position, the center reel stops at the second position, and the left reel stops at the third position.

Also, note 1 of Replay-A in Figure 69 shows the stop control in the eye-pressing when Replay-A is won. "Successful perfect press of red Seven on the upper row of the middle reel" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time and a red Seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is less than 1. "Failed perfect press of red Seven on the upper row of the middle reel" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time and a red Seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is 1 or more, or the middle reel is not stopped for the first time. "Successful perfect press of white Seven within the middle reel frame" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time and a white Seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is less than 2. "Failed perfect press of red Seven on the upper row of the middle reel" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time and a white Seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is less than 2. "Failed to press white seven within frame" means that the center reel is stopped as the first stop and the white seven symbol is drawn to the top row of the center reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is two or more, or when the center reel is not the first stop, "successful five-frame press of red seven on left reel" means that the left reel is stopped as the first stop and the red seven symbol is drawn to the top row of the left reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is less than five, and "failed five-frame press of red seven on left reel" means that the left reel is stopped as the first stop and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the red seven symbol cannot be drawn to the top row of the left reel, or when the left reel is not the first stop.

The above explanation of the reel arrangement and condition device combination for the correct operation challenge performance is based on the assumption that there is one active line in the middle row, but this is not limited to the above. The active line may be any one of the following lines: the downward-sloping line on the top left reel, the middle reel, or the bottom right reel, or the small hill line on the bottom left reel, the middle reel, or the bottom right reel. Also, the design can be appropriately done even if there is not one active line but multiple lines.

The winning-B1 to B4 condition devices in FIG. 67 are condition devices that do not have a correct answer for the first stop of the left reel. Similarly, the winning-D1 to D8 condition devices in FIG. 69 are also condition devices that do not have a correct answer for the first stop of the left reel. Such condition devices are sometimes called biased bells.

A biased bell is one in which there is no first stop correct answer for all reels, and there is no first stop correct answer for a specific reel, and there is a first stop correct answer only for the remaining reels. In other words, if there are three reels, the correct push order for the first stop operation is only for two reels, so there are four correct push orders. For example, if there is no first stop correct answer for the left reel, there are only four correct push orders: center left/right, center right/left, right left center, and right center/left. Similarly, if there is no first stop correct answer for the center reel, there are only four correct push orders: left center right, left/right center, right left center, and right center/left. Similarly, if there is no first stop correct answer for the right reel, there are only four correct push orders: left center right, left/right center, center left/right, and center right/left. Note that a biased bell is also called one in which there is no first stop correct answer for the center reel or no first stop correct answer for the right reel. Below, biased bells are explained using an example in which the first stop correct answer is not assigned to the left reel.

The correct push order for a biased bell means a push order that will get you a high-value bell, and the incorrect push order for a biased bell means a push order that will get you a low-value bell or a push order that will result in a small win drop. In particular, an incorrect push order is called an incorrect push order when the reel that normally performs the AT lottery stops for the first time and you get a low-value bell, or when a small win drop is displayed, because you have not gotten a high-value bell.

When equipped with a biased bell, the expected value of the payout of game medals is higher when using a stop operation order other than the first stop on the left, but when using a stop operation order other than the first stop on the left, the AT lottery is favored less than the first stop on the left, or the AT lottery is not executed, so that the overall expected value of the ball payout is made more advantageous when using the first stop on the left. Note that while the explanation has been given regarding the AT lottery, it is not limited to this and any or all of the lotteries related to the ball payout, such as the AT addition lottery and the CZ transition lottery, may be favored with the first stop on the left.

At this time, when a biased bell is won, it is unclear in what order the player will press the buttons to stop the reels, so the AT lottery is performed after all the reels have stopped. For example, if the AT lottery is performed based on the symbol combination after all the reels have stopped, the symbol combination of the 1-coin role that appears when the left reel is stopped for the first time and the symbol combination of the 1-coin role that can stop when the center or right reel is stopped for the first time are configured to be different, so that the AT lottery can be performed based on the symbol combination of the 1-coin role that is displayed only when the left reel is stopped for the first time.

Explaining this based on the winning-A3 in FIG. 67, when winning symbols 09-40 stop, which are winning symbols that can stop when the left reel stops first, the AT lottery is executed, but when winning symbols 105-120 stop, which are winning symbols that can stop when the right reel stops first, and winning symbols 41-72 stop, which are winning symbols that can stop when the center reel stops first, the right reel stops second, and the left reel stops third, the AT lottery is not executed. In this way, even if the pressing order is incorrect, by changing the winning symbols that stop when the left reel stops first and when the pressing order is incorrect in any other pressing order, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the AT lottery just by determining the winning symbols after all the reels have stopped, thereby reducing the program capacity.

For example, when the AT lottery is performed after all reels have stopped, the AT lottery can be performed based on push order information that the left reel was stopped first. In this case, the symbol combination of a 1-coin role when the left reel is first stopped may be configured to be different from the symbol combination of a 1-coin role that can be stopped when the middle or right reel is first stopped, or they may be configured to be the same. The AT lottery may also be performed based on push order information that the reels stopped in the left, middle, and right push order, or based on push order information that the reels stopped in the left, middle, and right push order, or the AT lottery may also be performed based on push order information that the left reel was stopped first.

When it is an advantageous zone and the biased bell is won, the indication information is not displayed on the indication monitor.

By configuring it in this way, the payout rate is normally highest when the left reel stops first, but since the probability of winning a biased bell is relatively higher than the probability of winning a replay, if an instruction monitor instructing the left reel to stop first is displayed on the instruction monitor every time a biased bell is won, it can prevent the player from frequently creating a sense of expectation that a special bonus will be granted, the player from realizing that they have not won a rare role with a higher AT win probability than a biased bell (rare roles have a lower win probability than a biased bell), and the number of payouts when a biased bell is won from being stored in the memory area for the number of payouts used to calculate the instruction-included role ratio by displaying an instruction on the instruction monitor.

If the push order is incorrect when the biased bell is won, it is possible that the 1 coin role that occurs when the push order is incorrect may be obtained, or the push order bell spill (0 payout) may be displayed. The payout for such an incorrect answer is "1" when the first left stop operation is performed when the biased bell is won, but if this 1 coin is included in the instruction role ratio, the fluctuation of the balls paid out will be limited (the difference between when the ball payout rate is low and when it is high will be reduced). Therefore, the freedom of ball payout design is improved by not adding the payout number of 1, which occurs when the first left stop operation is performed when the biased bell is won, to the instruction role ratio.

In addition, when a biased bell is won in a situation where the correct operation challenge effect is not executed, a mode is conceivable in which the effect group number is sent to the sub-control means but no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor. Note that the effect group number can be sent in an advantageous zone but not in a normal zone, or sent in both advantageous and normal zones, but either mode is acceptable.

In this case, for example, when the biased bell is won, the main control means transmits "50" as the presentation group number to the sub-control means. After that, when the sub-control means receives "50" as the presentation group number from the main control means, it executes the same presentation mode as when a miss is determined without executing the correct operation challenge presentation, or a mode in which no presentation is executed. Also, since no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor at this time, it is difficult for the player to tell whether or not the biased bell is won (strictly speaking, it is possible to recognize that the biased bell is won from the stopping pattern combination).

In addition, if the performance group number is transmitted when the biased bell is won, it is known that a minor role can be obtained by the sub-control means stopping the center or right reel first, so there is a concern that the sub-control means may be tampered with to notify the center or right reel to be stopped first when the biased bell is won and "50" is received as the performance group number. In order to reduce the effects of such tampering, the expected value for the difference in the number of coins when the center or right reel is stopped first when the biased bell is won is set to less than three coins (when three coins are played). For example, in a game with three coins, if the biased bell is won and 11 coins are paid out with a 1/4 probability of being center left/right, center right/left, right left center, or right center left (when the difference in the number of coins is eight coins), the expected value for the difference in the number of coins will be two coins for all of the push orders of center left/right, center right/left, right left center, and right center left, which is less than three coins. With this configuration, even if the biased bell wins and the performance group number is received, and the correct operation challenge performance is not executed, and the first left stop is notified due to illegal modification of the sub-control means, the expected value for the difference in the number of coins will be less than three coins, so the difference in the number of coins will not increase. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the payout rate due to illegal modification of the sub-control means.

In addition, in a game with three coins bet, if a biased bell is won and 11 coins are paid out with a 1/2 probability of middle left/right, middle right/left, right left middle, or right middle/left (when the difference in the number of coins is 8 coins), the expected value for the difference in the number of coins will be 4 coins for the push orders of middle left/right, middle right/left, right left middle, and right middle/left, so that the bet is 3 coins or more in such a case, by displaying in advance on the instruction monitor that the correct answer is the first stop of the middle reel or the first stop of the right reel, it is possible to eliminate any room for tampering with the sub-control means. In other words, the main control means notifies the push order without the need for tampering with the sub-control means, making it a legitimate game specification (this information is included in the instruction role ratio).

In addition, when a biased bell is won in a situation where the correct operation challenge effect is not executed, a mode is conceivable in which the effect group number is not sent to the sub-control means and no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor.

In this case, for example, when a biased bell is won, the performance group number is not transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means. After that, when the sub-control means receives a command to stop all reels from the main control means, it does not execute the correct operation challenge performance, but executes the same performance mode as when a loss is determined, or a mode in which no performance is executed. Also, at this time, since no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor, it is difficult for the player to tell whether or not a biased bell has been won (strictly speaking, it is possible to recognize that a biased bell has been won from the stopped pattern combination).

<In the case of a specification that combines 6-choice push order bells and 4-choice push order bells (biased bells)>
As a specification of a gaming machine equipped with a correct operation challenge presentation, a specification that combines a six-option push order bell and a four-option push order bell (biased bell) will be described.

As shown in Figure 67, Winning-A1 to A6 and Winning-B1 to B4 are 6-choice push order bells with no bias, while Winning-B1 to B4 are 4-choice push order bells with a bias.

<<If you execute the correct operation challenge with the 6-choice push order bell and do not execute the correct operation challenge with the 4-choice push order bell>>
It is conceivable that the target of the correct operation challenge performance could be a 6-choice push order bell with no bias from the winning number A1 to A6.

If the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 6-choice push order bell with no bias among the winning selections A1 to A6, the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of the winning selections A1 to A6 is selected, and the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any of the winning selections A1 to A6 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the winning-A1 is won, the correct operation challenge performance is executed, and even if any of the winning 01 to 08 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area for calculating the instruction-included role ratio, improving the freedom of ball design. Also, by not displaying the instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they may perform the stop operation at their own discretion.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed during the AT when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed during a non-AT situation when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed during a non-AT situation when the correct operation challenge effect is not executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected, and the instruction monitor display may be displayed during the AT when the push order notification effect (push order navigation) is executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning combination -A1 is won, a correct operation challenge performance is executed, and even if any of winning combinations 01 to 08 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area for calculating the instruction-included combination ratio, thereby improving the freedom of ball design. Also, by not displaying the instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they may perform the stop operation at their own discretion. Also, since the instruction monitor is only displayed when the push order is announced during the AT, the absence of the instruction monitor display allows the player to more intuitively recognize that they may perform the stop operation at their own discretion.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning a 6-option push order bell with the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell, the system is configured so that the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell is higher.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning a six-option push order bell with the probability of winning a four-option push order bell, the probability of winning a six-option push order bell may be configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the role that is the target of the correct operation challenge performance is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any time.

In addition, the number of high bells paid out in a 6-option push order bell is configured to be the same as the number of high bells paid out in a 4-option push order bell.

By configuring it this way, even if the high bell stops when the correct operation challenge effect does not occur and the push order notification effect does not occur, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 6-choice push order bell or the 4-choice push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells in a six-option push order bell and the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell, the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. It is also possible to reduce the stress of users who fail the correct operation challenge performance, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance when the six-choice push order bell is won includes a six-choice challenge that requires the player to guess one of six different push orders, a four-choice challenge that requires the player to guess one of four different push orders by announcing one incorrect push order on the first stop (making the first stop correct push order two choices) and not announcing the second stop if correct, and a two-choice challenge that requires the player to guess one of two push orders by announcing the correct push order on the first stop but not announcing the second stop, or an incorrect push order on the first stop (making the first stop correct push order two choices) and notifying the second stop if correct. In any of these correct operation challenge performance modes, no indication monitor is displayed.

<<If you execute the correct operation challenge with the 4-choice push order bell and do not execute the correct operation challenge with the 6-choice push order bell>>
It is conceivable that the target of the correct operation challenge performance could be a four-choice bell push order biased towards the winning number B1 to B4.

If the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 4-choice push order bell with a bias towards winning-B1 to B4, the instruction monitor will be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will be executed when any of winning-B1 to B4 is selected, and the instruction monitor will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will not be executed when any of winning-B1 to B4 is selected.

When the correct operation challenge effect is executed with a biased bell, the correct operation challenge effect always fails when the left reel makes its first stop, but when the left reel makes its first stop, the AT lottery is not executed in the same way as the AT lottery that is executed under normal circumstances (when the correct operation challenge effect is not executed). In other words, when the correct operation challenge effect is executed with a biased bell and the left reel makes its first stop, the AT lottery is executed with a lower probability than the AT lottery that is executed under normal circumstances, or the AT lottery is not executed at all.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the Winning-B1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge presentation is executed, and a notice is given that the high bell will not stop on the first stop of the left reel, increasing the possibility that the player will perform the correct operation.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor may be displayed when the AT is in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations B1 to B4 is selected, when the non-AT is in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations B1 to B4 is selected, and when the AT is in progress and a push order notification effect is executed when any of the winning combinations B1 to B4 is selected, the instruction monitor may be displayed.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning win-B1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed to inform the player that the high bell will not stop when the left reel stops first, increasing the possibility of the player performing the correct operation. In addition, because the instruction monitor display is executed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed or when the push order notification effect is executed, it is possible to clarify when it is and is not OK to stop the left reel first.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning a 6-option push order bell with the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell, the system is configured so that the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell is higher.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. In addition, the probability of winning the role that is the target of the correct operation challenge performance is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any time.

In addition, the number of high bells paid out in a 6-option push order bell is configured to be the same as the number of high bells paid out in a 4-option push order bell.

By configuring it this way, even if the high bell stops when the correct operation challenge effect does not occur and the push order notification effect does not occur, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 6-choice push order bell or the 4-choice push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells in a six-option push order bell and the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell, the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance when the four-choice push order bell is won includes a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of four different push orders, and a two-choice challenge in which two incorrect push orders are announced for the first stop (the correct push order for the first stop is the only option) and the second stop is not announced, or the correct push order for the first stop is announced and the second stop is not announced, so that the player must guess one of two different push orders. In any of these correct operation challenge performance modes, the instruction monitor is displayed.

<<When executing the correct operation challenge performance with a 4-choice push order bell and executing the correct operation challenge performance with a 6-choice push order bell>>
It is conceivable that the targets of the correct operation challenge performance could be a 6-choice push order bell with no bias from the winning combination A1 to A6, and a 4-choice push order bell with a bias from the winning combination B1 to B4.

When the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 6-choice push order bell with no bias towards winning-A1 to A6, the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of winning-A1 to A6 is selected, and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any of winning-A1 to A6 is selected. Also, when the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 4-choice push order bell with bias towards winning-B1 to B4, the instruction monitor display is performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of winning-B1 to B4 is selected, and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any of winning-B1 to B4 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, the display on the instruction monitor allows the player to know whether a six-choice correct operation challenge presentation or a four-choice correct operation challenge presentation is being presented, preventing erroneous operation of the stop switch.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning a 6-option push order bell with the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell, the system is configured so that the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell is higher.

This configuration can prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. In addition, the probability of winning the four-choice correct operation challenge target role increases, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge at any time.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning a six-option push order bell with the probability of winning a four-option push order bell, the probability of winning a six-option push order bell may be configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the six-choice correct operation challenge target role increases, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge at any time.

In addition, the number of high bells paid out in a 6-option push order bell is configured to be the same as the number of high bells paid out in a 4-option push order bell.

By configuring it this way, even if the high bell stops when the correct operation challenge effect does not occur and the push order notification effect does not occur, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 6-choice push order bell or the 4-choice push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells in a six-option push order bell and the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell, the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance when the six-choice push order bell is won includes a six-choice challenge that requires the player to guess one of six different push orders, a four-choice challenge that requires the player to guess one of four different push orders by announcing one incorrect push order on the first stop (making the first stop correct push order two choices) and not announcing the second stop if correct, and a two-choice challenge that requires the player to guess one of two push orders by announcing the correct push order on the first stop but not announcing the second stop, or an incorrect push order on the first stop (making the first stop correct push order two choices) and notifying the second stop if correct. In any of these correct operation challenge performance modes, no indication monitor is displayed.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance when the four-choice push order bell is won includes a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of four different push orders, and a two-choice challenge in which two incorrect push orders are announced for the first stop (the correct push order for the first stop is the only option) and the second stop is not announced, or the correct push order for the first stop is announced and the second stop is not announced, so that the player must guess one of two different push orders. In any of these correct operation challenge performance modes, the instruction monitor is displayed.

<Processing related to instruction function according to the number of failures in correct operation challenge performance>
When a correct operation challenge performance is executed, a process related to the instruction function (for example, an AT lottery, an AT addition lottery, etc.) is executed according to the number of times an incorrect button press is performed (low bells are stopped) in the incorrect button press sequence.

For example, when a 6-choice correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is won during the AT, if the first correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (operated in the incorrect button press order), a 50-game additional lottery is executed with a 2.5% probability; if the second correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (operated in the incorrect button press order), a 50-game additional lottery is executed with a 5.0% probability; if the third correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (operated in the incorrect button press order), a 50-game additional lottery is executed with a 7.5% probability; if the fourth correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (operated in the incorrect button press order), a 50-game additional lottery is executed with a 10% probability; if the fifth correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (operated in the incorrect button press order), a 50-game additional lottery is executed with a 50% probability; and if the sixth correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (operated in the incorrect button press order), a 50-game additional lottery is executed with a 100% probability.

With this configuration, even if the player presses the buttons in the incorrect order when executing the correct operation challenge performance, the player's chances of winning the bonus lottery increase according to the number of incorrect answers (failures), so the player's motivation to play is less likely to decrease even if the player presses the buttons in the incorrect order.

As shown in FIG. 67, when any of the winning symbols A1 to A6 is won, the winning symbols when the push order is incorrect are 09 to 40 and 105 to 120. 09 to 40 are winning symbols that can be used to draw an AT when the AT is not selected, and 105 to 120 are winning symbols that do not draw an AT when the AT is not selected (or draw an AT with a lower probability than 09 to 40).

If the correct operation challenge is performed with an incorrect button press, there is a possibility that the winning numbers 09-40 and 105-120 will be stopped, but if the correct operation challenge is unsuccessful, the same lottery will be held for the winning numbers 09-40 and 105-120 depending on the number of failures.

In addition, the specified memory area that stores the number of times the correct operation challenge performance is failed is initialized by the initialization process when the advantageous zone ends. Therefore, for example, if the advantageous zone ends when the number of times the correct operation challenge performance is failed five times, and the correct operation challenge performance is failed again in a new advantageous zone, the number of times the correct operation challenge performance is failed in the new advantageous zone will be counted as the first time, and an additional lottery will be executed.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game, such as by playing across advantageous zones.

In addition, if the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance is stored in a specified memory area, the specified memory area will be initialized when the player wins the bonus lottery according to the number of failures.

This configuration prevents excessive benefits from being awarded based on the number of failures, and prevents players from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, if the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance is stored in a specified memory area that stores the number of failures, the specified memory area is initialized when the correct operation challenge performance is successful.

This configuration prevents excessive benefits from being awarded based on the number of failures, and prevents players from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, if the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance is stored in a specified memory area that stores the number of failures, the specified memory area may not be initialized even if the correct operation challenge performance is successful. In this case, the specified memory area is configured to be initialized when an additional lottery corresponding to the number of failures is won.

This configuration prevents excessive benefits from being awarded based on the number of failures, and prevents players from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance has been described as being executed by guessing the order in which buttons are pressed, but it may be executed by guessing the keystroke pattern, or by guessing both the order in which buttons are pressed and the keystroke pattern.

<Processing related to instruction function according to the number of times correct operation challenge performance is successful>
When the correct operation challenge performance is executed, processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery, AT addition lottery, etc.) is executed depending on the number of times the correct button presses are pressed (the high bell stops) in the correct order.

For example, when five games are played as a trigger for ending a specified game state, and a six-choice correct operation challenge presentation is executed upon winning any of the winning combinations A1 to A6, if the correct operation challenge presentation in the specified game state that lasts for five games is successful once (operated in the correct button sequence), an additional 10 games are awarded, if the correct operation challenge presentation in the specified game state that lasts for five games is successful twice (operated in the correct button sequence), an additional 20 games are awarded, and if the correct operation challenge presentation in the specified game state that lasts for five games is successful twice (operated in the correct button sequence), an additional 20 games are awarded. If the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button press order) three times, an additional 30 games will be awarded; if the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button press order) four times in a specified game state that lasts for five games, an additional 50 games will be awarded; if the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button press order) five times in a specified game state that lasts for five games, an additional 100 games will be awarded; and if the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button press order) zero times in a specified game state that lasts for five games, an additional 20 games will be awarded.

With this configuration, when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be gradually increased according to the number of correct button presses, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the number of times that the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) in a specified game state that lasts for five games is zero, no additional bonus may be added, or if the number of times that the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) in a specified game state that lasts for five games is zero, the specified game state may be extended until the correct operation challenge performance is correctly performed, or the specified game state may be ended when the correct operation challenge performance is performed five times.

In addition, the specified memory area that stores the number of successful correct operation challenge performances is initialized by the initialization process when the advantageous zone ends. Therefore, for example, when the number of successful correct operation challenge performances is four, the advantageous zone ends and in the new advantageous zone, the specified memory area that stores the number of successful correct operation challenge performances is set to 0.

With this configuration, even if someone tries to extend the life of the correct operation challenge effect by using a gameplay method that is not performed in normal play, it will be initialized at the end of the advantageous zone, so the damage caused by fraudulent ball output manipulation can be reduced.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance has been described as being executed by guessing the order in which buttons are pressed, but it may be executed by guessing the keystroke pattern, or by guessing both the order in which buttons are pressed and the keystroke pattern.

<Processing when the correct operation challenge performance when the 6-choice push order bell is won is set to 4 or 2 choices>
An embodiment will be described in which some operation modes are notified when the correct operation challenge performance is executed to increase the probability of a correct operation being performed.

As mentioned above, some operation modes may be notified when the correct operation challenge performance is executed. For example, there is a four-choice challenge in which, when a six-choice push order bell is drawn, one incorrect push order is notified at the first stop (the first stop correct push order is set to two options), and if the answer is correct, the second stop is not notified, so that one push order is guessed from four different push orders; a two-choice challenge in which, when a six-choice push order bell is drawn, the first stop correct push order is notified but the second stop is not notified, or, when the answer is correct, one incorrect push order is notified at the first stop (the first stop correct push order is set to two options), and, if the answer is correct, the second stop is not notified, so that one push order is guessed from two different push orders; and a two-choice challenge in which, when a four-choice push order bell is drawn, two incorrect push orders at the first stop are notified (the first stop correct push order is set to one option), and the second stop is not notified, or, when the answer is correct, the first stop correct push order is not notified but the second stop is not notified, so that one push order is guessed from two different push orders.

Specifically, we will explain the case where Winning-A1 is won. When the correct operation challenge effect is executed when Winning-A1 is won, and the first stop is announced as correct and a two-choice challenge is executed, "1??" is displayed in the area of the LCD that displays the push order. The "1" on the left corresponds to the left reel, the "?" in the middle corresponds to the middle reel, and the "?" on the right corresponds to the right reel.

Here, if the player makes the left reel the first stop, "-??" is displayed in the area of the LCD that shows the push order. Also, a bell A symbol or a bell B symbol will stop on the active line in the middle of the left reel. The "-" on the left of the LCD indicates that the correct operation has been performed, and other suitable designs can be made, such as displaying nothing or displaying a "○". When "-??" is displayed on the LCD, it is unclear whether the correct operation for the second stop will be the middle reel or the right reel, providing the player with the fun of guessing between two options.

When the player stops the middle reel for the second time, "-??" is displayed in the area of the LCD that displays the push order. Also, a bell A symbol or a bell B symbol stops on the active line in the middle of the middle reel. The LCD display does not change when the reel stops for the second time, but it may change to "--?" or in other ways. When "-??" is displayed on the LCD, it is unclear whether the second stop was correct or incorrect, so a sense of expectation can be maintained until the end. In this embodiment, the correct answer is confirmed when two bells A or B stop on an active line, so a player who checks the main reel can understand whether the answer is correct or not based on the stopped symbols. In addition, it is also possible to make it impossible to tell whether the answer is correct or not on the main reel until the third stop.

When the player stops the right reel for the third time, a congratulatory message such as "Congratulations" or an additional number such as "+100" is displayed on the LCD. In addition, a Bell A symbol or a Bell B symbol will stop on the active line in the middle of the right reel, and one of the symbol combinations of "Bell A, or Bell B - Bell A, or Bell B - Bell A, or Bell B" will stop. Note that since the processing related to the instruction function for the additional lottery, etc. is executed according to the symbol combination when all the reels have stopped or the push order information, the timing for displaying the congratulatory message such as "Congratulations" or the additional number such as "+100" is displayed after the processing related to the instruction function when all the reels have stopped has been executed.

In addition, if the player makes the center or right reel stop when the Win-A1 wins, it is possible to make all of the "1??" displays on the LCD invisible or to make them invisible after a failure effect is performed. In addition, the symbol combination that is displayed when all the reels stop at this time is "Replay-Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven-Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven." In this case, since the symbol "Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven" stops on the center or right reel at the time of the first stop, the push order is determined to be incorrect when the center or right reel stops for the first time, and the processing related to the instruction function to be executed when all the reels stop is not executed, or a lower profit is awarded compared to when the push order is correct.

In addition, when the player makes the left reel stop for the first time and the right reel stop for the second time when the winning-A1 is won, the symbol combination displayed when all reels stop will be one of the following symbol combinations: "Bell A or Bell B - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven". In this case, since one of the symbols "Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven" stops on the right reel at the time of the second stop, the push order is determined to be incorrect when the right reel stops for the second time, and the processing related to the instruction function executed when all reels stop is not executed, or a lower profit is awarded compared to when the push order is correct. For winning 09 to 40, if the correct operation challenge performance is not executed, the processing related to the instruction function is executed, but if the performance is stopped when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, a profit with an expected value lower than the expected value of the profit that can be obtained when the processing related to the instruction function is not executed or the correct operation challenge performance is not executed is awarded.

<The correct operation challenge will be executed according to the eye-pressing skill when the replay is won>
The condition device for executing the correct operation challenge performance can be a push order bell, a replay or a common bell, and the following will explain how to execute the correct operation challenge performance with a replay. Note that the instruction monitor display is hidden when executing the correct operation challenge performance with a replay.

We will explain an example of executing a correct operation challenge presentation when Replay-A shown in Figure 69 is won.

When the correct operation challenge performance is executed when Replay-A is selected, the symbol combination that stops varies depending on the player's stopping operation position.

For example, if the red seven is pressed exactly on the top row of the center reel when it first stops, the red seven symbol will stop on the top row of the center reel (the cherry symbol will stop on the middle row of the center reel, which is the active line). Then, if the left and right reels are stopped in any order and at any timing, replay 01 will stop, and if replay 01 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will be executed. At this time, if the red seven cannot be pressed exactly on the top row of the center reel when it first stops, replay 04 will stop, and if replay 04 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will not be executed, or processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when replay 01 has stopped will be executed.

Also, if the white seven is pressed within the frame when the center reel first stops, the white seven symbol will stop on the top row of the center reel (a blank symbol will stop in the middle row of the center reel, which is the active line). Then, if the left and right reels are stopped in any order and at any timing, replay 02 will stop, and if replay 02 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will be executed. At this time, if the white seven cannot be pressed within the frame when the center reel first stops, replay 04 will stop, and if replay 04 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will not be executed, or processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when replay 02 has stopped will be executed. Note that the processing related to the instruction function executed when replay 02 stops will execute processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than the processing related to the instruction function executed when replay 01 has stopped. This is because it is easier to hit the white seven symbol within the frame of the middle reel (more symbols are drawn) than it is to hit the red seven symbol on the top row of the middle reel.

Also, if the red seven is pressed within 5 frames when the left reel first stops, the red seven symbol stops in the middle of the left reel (the red seven symbol stops in the middle of the left reel, which is the active line). Then, if the center and right reels are stopped in any order and at any timing, replay 03 stops, and if replay 03 is stopped when all reels have stopped, a process related to the instruction function is executed. At this time, if the red seven cannot be pressed within 5 frames when the left reel first stops, replay 04 stops, and if replay 04 is stopped when all reels have stopped, a process related to the instruction function is not executed, or a process related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when replay 03 stops is executed. Note that the process related to the instruction function executed when replay 03 stops executes a process related to the instruction function with a lower profit than the process related to the instruction function executed when replay 02 stops. This is because it is easier to hit the red seven symbol within five frames on the left reel than it is to hit the white seven symbol within the frame of the center reel (more symbols are drawn).

In this way, by varying the symbol combinations that can be stopped depending on the stopping position when Replay-A is won, the symbol combination that corresponds to the stopping position stops, and when all reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function can be executed according to the symbol combination. One example of processing related to the instruction function according to the symbol combination is when Replay 01 stops, the number of AT games increases by 20 games, when Replay 02 stops, the number of AT games increases by 10 games, when Replay 03 stops, the number of AT games increases by 5 games, and when Replay 04 stops, the number of AT games does not increase.

As mentioned above, when a common bell is won, which does not change the payout amount depending on the push order regardless of whether or not a replay is selected, a different processing mode may be used for the instruction function according to the push position, similar to when a replay-A is selected.

<In the case of a specification that combines 12-choice push order + eye-touch bell and 8-choice push order + eye-touch bell (biased bell)>
As a specification of a gaming machine equipped with a correct operation challenge performance, a specification that combines a 12-option push order + key press role and an 8-option push order + key press role will be described.

As shown in Figures 67 to 69, Winning-C1 to C12 and Winning-D1 to D8 are, Winning-C1 to C12 are unbiased 12-option push order + eye-pressing bells, while Winning-D1 to D8 are biased 8-option push order + eye-pressing bells.

<<When you execute the correct operation challenge with 12-choice push order + eye-pressing bell, and do not execute the correct operation challenge with 8-choice push order + eye-pressing bell>>
It is conceivable that the target of the correct operation challenge performance could be a winning combination - a balanced 12-choice pressing sequence from C1 to C12 + a target pressing bell.

If the target of the correct operation challenge performance is the unbiased 12-choice push order + eye-pressing bell for winning-C1 to C12, the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when winning-C1 to C12 is won, and the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when winning-C1 to C12 is won.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning -C1 is won, a correct operation challenge performance is executed, and even if any of winning 01 to 04 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area for calculating the instruction-included role ratio, improving the freedom of ball design. Also, by not displaying the instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they may perform the stop operation at their own discretion.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed when the AT is in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning symbols C1 to C12 is selected; the instruction monitor display may not be displayed when the non-AT is in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning symbols C1 to C12 is selected; the instruction monitor display may not be displayed when the non-AT is in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is not executed when any of the winning symbols C1 to C12 is selected; and the instruction monitor display may be displayed when the AT is in progress and a push order + push notification effect (push order + push navigation) is executed when any of the winning symbols C1 to C12 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning -C1 is won, a correct operation challenge performance is executed, and even if any of winning 01 to 04 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area for calculating the instruction-included role ratio, thereby improving the freedom of ball design. Also, by not displaying the instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they may perform the stop operation at their own discretion. Also, since the instruction monitor is displayed only when the push order + eye push is not announced during the AT, the absence of the instruction monitor display allows the player to more intuitively recognize that they may perform the stop operation at their own discretion.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of 12-choice push order + bell push with the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push, the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push is configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of 12-choice push order + bell push with the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push, the winning probability of 12-choice push order + bell push may be configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the role that is the target of the correct operation challenge performance is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any time.

In addition, the number of payouts for high bells in the 12-choice push order + key bell push is configured to be the same as the number of payouts for high bells in the 8-choice push order + key bell push.

By configuring it this way, even if the high bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect occurring and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 12-choice push order + push order bell or the 8-choice push order + push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells with a 12-option push order + key press bell to the number of payouts for high bells with an 8-option push order + key press bell, the number of payouts for high bells with an 8-option push order + key press bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. It is also possible to reduce the stress of users who fail the correct operation challenge performance, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge performance when the 12-choice push sequence + eye-pressing bell is won, the 12-choice challenge is to have the player guess one of the 12 types of push sequences + eye-pressing by not announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-pressing pattern, and not announcing the correct push sequence for the second stop either; or, by announcing one incorrect push sequence for the first stop but not announcing the eye-pressing pattern (making the correct push sequence for the first stop + eye-pressing four options) and not announcing the correct push sequence for the second stop, a 12-choice challenge is to have the player guess one of the 12 types of push sequences + eye-pressing. There are eight-choice challenges in which the player must guess one of six different push sequences + push sequences; a six-choice challenge in which the correct push sequence for the first stop and push sequence pattern are not announced, but the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced, or the correct push sequence for the first stop is not announced, but the push sequence pattern is announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced; and a six-choice challenge in which the correct push sequence for the first stop is announced, but the push sequence is not announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced, and the incorrect push sequence for the first stop is announced. The four-choice challenge is to announce one of the four push sequences + the push pattern (the first stop correct push sequence + the push sequence is set to four options) and announce the second stop correct push sequence, or to announce one of the first stop incorrect push sequences and the push sequence pattern (the first stop correct push sequence is set to two options) and not announce the second stop correct push sequence, making it a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of the four push sequences + the push sequence. There are three-choice challenges that require the player to guess one of three different push sequences, and two-choice challenges that require the player to guess one of two push sequences + push sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the push sequence symbol and the correct push sequence for the second stop, announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the push sequence symbol but not the correct push sequence for the second stop, or an incorrect push sequence for the first stop and the push sequence symbol and an incorrect push sequence for the second stop are announced. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, no indication monitor display is performed.

<<If you execute the correct operation challenge with 8-choice push order + eye-pressing bell, and do not execute the correct operation challenge with 12-choice push order + eye-pressing bell>>
It is conceivable that the target of the correct operation challenge performance could be a prize-winning bell with eight choices in the push order biased from D1 to D8.

If the target of the correct operation challenge performance is an 8-choice push order bell with a bias towards winning-D1 to D8, the instruction monitor will be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will be executed when any of winning-D1 to D8 is selected, and the instruction monitor will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will not be executed when any of winning-D1 to D8 is selected.

If the correct operation challenge effect is executed with a biased bell, when the left reel is stopped for the first time, the AT lottery that is usually performed will not be performed, and instead, an AT lottery will be performed with a lower probability than the AT lottery that is usually performed, or no AT lottery will be performed.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the winning combination D1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed, informing the player that the high bell will not stop on the first stop of the left reel, and increasing the possibility of the player performing the correct operation.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor may be displayed when the AT is in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning symbols D1 to D8 is selected, when the non-AT is in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning symbols D1 to D8 is selected, and when the AT is in progress and a push order + eye-press notification effect is executed when any of the winning symbols D1 to D8 is selected, the instruction monitor may be displayed.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning win-D1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed to inform the player that the high bell will not stop when the left reel stops first, increasing the possibility of the player performing the correct operation. In addition, because the instruction monitor display is executed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed or when the push order notification effect is executed, it is possible to clarify when it is OK to stop the left reel first and when it is not OK to stop the left reel first.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of 12-choice push order + bell push with the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push, the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push is configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payout due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. In addition, the probability of winning the role that is the target of the correct operation challenge performance is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any time.

In addition, the number of payouts for high bells in the 12-choice push order + key bell push is configured to be the same as the number of payouts for high bells in the 8-choice push order + key bell push.

By configuring it this way, even if the high bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect occurring and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 12-choice push order + push order bell or the 8-choice push order + push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells with a 12-option push order + key press bell to the number of payouts for high bells with an 8-option push order + key press bell, the number of payouts for high bells with an 8-option push order + key press bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge performance when the 8-choice push sequence + eye-touch bell is won, there are 8-choice challenges in which the player must guess one of the 8 types of push sequences + eye-touches by not announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-touch pattern, nor the correct push sequence for the second stop; 8-choice challenges in which the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-touch pattern are not announced, but the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced; the correct push sequence for the first stop is announced but the eye-touch pattern is not announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced; or the correct push sequence for the first stop is not announced but the eye-touch pattern is announced. There are four-choice challenges in which the player is prompted to guess one of four different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop, and two-choice challenges in which the player is prompted to guess one of two different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop, announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop but not the correct push sequence for the first stop, or announcing the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop but not the correct push sequence for the first stop, and allowing the player to guess one of two different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, the instruction monitor is displayed.

<<When executing the correct operation challenge performance with 8-choice push order + eye-pressing bell, and executing the correct operation challenge performance with 12-choice push order + eye-pressing bell>>
It is conceivable that the targets for the correct operation challenge performance could be a winning combination of a 12-choice push order with no bias from C1 to C12 + a bell with a momentary bell, and a winning combination of a 8-choice push order with a bias from D1 to D8 + a bell with a momentary bell.

When the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 12-choice push order + button press bell with no bias from Winning-C1 to C12, the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of Winning-C1 to C12 is selected, and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any of Winning-C1 to C12 is selected. Also, when the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 8-choice push order + button press bell with bias from Winning-D1 to D8, the instruction monitor display is performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of Winning-D1 to D8 is selected, and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any of Winning-D1 to D8 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, the display on the instruction monitor allows the player to know whether a 12-choice correct operation challenge presentation or an 8-choice correct operation challenge presentation is being presented, preventing erroneous operation of the stop switch.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of 12-choice push order + bell push with the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push, the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push is configured to be higher.

This configuration can prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. In addition, the probability of winning the eight-choice correct operation challenge target role increases, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge at any time.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of 12-choice push order + bell push with the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push, the winning probability of 12-choice push order + bell push may be configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the role that is the target of the 12-choice correct operation challenge performance is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any time.

In addition, the number of payouts for high bells in the 12-choice push order + key bell push is configured to be the same as the number of payouts for high bells in the 8-choice push order + key bell push.

By configuring it this way, even if the high bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect occurring and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 12-choice push order + push order bell or the 8-choice push order + push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells with a 12-option push order + key press bell to the number of payouts for high bells with an 8-option push order + key press bell, the number of payouts for high bells with an 8-option push order + key press bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge performance when the 12-choice push sequence + eye-pressing bell is won, the 12-choice challenge is to have the player guess one of the 12 types of push sequences + eye-pressing by not announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-pressing pattern, and not announcing the correct push sequence for the second stop either; or, by announcing one incorrect push sequence for the first stop but not announcing the eye-pressing pattern (making the correct push sequence for the first stop + eye-pressing four options) and not announcing the correct push sequence for the second stop, a 12-choice challenge is to have the player guess one of the 12 types of push sequences + eye-pressing. There are eight-choice challenges in which the player must guess one of six different push sequences + push sequences; a six-choice challenge in which the correct push sequence for the first stop and push sequence pattern are not announced, but the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced, or the correct push sequence for the first stop is not announced, but the push sequence pattern is announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced; and a six-choice challenge in which the correct push sequence for the first stop is announced, but the push sequence is not announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced, and the incorrect push sequence for the first stop is announced. The four-choice challenge is to announce one of the four push sequences + the push pattern (the first stop correct push sequence + the push sequence is set to four options) and announce the second stop correct push sequence, or to announce one of the first stop incorrect push sequences and the push sequence pattern (the first stop correct push sequence is set to two options) and not announce the second stop correct push sequence, making it a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of the four push sequences + the push sequence. There are three-choice challenges that require the player to guess one of three different push sequences, and two-choice challenges that require the player to guess one of two push sequences + push sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the push sequence symbol and the correct push sequence for the second stop, announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the push sequence symbol but not the correct push sequence for the second stop, or an incorrect push sequence for the first stop and the push sequence symbol and an incorrect push sequence for the second stop are announced. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, no indication monitor display is performed.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge performance when the 8-choice push sequence + eye-touch bell is won, there are 8-choice challenges in which the player must guess one of the 8 types of push sequences + eye-touches by not announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-touch pattern, nor the correct push sequence for the second stop; 8-choice challenges in which the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-touch pattern are not announced, but the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced; the correct push sequence for the first stop is announced but the eye-touch pattern is not announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced; or the correct push sequence for the first stop is not announced but the eye-touch pattern is announced. There are four-choice challenges in which the player is prompted to guess one of four different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop, and two-choice challenges in which the player is prompted to guess one of two different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop, announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop but not the correct push sequence for the first stop, or announcing the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop but not the correct push sequence for the first stop, and allowing the player to guess one of two different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, the instruction monitor is displayed.

<Guaranteed lottery if the eye-pressing challenge fails>
This embodiment describes a mode in which a correct operation challenge presentation (eye-pressing challenge presentation) is executed when 12-option pressing sequence + eye-pressing bell, 8-option pressing sequence + eye-pressing bell, or replay-A is won, and a certain amount of benefit is given to the player even if he or she fails the eye-pressing challenge as a result of performing a stop operation.

If the player fails to stop the machine when the eye-pressing challenge is performed, a guarantee lottery will be held by referencing the symbol combination when all reels have stopped.

For example, if WIN-C1 is won, and the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, then any one of the winning symbol combinations 01-04 will stop when all the reels have stopped, and if the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, then any one of the winning symbol combinations 25-40 will stop when all the reels have stopped. Then, if any one of the winning symbol combinations 01-04 has stopped during the processing when all the reels have stopped, then an AT addition lottery is executed, and if any one of the winning symbol combinations 25-40 has stopped, then a guarantee lottery is executed.

In this case, when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 50 games, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 50% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 50 games, or when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 50 games, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 10 games, A possible mode is that when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 100% probability of adding 50 AT games, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 10% probability of adding 10 AT games, or when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 100% probability of adding 50 AT games, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 10% probability of adding 100 AT games.

In other words, the expected value of the profit given to the player is lower if the Eye-Striking Challenge is unsuccessful than if it is successful.

By configuring it this way, even players who are not confident in their eye-pressing skills can actively take on the eye-pressing challenge, increasing the excitement of the game.

<Left push recommended lamp>
When the biased bell is won, the left reel is stopped first, and the AT lottery is executed with a higher probability than when a reel other than the left reel is stopped first, so that the player's frequency of getting a high-value bell is reduced by stopping the left reel first during normal times, but it is a relatively advantageous operation mode because the AT lottery can be accepted. Also, even if the biased bell is won during normal times (non-AT times), the instruction monitor is not displayed (no instruction information is displayed).

However, since there is a possibility that a player without prior knowledge may stop the middle or right reel first without realizing that the game is played on the left reel, a left push recommendation lamp is provided and is configured to light up when the game is played on the left reel.

The left push recommendation lamp consists of a single red LED and is provided in a position visible to the player (for example, on the middle panel, the operation panel 11, the lower panel 5, etc.). However, the left push recommendation lamp may also be composed of a green LED or a full-color LED.

The left push recommendation lamp has a smaller lighting area than the instruction monitor, making it easier for players to see the instruction monitor than the left push recommendation lamp.

The left push recommendation lamp may be a lamp managed by the main control means or a lamp managed by the sub-control means, and as long as each control means is configured to be able to determine whether it is non-AT or AT, the lamp can be switched on and off.

The left push recommendation lamp remains lit when not in AT, turns on if not in AT after power is turned on, and remains lit until AT starts.

The left push recommendation lamp will also remain lit even in non-AT situations where the payout remains the same whether the middle or right reel is the first stop or the left reel is the first stop (for example, when there is a miss win or when a push order-independent condition device wins and the AT lottery is not held or the AT lottery is held regardless of the push order).

This configuration can prevent players from noticing that they have won a prize just from the lighting of the lamp. It also reduces the amount of eye movement the player has to make as the lamp repeatedly lights up and goes out, which can reduce fatigue caused by the player.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to display a demo screen a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after all reels have stopped (the demo time timing of the sub-control means), but even when the demo screen is being displayed, the left press recommendation lamp remains lit (it stays lit when the left press recommendation lamp is lit, and it stays off when it is off).

By configuring it in this way, players who start playing while the demo screen is being displayed can be made aware that the left reel will be the first stop.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is designed to display the menu screen when the sub-switch 20 is pressed at a certain timing after all reels have stopped (timing when the menu screen can be displayed), but even when the menu screen is displayed, the left push recommendation lamp remains lit (it stays lit when the left push recommendation lamp is lit, and it stays off when it is off).

By configuring it in this way, players who start playing while the menu screen is displayed can be made aware that the left reel will be the first stop.

When starting an AT from a non-AT, the left push recommendation lamp goes out. The AT can be started after all reels have stopped and the AT state has been set (after the end of the game immediately before the AT start), or it can be started by operating the start switch for the next game in which the AT state has been set when all reels have stopped (AT start game).

In addition, when the AT changes to non-AT (when the AT ends), the left push recommended lamp lights up. The AT changes to non-AT may be triggered after all reels have stopped in the final AT game, or by operating the start switch for the game after the final AT game, or when the advantageous zone ends. In order to avoid cases where the lighting of the left push recommended lamp confirms that the AT will not continue (for example, a revival suggestion is made during a defeat performance but the left push recommended lamp is lit), the left push recommended lamp is set to light up after it is confirmed that there will be no revival when a revival suggestion is made.

In addition, if the left press recommendation lamp is on when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the left press recommendation lamp may be turned off or may remain on. If the left press recommendation lamp is turned off, it will be turned on again when the setting confirmation mode is ended.

By configuring it in this way, since the administrator sets the settings during setting confirmation mode, there is no need to notify the player. It is also possible to have the administrator confirm that the control of the left press recommended lamp is normal (the lamp can be switched on and off) by turning off the left press recommended lamp during setting confirmation mode. In this case, if the left press recommended lamp is off and the mode transitions to setting confirmation mode, the left press recommended lamp may remain off or may be switched on (if the left press recommended lamp is off and the mode transitions to setting confirmation mode and the left press recommended lamp is on, the left press recommended lamp will be turned off when the setting confirmation mode ends).

If the power is cut off while the left press recommended lamp is on, and the setting key is turned ON when the power is turned back on and the setting change mode is entered, the left press recommended lamp may be turned off or may remain lit. If the left press recommended lamp is turned off, it will be turned on again when the setting change mode is ended.

By configuring it in this way, since the administrator sets the settings during setting change mode, there is no need to notify the player. It is also possible to have the administrator confirm that the control of the left press recommended lamp is normal (the lamp can be switched on and off) by turning off the left press recommended lamp during setting change mode. In this case, if the left press recommended lamp is off and the mode is switched to setting change mode, the left press recommended lamp may remain off or may be switched on (if the left press recommended lamp is off and the mode is switched to setting change mode and the left press recommended lamp is on, the left press recommended lamp will be turned off when the setting change mode ends).

The left push recommendation lamp may also remain lit during the AT. In this case, the left push recommendation lamp remains lit even when the first left stop correct bell is won, the first middle stop correct bell is won, or the first right stop correct bell is won. This is because the lamp is lit to indicate that pushing left is recommended for the gaming machine as a whole, and is a possible configuration when not corresponding to an individual condition device. Note that, because an instruction monitor display is performed during the AT, the player is able to know the push order even when the left push recommendation lamp is lit.

In this case, the left-press recommendation lamp will not be lit depending on the state, which reduces the program capacity and eliminates program complexity.

If there is a power outage while the left press recommended lamp is on, and the left press recommended lamp lights up when the power is turned back on, but if there is a power outage while the left press recommended lamp is off, and the left press recommended lamp does not light up when the power is turned back on.

This configuration can prevent the player from thinking that they need to press left if the light turns on even for a moment.

<BGM related modes>
In this embodiment, the BGM-related modes include a normal mode (sometimes referred to as a first mode) and a distribution mode (sometimes referred to as a second mode).
In the normal mode, the device is configured to be able to output from a speaker S BGM that is preset for each performance stage, continuous performance, and chance performance, regardless of whether the BGM is for which a music usage fee is charged or is copyright-free (not protected by copyright) BGM for which no music usage fee is charged.
In the distribution mode, the speaker S is configured to output only copyright-free BGM without outputting BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred, and when BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred is set in advance as BGM for a performance stage, BGM for continuous performances, BGM for chance performances, etc., the speaker S is configured to output copyright-free BGM instead of the BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred. Note that output from the speaker S is sometimes simply referred to as BGM being played.

In this way, even if the same performance stage, the same consecutive performance, or the same chance performance is being performed, the background music output from the speaker S may be different when the normal mode is set to normal mode and when the distribution mode is set to distribution mode.

Previously, when uploading video footage of gameplay to social media or video distribution sites, in order to avoid copyright infringement, it was necessary to edit out the parts where background music was being played, or to silence the video or overlay different background music.

In this embodiment, when the distribution mode is set, copyright-free background music is played instead of background music for which a music usage fee is incurred. Therefore, if the distribution mode is set and the gameplay is recorded, the recorded video can be uploaded to social media or a video distribution site without infringing the copyright of the music recorded on the gaming machine. By setting the distribution mode in this way, the effort required to avoid copyright infringement can be significantly reduced.

Even if the distribution mode is set, the BGM output from the speaker S may be configured not to be changed to copyright-free BGM in certain situations (for example, during so-called bonuses or endings, situations that are important in terms of presenting the worldview of the original anime or drama, or situations where the video and BGM are closely linked and changing the BGM would diminish the quality of the video, etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the entertainment value of the presentation from being reduced drastically.

In addition, in this embodiment, copyright-free BGM is played when the distribution mode is set, but this is not limiting, and BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred may be played silently (volume level 0). When configured in this way, it is preferable to play BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred silently regardless of the set volume level, while sound effects such as winning sounds, payout sounds, and stopping sounds, as well as copyright-free BGM, are output from speaker S at a volume that corresponds to the set volume level. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid copyright infringement for music while not drastically reducing the interest of the presentation.

<Explanation regarding the period during which the BGM mode can be changed> In this embodiment, the BGM mode can be changed during the period from a predetermined timing after the end of a game (for example, 2 seconds after the end of a game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has been completed, after the payout process has been completed, etc.)) until the start operation of the next game (betting operation or start switch operation) is performed. In other words, the BGM mode cannot be changed during a game from the start to the end of that game.

This configuration can prevent the player from accidentally switching background music modes while playing, which could stop the game progress or prevent the player from being able to concentrate on the presentation. Note that the configuration may also be such that background music modes can be switched even while playing.

In addition, while it is possible to switch the BGM mode during the period when it is possible to do so, regardless of whether the game screen or the demo screen is being displayed, the configuration is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that the BGM mode cannot be switched while the demo screen is being displayed. In addition, it may be configured so that the BGM mode cannot be switched after the end of a specified game (for example, after the end of a game during which a continuous performance is being performed or after the end of a game in which a specified chance performance has been executed) or while the menu screen is being displayed.

The system may also be configured so that the BGM mode can be switched regardless of whether the game is in a normal zone or an advantageous zone. By configuring the system in this way, the player can switch the BGM mode without waiting for the game to move to an advantageous zone.

It may also be configured so that the BGM mode can be switched only in advantageous zones. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to tell whether the zone is normal or advantageous depending on whether the BGM mode can be switched.

<Explanation on how to switch background music modes>
When it is desired to set the distribution mode, in a situation in which the BGM mode can be switched, the liquid crystal display (in this embodiment, a so-called touch panel that combines a display device and an input device) is touched a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) to switch from normal mode to distribution mode.
Furthermore, if you wish to end the distribution mode, in a situation where the BGM-related mode can be switched, you can switch from the distribution mode to the normal mode by pressing and holding the LCD for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds).

In this way, by making the operation complicated when setting the distribution mode, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally setting the distribution mode, and by making the operation simple when returning to normal mode, it is possible to reduce the effort required by the player.

In this embodiment, the BGM mode can be switched by touching the LCD screen, but the invention is not limited to this and a BGM mode item may be provided as a configurable item on the menu screen, allowing switching between normal mode and distribution mode. By configuring in this way, game-related setting items that can be set by the player can be consolidated on the menu screen, and even a player playing for the first time can easily recognize that the BGM mode can be switched by opening the menu screen.

In addition, instead of touching the LCD, the BGM mode may be switched by operating a specific switch (e.g., a performance switch or a middle stop switch 13b, etc.). Specifically, when it is desired to set the distribution mode, the specific switch may be touched a specific number of times (e.g., five times) in a situation in which the BGM mode can be switched to switch to the distribution mode, and when it is desired to end the distribution mode, the LCD may be pressed and held for a specific period of time (e.g., five seconds) in a situation in which the BGM mode can be switched to switch to the normal mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the BGM mode can be set at the player's discretion, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that only the staff of the gaming establishment can set it. Specifically, it may be configured so that it can only be set in the administrator menu (details will be omitted, but this is generally a mode that allows the setting of power saving mode and checking of error history, etc.) that can be set while checking or changing the settings. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the distribution mode from being inadvertently set by a player's mischief.

Next, using Figure 70, we will explain the LCD display when the device is set to normal mode and when it is set to distribution mode.

Figure 70 (a) shows an example of a game screen when the normal mode is set. When the normal mode is set as shown in the figure, the LCD is configured not to display the currently set BGM-related mode.

Figure 70 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a game screen when the game is set to the distribution mode. As shown in the figure, when the game is set to the distribution mode, "Distribution Mode" is displayed on the left edge of the liquid crystal as a display indicating the currently set BGM mode, and it is configured to be visible that the game is set to the distribution mode. In addition, when two seconds have passed since the end of one game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, after the payout process has ended, etc.) and it is possible to switch to the normal mode, the explanation of the mode switching is displayed below the "Distribution Mode" display, saying "Mode can be switched by pressing and holding the liquid crystal display." When the start operation of the next game (betting operation or start switch operation) is performed and it is not possible to switch to the normal mode, the display of the explanation of the mode switching is stopped. In this way, when the game is ended while in the distribution mode, the next player is configured to know that the game is in the distribution mode and how to return to the normal mode.

Note that (1) the display of the currently set BGM mode and the display of the explanation for switching modes may be continued even while the demo screen is being displayed, (2) the display of the currently set BGM mode and the explanation for switching modes may not be displayed while the demo screen is being displayed, or (3) the display of the currently set BGM mode may be displayed while the demo screen is being displayed, but the explanation for switching modes may not be displayed.

In this way, the "Distribution mode" display is always displayed (it may be configured not to display during CZ, continuous performances, or on the demo screen), but the explanation of mode switching (the display of "Modes can be switched by pressing and holding the LCD screen" in Figure 70 (b)) is configured to only be displayed when the game is set to distribution mode and it is possible to switch from distribution mode to normal mode.

By notifying the user through a display on the LCD only when the machine is set to distribution mode in this way, it is possible to reduce displays that are not directly related to the effects that affect the progress of the game, allowing players who are not interested in video distribution to enjoy the effects to the fullest. Also, since "Distribution Mode" is displayed on the LCD when the machine is set to distribution mode, players can see at a glance that they can return to normal mode if they want to listen to background music for which a music usage fee is charged, and it is also possible to prevent players from mistakenly thinking that a particular song is not included in the gaming machine.

Even when normal mode is set, the display may be configured to display "normal mode" on the left edge of the LCD screen to indicate the currently set BGM mode. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display to display an explanation of the mode change when the BGM mode can be changed even when normal mode is set. This configuration allows the player to properly understand the BGM mode.

<About the distribution mode and song selection function during AT>
In this embodiment, a music selection function is provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the BGM to be output from the speaker S during the AT. For example, in a situation where BGM1 is output from the speaker S as the default BGM predetermined for each production stage or game state, when BGM2 is selected by the music selection function, the BGM output from the speaker S is changed from BGM1 to BGM2.

Song selection is possible at a predetermined timing after the end of play during the AT (for example, 2 seconds after the end of play (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has been completed, after the payout process has been completed, etc.)), and at that predetermined timing the name of the BGM song currently being played is displayed on the LCD; each time the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated, the selected BGM is switched in sequence and the name of the selected BGM song is displayed on the LCD; and by operating the sub-switch 20, the BGM corresponding to the currently displayed (selected) song name is played. For example, if the music list is configured in the following order: "BGM1 (copyright free)" → "BGM2 (music usage fee applies)" → "BGM3 (copyright free)" and the BGM currently being played is BGM1, then "BGM1" will be displayed in a specific display area of the LCD (for example, the edge of the LCD, such as the top right or bottom right) at a specific timing after the game ends, and each time the sub cross key switch 21 is operated, the display will switch in the following order: "BGM2" → "BGM3" → "BGM1" → "BGM2" ...

The music selection function may be configured to be unavailable after a game ends in a specific situation, such as when a game is playing during a continuous performance or when a specific chance performance has been executed. In this case, the name of the currently playing BGM is not displayed even at a specific timing after the game ends (for example, 2 seconds after the game ends (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, after the payout process has ended, etc.)), and the BGM is not changed even if the sub cross key switch 21 is operated. By configuring it in this way, the player can properly understand that a situation exists in which music selection is not possible.

The music selection function is available when the machine is set to normal mode, and is configured to be unavailable when the machine is set to distribution mode. Specifically, when the machine is in distribution mode during an AT, copyright-free BGM is played as the default BGM, and the name of the currently played BGM is not displayed even at a predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, two seconds after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, after the payout process has ended, etc.)), and the BGM cannot be changed even if the sub cross key switch 21 is operated. This configuration allows the player to properly understand that a situation exists in which music cannot be selected.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the song selection function can be used for copyright-free BGM even when the AT is in distribution mode. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that even if the sub cross key switch 21 is operated, only the song names of copyright-free BGM are displayed, and the song names of BGM for which a song usage fee is incurred are not displayed (cannot be selected). For example, if the music list is configured in the order "BGM1 (copyright free)" -> "BGM2 (music usage fee required)" -> "BGM3 (copyright free)" and the BGM currently being played is BGM1, then "BGM1" is displayed on the LCD at a predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, two seconds after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has been completed, after the payout process has been completed, etc.)), and when the sub cross key switch 21 is operated, "BGM3" is selected and "BGM3" is displayed on the LCD. In other words, the BGM for which a music usage fee is required is skipped and copyright-free BGM is selected and displayed on the LCD. This configuration prevents the player from mistakingly believing that the gaming machine is broken because BGM for which a music usage fee is required can be selected but not played.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game other than the final game of a consecutive performance or CZ, the currently playing background music is changed to a dedicated background music (sometimes called confirmation background music) as a performance that notifies the player that a bonus will be awarded in the final game (a performance in which the success of a consecutive performance or CS is confirmed in an intermediate game), and a performance in which a specific one of the LED lamps used for the performance is illuminated in rainbow colors (sometimes called confirmation performance A) can be executed.

In this embodiment, since BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred is used as the confirmed BGM, when confirmed performance A is executed in distribution mode, the BGM being played is not switched to the confirmed BGM but is continued to be played. Even when distribution mode is set, as in normal mode, a specific lamp among the LED lamps for performance is configured to light up in rainbow colors as part of confirmed performance A. On the other hand, when confirmed performance A is executed in normal mode, the BGM being played is switched to the confirmed BGM.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to properly notify the player that a bonus will be awarded in the final play of a consecutive performance or CZ, while avoiding copyright infringement of the music.

It should be noted that if you use copyright-free BGM as the confirmed BGM, there is no problem in switching to the confirmed BGM as confirmed performance A, just as in normal mode, even when the distribution mode is set.

<Explanation regarding ball output specifications across advantageous zones>
In the conventional gaming machines, when a favorable zone is ended and a normal zone is entered, all parameters that affect the performance of the instruction function are updated to 0 by the RAM initialization process (also called RAM initialization process at the end of the favorable zone). Therefore, when a favorable zone is ended and a new favorable zone is entered through a normal zone, information on the instruction function in the previous favorable zone cannot be carried over at all. For this reason, even if there are 500 games left in the AT in one favorable zone, if the upper limit of the favorable zone is reached, the AT is ended and the number of remaining games in the AT is initialized, which often makes the player feel that he has lost. In view of this problem, a method is described in which a predetermined parameter that affects the performance of the instruction function (for example, a predetermined mode related to the winning of the AT, a predetermined point related to the winning of the AT, etc., also called a carryover parameter) is indirectly carried over to the next favorable zone by winning a bonus before the end of the favorable zone.

Note that here, the reel arrangement, symbol combination, condition device, and internal lottery placement number are basically the same as in Figures 12 to 22, but the replay probability is configured not to change (maintain non-RT) even if the Type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop in a game in which Type 1 BB is won. In other words, it is configured not to have RT1 (inside Type 1 BB). Also, it is configured to have RT2, which is entered after the end of Type 1 BB and ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games). Also, since it is configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone even in a game in which Replay-A or Replay-B is won, it is configured to determine a transition to the advantageous zone at approximately 1/1 (65532/65536) in the normal zone. Also, for ease of explanation, a non-RT state where the Type 1 BB is not activated will be referred to as Non-RT1, and a non-RT state where the Type 1 BB condition device is activated will be referred to as Non-RT2, but Non-RT1 and Non-RT2 are the same RT, and the internal lottery numbers are also the same, except that a Type 1 BB single win with a number of 4 in Non-RT1 will be a loss in Non-RT2.

The RT transition starts from non-RT1, and if a type 1 BB is won during non-RT1 and the type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, the next game (or the end of the game) will be non-RT2, and if a type 1 BB symbol combination stops during non-RT2, non-RT2 ends and type 1 BB is activated from the next game (also referred to as during type 1 BB), and when the activation of type 1 BB ends, the next game will transition to RT2, and when a predetermined number of games are played in RT2, RT2 ends and the next game will transition to non-RT1. Note that when a type 1 BB is won during RT2, if a type 1 BB symbol combination stops, RT2 ends and type 1 BB is activated from the next game, and if a type 1 BB symbol combination does not stop, RT2 is not ended and if 5 games are played in RT2, RT2 ends and the next game will transition to non-RT2. In addition, since the setting change starts from non-RT (non-RT1), if the setting change device operates while the type 1 BB condition device is operating (non-RT2) or while type 1 BB is operating, non-RT (non-RT1) is set when the operation of the setting change device ends. Note that in the event of a power outage in which the setting change device does not operate (sometimes called a normal power outage), the RT state and type 1 BB operation state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, it starts from the state before the power outage.

In addition, the system is configured to be able to stop the type 1 BB symbol combination by operating certain stop switches in games in which a type 1 BB is won during non-RT1, games in which a loss occurs during non-RT2, and games in which one of the push order bell group C (winning - C1 to C6) is won during non-RT2. In games in which one of the push order bell group C is won during an advantageous zone, the system notifies the user of the operation mode of the stop switch that will not stop the type 1 BB symbol combination except in some circumstances, so the user can maintain non-RT2 by playing according to the operation mode notified.

In this embodiment, in order to indirectly carry over carryover parameters (also referred to as the expectation level for the AT, the expectation level for the notified game state, and the specified information for the notified game state) in one favorable period (hereinafter also referred to as favorable period 1) to the next favorable period (hereinafter also referred to as favorable period 2), first, in favorable period 1, if a specific condition is met during the AT (for example, the number of coins won during the AT exceeds 2000, the number of times played during the AT reaches a specified number, the number of times played in one favorable period reaches a specified number, etc., also referred to as an ending condition), the AT is configured to continue until the specified condition is met (for example, until the value of the MY counter exceeds a specified value (for example, a value less than the upper limit value of the MY counter, such as 2350)) regardless of the remaining period of the AT at the time the specific condition is met.

After that, in a game in which the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value and in which the 1st type BB symbol combination can be stopped, a predetermined effect is executed to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination to stop. Note that when executing the predetermined effect to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination to stop, the operation mode of the stop switch that can stop the 1st type BB symbol combination is not notified, but the operation mode of the stop switch that does not stop the 1st type BB symbol combination even if one of the push order bells C group is won. Also, if the 1st type BB symbol combination does not stop in a game in which a predetermined effect to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination is executed, the predetermined effect to prompt the 1st type BB symbol combination to stop is executed again in the subsequent game in which the 1st type BB symbol combination can be stopped.

After that, when the operation of the Type 1 BB ends, the next game will transition to RT2, and the advantageous zone 1 will end in either the game in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or in any game during RT2, and all parameters will be updated to 0, and the next game will transition to the normal zone and non-RT1. Note that which game, either the game in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or any game during RT2, will end the advantageous zone 1 in is configured to be determined at the end of the game in which the ending conditions are satisfied in the advantageous zone 1, depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the game in which the ending conditions are satisfied.

After that, the game moves through the normal zone and then to the advantageous zone 2, and the carryover parameter values are configured to be newly determined according to the number of games played in RT2.

Specifically, if the value of the carryover parameter at the end of a game in which the ending condition is satisfied in advantageous zone 1 is a first value, it is determined that advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends, and the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 occurs in the first game of RT2, so that four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the value of the carryover parameter is set to the first value.
Furthermore, if the value of the carryover parameter at the end of a game that has satisfied the ending conditions in advantageous zone 1 is a second value, then after the operation of Type 1 BB has ended, it is determined that advantageous zone 1 will end in the first game of RT2 and that the game will move from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the second game of RT2, so that three games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the value of the carryover parameter is set to the second value.
In this way, the value of the carried-over parameter at the time of transition to non-RT in favorable zone 2 is configured to differ depending on the value of the carried-over parameter at the end of a game in which the ending condition is satisfied in favorable zone 1.

By changing the number of times to play in RT2 at the start of the next favorable zone in this way depending on the value of the carryover parameter in one favorable zone, it is possible to roughly know the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the previous favorable zone based on the number of times to play in RT2 at the start of the favorable zone, and it is also possible to indirectly carry over the value of the carryover parameter to the next favorable zone.

In this embodiment, the timing for deciding which of the games in which the operation of the Type 1 BB ends or any of the games during RT2 will end the advantageous zone 1 is set to the end of the game in which the ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous zone 1, but it is not limited to this and may be set to the end of the game in which a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous zone 1 (for example, the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, a value less than the upper limit of the MY counter, such as 2350)), or may be set to the end of the game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination stops after satisfying a predetermined condition in the advantageous zone 1.

In addition, in the case where the ending conditions are not met during the AT but the advantageous zone ends after the AT ends, the value of the carryover parameter may be indirectly carried over to the next advantageous zone using a similar method. In this case, it is preferable to configure the game to execute a predetermined effect that encourages the stopping of the Type 1 BB symbol combination in a game in which the Type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the AT ends. In this case, the game may be configured to determine whether the advantageous zone will end in the game in which the Type 1 BB operation ends or in any game during RT2 at the end of the final game of the AT, depending on the value of the carryover parameter at the end of the final game of the AT.

In addition, if a player accidentally stops the Type 1 BB symbol combination when a specific effect that encourages the player to stop the Type 1 BB symbol combination is not being executed, the advantageous zone is configured to continue without ending even after the operation of the Type 1 BB ends. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the advantageous zone from ending at an unintended timing. This configuration also makes it possible to prevent a player from using a strategy such as intentionally ending the advantageous zone depending on the game situation.

<<Example 1 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 75, we will explain the case where certain points related to winning the AT are carried over to the next advantageous period as carryover parameters.

The specific points related to winning the AT are managed by a specific counter (details omitted), and are accumulated when an unfavorable event occurs to the player during gameplay, such as when a consecutive performance fails or when a CZ fails. When the points reach 100, a specific bonus is awarded, such as winning the AT or adding to the remaining time of the AT.

Pattern A in Figure 75 shows the case where the specified points for winning the AT are 0 to 30 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A of FIG. 75, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB ends, and the first game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the system is configured to set the specified point related to winning the AT to 30.

Pattern B in Figure 75 shows the case where the specified points for winning the AT are 31 to 50 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of FIG. 75, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the first play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the second play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the system is configured to set the specified point related to the AT win to 50.

Pattern C in Figure 75 shows the case where the specified points for winning the AT are 51 to 70 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of FIG. 75, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the second play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the third play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the system is configured to set the specified point related to the AT win to 70.

Pattern D in Figure 75 shows the case where the specified points for winning the AT are 71 to 100 points at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern D of FIG. 75, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, it is determined that advantageous zone 1 ends with the third play of RT2, and that the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 occurs with the fourth play of RT2, so that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play has been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the system is configured to set the specified point related to the AT win to 100.

<<Specific example 2 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 76, we will explain the case where a specified mode related to winning the AT is carried over to the next advantageous period as a carryover parameter.

Details of the specified modes for winning the AT are omitted, but there are four modes: Normal A, Normal B, Heaven Preparation, and Heaven, and the expected probability of winning the AT in the general advantageous zone state differs depending on which mode you are in.

Pattern A in Figure 76 shows the case where the player is in normal A at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A in FIG. 76, advantageous zone 1 ends with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB ends, and the first game of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that four games are played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, normal A is set as the predetermined mode for winning the AT.

Pattern B in Figure 76 shows the case where the player is in normal B at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of FIG. 76, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the first play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the second play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, normal B is set as the predetermined mode for winning the AT.

Pattern C in Figure 76 shows the case where the player is in Heaven Preparation at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of FIG. 76, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the second play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the third play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so that two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, heaven preparation is set as a predetermined mode related to winning the AT.

Pattern D in Figure 76 shows the case where the player is in heaven at the end of the game after satisfying the ending conditions.

In pattern D in FIG. 76, after the operation of Type 1 BB is completed, the third play of RT2 ends advantageous zone 1, and the fourth play of RT2 determines the transition from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2, so one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, heaven is set as the specified mode for winning the AT.

<<Specific example 3 of ball output specifications across advantageous zones>>
Next, using Figure 77, we will explain the case where specified information regarding the AT execution period is carried over to the next favorable period as a carryover parameter.

Note that, here, the game of RT2 that ends the advantageous zone is determined according to the number of remaining stocks in the AT at the end of the advantageous zone, but if the remaining stocks in the AT are configured to be cleared when the ending conditions are met, the game of RT2 that ends the advantageous zone may be determined according to the number of remaining stocks in the AT at the time the ending conditions are met. Also, instead of the remaining number of stocks in the AT as the specified information regarding the execution period of the AT, if the AT is a game number management type AT, the number of remaining games in the AT may be used as the carryover parameter, or if the AT is a difference number management type AT, the remaining number of wins that can be won in the AT may be used as the carryover parameter.

The number of remaining stocks in the AT is information about the remaining period of the AT in a so-called set-managed AT, and details will be omitted, but for example, in the case of an AT that lasts for 50 games per set, if there are remaining stocks after 50 games of the AT are played, the AT will move on to the next set, and if there are no remaining stocks, a lottery to continue the AT is held and the AT will end if there is no winning lottery.

Pattern A in Figure 77 shows the case where the remaining stocks in the AT are 0 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern A of FIG. 77, it is decided that advantageous zone 1 will end with the game in which the activation of Type 1 BB has ended, and it is decided to move from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 in the first game of RT2, so that four games will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 0 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern B in Figure 77 shows the case where the remaining stock in the AT is 1 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern B of FIG. 77, after the operation of Type 1 BB has finished, the first play of RT2 determines that advantageous zone 1 will end, and the second play of RT2 determines that the normal zone will transition to advantageous zone 2, so that three plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that three plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 1 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern C in Figure 77 shows the case where the remaining stock number in the AT is 2 at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern C of FIG. 77, after the operation of Type 1 BB has finished, the second play of RT2 determines that advantageous zone 1 will end, and the third play of RT2 determines that the normal zone will transition to advantageous zone 2, so that two plays are executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that two plays have been executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 2 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

Pattern D in Figure 77 shows the case where the remaining stocks in the AT are 3 or more at the end of a game in which the ending conditions are met in advantageous zone 1.

In pattern D of FIG. 77, after the operation of Type 1 BB has finished, it is decided to end advantageous zone 1 at the third play of RT2, and it is decided to move from the normal zone to advantageous zone 2 at the fourth play of RT2, so that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2. Then, based on the fact that one play is executed in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, the remaining stock number of the AT is set to 3 as predetermined information regarding the execution period of the AT.

By configuring as in specific examples 1 to 3 above, the value of the carried-over parameters in one favorable zone can be indirectly carried over to the next favorable zone, so that the carried-over parameters in one favorable zone can be prevented from being initialized by the initialization process at the end of the favorable zone, which would cause the player to incur losses. In addition, it is possible to create an incentive to continue playing even when one favorable zone ends and the game moves to the next favorable zone.

As shown in Figures 75 to 77, the timing of the end of the advantageous zone is delayed as the carry-over parameter value increases, because there is a 4/65536 probability that the normal zone will continue. For example, in pattern B of Figure 75, the specified point related to winning the AT is set to 50 at the start of advantageous zone 2, but if the normal zone continues for two plays, two plays will be played in RT2 at the start of advantageous zone 2, and so the specified point related to winning the AT is set to 70. In this way, by configuring the timing of the end of the advantageous zone to be delayed as the carry-over parameter value increases, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering losses even if the normal zone happens to continue for more than two plays.

The system may be configured so that the greater the carryover parameter value, the earlier the advantageous period ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the gaming establishment from incurring losses even if the normal period happens to continue for two games.

Note that RT2 is configured to end after five plays, but the number of plays after which RT2 ends can be set appropriately depending on the carryover parameters that you want to indirectly carry over to the next favorable zone.

It is also possible to indirectly carry over multiple carryover parameters to the next advantageous period by increasing the number of games that will end RT2.
For example, any one of the specified points related to winning the AT, the specified mode related to winning the AT, and the specified information related to the remaining period of the AT may be set as a carryover parameter, any two of them may be set as carryover parameters, or all three may be set as carryover parameters.
It should be noted that carry-over parameters may be set to four or more in addition to the above-mentioned three.

In addition, a method for indirectly carrying over a specific parameter that affects the performance related to the indication function to the next favorable interval has been described, but the above-mentioned method can also be used for other purposes.
For example, when a specific flag is won (for example, a part of the game in which a role of 4/65536 is won), the AT continues in one advantageous zone until the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 2350), and a predetermined performance is executed in a game in which the 1st type BB symbol combination can be stopped after the value of the MY counter exceeds the predetermined value, and then the advantageous zone ends in a game in which the operation of the 1st type BB ends. After that, it is decided to move from the normal zone to the next advantageous zone in the first game of RT2, and four games are played in RT2 at the start of the next advantageous zone. Based on the fact that four games have been played in RT2 at the start of the advantageous zone, the AT is moved to after a predetermined number of premonition games (for example, 32 games), and the AT is continued until the value of the MY counter exceeds 2400 and the end condition of the advantageous zone is satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a player a game value that exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous zone based on the winning of a specific flag.

For example, when an ending condition is satisfied in one favorable zone, the AT continues until the value of the MY counter exceeds a predetermined value, and a predetermined effect is executed in a game in which a type 1 BB symbol combination can be stopped after the value of the MY counter exceeds the predetermined value, prompting the stopping of the type 1 BB symbol combination, and then the favorable zone ends in a game in which the operation of the type 1 BB ends. After that, it may be decided to move from the normal zone to the next favorable zone in the first game of RT2, and at the start of the next favorable zone, the remaining games of RT2 may be configured to be in a high probability state in which the expectation of winning the AT is high. In addition to being in a high probability state, it may also be configured to hold a lottery to add to the remaining period of the AT when the AT is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the next favorable zone even when the upper limit is reached and the favorable zone ends.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be the subject of the lottery.

<Processing for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media>
Conventionally, there have been gaming machines that have a normal zone and a favorable zone as game zones, and that end the favorable zone when the MY of the favorable zone exceeds 2400. (Prior art document: JP 2020-010896 A)

Here, in conventional gaming machines (prior art documents), the MY of the advantageous zone is set as the base (0) at the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed since the advantageous zone began, and the advantageous zone ends when the difference from the base exceeds "2400." Note that the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is synonymous with the point where the difference in the number of gaming media is the lowest.

Therefore, in conventional gaming machines (prior art documents), a player could only receive a maximum profit of the difference of "2414" in one advantageous zone. Therefore, if a player spends a lot of gaming media while playing in an advantageous zone, he or she cannot get back the gaming media spent in that advantageous zone, and conventional gaming machines were not attractive to players.

For example, in conventional gaming machines, even if a game where the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone is -3000 reaches a specified game state (e.g., AT state), the game ends if the MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Therefore, at most, only about 2400 game media could be obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference in the number of game media in the advantageous zone would end at about -600).

Therefore, instead of ending the advantageous zone when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the advantageous zone is configured to end when the start of the advantageous zone is set as the starting point (0) and the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2400). Specifically, the total number of INs of gaming media in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of inputs or total number of bets) and the total number of OUTs of gaming media in the advantageous zone (also referred to as the total number of payouts or total number of awards) are taken into consideration. In other words, the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference between the number of OUTs of gaming media in the advantageous zone and the number of INs of gaming media in the advantageous zone (hereinafter referred to as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone) exceeds 2400. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with improved playability compared to conventional machines while keeping the gambling nature within a certain range.

For example, with the gaming machine according to the present invention, when a certain game state (e.g., AT state) is reached from a certain game in which the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000, the advantageous zone can be ended when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, starting from the start of the advantageous zone. Therefore, it becomes possible to obtain a maximum of approximately 5400 gaming media from a game in which the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is -3000 (the difference in the number of gaming media in one advantageous zone becomes +2400, and the advantageous zone ends).

If the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone (the difference between the total number of gaming media awarded in the advantageous zone and the total number of gaming media bet in the advantageous zone) exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2,400), it is acceptable to end the advantageous zone at a value less than this predetermined number. In other words, when the start of the advantageous zone is taken as the starting point (0), the maximum difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone becomes a predetermined number (more precisely, the predetermined number + α (α is the maximum difference in the number of gaming media in one game)).

In addition, even if the advantageous zone is configured to end when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds a predetermined number, the advantageous zone can also be ended if any end condition is met before the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one advantageous zone exceeds the predetermined number.

In this way, in order to end the game when the difference in the number of gaming media obtained in one favorable zone exceeds a predetermined value, it is necessary to be able to store the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone even if the difference in the number of gaming media is a negative value.

Below, we will use diagrams to explain the specific process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media.

<<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (addition version)>>
78 is a diagram showing an example of a process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference number of game media. This process corresponds to a modified example of the advantageous zone clear counter management process of FIG.

In Figure 78, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the (total) difference number of game media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is not cleared by turning the power on or off. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM when the favorable zone ends. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by turning the power on with a setting change (clearing the RWM when a setting change occurs). Information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag area, and is not cleared when the limit state is reached.

Note that turning on the power with a setting change specifically refers to turning on the power switch while the setting key switch is on. In other words, turning on the power with a setting change causes the machine to switch to setting change mode, and once the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met (for example, the setting key switch being turned off after the start switch being turned on), the machine will end the setting change mode and become playable.

The value stored in the advantageous zone difference counter is configured to be updated by playing in the advantageous zone.

In the following explanation, the advantageous section difference counter is configured with 2 bytes, but the advantageous section difference counter may be configured with 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in "favorable zone clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is not below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

As mentioned above, the advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

In "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the answer is NO. Specifically, the answer is NO if the carry flag is not 1. In other words, if "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is judged as NO, it means that a value of 1 or more is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for the current game. In other words, this means that the current game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

"Is the next game in an advantageous zone?" is determined based on the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, a transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores information indicating a transition to an advantageous zone. Also, for example, if a transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (game in the normal zone) and the game state of the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores the game state of the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not based on information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the result is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the result is NO.

In "save favorable zone clear counter initial value", an initial value is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Note that this initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one favorable zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, but may be any predetermined value. For example, a number of games that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535) may be set.

In "Set initial value of favorable zone difference counter", the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. In other words, when the favorable zone starts (when the current game is a game in the normal zone and the next game is a game in the favorable zone), the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 63135 (65535-2400) and stored in the HL register.

The initial value of 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400" corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone at which the favorable zone ends from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte storage area (corresponding to the size of the storage area of the favorable zone difference counter). Note that in this example, the condition for ending the favorable zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the favorable zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the favorable zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the favorable zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone exceeds 4800, the initial value is set to 60735 (65535-4800).

In this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 16774815 (16777215-2400).

The effect of setting the initial value as "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" minus "a value corresponding to the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone defined as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be described later.

"Before decrement of favorable zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the favorable zone clear counter was 1 before performing "favorable zone clear counter -1". For example, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the favorable zone clear counter has a value of 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before subtraction of favorable zone clear counter = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", a process is performed to store the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter in a specified register (e.g. HL register).

In "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a game based on a replay), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the answer is NO.
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the answer is NO.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the IN number minus the OUT number (if the carry flag is 1), the result is determined as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is determined as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is determined as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is determined as NO.

To give a specific example, the result of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, then the A register will have a value of 249 and the carry flag will have a value of 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, the number of bets set by the automatic bet will be treated as the number of INs for the current game.

On the other hand, for the IN number and OUT number, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "IN number < OUT number?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the OUT number.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", we calculated the IN number - the OUT number, but we could also determine it by OUT number - IN number. In other words, it would be sufficient if we could use the IN number and the OUT number to calculate the difference in the number of game media for the current game.

In "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?" is subtracted from the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, HL register). Note that if a carry occurs due to "advantageous section difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register = 65535 and the carry flag = 1. Note that 2-3 = -1, but a register cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the HL register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.

When "favorable section difference number counter < 0", "favorable section difference number counter subtraction" is used to determine whether or not a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, it is judged as YES, and if a carry has not occurred, it is judged as NO. In the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, a) it is judged as YES if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0. Also, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, b) it is judged as NO if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 1. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter is 2, c) it is judged as NO if IN number = 3 and OUT number = 3.

When "favourable section difference counter < 0" returns YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Setting the lower limit of the favorable section difference counter", if a carryover occurs due to "Subtracting the favorable section difference counter", a predetermined lower limit (0) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 2, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, then "Subtracting the favorable section difference counter" causes the HL register to = 65535. In such a case, "Setting the lower limit of the favorable section difference counter" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, the lower limit value of 0 is stored in the HL register, making it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Set advantageous zone difference counter lower limit value" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set advantageous zone difference counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 78 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that, although FIG. 78 includes the process of "Set lower limit of favorable section difference counter", the process of "Set lower limit of favorable section difference counter" may not be included. Specifically, when "Favorable section difference counter < 0" is judged as YES, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 2, and the IN number and OUT number of the game are a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the value of the favorable section difference counter of the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with digits dropped) from being stored in the "Favorable section difference counter". In addition, since the process corresponding to "Set lower limit of favorable section difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a downgrade occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction," the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the downgrade, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In "Favourable Zone Difference Counter Addition", the complement of the result of the calculation "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then added to the HL register.

The complement in "advantageous section difference counter addition" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or by a single instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Then, by calculating 2+7, 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2+7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

In addition, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65530,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register = 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 65530 + 7 is calculated, and 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530 + 7 is 65537, but since it exceeds 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

In "save favorable zone difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if 63135 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 63135 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activation" is YES, the value of the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save favorable zone difference counter" stores the same value as the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if "Is favorable zone difference counter < 0?" returns NO, the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "save favorable zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by subtracting the difference in the gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit (0) is stored in the HL register, so the lower limit (0) is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, after "adding favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by adding the difference number of the media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) to the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by adding the difference number of the game media for the current game to the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the favorable zone difference number counter.

In "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?", it is determined whether the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it is determined as YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it is determined as NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when there is a carry due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition". On the other hand, if there is a carry due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction", the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", it is possible to determine whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is directly compared to a constant (2400).

In this way, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", whether the carry flag is 1 determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 63135 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 63135 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "2400", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area of the favorable zone difference counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will be set to 1.

In addition, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 63135, a situation in which the value of the favorable zone difference counter is 13135 means that with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0), the difference is -50000.

As described above, by storing 63135 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the advantageous zone difference number counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone set as the end condition of the advantageous zone", it is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400. Also, by storing 63135 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to -63135 as the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. Note that although an example is given of storing 63135 as the initial value, values other than 63135 can be used as the initial value as long as they have the same effect.

In "RWM initialization", all parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function are updated to 0, and the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated. Note that parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. Then, by updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be a game in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. In the game in the advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be a game in the advantageous zone (the advantageous zone does not end).

In other words, if an abnormal value is stored in the HL register due to a carryover, it is possible to calculate the difference number of the favorable zone as accurately as possible by storing the lower limit value of 0 in the HL register. Note that even if "Set favorable zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the favorable zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the favorable zone. In other words, even in play after "Set favorable zone difference number counter lower limit value" is executed, the processing in FIG. 78 is executed as long as the favorable zone continues.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. In the case where the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number, when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO (when a down-carriage occurs in the A register), in "favourable section difference number counter subtraction", the complement is calculated by a predetermined calculation and stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game), and then the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter). In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" is NO, it is sufficient to be configured to subtract the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium of the current game from the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter.

Similarly, if the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is configured, then when "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES (when no carryover occurs in the A register), the "advantageous section difference number counter addition" can add the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming media in the current game) from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter) without calculating the complement. In other words, when "IN number < OUT number?" is NO, it is sufficient to configure it to add the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game from the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

<Processing to end the advantageous zone with the difference in the number of gaming media (subtraction version)>
79 is a diagram showing an example of a process for ending the advantageous zone with the difference number of game media. This process corresponds to a modified example of the advantageous zone clear counter management process of FIG.

In Figure 79, there is a favorable zone difference number counter. The favorable zone difference number counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone.

The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is not cleared by turning the power on or off. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by clearing the RWM when the favorable zone ends. The value stored in the favorable zone difference counter is cleared by turning the power on with a setting change (clearing the RWM when a setting change occurs). Information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag area, and is not cleared when the limit state is reached.

In the following explanation, the advantageous section difference counter is configured with 2 bytes, but the advantageous section difference counter may be configured with 3 bytes or 4 bytes.

First, in "favorable zone clear counter -1", 1 is subtracted from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter. If the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is below 0 (if there is a borrow), the carry flag becomes 1. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is not below 0 (if there is no borrow), the carry flag becomes 0. Also, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter is 0, the zero flag becomes 1.

As mentioned above, the advantageous zone clear counter is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area that can store a value corresponding to the number of plays in the advantageous zone.

In "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?", if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the advantageous zone clear counter does not fall below 0, the answer is NO. Specifically, the answer is NO if the carry flag is not 1. In other words, if "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is judged as NO, it means that a value of 1 or more is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter for the current game. In other words, this means that the current game is in an advantageous zone.

On the other hand, if the answer to the question "Is the advantageous zone clear counter before subtraction = 0?" is YES, it means that the current game is in the normal zone.

"Is the next game in an advantageous zone?" is determined based on the information in the RWM area stored in the main control board. For example, a transition to an advantageous zone may be decided in the current game (game in the normal zone), and the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores information indicating a transition to an advantageous zone. Also, for example, if a transition to an advantageous zone is decided in the current game (game in the normal zone) and the game state of the transition destination is also determined, the determination may be made based on the information in the RWM area that stores the game state of the transition destination. In any case, it is possible to determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not based on information that can determine whether the next game will be in an advantageous zone or not. If the next game is in an advantageous zone, the result is YES, and if the next game is not in an advantageous zone, the result is NO.

In "save favorable zone clear counter initial value", an initial value is stored in an RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. For example, if the initial value is 1500, 1500 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Also, for example, if the initial value is 3000, 3000 is stored in the RWM area capable of storing the value of the favorable zone clear counter. Note that this initial value corresponds to the maximum number of games that can be played in one favorable zone. Therefore, the initial value is not limited to 1500 or 3000, but may be any predetermined value. For example, a number of games that cannot be completed in one day (e.g., 65,535) may be set.

In "Set initial value of favorable zone difference counter", the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. In other words, when the favorable zone starts (when the current game is a game in the normal zone and the next game is a game in the favorable zone), the initial value to be stored in the favorable zone difference counter is set in the register. Specifically, the initial value is set to 2400 and stored in the HL register.

Here, the initial value of 2400 is the value "2400" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that ends the advantageous zone. Note that in this example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone is not limited to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 2400. For example, the condition for ending the advantageous zone can be set to a predetermined value, such as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeding 4800. If the condition for ending the advantageous zone is that the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 4800, the initial value is set to 4800.

In addition, in this example, the advantageous zone difference number counter is 2 bytes, but it can also be 3 bytes. If the advantageous zone difference number counter is 3 bytes and the condition for ending the advantageous zone is when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, the initial value is set to 2400.

The effect of setting the initial value to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that is set as the end condition of the advantageous zone" will be described later.

"Before decrement of favorable zone clear counter = 1?" determines whether the favorable zone clear counter was 1 before performing "favorable zone clear counter -1". For example, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the favorable zone clear counter has a value of 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 1), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the favorable zone clear counter in "favorable zone clear counter -1" is that the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (specifically, if the zero flag is 0), the answer is NO.

In addition, after "Before subtraction of favorable zone clear counter = 1?" and before "When replay is activated?", a process is performed to store the value stored in the favorable zone difference counter in a specified register (e.g. HL register).

In "Replay Activated?", if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game based on a replay), the answer is YES. On the other hand, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is not a game based on a replay), the answer is NO.

"IN number < OUT number?" determines whether the OUT number is greater than the IN number.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the answer is NO.
a) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 1, the answer is NO.
c) If the number of INs is 3 and the number of OUTs is 3, the answer is NO.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the IN number minus the OUT number is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the IN number minus the OUT number (if the carry flag is 1), the result is determined as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is determined as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the OUT number, the carry flag is 0 and the result is determined as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the OUT number, the carry flag is 1 and the result is determined as NO.

To give a specific example, the result of this game:
a) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the A register is 2 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the A register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
d) If the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, then the A register will have a value of 249 and the carry flag will have a value of 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, the number of bets set by the automatic bet will be treated as the number of INs for the current game.

On the other hand, for the IN number and OUT number, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "IN number < OUT number?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the IN number. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the OUT number.

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", we calculated the IN number - the OUT number, but we could also determine it by OUT number - IN number. In other words, it would be sufficient if we could use the IN number and the OUT number to calculate the difference in the number of game media for the current game.

In "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the value of the calculation result (IN number - OUT number) of "IN number < OUT number?" is added to the value of the advantageous section difference number counter stored in a specified register (for example, HL register). Note that if a carry occurs due to "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the carry flag becomes 1.
For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
A) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 0, the HL register is 1 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 1.
a) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 0.
c) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 3, the HL register value is 65534 and the carry flag is 0.

In "Favourable section difference number counter > upper limit value?", "Favourable section difference number counter addition" determines whether a carry has occurred. If a carry has occurred, it is judged as YES, and if a carry has not occurred, it is judged as NO. In the above example, when the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as YES if a) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 0. Also in the above example, when the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as YES if b) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 1. Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the favourable section difference number counter is 65534, it is judged as NO if c) IN number = 3 and OUT number = 3.

If "Favourable section difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Set favorable section difference counter upper limit value", if a carry occurs due to "Add favorable section difference counter", a predetermined upper limit value (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (HL register in this embodiment). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 65534, if a) the IN number = 3 and the OUT number = 0, then "Subtract favorable section difference counter" causes the HL register to = 1. In such a case, "Set favorable section difference counter upper limit value" stores 65535 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, it is possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone as accurately as possible by storing the upper limit value of 65535 in the HL register. Note that even if "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference number counter" is executed, the advantageous zone continues, and it is possible to provide the player with play in the advantageous zone. In other words, even in play after "Set upper limit value of advantageous zone difference number counter" is executed, the processing in FIG. 79 is executed as long as the advantageous zone continues.

Note that, although FIG. 79 includes the process of "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter", the process of "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter" may not be included. Specifically, when "Favorable section difference counter>Upper limit value" is determined to be YES, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter of the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the favorable section difference counter is 65534 and the IN number and OUT number of the game are a) IN number=3 and OUT number=0, the value stored in the favorable section difference counter may be set to 65534 (the same value as the value of the favorable section difference counter of the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with digits dropped) from being stored in the "favorable section difference counter". In addition, since the process corresponding to "Set upper limit value of favorable section difference counter" is eliminated, the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, if a carry occurs due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition", the advantageous zone difference number counter is not updated using the value at the time of the carry, thereby preventing abnormal values from being entered as the value of the advantageous zone difference number counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone becomes a negative value, the advantageous zone can be ended as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone.

In addition, although 65,535 (the maximum value that can be stored in the favorable zone difference number counter) has been described as an example of the upper limit value, this is not limited to this. For example, it may be a value such as 12,400, which is a numerical value less than the maximum value that can be stored in the favorable zone difference number counter. If 12,400 is adopted as the upper limit value, the favorable zone difference number counter can store a value up to the equivalent of -10,000 as the difference number of gaming media in the favorable zone.

In "Advantageous section difference counter subtraction," the complement of the result of the calculation "IN number < OUT number?" (IN number - OUT number) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register.

The complement in "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived by subtracting the value of the 0-A register, or by a single instruction (NEG instruction) for deriving the complement.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter subtraction" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 2-7 is calculated, and 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2-7 is less than 0 (because there is a carry), the carry flag is 1.

In addition, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the advantageous section difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 10,
d) When the IN number is 3 and the OUT number is 10, the A register is 249, but the "advantageous section difference counter addition" first derives 7, which is the complement of 249. Next, 10-7 is calculated, and 3 is stored in the HL register. Note that 10-7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrow), so the carry flag is 0.

In "save favorable zone difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the favorable zone difference counter. In other words, this is a process that updates the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if 2400 is stored in the HL register by "Set favorable zone difference counter initial value," then 2400 is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, if "Replay Activation" is YES, the value of the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play is stored in the HL register, so "Save favorable zone difference counter" stores the same value as the favorable zone difference counter from the previous play in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter > upper limit?" is NO, the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game (IN number - OUT number) from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so "save favorable zone difference counter" stores the value obtained by adding the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference counter for the previous game in the favorable zone difference counter.

For example, if the answer to "Is favorable zone difference counter > upper limit?" is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so the upper limit (65535) is stored in the favorable zone difference counter by "Save favorable zone difference counter."

For example, after "subtracting favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by subtracting the difference number of gaming media for the current game (OUT number - IN number) from the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the HL register, so by "saving favorable zone difference number counter", the value obtained by subtracting the difference number of gaming media for the current game from the value of the favorable zone difference number counter for the previous game is stored in the favorable zone difference number counter.

In "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?", it is determined whether the difference number of game media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400. Specifically, it is determined whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it is determined as YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it is determined as NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when a carry has been made due to "advantageous zone difference number counter subtraction." On the other hand, if a carry has been made due to "advantageous zone difference number counter addition," the carry flag becomes 1 once, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so that "Advantageous zone difference number > 2400?" can be determined as NO.

In other words, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", it is possible to determine whether the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced compared to when the difference number of gaming media in the advantageous zone is directly compared to a constant (2400).

In this way, in "Advantageous Zone Difference Number > 2400?", whether the carry flag is 1 determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, so the "Advantageous Zone Difference Number Counter Initial Value Set" stores 2400 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 2400 is a value that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media in the favorable zone that ends the favorable zone exceeds 2400, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will become 1.

In addition, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -63135 as the difference in gaming media, with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 2400, a situation in which the value of the favorable zone difference counter is 30000 means that with the start of the favorable zone as the starting point (0), the difference is -27600.

As described above, by storing 2400 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone that is set as the end condition of the advantageous zone," it is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone has exceeded 2400. Also, by storing 2400 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -63135 as the difference in the number of gaming media in the advantageous zone. Note that although an example is given of storing 2400 as the initial value, a value other than 2400 (for example, 2401) can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

In "RWM initialization", all parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function are updated to 0, and the advantageous zone clear counter management process is terminated. Note that parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games, the game status related to the AT, the advantageous zone clear counter, the advantageous zone difference counter, etc. Then, by updating the advantageous zone type to 0, the next game will be a game in a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone. In the game in the advantageous zone, if "RWM initialization" is not executed, the next game will be a game in the advantageous zone (the advantageous zone does not end).

Note that in "IN number < OUT number?", the OUT number is subtracted from the IN number, but it may be configured to subtract the IN number from the OUT number. In the case where the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number, if "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as NO (if a borrow occurs in the A register), then in "advantageous section difference number counter addition", the complement is calculated by a predetermined calculation and stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium in the current game), and then the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter) is added to the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming medium in the current game). In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is judged as YES, the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming medium in the current game is added to the value stored in the advantageous section difference number counter.

Similarly, if the configuration is such that the IN number is subtracted from the OUT number when "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with YES (when no carryover occurs in the A register), then in the "favorable section difference number counter subtraction", the value stored in the A register (the difference number of the gaming media in the current game) can be subtracted from the value stored in the HL register (the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter) without calculating the complement in the "favorable section difference number counter subtraction". In other words, if "IN number < OUT number?" is answered with NO, then the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game can be subtracted from the value stored in the favorable section difference number counter.

As described above, specific processing for ending the advantageous period with the difference in the number of gaming media has been explained using Figures 78 and 79, but the present invention is not limited to these. In other words, it is sufficient if the advantageous period can end with the difference in the number of gaming media.

In addition, in Figures 78 and 79, one of the conditions for ending the advantageous zone is that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number, but the condition for ending the advantageous zone does not have to be that the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number. In that case, it is not necessary to provide the advantageous zone clear counter in Figures 78 and 79.

If a favorable zone clear counter is not provided, the process corresponding to "favorable zone clear counter -1" in Figures 78 and 79, the process corresponding to "before favorable zone clear counter subtraction = 0?", and the process corresponding to "save favorable zone clear counter initial value" may not be provided.

<About the difference counter that records the difference from when the power was turned on>
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a value (difference) is calculated for each game by subtracting the number of medals inserted (sometimes called the number of medals inserted, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of medals bet, the number of bets, the number of bets, the number of points inserted, the bet points, or the number of INs) from the number of medals paid out (sometimes called the number of medals paid out, the number of medals paid out, the number of medals given, the number of game media given, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals acquired, the number of medals paid out, the number of points given, the number of game media acquired, the number of points paid out, the number of points acquired ... Moreover, the process of updating the difference counter before the execution of the limiting process and the process related to the judgment are collectively referred to as the limiting monitoring process.

Note that, in the following, an example will be mainly described in which the stop processing is executed when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a predetermined value, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0), but this is not limited to this. For example, the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed after the power is turned on may be set as the reference (0), and the stop processing may be executed when the difference in the number of gaming media from that reference exceeds a predetermined value. In other words, the stop processing may be executed by MY.

For example, after power is turned on, the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0), and if a stop-play process is executed when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds a predetermined value, the difference counter can store the difference in the number of game media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0), or a value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0) (a value that allows the difference in the number of game media from the reference when the point at which the player's ball output is at its lowest is set as the reference (0) to be understood).

This end-of-game monitoring process is performed not only in advantageous zones but also in normal zones (regardless of the game zone).

For example, in a certain game in which the total number of medals paid out since the power was turned on is 50,001 and the total number of medals inserted since the power was turned on is 31,000, the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, so information indicating that the stop condition has been met in that certain game is stored in the stop flag memory area, making it possible to execute the stop processing.

The cap flag memory area is an area within the RWM area of the main control board. For example, if the difference in the number of game media from the time the power is turned on exceeds 19,000, a specified value (e.g., a predetermined number such as "1" or "255") is stored in the cap flag memory area as information indicating that the cap condition has been met.

Then, if information indicating that the halt condition has been met is stored in the halt flag storage area, the halt process can be executed.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized by simply turning the power on without changing the settings (normal power ON) or turning the power off normally (power switch turned off). Also, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized by clearing the RWM at the end of the favorable zone. Note that turning the power on without changing the settings corresponds, for example, to turning the power switch on when the setting key switch is off.

In other words, if the power is turned off (the power switch is turned off) while the stop processing is being executed, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the stop processing will not be canceled and the stop processing will be executed. Also, even if the game at the end of the advantageous zone is a game that satisfies the stop condition, clearing the RWM at the end of the advantageous zone will not initialize the value of the difference counter related to the stop condition, nor will it clear the information stored in the stop flag memory area, and the stop processing will be executed.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a change in settings (RWM clear process with a change in settings) (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

Also, an RWM clear switch different from the setting key switch may be provided, and the information stored in the stop flag storage area may be cleared when the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated (when the RWM clear switch is on). When the power is turned on while the RWM clear switch is operated, the device does not enter setting change mode, but the RWM clear process associated with the RWM clear switch is performed.

The RWM clear switch may also serve as the reset switch. In other words, when the power is turned on while the reset switch is being operated (while the reset switch is on), the information stored in the stop flag storage area may be cleared.

As described above, if the power is turned off while the limiting process is being executed and then turned on again with a change of settings, the machine will transition to setting change mode, and once the conditions for ending the setting change mode are met and the setting change mode is terminated, the limiting process will not be executed and the machine will enter a state in which play can be continued (a state in which betting can be made).

In addition, the information stored in the stop flag memory area is not initialized by operating a reset switch that can release a certain error state (door open error, medal retention error, etc.), and the stop processing is executed.

In other words, even if the reset switch is operated while the stop process is being executed, the stop process will not be canceled and will be executed.

Note that, although the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the capped flag storage area have been explained here, the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the capped temporary flag storage area, which will be described later, are similar to the conditions for clearing and not clearing the information stored in the capped flag storage area.

The stop processing may be any or all of the following processing: not adding the number of bets or credits when a medal is inserted, turning off the blocker so that the number of bets or credits is not added even when a medal is inserted, not executing bet processing even if the operation of the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch is accepted, not accepting the operation of the MAX bet switch or 1 bet switch, not executing reel spin start processing even if the operation of the start switch is accepted, not accepting the operation of the start switch, not executing reel stop processing even if the operation of the stop switch is accepted, or not accepting the operation of the stop switch.

In other words, the stop processing prevents operations to be performed to play the next game (also called stopping the progress of the game). In this way, the state in which the stop processing is being executed is sometimes called the stop state or the activation of the complete function.

Even if the game progress is stopped by the stop processing, the operation of the settlement switch is valid, and the settlement processing can be executed. In gaming machines that do not use actual medals (so-called medal-less gaming machines), the operation of the settlement switch for moving the bet medals (electronic medals) to the medal count display device (a device that can store up to 16,383 medals based on the concept of the tray 28 of conventional gaming machines) and the operation of the counting switch for moving the number of medals stored in the medal count display device to the lending unit are valid, and the processing based on the operation of each switch is configured to be executable.

When game progress is stopped by the stop processing, it cannot be released even by turning the power on. The stopped game progress (stopped state) can be released by turning the power on, which involves changing the settings and executing the RWM initialization process. In other words, if a gaming machine is put into a stopped state during the opening hours of the gaming center, that gaming machine cannot be operated during the opening hours of that day.

In this way, when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, there is a possibility that it will cause the player to become overly gambling-minded. Therefore, by stopping the progress of the game when the value of the difference counter exceeds the predetermined value, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game.

The difference counter may also be referred to as a difference number counter, difference number storage means, difference number storage means, difference number storage area, difference number storage area, number of gaming media storage means, number of gaming media storage area, number of gaming medals storage means, number of gaming medals storage area, MY counter at power-on, MY storage means at power-on, MY storage area at power-on, limit counter, difference number counter for limiting, difference number counter for limiting, MY counter for limiting, MY storage means for limiting, and MY storage area for limiting.

The value stored in the difference counter is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on in a situation where the game is at a dead end or when the game is not at a dead end. In this embodiment, the initial value of the difference counter is 0 and the game is incremented from the initial value, so initialization at power-on means setting the value of the difference counter to 0. However, if the initial value of the difference counter is 19,000 and the counter is decremented, initialization at power-on means setting the value of the difference counter to 19,000. Note that power-on includes normal power-on, power-on with a setting change, and power-on with an RWM abnormality. Also, the value stored in the difference counter is not initialized by the RWM initialization process that is executed when the end condition of the favorable zone (for example, MY during the favorable zone exceeds 2,400, or the number of games during the favorable zone reaches a predetermined number, etc.) is met.

In addition, since the difference counter is easily initialized by fraudulent means if it is initialized only by turning on the power, the difference counter may be configured to be cleared by turning on the power while pressing a specific switch that cannot be operated by the player, such as a setting change switch, reset switch, or RAM clear switch, when no power is being supplied.

In addition, if a power outage occurs when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value and game progress is stopped, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the OFF position and the game starts up normally (normal power on), the value of the difference counter is initialized, but game progress remains stopped. This is because a stop process is executed when the value of the difference counter exceeds a predetermined value, and this stop process is configured to repeat the same process indefinitely using jump commands, etc., so even if a power outage occurs during the stop process and the power is turned on again, the stop process will start. Note that when the stop process is executed, an interrupt process is executed, and the interrupt process is executed as usual, but the stop process will loop without returning from the interrupt process to the normal main loop process.

In addition, since interrupt processing is executed normally while the termination processing is being performed, the above-mentioned power cut-off processing can be executed normally even if an event that cuts off the power supply (for example, turning off the power switch) occurs during the termination processing.

This configuration can prevent unauthorized power-off and power-on that would allow gameplay to continue after gameplay has been halted by the game-stopping process.

The difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out for each game, and a specific example of updating the value of the difference counter will be described below. Note that the process of updating the value of the difference counter is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (betting for the next game can be made). Since the process of updating the value of the difference counter is executed when one game ends, the predetermined timing is sometimes referred to as when one game ends. Also, the difference counter will be described as 2-byte data. Note that the "/" indicating 2-byte data indicates the separator between each byte, and the number in parentheses after the binary value indicates the binary value as a decimal value.

<When the difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/01101011b (107).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/01100100b (100), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/01100100b (100), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter in the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 00000000/01100001b (97).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00001010b (10), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00001010b (10 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = 00000111b (7), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter in the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter becomes 00000000/00000111b (7).

<When the difference counter = 00000000/00000000b (0), the number of medals paid out = 00000000b (0), and the number of medals inserted = 00000011b (3)>
If the value of the difference counter is 00000000/00000000b (0), the register calculates 00000000b (0 (number of medals paid out)) - 00000011b (3 (number of medals inserted)) = -00000011b (-3), obtains the value of the difference counter, and stores (updates) the result of adding the calculation result and the value of the difference counter in the difference counter. In this case, the value stored in the difference counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771).

The result of the calculation explained above in <When Difference Counter = 00000000b (0), Number of Medals Paid Out = 00000000b (0), Number of Medals Inserted = 00000011b (3)> is -00000011b (-3), but the value stored in the Difference Counter is 10000000/00000011b (32771) because the most significant bit is configured to indicate a positive value when it is 0 and a negative value when it is 1. With a 2-byte counter, values up to 01111111/11111111 (32767) of the difference counter can be stored correctly without using the most significant bit. In other words, if the difference counter value is 11111111/11111111b, it can indicate -32767, so in the above example, -3 would be 10000000/00000011b.

Note that some parts of the above calculation examples are omitted, and in more detail, the current difference counter value is obtained, and it is determined whether the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 0 or not, and if the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 0, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, the subtracted value is added to the obtained difference counter value, and the added value is updated as the value of the difference counter. Also, if the most significant bit of the obtained difference counter value is 1, the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the number of medals paid out, and a value obtained by subtracting 10000000/00000000b (32768) as a fixed value from the obtained difference counter value is added to the subtracted value, and the subtracted value is updated as the value of the difference counter.

In addition, if the result of calculating the value to be updated as the difference counter value is a negative value, the most significant bit of the absolute value of the result of calculating the value to be updated as the difference counter value is set to 1 and the difference counter value is updated.

In addition, in each of the above calculation examples, the result of subtracting the number of medals inserted from the number of medals paid out on the register was added to the obtained value of the difference counter, but the order of calculations may be such that first the number of medals paid out is added to the obtained value of the difference counter, and then the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the result of that addition, or first the number of medals inserted is subtracted from the obtained value of the difference counter, and then the number of medals paid out is added to the result of that subtraction.

When the number of medals paid out is not 0, it means that a small role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the small role has stopped. When a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals paid out may be 3 or 0. If the number of medals paid out is 3 when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals inserted is 3, and if the number of medals paid out is 0 when a replay role has been won and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role has stopped, the number of medals inserted is 0.

In addition, when a replay role is won, the update process of the difference number counter may be executed, or the update process of the difference number counter may not be executed.
In addition, when a replay role is won, the difference number counter determination process may be executed, or the difference number counter determination process may not be executed.

The difference counter does not have to be 2 bytes, but may be 3 bytes or 4 bytes. When the difference counter is 3 bytes, the fixed value is 10000000/00000000/00000000b (8388608), and when the difference counter is 4 bytes, the fixed value is 10000000/00000000/00000000/00000000b (2147483648). Note that the difference counter is initialized when the power is turned on, so even if the number of medals paid out is 0 in 10,000 games, which corresponds to about a whole day during the opening hours of the game arcade, only up to -30,000 (10,000 (number of games that can be played in a day) x 3 (number of medals inserted)) is stored, so a difference counter of 2 bytes is sufficient storage capacity.

<Another aspect regarding update of difference counter>
The gaming machine may be equipped with a payout medal count memory area that stores the total number of payout medals since the gaming machine was powered on, a medal count memory area that stores the total number of medals inserted since the gaming machine was powered on, and a difference counter that stores the difference since the gaming machine was powered on, wherein the payout medal count memory area, the medal count memory area, and the difference counter are configured to be initialized when the power is turned on, and when updating the difference counter in a difference counter update process that is executed after one game is completed, if the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is a positive value, the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is stored in the difference counter, and if the result of subtracting the value stored in the medal count memory area from the value stored in the payout medal count memory area is a negative value, 0 is stored in the difference counter.

In this configuration, it is desirable that the payout medal count storage area, the inserted medal count storage area, and the difference counter are each a 2-byte storage area, but the payout medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, the inserted medal count storage area may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more, and the difference counter may be a storage area of 2 bytes or more.

The medal payout count storage area, medal insertion count storage area, and difference counter are initialized when the power is turned on, and the initialization process involves storing 0 in each storage area. As with the above, the events that occur when the power is turned on include setting changes and RWM abnormalities.

The number of medals paid out storage area is a storage area that accumulates and stores the number of medals paid out for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of medals paid out storage area update process). For example, when 100 is stored in the number of medals paid out storage area, if the Nth game is played and 10 medals are paid out, 110 will be stored in the number of medals paid out storage area after the Nth game is completed, and if the N+1th game is played and 0 medals are paid out (no medals were paid out), 110 will be stored in the number of medals paid out storage area after the N+1th game is completed.

The number of medals inserted memory area is a memory area that accumulates and stores the number of medals inserted for each game, and is updated regardless of the game status or the specified number (sometimes referred to as the number of medals inserted memory area update process). For example, when 50 is stored in the number of medals inserted memory area, if the Nth game is played and three medals are inserted, 53 will be stored in the number of medals inserted memory area after the Nth game is completed, and if the N+1th game is played and two medals are inserted, 55 will be stored in the number of medals paid out memory area after the N+1th game is completed.

The difference counter stores a value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game. Here, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a positive value, the difference counter is updated to the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game. However, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the difference counter is updated to 0. For this reason, the value of the difference counter is not necessarily the value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid medals for each game, but this is not a problem because the difference counter is a counter for determining whether the difference counter has exceeded 19,000.

In addition, the embodiment has been described in which 0 is stored in the difference counter when the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is a negative value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the difference counter may not be updated, a fixed value greater than 0 and less than 19,000 may be stored in the difference counter, a fixed value of 19,000 or more may be stored in the difference counter, or the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game may be stored as is.

In the case of a mode in which the difference counter is not updated when the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game is subtracted from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game, and the value is a negative value, or in the case of a mode in which a fixed value exceeding 0 and less than 19,000 is stored in the difference counter, the value of the difference counter will not exceed 19,000 even if the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 is executed every game, so the progress of the game will not be stopped, and if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a positive value, an accurate value is stored in the difference counter, so there is no problem. Also, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area updated for each game from the value stored in the number of paid medals storage area updated for each game is a negative value, the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 may not be executed.

In the case of a mode in which a fixed value of 19,000 or more is stored in the difference counter when the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is negative, or the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is stored as is, if the process of determining whether the difference counter value exceeds 19,000 is executed every game, it may be determined that the value exceeds 19,000. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting the value stored in the payout medal count storage area updated for each game minus the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area updated for each game is negative, there is no problem in not executing the process of determining whether the difference counter value exceeds 19,000.

The difference counter update process is similar to the above-mentioned process, and is executed at a predetermined timing between when all reels have stopped and when medals for the next game can be inserted (bet for the next game can be placed). The difference counter update process may include a payout medal count memory area update process and an inserted medal count memory area update process.

<Difference counter judgment process when the reel continuous operation device or the first type special reel is in operation>
Before executing the process of determining whether the value of the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 as the difference counter judgment process, it may be possible to judge whether the reel continuous operation device is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, or whether the reel continuous operation device or the first type special reel is operating, and if it is determined that they are operating in either case, the difference counter judgment process may not be executed.

This is because if play stops while the continuous role operation device or the first type special role is operating (so-called during a bonus), there is a high possibility that the player's motivation to play will be significantly diminished. Therefore, by allowing play to proceed during a bonus even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, and stopping the progress of play after the bonus ends, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment without diminishing their motivation to play. It is also possible to increase the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls dispensed during a bonus.

Even in this case, the difference counter update process is performed even when the continuous reel operation device is operating or when the first type special reel is operating. Therefore, it is preferable that the program processing order is configured as follows: "difference counter update process" → "processing to determine whether the continuous reel operation device is operating, whether the first type special reel is operating, and whether the continuous reel operation device or the first type special reel is operating" → "difference counter determination process."

Also, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and the value of the difference counter falls below 19,000 when the bonus ends, the game may be stopped after the bonus ends.

In this case, even during a bonus, it is determined whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, and if it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (for example, any value such as "1", "255", etc.) is stored in the temporary limit flag (temporary limit flag storage area), and it is determined whether the value of the temporary limit flag is the predetermined value when the bonus ends, and if it is the predetermined value, the progress of the game is stopped. Note that if it is determined that the value of the temporary limit flag is not the predetermined value when it is determined that it is not the predetermined value when the bonus ends, the progress of the game is not stopped. Also, if the configuration stores a predetermined value in the temporary stop flag even when it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 when not in a bonus, it can be configured to determine whether the temporary stop flag is a predetermined value or not after each game ends, whether in a bonus or not, and to stop the game depending on the value of the temporary stop flag. If the configuration does not store a predetermined value in the temporary stop flag when it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 when not in a bonus, it can be configured to stop the game depending on whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, without determining whether the temporary stop flag is a predetermined value or not after each game ends when not in a bonus.

The temporary limit flag is not initialized by the initialization of the RWM at power-on, but is configured to be cleared by the initialization of the RWM at power-on that involves a setting change.

In the above embodiment, an example was described in which game progress is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured in such a way that game progress is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during an AT. However, as described above, since the AT is capable of extending (changing) the end condition, game progress is not stopped only in an AT in which the end condition is not extended.

When there are multiple prescribed numbers for starting a game, there are cases where the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one prescribed number, and when the process related to the instruction function cannot be executed with one prescribed number, it cannot be said that the end condition has changed, so the game is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000. Specifically, when three and two coins are possible as the prescribed numbers for starting a game, the AT end condition can be updated with three coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference number can be updated), but the AT end condition cannot be updated with two coins (the number of games at which the AT ends and the difference number cannot be updated), and when the difference counter reaches 19,000 during the AT, the game is not stopped until the AT end condition is met.

This makes it possible to ensure that the player's interest in the game does not decrease, since the AT operates in the same way as a bonus, even if the gameplay makes the AT appear to be a bonus. It also increases the player's motivation to play and increase the number of balls won during the bonus.

In addition, if the progress of the game is not stopped even if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus or AT, lotteries that are advantageous to the player, such as AT lotteries or CZ lotteries, will not be executed during the bonus or during play during the AT after the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000.

This will help to prevent players from becoming overly gambling-minded when it is certain that the game will stop.

It has been described that a determination is made as to whether the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, and if it is determined that the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000, a predetermined value (e.g., any value such as "1" or "255") is stored in a temporary limit flag (temporary limit flag storage area), and when the bonus ends, it is determined whether the value of the temporary limit flag is the predetermined value, and if so, the progress of the game is stopped; however, it is not necessary to provide a temporary limit flag.

Specifically, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the value of the difference counter may be configured not to be updated during subsequent play during the bonus, and a stoppage process may be executed based on the difference counter judgment process after the bonus ends. For example, if the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 during a bonus (e.g., 19001), the difference counter may not be updated during subsequent play after the bonus ends, and the value of the difference number counter at the end of the bonus may be configured to exceed 19,000.

<Initializing the difference counter>
In the above-described embodiment, when the value of the difference counter is initialized at power-on, the initial value is set to 0 if the counter is an additive type, and 19,000 if the counter is a subtractive type. However, this is not limited to this, and any value may be used as the initial value.

For example, if the difference counter is a 2-byte counter, it can count from 0 to 65535. If the difference counter is to be set to 19,000 and the game is to be stopped, the difference counter must be able to count up to 19,000, so the initial value is set to 46,535 (65,535-19,000). In this case, the game is stopped when the difference counter exceeds 65,535, so it is easy to determine whether the difference counter has exceeded 19,000 since the power was turned on, depending on whether the carry flag is set to 1 or 0. The carry flag also stores 1 when it falls below 0, but as mentioned above, the theoretical maximum number of coins inserted in a day is around 30,000 coins, so there is a sufficient margin of 16,535 coins (46,535-30,000). In reality, the number of coins that can be inserted in a day is unlikely to decrease by 30,000 coins because small prizes and replay prizes are won, so the probability of it falling below 0 is extremely low.

By configuring it in this way, the process of updating the difference counter can be simplified and the program size can be reduced.

For example, as described above, if the difference number exceeds 19,000 during a bonus, the progress of the game may be stopped at the end of the bonus. In this case, if the difference number counter can only count up to 19,000, the increase during the bonus cannot be counted, so the initial value of the difference number counter when it is a 2-byte counter may be set to a value smaller than 46,535. For example, a value smaller than 46,535 may be 40,000. In this case, since there is a margin for winning up to a maximum of 6,535 coins after the difference number exceeds 19,000 coins, even if the difference number exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus, the counting of the difference number can be continued until the bonus ends. Also, even if the difference number exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the AT can only win up to a maximum of 2,414 coins due to the relationship with the advantageous zone, so even if the difference number exceeds 19,000 coins during the AT, the counting of the difference number can be continued until the AT ends. When determining whether the difference number exceeds 19,000 when the initial value of the difference number counter is 40,000, it can be determined whether the value of the difference number counter exceeds 59,000. In addition, if the difference counter value exceeds 59,000, it will determine whether the game is in a bonus state, and if so, allow the game to continue until the bonus ends.

Although an example has been given in which the initial value of the difference counter is a value smaller than 46535, it is preferable to set the initial value to a value (32767 or greater) greater than half the maximum value (65535) that can be counted with two bytes. This is because when the setting value of a gaming machine is a value that indicates the smallest ball payout rate (for example, setting value 1), the ball payout rate is often designed to be below 100%, making it more likely that the difference number will decrease rather than increase. For this reason, by setting the initial value of the difference counter to a value greater than half the maximum value that can be counted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the value of the difference counter will become 0, making it easier to achieve normal operation in the market.

It is also possible that the difference counter does not count the difference correctly when it exceeds 19,000. In this case, even if the initial value of the difference counter is set to 46,535, the game will not be stopped even if the difference exceeds 19,000 during the bonus. In this case, when the difference counter exceeds 65,535 (when it is determined that it has exceeded 65,535, or when it is determined that 1 has been stored in the carry flag), a predetermined value is stored in the temporary stop flag, and whether or not to stop the game progress is determined depending on whether the temporary stop flag is at a predetermined value. In this way, if the difference exceeds 19,000 during the bonus, the difference counter will exceed 65,535 and count from 0, but since whether or not to stop the game progress is determined depending on the temporary stop flag, it is possible to achieve normal operation overall, even though the value of the difference counter is not normal.

Although the difference counter has been described as subtracting the number of medals inserted and adding the number of medals paid out, it may also be configured to do the opposite, adding the number of medals inserted and subtracting the number of medals paid out. In this case, the initial value of the difference counter may be set to 19,000, or a value between 19,000 and 32,766 inclusive.

Although the difference counter has been explained as a 2-byte counter, it can also be a 3-byte or 4-byte counter. If the difference counter is a 3-byte counter, the initial value can be set to 16758215 so that the carry flag will store 1 when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins. By making it 3 bytes or more, even if there are gaming parlors that do not turn off the power to gaming machines, and the set value is always below 100% and 10,000 games are played every day, the difference counter will not fall below 0 for several years, further reducing the possibility of malfunctions in the market.

<About test signals related to termination>
As described above, when the stopping process is executed, the progress of the game stops (the game enters a stopped state). If the progress of the game suddenly stops during testing by the testing institution, it is not possible to accurately determine whether the stop of the game progress is due to a malfunction or due to the operation of the stopping process. Therefore, when the stopping process is executed, a process for outputting a test signal related to the stopping process that can grasp that the progress of the game has stopped due to the execution of the stopping process may be executed. By configuring in this way, when the progress of the game stops due to the stopping process, the testing institution can determine that the stop of the game progress is not due to a malfunction but due to the execution of the stopping process, and the test by the testing institution can be determined to be a correct result.

At this time, the process for outputting the test signal related to the stop may be executed continuously during the stop state, may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), or may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)).

In addition, when the stopping process is executed, the process for outputting a test signal related to stopping, which allows the player to know that the game has stopped due to the execution of the stopping process, can be executed, but the process for outputting a test signal related to stopping may be executed from the game before the stopping process occurs. In other words, the process for outputting a test signal related to stopping may be executed in advance. For example, in a specification in which the stopping process is executed when the difference number from the start point at the time of power-on exceeds 19,000, the process for outputting a test signal related to stopping may be executed from the time the difference number from the start point at the time of power-on becomes 18,900. In this case, since the difference number from the start point at the time of power-on has not yet reached 19,000, the game can continue even in a situation where a test signal related to stopping is being output. By configuring in this way, the testing organization can be notified in advance that there is a possibility that the stopping process will be executed, and the testing by the testing organization can be performed smoothly.

At this time, the process for outputting the test signal related to the cutoff may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) or may be executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or multiple times (5 times)). Also, it may be executed when the difference number from the start point at power-on is a value of 18,900 or more (if the difference number from the start point at power-on becomes less than 18,900, the process for outputting the test signal related to the cutoff may not be executed).

Note that the timing for executing the process to output the test signal related to the pre-canceling is set to when the difference number from the start point at power-on reaches 18,900, but the difference number from the start point at power-on can be set to any value, such as 18,000 or 18,985.

In addition to the test signal, processing may also be performed to output an external signal. In this case, the output mode and output timing of the test signal related to the limiting process described above can be applied to the external signal (e.g., a security signal). By outputting an external signal in this way, it is possible to notify hall staff in advance that the limiting process may be executed.

<Regarding processing by the sub-control means based on the difference counter>
The main control means is configured to be able to transmit information regarding the value of the difference counter to the sub-control means, so that a notification can be given to the player before the progress of the game is stopped.

For example, if the difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000 coins, the LCD display could display an ending message saying "100 coins remaining" or play a sound. Then, each time the difference is updated and the remaining difference gets smaller, the ending message could be updated to say "90 coins remaining" or "85 coins remaining," etc. When the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory message such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" could be displayed or a sound could be played to give the player a sense of accomplishment.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, which increases the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference of 100 exceeds 19,000, and an ending display of "100 remaining" is displayed on the LCD, if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100, the ending display of the remaining difference can be erased (made non-display). When the remaining difference again becomes 100, the ending display of "100 remaining" is displayed on the LCD.

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the difference number continuing to fall below the number and the ending display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and the game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Also, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment is not hindered by the disappearance of the celebration display, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the above example, the remaining difference was displayed as the ending display, but this is not limited to this and a story-like presentation may be displayed. Even in this case, the ending display can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below a threshold that triggers the execution of the ending display, so that the ending display is not executed more than necessary.

In addition, when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, if a congratulatory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops, there is a possibility that players who are unaware of the existence of the limiting process may lose their motivation to play. Therefore, a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Regarding external signal output based on the value of the difference counter>
When the main control means or monitoring process updates the value of the difference counter during the stop process to a specific value (18,900 in this embodiment) just before the specified value (19,000 in this embodiment) at which the stop process is executed, a process is executed to output a test interrupt request signal to the test IF board.

This allows the gaming machine test to be interrupted before the gaming machine reaches a dead end and game progress stops during testing, and when testing is interrupted, the tester can initialize the value of the difference counter by turning the power off and then back on to the gaming machine, allowing the gaming machine test to continue until the value of the difference counter exceeds 19,000 again. In other words, by turning the power off and back on when the difference counter value is 18,900, it is possible to prevent game progress from stopping until the value of the difference counter effectively exceeds 37,900, and to achieve stable testing.

Note that the specific value before the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed (19,000 in this embodiment) is set to 18,900, but this is not limited to this, and any value between 9,500, which is half the predetermined value at which the stop processing is executed, and 18,985, which is the value at which the stop processing is not executed even if it is the maximum payout number, may be set as the specific value.

In addition, in this embodiment, a process is executed to output a test interruption request signal to interrupt the test, but any signal may be output as long as it is transmitted to the tester. As a result, the signal output to the test IF board when a specific value is reached before the predetermined value at which the cut-off process is executed may be referred to as a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal), and the process for outputting to the test IF board may be referred to as a process for outputting a predetermined signal (predetermined test signal).

<Regarding the processing of the sub-control means based on the value of the difference counter>
When the main control means executes the stop processing, the sub-control means is configured to be able to transmit information based on the value of the difference counter to the sub-control means, so that a notification can be issued to the player before a notification that the game progress has stopped (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a "stop notification").

For example, when the remaining difference of 100 coins exceeds 19,000 coins, it is possible to display the remaining difference of "100 coins remaining" on the LCD display, and to play an ending effect or sound. Then, each time the remaining difference is updated and the remaining difference becomes smaller, the remaining difference display is updated to "90 coins remaining" or "85 coins remaining", etc. When the remaining difference exceeds 19,000 coins, a congratulatory display such as "Complete" or "Congratulations" or sound is played, giving the player a sense of accomplishment. A state in which such a sub-control means displays the remaining difference until the end of the game, plays an ending effect or sounds, or a state in which the remaining difference until the end of the game is not displayed but an ending effect or sound related to the end of the game is played is referred to as an operation advance notice state (related to the end of the game). Note that the operation advance notice state is a state related to the sub-control means.

By doing this, the game goal can be set to stop when the difference exceeds 19,000 coins, which increases the excitement of the game.

For example, if the remaining difference exceeds 19,000 sheets with a difference of 100 sheets remaining, and the LCD display shows the remaining difference as "100 sheets remaining," if the remaining difference increases and exceeds 100 sheets, the remaining difference display can be erased (made non-display). When the remaining difference again becomes 100 sheets, the LCD display will show the remaining difference as "100 sheets remaining."

By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the difference continuing to fall below the number and the remaining difference display not disappearing.

For example, if the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during a bonus and the game progress is not stopped until the bonus ends, once the difference exceeds 19,000 coins during the bonus and a congratulatory display is displayed, the congratulatory display will not be erased even if the difference falls below 19,000 coins. Also, the congratulatory display will continue to be displayed until the bonus ends.

By doing this, the player's sense of accomplishment will not be hindered by the disappearance of the celebration display, and a decrease in interest in the game will be prevented.

The ending performance or sound may be a continuous performance with a storyline, or may be a still image. Even in this case, the ending performance or sound can be terminated when the remaining difference falls below a threshold that triggers the execution of the ending performance or sound, so that the ending performance or sound is not executed more than necessary.

In addition, when the difference reaches 19,000 coins, if a congratulatory effect is suddenly displayed and play stops, there is a possibility that players who are unaware of the existence of the limiting process may lose their motivation to play. Therefore, a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made when the power is turned on or during play, or a notification regarding the limiting process (for example, a display or audio such as "Aim for 19,000 coins!" or "Ending at 19,000 coins") may be made on a demo screen or menu screen.

<Performance in the operation advance notice state>
A display mode on the display device in the operation notice state may be as shown in Fig. 85. In Fig. 85, as the effect images in the normal state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means) which is neither the operation notice state nor the end state, the lion and girl character display, the heart effect display, the dialogue display "Today was fun," and the total number of acquisition display "TOTAL: 18,000 coins" are performed. In addition to the effect images displayed in the normal state, the remaining difference display "The complete function will be activated soon. 100 coins remaining until activation" is performed as the effect images in the operation notice state (including various game states such as CZ, AT, and non-AT as game states managed by the main control means). In addition, as the presentation image in the limit notification state (state where the game progress is stopped), the presentation image displayed in the normal state and the operation notice notification state is not displayed, and instead, a black background and a limit display (notification regarding the limit processing, limit notification) of "Complete function has been activated" are displayed. Note that the total number of acquisitions display in the normal state does not need to be displayed all the time, but is displayed when the total number of acquisitions reaches or exceeds a predetermined threshold value (for example, 18000 shown in FIG. 85, or 18900 which is the value for sending a test interruption request signal to the test IF board).

In the operation preview notification state, the remaining difference display prevents the player from seeing all of the total wins display, part of the girl character display, and all of the effect display. However, the display area of the remaining difference display is smaller than 50% of the full screen display area, so the player can generally see the performance image being executed. Note that in Figure 85, the transparency (transparency) of the remaining difference display is set to 0%, so the display of layers behind the remaining difference display cannot be seen, but the transparency of the remaining difference display can be set to any value between 10% and 90%. This makes it possible to see both the remaining difference display and the performance image.

The limit notification may be, in addition to the congratulatory display described above, a limit text display such as "The limit has been reached" or "The game has ended" or a sound. The limit text display may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the congratulatory display may be ended after the congratulatory display is displayed and the limit text display or sound may be executed. In addition, a warning display or sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch" may be executed together with the limit text display.
In addition, the remaining difference display in the operation advance notification state is displayed on the upper side of the display area of the display device, but this is not limiting, and the remaining difference display may be displayed on the lower side or in the center of the display area of the display device. However, if displayed on the lower side or in the center, there is a possibility that it will overlap with the display area of various information displays (game medal number display, awarded number display, or bet number display) not shown and most of the performance images, so by setting the transparency of the remaining difference display to any value between 20% and 90%, the player can view the various information displays and performance images.

In addition, when any of the AT end conditions (for example, the number of AT play times, the difference during the AT, or the number of AT navigation times) are met during the activation notice state, the addiction prevention display is displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. This allows the player to view the addiction prevention display rather than the remaining difference display, effectively preventing addiction to the game.

Also, contrary to the above-mentioned embodiment, when any of the AT termination conditions (e.g., the number of AT play times, the difference in the AT, or the number of AT navigation times) is met in the activation notice state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the addiction prevention display. This allows the player to quickly visually confirm the remaining difference until the play is stopped.

In addition, when any of the AT termination conditions (for example, the number of AT execution plays, the difference during the AT, or the number of AT navigations) is met in the activation notice state, the remaining difference display and the anti-addiction display may be displayed in different display areas. This allows the player to view both pieces of information. Note that in this case, if the display area of the anti-addiction display and the remaining difference display are configured to be displayed in a display area that would normally overlap, the display area of the anti-addiction display may be changed, or the display area of the remaining difference display may be changed. Also, the display areas of the anti-addiction display and the remaining difference display may be predetermined to be display areas that do not overlap even when displayed simultaneously.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit, a notification is issued to encourage counting (counting switch prompting display), so when the total score threshold is reached or an abnormality occurs in the total score upper limit during the operation advance notification state, both the remaining difference display and the counting switch prompting display are displayed. This allows the player to be aware of both the remaining difference display and the need to operate the counting switch.

In addition, when the total score threshold has been reached or an abnormality has occurred in the total score upper limit during the activation notification state, the counting switch prompting display may be displayed in priority over the remaining difference display. In this case, when the counting switch is operated while the counting switch prompting display is being displayed and the total score falls below the threshold (15,000 in this embodiment), the remaining difference display is displayed. This allows the total score threshold reaching state to be cancelled by operating the counting switch promptly, and then allows the player to become aware of the remaining difference display.

In addition, when the total score threshold is reached or the total score upper limit is abnormal during the activation notice state, the remaining difference display may be displayed in priority over the count switch prompt display. This provides a sense of satisfaction when the player wants to prioritize recognition of the remaining difference.

<Performance in the end notification state>
In the limit notification state, the lion and girl character displays, the effect display, the dialogue display, and the total number of wins display are all invisible. Also, the limit display is displayed instead of the remaining difference display. In Fig. 85, the limit display is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device, but the performance image is not displayed (the transparency of the limit display is 0%), so it may be displayed anywhere, including the top or bottom of the display area.

The limit display in the limit notification state may be 50% or more of the display area of the entire screen. However, when other information is displayed (such as a display indicating that the menu screen can be displayed by operating the sub-switch or a warning display), it is desirable for the limit display in the limit notification state to be any value between 50% and 90% of the display area of the entire screen.

In the game limit notification state in FIG. 85, no congratulatory display is displayed, but a congratulatory display using a character may be displayed instead of a black background image. However, even when the congratulatory display is displayed, the in-game presentation image is not displayed.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of AT play times, the difference in the number of AT play times, or the number of AT navigation times) are not met but the limit conditions are met), and the limit display is displayed, an anti-addiction display may be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the anti-addiction display that would normally be displayed on the AT end screen from not being displayed. The anti-addiction display at this time may be in the same display form and for the same display time as when it is displayed on the AT end screen, or may be in a different display form and for a different display time than when it is displayed on the AT end screen. In addition, the display area of the anti-addiction display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display area of the limit display, but if the anti-addiction display is configured to be hidden (not visible) for a predetermined time, the display area of the anti-addiction display and the display area of the limit display may overlap.

Also, contrary to the above-mentioned embodiment, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT end conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit condition is met), the addiction prevention display does not need to be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the limit state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the limit display.

In addition, even if a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's ending conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in the number of times during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit conditions are met), and the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the limit display is displayed, if any of the AT's ending conditions are met and the limit conditions are met (when any of the AT's ending conditions and the limit conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to recognize that the AT has ended even when the limit state is reached, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, when a limit notification state is reached during the AT (when any of the AT's ending conditions (e.g., the number of times the AT is executed, the difference in number during the AT, or the number of times the AT is navigated) are not met but the limit conditions are met), the addiction prevention display is not displayed when the limit display is displayed, and even when any of the AT's ending conditions are met and the limit conditions are met (when any of the AT's ending conditions and the limit conditions are met simultaneously), the addiction prevention display may not be displayed when the limit display is displayed. This allows the player to quickly recognize that the limit state has been reached, without reducing the visibility of the limit display.

<Regarding the processing of the main control means or the sub-control means during the termination processing>
When the main control means executes the stop processing, the main control means and/or the sub control means notifies the player that the game progress has stopped (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a "stop notification").

The main control means may notify the user that a limit has been reached by displaying a message on a specified display device controlled by the main control means indicating that a limit has been reached.

Examples of the specified indicators controlled by the main control means include an indicator for the number of coins won and an indicator for the number of credits.

For example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the number of coins acquired display is displaying a message (e.g., EE) indicating that the limit has been reached, the number of coins acquired display may be configured to display a message (e.g., E1) indicating that the specific error has occurred. Then, when the specific error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the number of coins acquired display may be configured to display again a message indicating that the limit has been reached.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a stalled state has been reached even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a specified error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to accurately notify the user that the specified error has occurred even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when the specified error is resolved, it is possible to notify the user that the specified error has been resolved and that a stalled state has been reached.

In addition, for example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the acquired coin count display is displaying a message indicating that the limit has been reached (e.g., EE), the acquired coin count display may not display a message indicating that the specific error has occurred (e.g., E1). In other words, even if a specific error has occurred, the acquired coin count display may continue to display a message indicating that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, the player will not be confused as to whether a specific error has occurred or a stoppage has occurred, and the player can be accurately notified that a stoppage has occurred.

Note that although the number of coins acquired indicator is given as an example of a specific indicator controlled by the main control means, as mentioned above, a credit number indicator may also be used.

For example, the credit number display displays the number of credits. However, if a limiting condition is met (if information indicating that the limiting condition has been met is stored in the limiting flag storage area), automatic settlement, described below, may be performed. If configured in this way, once the limiting condition is met and automatic settlement has been made, the number of credits becomes 0, and a display (e.g., EE) can be executed on the credit number display to indicate that a limiting state has occurred.

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle accounts when a limiting condition is met, after the player operates the settlement switch and the number of credits becomes 0, a display (e.g., EE) can be displayed on the credit number display to indicate that a limiting condition has occurred.

When the number of coins acquired is not displaying anything and the credit count display is displaying an indication that a limit has occurred, if a specified error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs, the number of coins acquired may display an indication that a specified error has occurred (e.g., E1) and the credit count display may display an indication that a limit has occurred. Then, when the specified error is cleared by operating the reset switch, the indication on the number of coins acquired indicating that a specified error has occurred disappears (terminating the display process), and the credit count display may continue to display an indication that a limit has occurred.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to accurately notify the user that a stalled state has been reached even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when a specified error occurs during a stalled state, it is possible to accurately notify the user that the specified error has occurred even if there is an abnormality in the sub-control means. Furthermore, when the specified error is resolved, it is possible to notify the user that the specified error has been resolved and that a stalled state has been reached.

In addition, for example, if a specific error (e.g., a door open error, a medal accumulation error, etc.) occurs while the credit number display is displaying (e.g., EE) an indication that the limit has been reached, the acquired coin number display may not display (e.g., E1) an indication that the specific error has occurred. In other words, even if a specific error has occurred, the credit number display may continue to display the indication that the limit has been reached.

By configuring it in this way, the player will not be confused as to whether a specific error has occurred or a stoppage has occurred, and the player can be accurately notified that a stoppage has occurred.

As a notification of the end of the game by the sub-control means, in addition to the congratulatory display described above, a display or sound of the end of the game such as "The complete function has been activated", "The end of the game has been reached", or "The game has ended" as shown in FIG. 85 may be executed. The end of the game display may be displayed simultaneously with the congratulatory display, or the congratulatory display may be terminated after the congratulatory display is displayed and the end of the game display or sound may be executed. In addition, a warning display (various switch prompting displays) such as "Please press the settlement switch" or a sound may be executed together with the end of the game display.

To notify the user of the limit, a limit process may be executed before the congratulatory display is executed and the congratulatory display may be displayed during the limit process, or a freeze may be executed for a predetermined period before the limit process is executed, the congratulatory display may be executed during the predetermined period, and the limit text may be displayed when the limit process is executed after the predetermined period.

In addition, when the limit character is displayed after the blessing display, the warning display will not be executed while the blessing display is being executed, but will be executed when the limit character is displayed.

This prevents players from forgetting to operate the settlement switch or counting switch, and does not hinder the sense of accomplishment that comes from executing the congratulatory display, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

During the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text sound such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" and "Please press the counting switch" are not output, and the device is silent. During the limit notification, sounds such as background music other than the limit text sound such as "The limit has been reached" and the warning sound such as "Please press the settlement switch" may be output at a volume lower than the volume during error notification.

By configuring it in this way, players are less likely to have a negative impression of a dead end state, and it becomes easier for them to recognize it as something to aim for, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the functions of the sub-switches managed by the sub-control means are enabled during the limit notification. For this reason, even during the limit process (limit notification), it is possible to open the menu screen or the volume change screen by operating the sub-switches. Note that the volume that can be changed from the volume change screen does not include the volume related to the limit notification, so it is not possible to change the volume during the limit notification.

In addition, by opening a menu screen during the limit process and displaying a two-dimensional code including the game history, a service (a so-called "game machine linked service") can be provided to the player in which the game history is read by a mobile device and saved on a server. Note that since the limit is displayed on the display device, the two-dimensional code is displayed in a specified area in the center of the display device's screen when displayed from the menu screen except when the limit is being notified. However, since the specified area overlaps with the limit display during the limit is notified, the display area of the two-dimensional code during the limit is displayed in an area different from the specified area that does not overlap with the limit display.

As another way of displaying the limit indication and the two-dimensional code, even if the display areas of the limit indication and the two-dimensional code overlap, the limit indication and the two-dimensional code may be displayed alternately, making it possible to read the two-dimensional code while issuing a limit notification.

In addition, when the limit process is executed, the gaming media may be automatically settled. For example, when the limit process is executed when the number of credits stored is "50," "50" gaming media will be automatically settled (discharged into the lower tray) even if the settlement switch is not operated. By configuring it in this way, the gaming media electronically stored in the gaming machine can be returned to the player even if the player does not operate the settlement switch. In other words, it is possible to avoid issuing warning sounds such as "Please press the settlement switch" or warning displays such as "Please press the settlement switch" or "Please press the counting switch."

In addition, the stop notification will not end due to the passage of time during the stop process. In other words, the stop notification will continue until the stop state is released (until a setting change process or RWM abnormality process is performed).

During the termination process, even if an event occurs that could be one of the specified recoverable errors described above, the specified error may not be detected, or the specified error may be detected but the specified error processing may not be executed. In either case, the system is configured not to notify the user of the specified error.

As mentioned above, this is because the stop processing is looped during the stop processing, so even if a specific error is detected in the interrupt processing, the specific error processing in the main loop processing is not executed. Note that if interrupt processing is prohibited during the stop processing, the specific error will not be detected.

This makes it possible to prevent the trouble of having to clear an error when the game cannot continue by executing a stop process, and reduces the workload of game center staff.

Note that if the system is configured to execute a specified error process within an interrupt process, the specified error process will be executed even during stop processing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specified error process from being executed during stop processing by determining whether stop processing is in progress before executing the specified error process and not executing the specified error process if stop processing is in progress. This can also be achieved by prohibiting interrupt processing during stop processing.

In addition, considering that fraud can be detected quickly by executing a specified error process even during the stop process, the configuration may be such that a specified error process can be executed during the stop process.

In this case, interrupt processing is permitted even during the stop processing, and when a specified error is detected during the interrupt processing, a specified error processing is executed within the interrupt processing to notify the specified error, or when a specified error is detected during the stop processing, the specified error processing is executed, and the specified error notification processing is executed during the specified error processing in the loop processing of the stop processing after the specified error is detected during the interrupt processing.

By doing this, fraudulent processing can be carried out even during the termination process, preventing fraudulent activity.

When the stop-play process is executed, an external signal may be output. For example, an external signal may be output as a security signal. A security signal is a signal that is output due to a specific error (such as a door being open). When the security signal is output, the gaming facility is able to know that some kind of abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine on which the stop-play process was executed, and therefore can deter fraudulent behavior even if no error notification is given during the stop-play process.

<Other configurations related to the stop monitoring process or the stop process>
The end-of-period monitoring process and the end-of-period process are configured to be executed outside the usage area. Also, the end-of-period monitoring process may be configured to be executed outside the usage area and the end-of-period process may be executed within the usage area, or the end-of-period monitoring process and the end-of-period process may be configured to be executed within the usage area.

In addition, in the case of medal-less gaming machines, the stoppage monitoring process and the stoppage process may be executed outside the usage area of the main control board, or the stoppage monitoring process and the stoppage process may be executed outside the usage area of the gaming medal count control board.

It is configured to continue executing the process to output an external signal during the termination process.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to notify the outside world that the game is being stopped, allowing the amusement center manager to quickly grasp the status of the gaming machine.

The limit notification may be given not only by the LCD display or sound output from the speaker, but also by the lighting of the LEDs on the frame lamp, lower panel lamp, number of coins acquired indicator, credit indicator, etc.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player that a game has stopped even on gaming machines that do not have a liquid crystal display.

Below, a specific example of the limit monitoring process will be explained using the figures. Here, the limit monitoring process is configured to be executed at a predetermined timing after the awarding of gaming media (the winning awarding process related to the displayed symbol combination in FIG. 9) has ended. For example, the limit monitoring process may be configured to be executed as one of the processes executed in the game end check in FIG. 9.

The end-of-game monitoring process is executed in all games. Specifically, it is executed regardless of the game zone (normal zone, advantageous zone). It is also executed regardless of the game state (non-AT state, AT state, during bonus (bonus game state), inside bonus state). It is also executed regardless of the number of gaming media bet (game with one bet, game with two bets, game with three bets).

<End monitoring process (version without difference counter)>
In FIG. 80, there is a storage area for the number of inserted medals and a storage area for the number of paid out medals.

The inserted medal count memory area (also called the total IN counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of gaming media inserted (total number of bets). For example, the inserted medal count memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area capable of storing values from 0 to 65535).

The number of medals paid out memory area (also called the total OUT counter) is one of the RWM areas of the main control board, and is a memory area capable of storing a value corresponding to the total number of gaming media paid out (total payouts). For example, the number of medals paid out memory area can be a 2-byte memory area (a memory area capable of storing values from 0 to 65535).

The value stored in the medal insertion count storage area is set to an initial value (0) when the power is turned on. Similarly, the value stored in the medal payment count storage area is set to an initial value (0) when the power is turned on. In other words, if a power outage occurs when the value stored in the medal insertion count storage area is 1000 and the value stored in the medal payment count storage area is 2000, and then the power is turned on, the initial value (0) is stored in the medal insertion count storage area and the initial value (0) is stored in the medal payment count storage area.

Note that "power-on" includes both power-on without a setting change and power-on with a setting change. However, the initial value may not be stored when the power is turned on without a setting change, and the initial value may be stored when the power is turned on with a setting change.

In addition, the values stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and the number of paid out medals memory area are not stored as initial values (0) when the RWM is cleared following the end of the favorable zone. In other words, the favorable zone ends (the RWM is cleared following the end of the favorable zone) when the value stored in the number of inserted medals memory area is 1000 and the value stored in the number of paid out medals memory area is 2000, and the next game (game in the normal zone) starts with 1000 stored in the number of inserted medals memory area and 2000 stored in the number of paid out medals memory area. Note that it is assumed that the power is not turned off between the end of the favorable zone and the next game.

First, in "Replay activation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, in a game in which a replay role is won by the internal lottery and a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is stopped and displayed, the answer is YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which a push order bell role is won by the internal lottery (a game in which a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not stopped and displayed), the answer is NO. Note that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay can also be referred to as a symbol combination corresponding to a replay role (the same applies below).

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the current game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In the "total OUT counter update process", the value stored in the number of medals paid out storage area is updated. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is added to the value stored in the number of medals paid out storage area. The result of adding the number of medals paid out in the current game to the value stored in the number of medals paid out storage area is then stored in the number of medals paid out storage area. For example, if "1000" is stored in the number of medals paid out storage area, and the number of medals paid out as a result of the current game is "9", then "1009" is stored in the number of medals paid out storage area.

In the "total IN counter update process", the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area is updated. Specifically, the number of inserted medals for the current game is added to the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area. The result of adding the number of inserted medals for the current game to the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area is then stored in the number of inserted medals storage area. For example, if "3000" is stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the number of bets for the current game is "3", then "3003" is stored in the number of inserted medals storage area.

Note that even if the current game is bet by automatic betting, the number of bets for that automatic bet will be the number of throws in the current game. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the previous game and "3" is bet by automatic betting, the number of throws in the current game will be "3". However, for example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in both the previous game and the current game (two consecutive games), "Replay activation symbol display?" will be YES in the end-of-game monitoring process for the current game, and the end-of-game monitoring process will end without executing the "total-IN counter update process".

"Total OUT counter < total IN counter?" determines whether the total number of payouts after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is less than the total number of put-in coins after being updated by the "total IN counter update process".

Specifically, a subtraction process is performed to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after being updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after being updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". If the result of this subtraction process shows that the carry flag is 1, then a YES judgment is made and the limit monitoring process is terminated. In other words, the next process, "difference number > 19000", is not executed. On the other hand, if the result of this subtraction process shows that the carry flag is not 1 (if it is 0), then a NO judgment is made.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "1000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", then "2000" - "1000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, no carry occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0. In other words, the answer is determined to be NO.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "2000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "1000", then "1000" - "2000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, a carry flag is set to 1 because a carry occurs. In other words, the answer is YES.

For example, if the total number of coins inserted after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "2000" and the total number of coins paid out after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", then "2000" - "2000" is executed. As a result of this subtraction process, no carry occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0. In other words, the answer is determined to be NO.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media when the power is turned on is greater than 19000, starting from the point (0). Specifically, the determination is made by comparing the result of the subtraction process performed in "Total OUT counter < Total IN counter?" with the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state." Here, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will result in a capped state" is set to "19001," and the determination is made.

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "1000" and the total output number after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "2000", the result of subtracting "2000" from "1000" is "1000". As a result of the comparison between "1000" and "19001" (1000" - "19001"), the carry flag becomes 1, so the result is NO (the difference does not exceed 19000).

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "10,000" and the total output number after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "29,000", the result of subtracting "29,000" from "10,000" is "19,000". As a result of the comparison between "19,000" and "19,001" (19,000" - "19,001"), the carry flag becomes 1, so the result is determined to be NO (the difference does not exceed 19,000).

For example, if the total input number after being updated by the "total IN counter update process" is "10,000" and the total output number after being updated by the "total OUT counter update process" is "29,005", then the result of subtracting "29005" from "10,000" is "19005". As a result of comparing "19005" with "19001" (19005 - 19001), the carry flag becomes 0, so the answer is YES (the difference exceeds 19,000).

In "Save stop flag", information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the stop flag storage area.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power off process). Also, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (if information indicating that the limit conditions have been met has been stored, the information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save Cap Flag" stores information indicating that the cap condition has been met in the cap flag memory area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the values stored in the number of medals inserted memory area and the number of medals paid out memory area will be reset to their initial values (0), but the information stored in the cap flag memory area (information indicating that the cap condition has been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, when information indicating that the conditions for the limit have been met is stored in the limit flag memory area, if the power is turned off and then turned on without changing any settings, the limit state will be reached even though the difference between the value stored in the number of medals inserted memory area and the value stored in the number of medals paid out memory area does not exceed 19,000 (the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) does not exceed 19,000).

When information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (when the stop state is reached), it is not possible to perform a bet operation to execute the next game. For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the blocker is (set to) a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limiting condition has been met is stored in the limiting flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In other words, the limit monitoring process in FIG. 80 performs a subtraction process to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". Then, if the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'" is greater than the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'", it is determined whether or not it is greater than a specified value (19,000). If it is determined that the value is greater than the specified value (19,000), information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. For this reason, the process is configured such that the next game cannot be played unless the settings are changed.

In addition, in the limit monitoring process of FIG. 80, a subtraction process is performed to subtract the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'" from the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'". Then, if the "total number of coins paid out after updated by the 'total OUT counter update process'" is smaller than the "total number of coins inserted after updated by the 'total IN counter update process'", no determination is made as to whether it is greater than a specified value (19,000). Therefore, information indicating that the limit condition has been met is not stored in the limit flag storage area, and the next game can be played.

In other words, if the total number of coins paid out is greater than the total number of coins put in, it is compared with the specified value, but if the total number of coins paid out is less than the total number of coins put in, it is not compared with the specified value.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed when the total payout number is smaller than the total input number. In other words, it is possible to shorten the processing time of the main control means and reduce erroneous decisions due to noise, etc.

Note that although the initial value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the initial value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area have been explained as "0" as an example, the initial value is not limited to "0." As long as the initial value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area and the initial value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area are the same, any value can be used.

In addition, the inserted medal count storage area is a 2-byte storage area, and the paid out medal count storage area is a 2-byte storage area, but the inserted medal count storage area may be a 3-byte storage area, and the paid out medal count storage area may be a 3-byte storage area.

In addition, if the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0), the value stored in the inserted medal count storage area and the value stored in the paid out medal count storage area may be configured not to be updated.

For example, if the lower limit is set to -10,000, and the difference in the number of game media when the power is turned on is set as the starting point (0) and the number of game media is below -10,000, the value stored in the number of inserted medals storage area will not be updated based on the number of bets in that game. Also, the value stored in the number of paid out medals storage area will not be updated based on the number of paid out medals in that game.

By setting a lower limit in this way, it is possible to reach a limit state when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds a maximum of 29,000 (the absolute value of the lower limit value (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when no lower limit is set, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before reaching a limit state. In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

Although the lower limit has been described as -10000, the lower limit is not limited to -10000 and may be any value.
stomach

<End of life monitoring process (difference counter increment version)>
81, a difference counter is included. The explanation of the difference counter is omitted since it has been described above. Note that the size of the storage area of the difference counter is 2 bytes.

The initial value of the difference counter in FIG. 81 is the value obtained by subtracting the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is to be stopped" from the "value corresponding to the memory area of the difference counter."

The "value corresponding to the storage area of the difference counter" is 65535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the storage area of the difference counter if the storage area of the difference counter is 2 bytes. Also, if the storage area of the difference counter is 3 bytes, it is 16777215, which is the maximum value that can be stored in the storage area of the difference counter.

"A value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause a capping state" would be 19,000, for example, if the capping state is to occur when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, with the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0). Also, for example, if the capping state is to occur when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 10,000, with the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0), the value would be 10,000. Also, for example, if the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the standard (0), and the capping state is to occur when the difference in the number of gaming media from that standard exceeds 19,000, the value would be 19,000.

In Figure 81, the explanation will be given assuming that the "value corresponding to the memory area of the difference counter" is 65,535, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped" is 19,000, and the initial value is 46,535.

The initial value of the difference counter is stored in the difference counter when the power is turned on without changing the settings (not shown). Note that the initial value of the difference counter is also stored in the difference counter when the power is turned on with a change in settings (not shown).

First, in "Replay activation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, in a game in which the replay role is won by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, it is determined as YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which the push order bell role is won by the internal lottery (a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed), it is determined as NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the current game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In "difference counter set", the value stored in the difference counter is stored in a specified register. For example, when the value stored in the difference counter is 10,000, 10,000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the difference counter at this time is the value before the difference counter was updated using the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game.

"Is the number of coins put in < the number of coins paid out?" determines whether the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins put in.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the determination is NO.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the determination is NO.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the answer is NO.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of inserts minus the number of payouts is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the number of inserts minus the number of payouts (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the number of payouts, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the number of payouts, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the result of this game:
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, then the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, then the A register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will read 249 and the carry flag will read 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, the number of bets will be treated as the number of bets for the current game, even if it was the number of bets set by the automatic bet.

On the other hand, regarding the number of inserts and the number of payouts, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "number of inserts < number of payouts?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the number of inserts. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the number of payouts.

Note that in "Number of Inserts < Number of Payouts?", we subtracted the number of inserts from the number of payouts, but we could also use the number of payouts minus the number of inserts. In other words, it would be sufficient to be able to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the number of inserts and the number of payouts.

"Difference counter < 0?" determines whether the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is subtracted from the value stored in the difference counter, and the result is below the lower limit (0). Specifically, the function determines whether there is any borrowing when the value stored in the A register (number of coins inserted for the current game - number of coins paid out for the current game) is subtracted from the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the difference counter). If there is any borrowing, the result is YES, and if there is no borrowing, the result is NO. If there is any borrowing, the carry flag becomes 1, and if there is no borrowing, the carry flag becomes 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, if the difference counter (HL register) is set to 2, the result of the current game is
A) When the input number is 3 and the output number is 0 (when the A register is 3), the HL register is 65535 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 2-3=-1, but a register cannot store negative values. Therefore, a carry occurs, resulting in 65535.
a) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1 (when the A register is 2), the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 0.
c) When the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3 (when the A register = 0), the HL register = 2 and the carry flag = 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins removed = 0, the answer is YES. Also, b) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is NO. Also, c) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO.

If "Difference counter < 0?" is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value of the A register and the value of the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Set Lower Limit", if a carryover occurs due to "Difference Counter < 0?", a predetermined lower limit (0) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (in this embodiment, the HL register). In the above example, in a situation where the value stored in the Difference Counter is 2, if a) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 0, then "Difference Counter < 0?" causes the HL register to = 65535. In such a case, "Set Lower Limit" stores 0 in the HL register.

In other words, if a carryover occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, the lower limit value of 0 is stored in the HL register, making it possible to calculate the difference number of gaming media as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Lower Limit Set" is executed, the next game can be played. In other words, the process in FIG. 81 is executed even in games after "Lower Limit Set" is executed.

Note that although FIG. 81 includes a "lower limit value set" process, the "lower limit value set" process may not be included. Specifically, when "Difference counter < 0?" is judged to be YES, the value stored in the difference counter for the previous game may be set. For example, when the value stored in the difference counter is 2 and the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for the game are a) number of coins inserted = 3 and number of coins paid out = 0, the value stored in the difference counter may be set to 2 (the same value as the value of the difference counter for the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values with borrowed digits) from being stored in the "difference counter". Also, since there is no process equivalent to the "lower limit value set", the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a carryover occurs due to "Difference counter < 0?", the difference counter is not updated using the value at the time of the carryover, so that an abnormal value does not occur as the value of the difference counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media becomes a negative value, a capped state can be generated as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media. In addition, for values below the lower limit, the lower limit or the previous value is set as the value of the difference counter, so that too many gaming media are not awarded before the capped state is reached. In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

In "Difference Update", the complement of the result of the calculation "Difference Counter < 0?" (Number of Inserts - Number of Payouts) (the value stored in the A Register) is calculated and stored in the A Register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A Register) is then added to the HL Register. In other words, the calculation is "Value stored in the Difference Counter" + "Absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game".

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register is 249, but in the "difference update", the complement of 249, 7, is derived first. Next, 2+7 is calculated, and 9 is stored in the HL register. Note that since 2+7 does not exceed 65535 (there is no carry), the carry flag is 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65530,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but in the "difference counter update", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65530+7 is calculated, and 2 is stored in the HL register. Note that 65530+7 is 65537, but since it exceeds 65535 (because there is a carry), 2 is stored in the HL register. Also, since there is a carry, the carry flag becomes 1.

In "Update difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the difference counter.

For example, if "Difference counter < 0?" is NO, the updated value based on the absolute value of the difference between the previous game's difference counter and the current game's game media (number of inserts - number of payouts, or number of payouts - number of inserts) is stored in the HL register, so "difference counter update" subtracts or adds the absolute value of the difference between the previous game's difference counter and the current game's game media, and stores the result in the difference counter.

For example, if "Difference counter < 0?" is YES, the lower limit (0) is stored in the HL register, so "Update difference counter" stores the lower limit (0) in the difference counter.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0) exceeds 19000. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it judges YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it judges NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when a carry has occurred due to "update difference". On the other hand, if a carry has occurred due to "number inserted < number paid out?", the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be judged as NO.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" makes it possible to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) with a constant (19,000).

In this way, in "Difference > 19,000?", the system determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since the power-on start point (0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so it stores 46,535 as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 46535 is the value obtained by subtracting the value "19000", which corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media at the limit, from the maximum value "65535" that can be stored in a 2-byte memory area (corresponding to the size of the memory area of the difference counter). In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media from the starting point (0) at power-on exceeds 19000, it will exceed 65535, and the carry flag will become 1.

In addition, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46535 as the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 46535, a situation in which the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is 16535 means that the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), is -30000.

In addition, by storing 46535 as the initial value and setting the lower limit to 0, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before reaching a limit can be limited to approximately 65535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46535) and the lower limit (0) (46535) + 19000).

As described above, by storing 46535 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the difference number counter" - "a value corresponding to the difference number of gaming media to be in a capped state", it is possible to reduce the program capacity for determining whether the difference number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000. Also, by storing 46535 as the initial value, it is possible to store up to a value equivalent to -46535 as the difference number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. Note that although an example is given of storing 46535 as the initial value, a value other than 46535 can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

In "Save stop flag", information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., "1") is stored in the stop flag storage area.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power off processing is executed). Also, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a change in settings (RWM clear process with a change in settings) (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save cap flag" stores information indicating that the cap condition has been met in the cap flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the value stored in the difference counter will be the initial value (46535), but the information stored in the cap flag storage area (information indicating that the cap condition has been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while the limit flag storage area stores information indicating that the limit conditions have been met, and then the power is turned on again without changing any settings, the difference counter will return to its initial value, but the limit state will still be reached.

When information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (when the stop state is reached), it is not possible to perform a bet operation to execute the next game. For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the blocker is (set to) a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limiting condition has been met is stored in the limiting flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

In addition, in "Difference counter < 0?", the absolute value of the difference in the number of game media currently played is subtracted from the value stored in the difference counter to determine whether the result falls below the lower limit (0). However, taking into account the case where the lower limit is not 0, it can also be expressed as "Difference counter < lower limit?" instead of "Difference counter < 0?".

For example, if the lower limit is 36535, "Difference Counter < Lower Limit?" determines whether the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game from the value stored in the difference counter falls below the lower limit (36535). If the result of subtracting the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media in the current game from the value stored in the difference counter falls below the lower limit (36535), "Set Lower Limit" may be used to store 36535 in the HL register.

By setting the lower limit to 36,535 in this way, the game can be capped when the maximum difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (46,535) and the lower limit (36,535) (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when the lower limit is set to 0, the number of differences in gaming media that the player can potentially obtain before the game is capped can be reduced. In other words, the risk of gambling becoming too high can be prevented.

Also, even if the lower limit is set to 36535, if the answer to "Is difference counter < lower limit?" is YES, the value stored in the difference counter from the previous game may be used.

Note that although the lower limit has been described as 36535, the lower limit is not limited to 36535 and can be any value.

In addition, the example described above uses the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000. However, the present invention can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls is set as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

When the point where the player's ball output is the lowest is set as the reference (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from the reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to set the lower limit to the same as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 46,535, which is the "value corresponding to the size of the storage area of the difference counter" minus the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media at which the game is stopped", the lower limit is also set to 46,535. By doing this, when the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Difference counter < lower limit?" (in the figure, "Difference counter < 0?") becomes YES, and 46,535 is stored as the lower limit. Therefore, the point where the player's ball output is the lowest can be set as the reference (0), and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from the reference exceeds 19,000.

Similarly, if the point where the player has the lowest number of balls put out is set as the reference (0) and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, the initial value is set to 0 and the lower limit is also set to 0, so that when the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Difference counter < lower limit?" (in the figure, "Difference counter < 0?") becomes YES and 0 is stored as the lower limit. Then, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the value stored in the difference counter updated by "Difference counter update" is less than 19,001. By configuring in this way, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls put out can be set as the reference (0) and the game is to be stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

<End of life monitoring process (subtraction version of difference counter)>
82, a difference counter is provided. The explanation regarding the difference counter is omitted since it has been described above. Note that the size of the storage area for the difference counter is 2 bytes.

The initial value of the difference counter in FIG. 82 is set to "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is to be stopped."

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will cause the capping state" would be 19,000 if the capping state is to be established when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0). Also, for example, if the capping state is to be established when the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 10,000, with the time when the power is turned on being the starting point (0), the value would be 10,000.

In Figure 82, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped" is set to 19,000, and the explanation will be given assuming the initial value to be 19,000.

The initial value of the difference counter is stored in the difference counter when the power is turned on (not shown). Note that the initial value of the difference counter is also stored in the difference counter when the power is turned on with a setting change (not shown).

First, in "Replay activation symbol display?", it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has been stopped and displayed as a result of the current game. In other words, in a game in which the replay role is won by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, it is determined as YES. On the other hand, for example, in a game in which the push order bell role is won by the internal lottery (a game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is not stopped and displayed), it is determined as NO.

In other words, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed in the current game, "Replay activation symbol display?" will answer YES, and the game end monitoring process will end.

In "difference counter set", the value stored in the difference counter is stored in a specified register. For example, when the value stored in the difference counter is 10,000, 10,000 is stored in the HL register. Note that the value stored in the difference counter at this time is the value before the difference counter was updated using the absolute value of the difference number of the gaming media in the current game.

"Is the number of coins put in < the number of coins paid out?" determines whether the number of coins paid out is greater than the number of coins put in.

For example, as a result of this game,
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the determination is NO.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the determination is NO.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the answer is NO.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the answer is YES.

Specifically, the number of inserts minus the number of payouts is calculated, and the result of this calculation is stored in a specified register (for example, the A register). Furthermore, if there is a carry over as a result of the number of inserts minus the number of payouts (if the carry flag is 1), the result is judged as YES, and if there is no carry over (if the carry flag is 0), the result is judged as NO. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is greater than the number of payouts, the carry flag is 0 and the result is judged as YES. Furthermore, if the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game is less than the number of payouts, the carry flag is 1 and the result is judged as NO.

To give a specific example, the result of this game:
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, then the A register will be 3 and the carry flag will be 0.
a) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, then the A register will be 2 and the carry flag will be 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, then the A register will be 0 and the carry flag will be 0.
d) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will read 249 and the carry flag will read 1.

Here, if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) as a result of the previous game, the number of bets for the current game is automatically bet (for example, "3" is set by the automatic bet), and if a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is not displayed (on an active line) as a result of the current game, the number of bets will be treated as the number of bets for the current game, even if it was the number of bets set by the automatic bet.

On the other hand, regarding the number of inserts and the number of payouts, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the determination of "number of inserts < number of payouts?" is not made. In other words, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of bets for the current game is not treated as the number of inserts. Similarly, if the result of the current game is that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay is displayed (on an active line) (if the next game is a game with a replay), the number of awards (or automatic bets) for the current game is not treated as the number of payouts.

Note that in "Number of Inserts < Number of Payouts?", we subtracted the number of inserts from the number of payouts, but we could also use the number of payouts minus the number of inserts. In other words, it would be sufficient to be able to calculate the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media for the current game using the number of inserts and the number of payouts.

"Exceeding upper limit?" determines whether the result of adding the absolute value of the difference number of gaming media for the current game to the value stored in the difference counter exceeds the upper limit (for example, 65,535). Specifically, it determines whether the result of adding the value stored in the A register (number of coins inserted in the current game - number of coins paid out in the current game) to the value stored in the HL register (value stored in the difference counter) results in a carry. If there is a carry, it determines YES, and if there is no carry, it determines NO. If there is a carry, the carry flag becomes 1, and if there is no carry, the carry flag becomes 0. The result of this calculation is stored in the HL register.

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
A) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 0, the HL register is 1 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 3 = 65537, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 1.
a) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 1, the HL register is 0 and the carry flag is 1. Note that 65534 + 2 = 65536, but a 2-byte pair register (HL register) cannot store a value greater than 65535. Therefore, a carry occurs and the value becomes 0.
c) If the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 3, the HL register will read 65534 and the carry flag will read 0.

In other words, in the above example, a) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins removed = 0, the answer is YES. Also, b) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the answer is YES. Also, c) if the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 3, the answer is NO.

If "Upper limit exceeded?" is YES, the carry flag is 1, so a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0. For example, the specified calculation is the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register. As a result of this exclusive OR, the carry flag becomes 0. Note that although the exclusive OR of the value in the A register and the value in the A register is given as an example of the specified calculation, any calculation can be used as long as it sets the carry flag to 0.

In "Upper limit set", if a carry occurs due to "Upper limit exceeded?", a predetermined upper limit (65535) is stored in the register that stores the calculation result (HL register in this embodiment). Note that the upper limit in this embodiment is 65535, which is the maximum value that can be stored in 2 bytes, but the upper limit is not limited to 65535 and may be any predetermined value.

In the above example, when the value stored in the difference counter is 65534, if a) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 0, the HL register = 2 due to "Upper limit exceeded?". In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register due to "Upper limit set."

Similarly, in the above example, when the value stored in the difference counter is 65534, if (a) the number of coins inserted = 3 and the number of coins paid out = 1, the HL register = 0 due to "Upper limit exceeded?". In such a case, 65535 is stored in the HL register due to "Upper limit set."

In other words, if a carry occurs in the value stored in the HL register and an abnormal value is stored, the upper limit value of 65535 is stored in the HL register, making it possible to calculate the difference in the number of gaming media as accurately as possible. Note that even if "Upper limit set" is executed, the next game can be played. In other words, the process in FIG. 82 is executed even in games after "Upper limit set" is executed.

Note that although FIG. 82 includes a process for "setting the upper limit", the process for "setting the upper limit" may not be included. Specifically, if "exceeds the upper limit?" is judged to be YES, the value stored in the difference counter for the previous game may be set. For example, if the value stored in the difference counter is 65534 and the number of coins inserted and the number of coins paid out for the game are a) number of coins inserted = 3 and number of coins paid out = 0, the value stored in the difference counter may be set to 65534 (the same value as the value of the difference counter for the previous game). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent abnormal values (values that have been carried over) from being stored in the "difference counter". Also, since there is no process equivalent to "setting the upper limit", the program capacity can be reduced.

In other words, when a carry occurs due to "Exceeding upper limit?", the difference counter is not updated using the value at the time the carry occurred, so that an abnormal value does not occur in the difference counter. In other words, even if the difference number of gaming media becomes a negative value, the stop state can be generated as accurately as possible using the difference number of gaming media.

In addition, for values that exceed the upper limit, the difference counter value is set to the upper limit or the previous value, so that it is not possible to award a difference that greatly exceeds the value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media until the limit is reached (for example, 19,000). Specifically, by storing 19,000 as the initial value and setting the upper limit to 65,535, the maximum difference in the number of gaming media that a player can potentially obtain before the limit is reached can be limited to approximately 65,535 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit (65,535) (46,535) + 19,000). In other words, it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling to become excessively high.

In "Difference Update", the complement of the result of the calculation in "Upper Limit Exceeded?" (Number Deposited - Number Disbursed) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register. In other words, "Value stored in Difference Counter" - "Value of the difference between the gaming media in the current game" is executed.

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 65534,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but in the "difference update", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65534-7 is calculated, and 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that since the result of 65534-7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag will be 0.

Also, for example, in a situation where the value stored in the difference counter (the value of the HL register) is 2,
d) When the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but in the "difference counter update", the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 2-7 is calculated, and 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2-7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (because there is a borrow), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a borrow, the carry flag becomes 1.

In "Update difference counter", the value stored in the HL register is stored in the difference counter.

For example, if "Upper limit exceeded?" is NO, the value updated based on the difference between the value of the difference counter from the previous game and the number of gaming media in the current game (number of inserts - number of payouts, or number of payouts - number of inserts) is stored in the HL register, so "Update difference counter" stores the value updated (subtracted or added) based on the absolute value of the difference between the value of the difference counter from the previous game and the number of gaming media in the current game in the difference counter.

For example, if "Exceeded upper limit?" is YES, the upper limit (65535) is stored in the HL register, so "Update difference counter" stores the upper limit (65535) in the difference counter.

"Difference > 19000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0) exceeds 19000. Specifically, it determines whether the carry flag is 1. If the carry flag is 1, it judges YES, and if the carry flag is not 1 (if the carry flag is 0), it judges NO. Note that the carry flag is 1 when a carry is down due to "difference update". On the other hand, if a carry is up due to "number inserted < number paid out?", the carry flag will temporarily become 1, but then a specified calculation is performed to set the carry flag to 0, so "Difference > 19000?" can be judged as NO.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" makes it possible to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1. This makes it possible to reduce the program capacity compared to directly comparing the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power was turned on (starting point (0)) with a constant (19,000).

In this way, "Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of gaming media since the power-on starting point (0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the carry flag is 1, so 19,000 is stored as the initial value.

As mentioned above, this 19000 is the value "19000" that corresponds to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the game is capped. In other words, if the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on (starting point (0)) exceeds 19000, it will fall below 0, and the carry flag will become 1.

In addition, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46,535 as the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 19,000, a situation in which the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is 49,000 means that the difference in gaming media, with the power-on time being the starting point (0), is -30,000.

As described above, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, which is "a value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media at which the limit is reached," it is possible to reduce the program capacity required to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000. Also, by storing 19,000 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -46,535 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. Note that although an example is given of storing 19,000 as the initial value, any value other than 19,000 can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

"Save stop flag" stores information indicating that the stop condition has been met in the stop flag storage area in the RWM area of the main control board. For example, a specified value is stored in the stop flag storage area.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the power is turned on without changing the settings, or when the power is turned off (power off processing is executed). Also, the information stored in the limit flag memory area is not initialized when the RWM is cleared at the end of the favorable period.

The information stored in the limit flag memory area can be initialized by turning on the power with a change in settings (RWM clear process with a change in settings) (information indicating that the limit conditions have been met can be cleared).

In other words, if the power is turned OFF after "Save cap flag" stores information indicating that the cap condition has been met in the cap flag storage area, and then the power is turned ON (power ON without changing settings), the value stored in the difference counter will be the initial value (19000), but the information stored in the cap flag storage area (information indicating that the cap condition has been met) will not be initialized.

Therefore, if the power is turned off while the limit flag storage area stores information indicating that the limit conditions have been met, and then the power is turned on again without changing any settings, the difference counter will return to its initial value, but the limit state will still be reached.

When information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area (when the stop state is reached), it is not possible to perform a bet operation to execute the next game. For example, the operation of the bet button is disabled, or the blocker is (set to) a position that does not form a medal flow path (a position for returning inserted medals from the return port).

In addition, in gaming machines that do not automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made operable after information indicating that the limit condition has been met is stored in the limit flag storage area. By configuring in this way, the number of credits can be settled.

On the other hand, in gaming machines that automatically settle gaming media after information indicating that the limiting condition has been met is stored in the limiting flag storage area, the settlement switch may be made inoperable.

Note that, while 65,535 has been used as an example of the upper limit, if the upper limit is set to 29,000, "Upper limit exceeded?" determines whether the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media currently played is added to the value stored in the difference counter and whether it exceeds the upper limit (29,000). If the absolute value of the difference in the number of gaming media currently played is added to the value stored in the difference counter and exceeds the upper limit (29,000), then "Upper limit set" may be used to store 29,000 in the HL register.

By setting the upper limit at 29,000 in this way, the game can be stopped when the maximum difference in the number of game media exceeds 29,000 (the absolute value of the difference between the initial value (19,000) and the upper limit (29,000) (10,000) + 19,000). In other words, compared to when the upper limit is set to 65,535, the number of game media differences that the player can potentially obtain before the game is stopped can be reduced. In other words, the risk of gambling becoming too high can be prevented.

Also, even if the upper limit is set to 29,000, if the answer to "Exceeded upper limit?" is YES, the value stored in the difference counter from the previous game may be used.

Note that although the upper limit has been set to 29,000 in the above description, the upper limit is not limited to 29,000 and can be any value.

In addition, the example described above uses the time when the power is turned on as the starting point (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media exceeds 19,000. However, the present invention can also be applied to a case where the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls is set as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

When the point where the player has put out the lowest number of balls is set as the reference (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, it is possible to set the upper limit value to the same as the initial value. For example, if the initial value is 19,000, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media that will cause the game to be stopped," the upper limit value is also set to 19,000. By doing this, when the difference in the number of game media becomes smaller than the initial value, "Upper limit exceeded?" becomes YES, and 19,000 is stored as the upper limit value. Therefore, the point where the player has put out the lowest number of balls can be set as the reference (0), and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000.

As described above, by performing the processing shown in Figures 80, 81, and 82, an example has been shown in which, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), when the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000, information (a predetermined value) indicating that the capping condition has been met can be stored in the capping flag memory area (the capping process can be executed).

Also, by performing the processing as shown in Figures 81 and 82, the point at which the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the reference (0), and when the difference in the number of game media from that reference exceeds 19,000, information indicating that the stop condition has been met (a predetermined value) can be stored in the stop flag memory area (the stop processing can be executed) as an example.

Note that the control processes shown in Figures 80, 81, and 82 are merely examples, and any order of control processes may be used as long as the same effect is achieved, even if the order of control processes is different.

Similarly, the control processes shown in Figures 80, 81, and 82 are just examples, and even if the control processes involve different additions and subtractions (for example, when addition and subtraction are reversed), any calculation process may be used as long as it produces a similar effect. In other words, "adding" and "subtracting" can be expressed as "updating."

The capping monitoring process shown in Figures 80, 81, and 82 is also executed in the bonus game state. In other words, even in the middle of the bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the capping condition has been met (a predetermined value) is stored in the capping flag storage area, so that the capping state is reached even in the middle of the bonus game state.

Similarly, the limit monitoring process shown in Figures 81 and 82 sets the point where the player's ball output is at its lowest as the reference (0) even in the middle of a bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), and when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, stores information (a predetermined value) indicating that the limit condition has been met in the limit flag memory area, so that the limit state is reached even in the middle of a bonus game state.

By configuring it in this way, even in a bonus game state, the machine can be put into a stop state when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), providing a gaming machine that does not excessively increase gambling tendencies.

However, stopping the bonus game in the middle of the game can be unpleasant for the player.

Therefore, in the middle of a bonus game state (play before the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met), even if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0), the game is not immediately put into a halt state. Instead, when the conditions for terminating the bonus game state are met, information indicating that the halt condition has been met (a predetermined value) is stored in the halt flag memory area, and an example of putting the game into a halt state is described below.

<End-of-game monitoring process (subtraction version of difference counter, end-of-game state after bonus game state ends due to temporary end-of-game flag)>
Fig. 83 is a modified example of Fig. 82. In Fig. 83, a temporary flag storage area is provided.

The tentative limit flag memory area is one of the RWM areas of the main control board. Specifically, it is a memory area that stores information (for example, a predetermined value such as "1") indicating that the tentative limit condition is met when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, starting from the time the power is turned on (0).

The information stored in the temporary limit flag memory area is not initialized by simply turning the power on and off. Also, the information stored in the temporary limit flag memory area is not initialized by clearing the RWM at the end of the favorable period.

In addition, the information stored in the tentative limit flag memory area can be initialized (e.g., to "0") by powering on with a setting change (RWM clear process with setting change) (information indicating that the tentative limit condition has been met can be cleared).

In addition, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional limit condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is in a bonus game state, information indicating that the limit condition is satisfied is not stored in the provisional limit flag storage area. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional limit condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is in a bonus game state, the game will not be in a limit state.

If a game in which information indicating that the provisional limiting condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limiting flag storage area is in a bonus game state, information indicating that the limiting condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limiting flag storage area in a game in which the bonus game state has ended. In other words, if a game in which information indicating that the provisional limiting condition is satisfied is stored in the provisional limiting flag storage area is in a bonus game state, the game will enter a limiting state after the game in which the bonus game state has ended has ended.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from Figure 82.

First, "Temporary limit flag ON?" determines whether information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the temporary limit flag storage area.

If the answer to "Temporary limit flag ON?" is YES, the process determines whether the player is in bonus game mode.

If the answer to "Is the temporary stop flag ON?" is NO, the system checks whether "Replay activation symbol is displayed?".

The "Replay activation symbol display?" is the same as the "Replay activation symbol display?" in Figure 82, so the explanation will be omitted.

The "difference counter set" is the same as the "difference counter set" in Figure 82, so the explanation is omitted.

Since "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" is the same as "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" in Figure 82, the explanation will be omitted.

"Upper limit exceeded?" is the same as "Upper limit exceeded?" in Figure 82, so the explanation is omitted.

The "Upper limit set" is the same as the "Upper limit set" in Figure 82, so the explanation is omitted.

Since "Difference update" is the same as "Difference update" in Figure 82, the explanation will be omitted.

Since "Difference counter update" is the same as "Difference counter update" in Figure 82, the explanation is omitted.

Since "Difference > 19000?" is the same as "Difference > 19000?" in Figure 82, the explanation is omitted.

In "save tentative limit flag", information indicating that the tentative limit condition is met is stored in the tentative limit flag storage area. For example, the information indicating that the tentative limit condition is met corresponds to numerical information such as a predetermined value (e.g., "1").

"Bonus game state?" determines whether the next game will be a bonus game state game. Specifically, it checks the bonus activation flag and determines whether Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB is activated.

Here, the bonus activation flag is one of the RWM areas of the main control board. For example, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a type 1 BB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the type 1 BB in the bonus activation flag turns on (1), and when the type 1 BB is completed, it changes from on to off (0). Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to a type 2 BB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the type 2 BB in the bonus activation flag turns on (1), and when the type 2 BB is completed, it changes from on to off (0). Similarly, in a game where a symbol combination corresponding to an RB is stopped and displayed, the bit corresponding to the RB in the bonus activation flag turns on (1), and when the RB is completed, it changes from on to off (0).

Note that the on/off status of the bonus activation flag is stored in a process that occurs before the limit monitoring process.

For example, even if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), if the current game ends in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the "Bonus game state?" will be judged as NO.

For example, if the previous game was in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) and the current game did not end in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), the "Bonus game state?" will be answered with YES.

For example, if the previous game was not in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB) (it was in a non-bonus game state), and the current game is in a bonus game state (either Type 1 BB, Type 2 BB, or RB), then "Bonus game state?" will be answered with YES.

"Save stop flag" is the same as "Save stop flag" in Figure 82, so the explanation will be omitted.

As described above, by providing a temporary limit flag storage area, even if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the limit condition is met is not stored in the limit flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), the limit state will be reached after the game when the bonus game state ends.

In addition, after information indicating that the tentative limit condition is met is stored in the tentative limit flag storage area, the difference counter is not updated. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing.

However, the difference counter may be updated even after information indicating that the tentative limit condition is met is stored in the tentative limit flag storage area. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the processing.

In addition, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, no determination is made as to whether the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid unnecessary processing.

As is also clear from FIG. 83, after information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is stored in the provisional limit flag storage area, even if the difference in the number of gaming media falls below 19,000, the information stored in the provisional limit flag storage area is not updated (the information indicating that the provisional limit condition is met is not cleared). By configuring in this manner, if the difference in the number of gaming media exceeds 19,000 even once during the bonus game state, the game can be put into a limit state even if the difference in the number of gaming media is below 19,000 in the game in which the bonus game state ends.

Note that while Figure 83 has been explained as a modified example of Figure 82, it can also be applied to Figures 80 and 81.

For example, a process corresponding to "Temporary limit flag ON?" in FIG. 83 is provided before "Display replay operation symbol?" in FIG. 80, a process corresponding to "Temporary limit flag save" in FIG. 83 is provided after "Difference number > 19000?" in FIG. 80 becomes YES, and a process corresponding to "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 83 is provided before "Save limit flag" in FIG. 80. By configuring in this way, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 from the time of power-on during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), information indicating that the limit condition is met is not stored in the limit flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of game media exceeds 19000 from the time of power-on during the bonus game state as the starting point (0), the game can be limited after the bonus game state ends.

Similarly, for example, a process corresponding to "Temporary limit flag ON?" in FIG. 83 is provided before "Replay operation symbol display?" in FIG. 81, a process corresponding to "Temporary limit flag save" in FIG. 83 is provided after "Difference number > 19000?" in FIG. 81 becomes YES, and a process corresponding to "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 83 is provided before "Save limit flag" in FIG. 81. By configuring in this way, even if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), information indicating that the limit condition is met is not stored in the limit flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, if the number of game media exceeds 19000 during the bonus game state, starting from the time when the power is turned on (0), the game can be put into a limit state after the bonus game state ends.

In addition, Figure 83 can also be applied to a case where the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed is set as the base (0) and the game is stopped when the difference in the number of game media from that base exceeds 19,000.

For example, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and even if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, information indicating that the condition for halting is met is not stored in the halt flag area until the bonus ends. In other words, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed during the bonus game state is set as the reference (0), and if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the halt state can be set after the game when the bonus game state ends.

<End-of-game monitoring process (subtraction version of difference counter, end-of-game state after bonus game state ends due to difference counter)>
Figure 84 is a modified example of Figure 82 and Figure 83. Figure 84 is the same as Figure 83 in that, when the power is turned on during the bonus game state, the starting point (0) is set, and when the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the game is stopped after the bonus game state ends. However, unlike Figure 83, it is different in that it does not have a temporary stop flag storage area.

The "value corresponding to the difference in the number of game media to be put into the capped state" is set to 19001. In other words, when the power is turned on without changing the settings from a power-off state, the initial value stored in the difference counter is 19001. Similarly, when the power is turned on with a setting change from a power-off state, the initial value stored in the difference counter is 19001.

The following explanation will focus on the differences from Figure 83.

First, in "Difference counter = specific value?", it is determined whether the value stored in the difference counter is a specific value. For example, if the specific value is 0, it is determined whether the value stored in the difference counter is 0. Note that in the explanation of FIG. 83, the specific value is 0, but it can be any value other than 0 as long as it is a predetermined value.

In addition, a game in which "Difference counter = specific value?" is judged as YES is a game that has occurred during a bonus game state after the number of game media has exceeded 19,000, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), and is a game that has occurred until "Save limit flag" is executed. Details will be described later.

Since "Replay activation symbol display?" is the same as "Replay activation symbol display?" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), the explanation will be omitted.

The "difference number counter set" is the same as the "difference number counter set" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), so the explanation is omitted.

Since "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" is the same as "Number of coins inserted < number of coins paid out?" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), the explanation will be omitted.

"Upper limit exceeded?" is the same as "Upper limit exceeded?" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), so explanation is omitted.

The "upper limit set" is the same as the "upper limit set" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), so the explanation is omitted.

In "Difference Update", the complement of the result of the calculation in "Exceeding Upper Limit?" (Number of Inserts - Number of Payouts) (the value stored in the A register) is calculated and stored in the A register. The calculated complement (the value stored in the A register) is then subtracted from the HL register. In other words, "Value stored in the Difference Counter" - "Value of the Difference in the Number of Game Media in the Current Game" is executed. If the result of this calculation is below a specific value, the specific value is stored in the HL register.

Note that the complement in "difference update" refers to the smallest number that carries beyond one byte (255). For example, it can be derived using the value of the 0-A register, or a single instruction for deriving a complement (NEG instruction).

For example, if the value stored in the difference counter (value of the HL register) is 65534, and the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, then the A register will be 249, but in the "difference update" step, the complement of 249, 7, is first derived. Next, 65534-7 is calculated, and 65527 is stored in the HL register. Note that since the result of 65534-7 is not less than 0 (there is no borrowing), the carry flag is 0.

When there is no carry (when the carry flag is 0), the value of the HL register is not updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register is the result of the calculation "value stored in the difference counter" - "value of the difference between the game media currently played."

For example, when the value stored in the difference counter (value of the HL register) is 2, if the number of coins inserted is 3 and the number of coins paid out is 10, the A register will be 249, but the "difference counter update" first derives the complement of 249, which is 7. Next, 2-7 is calculated, and 65531 is stored in the HL register. Note that 2-7 is -5, but since this is less than 0 (because there is a borrow), 65531 is stored in the HL register. Also, because there is a borrow, the carry flag becomes 1.

When there is a carry (when the carry flag is 1), the value of the HL register is updated to a specific value (0). In other words, the value of the HL register becomes a specific value (0).

Since "Difference counter update" is the same as "Difference counter update" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), the explanation is omitted.

"Difference > 19,000?" determines whether the difference in the number of game media, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), exceeds 19,000. Specifically, it determines whether the value stored in the difference counter is a specific value (0). If the value stored in the difference counter is the specific value (0), it judges as YES, and if the value stored in the difference counter is not the specific value (0), it judges as NO.

The value stored in the difference counter is a specific value (0) when a) the result of the calculation performed by "difference update" of "value stored in difference counter" - "value of difference number of gaming media in current game" falls below the specific value (0), or b) the result of the calculation performed by "difference update" of "value stored in difference counter" - "value of difference number of gaming media in current game" becomes a specific value (0).

Specifically, the above A) corresponds to a case where the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on (starting point (0)) is greater than 19001, and the above B) corresponds to a case where the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on (starting point (0)) is 19001.

In other words, "Difference > 19,000?" can determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media since the power-on start point (0) has exceeded 19,000 depending on whether the value stored in the difference counter is a specific value (0).

In addition, by storing 19001 as the initial value when the power is turned on without a setting change or when the power is turned on with a setting change, it is possible to store a value equivalent to -46534 as the difference in gaming media from the time of power-on as the starting point (0). For example, when the initial value is 19001, a situation in which the value of the advantageous zone difference counter is 49001 means that the difference in gaming media from the time of power-on as the starting point (0) is -30000.

As described above, by storing 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media to be capped," as the initial value, it is possible to determine whether the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on has exceeded 19,000 by checking whether the value of the difference counter is "0," thereby reducing the program capacity. Also, by storing 19001 as the initial value, it is possible to store values up to the equivalent of -46534 as the difference in the number of gaming media from the time the power is turned on. Note that although an example is given of storing 19001 as the initial value, any value other than 19001 can be used as the initial value as long as it has the same effect.

Since "Bonus game state?" is the same as "Bonus game state?" in FIG. 83, some of the explanation will be omitted. Note that if "Bonus game state?" is judged as YES, "Save stop flag" is not executed and stop monitoring processing is executed. In other words, if "Bonus game state?" is judged as YES, a specific value (0) is stored in the difference counter, and the next game (game in the bonus game state) can be executed in a situation where no information indicating that the stop condition has been met is stored in the stop flag storage area.

In other words, when the next game is played while the specific value (0) is stored and the limit monitoring process is executed, the first determination in the limit monitoring process, "Is the difference counter = specific value?", is judged as YES. In other words, if the number of game media since the power-on time (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state and "save limit flag" has not been executed, the "difference counter = specific value?" is judged as YES, and it is determined whether or not the game is in the bonus game state without performing processes such as "update the difference counter".

Since "Save stop flag" is the same as "Save stop flag" in Figure 83 (Figure 82), the explanation will be omitted.

As described above, the limit monitoring process shown in FIG. 84 can achieve a limit state after the bonus game state ends, without providing a temporary limit flag storage area (without taking up space in the RWM storage area), even if the number of gaming media since the power-on time (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state.

If the number of game media from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus game state, the machine can be put into a stop state even if the number of game media from the time the power was turned on (starting point 0) in the game where the bonus game state ends falls below 19,000. By configuring the machine in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not require the player to have any strategy.

In addition, since the limit monitoring process in FIG. 84 does not have a temporary limit flag storage area, if a power outage occurs (the power is turned off) during a specific game in the bonus game state after the number of game media from the start point (0) at the time of power-on during the bonus game state exceeds 19,000 and a specific value is stored in the difference counter, and then the power is turned on without changing the settings, the difference counter will return from the specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state continues), and therefore the limit state will not be reached after the bonus game state ends.

In other words, if a power outage occurs during a bonus game state after the number of game media, starting from the time the power was turned on (0), exceeds 19,000, and the player continues playing the bonus game state from the beginning when the power is turned on, the game will not be stopped. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not give the player the misunderstanding that the game has been stopped due to a power outage that occurred during a bonus game.

Note that while Figure 84 has been explained as a modified version of Figures 82 and 83, it can also be applied as a modified version of Figure 81.

Specifically, in FIG. 84, the initial value is 19001, which is the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped", but when applied as a modified example of FIG. 81, the initial value is "value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the difference counter" - "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped". For example, if the memory area of the difference counter is 2 bytes, the "value corresponding to the size of the memory area of the difference counter" is 65535, the "value corresponding to the difference in the number of gaming media that will be capped" is 19001, and the initial value is 46534.

In addition, in Figure 84, the specific value is set to 0, but when applied as a modified example of Figure 81, the specific value is set to 65535.

As described above, the initial values and specific values in Figure 84 can be set to any predetermined values.

In addition, while a specific example was given in Figure 84, the processing order and processing contents are not limited to this, and it is sufficient if the limit state can be reached after the bonus gaming state ends, even if the number of gaming media since the power-on start time (0) exceeds 19,000 during the bonus gaming state, without providing a temporary limit flag storage area (without putting pressure on the RWM storage area).

In addition, in FIG. 84, it is also possible to use the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed as the base (0) and to end the game when the difference in the number of game media from the base exceeds 19,000.

For example, the point where the player has the lowest number of balls dispensed during the bonus game state is set as the base (0), and if the number of game media exceeds 19,000, the game can be stopped after the bonus game state ends. However, if the power is turned off during the bonus game state and then turned on again without changing the settings, the difference counter will be reset from a specific value to its initial value (the bonus game state will continue), so it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped after the bonus game state ends.

<Regarding another gaming machine specification (referred to as "specification 1") that can be applied to this embodiment>
Specification 1 applicable to the gaming machine described in this embodiment will be described.

In Specification 1, the number of coins required to start playing is 2 or 3 when the reel is not in operation (inside or outside the BB), and only 3 coins when the RB is in operation.

In Specification 1, the active line consists of one line on the top left reel, top middle reel, and bottom right reel.

In Specification 1, there are 10 different designs. They are called Seven, Bar, Replay A, Replay B, Lemon, Hat, Apple A, Apple B, Cherry, and Blank.

The reel arrangement of Specification 1 will be explained using Figure 86. As shown in Figure 86, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in specification 1 are shown in Figures 87 to 93. The "Winning symbol, operating symbol, pattern symbol name" item in the figure shows the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. Also, the "Specified number and game state" shows the bonus that is awarded when the symbol combination stops for each specified number. If "1 type BB" is written in the "Specified number and game state" item, it indicates that 1 type BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if it is written "Replay" it indicates that replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if a number is written, it indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops, and if it is written "-" it indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game state.

In specification 1, there are two types of bonuses, Type 1 BB, Type 1 BB01 has an end condition of more than two game medals being paid out, and Type 1 BB02 has an end condition of more than 20 game medals being paid out. Type 1 BB01 is a type in which RB-A operates continuously, and Type 1 BB02 is a type in which RB-B operates continuously. Both RB-A and RB-B end when either two wins or two games are met, and when the end condition of RB-A or RB-B is met, RB-A or RB-B will automatically operate until the end condition of Type 1 BB01 or Type 1 BB02 is met. During RB-A, an internal lottery may determine a loss.

As shown in Figure 87, there is only one type of symbol combination for 1 type BB01 and 1 type BB02, and the symbol pull rate (probability of symbols related to symbol combinations stopping) for 1 type BB01 symbol combinations and 1 type BB02 symbol combinations on each reel is not 100%, so to display 1 type BB01 symbol combinations and 1 type BB02 symbol combinations, you need to use your eyes to press each reel.

In specification 1, the RT transition starts from non-RT (within Type 1 BB01 and Type 1 BB02), and if Type 1 BB-A is won during non-RT and the Type 1 BB01 pattern combination does not stop, it will transition to RT1 (also referred to as being inside Type 1 BB-A) from the next play (which may be the end of that play), and if the Type 1 BB01 pattern combination stops during RT1, RT1 will end and Type 1 BB-A will be activated from the next play (also referred to as being during Type 1 BB-A), and when the activation of Type 1 BB-A ends, it will transition to non-RT from the next play. Also, if a type 1 BB-B is won during non-RT and the type 1 BB02 symbol combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of that game) will transition to RT2 (also referred to as during type 1 BB-B), and if a type 1 BB02 symbol combination stops during RT2, RT2 will end and type 1 BB-B will operate from the next game (also referred to as during type 1 BB-B), and when the operation of type 1 BB-B ends, the next game will transition to non-RT. Also, when the setting is changed during type 1 BB-A, the type 1 BB-A state will be inherited, and when the setting is changed in a state other than type 1 BB-A (type 1 BB01, and during non-type 1 BB02, during type 1 BB-A, during type 1 BB-B, and during type 1 BB-B), it will become non-RT. In addition, in the case of a power outage in which the setting change device does not operate (sometimes called a normal power outage), the RT state and Type 1 BB operation state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, the system will start from the state before the power outage.

The condition device in specification 1 is explained in Figure 94. The "Condition Device Number" item in Figure 94 lists the number that corresponds to the winning number. The "Condition Device" item lists the condition device that will be activated. The "Common Name" item lists the simple name of the condition device that will be activated. The "Component" item shows the pattern combination that corresponds to the condition device.

Using Figure 95, we will explain the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when three tickets are bet in specification 1. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when 3 coins are bet are as follows: Type 1 BB-B, Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-A7, Winning-A8, Winning-A9, Winning-A10, Winning-A11, Winning-A12, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-B7, Winning-B8, Winning-B9, Winning-B10, Winning-B1 The possible results are: 1, Winner-B12, Winner-C1, Winner-C2, Winner-C3, Winner-C4, Winner-C5, Winner-C6, Winner-C7, Winner-C8, Winner-C9, Winner-C10, Winner-C11, Winner-C12, Winner-D1, Winner-D2, Winner-D3, Winner-D4, Winner-D5, Winner-D6, Winner-D7, Winner-D8, Winner-D9, Winner-D10, Winner-D11, Winner-D12, Winner-E, Winner-F, Winner-G, Winner-H, Winner-I, Winner-J, Winner-K, Winner-L, Winner-M, Winner-N, Winner-O, Winner-P, Winner-Q. There are no losers.

In addition, the "internal lottery" item in FIG. 95 indicates whether or not the internal lottery is applicable for each game state, with "○" indicating that the internal lottery is applicable and "×" indicating that the internal lottery is not applicable. In addition, the "advantageous zone transition" item indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed and "×" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed. Note that in Specification 1, when the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, there is a 100% chance of winning and transitioning to the advantageous zone. In addition, the "R1" to "R6" items indicate the number of winning sets for the internal lottery corresponding to the set value, and 65536 sets are allocated for each game state. Note that "R1" corresponds to the set value "1", "R2" corresponds to the set value "2", "R3" corresponds to the set value "3", "R4" corresponds to the set value "4", "R5" corresponds to the set value "5", and "R6" corresponds to the set value "6".

In specification 1, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT1 when three coins are bet are shown in Figure 96, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT2 when three coins are bet are shown in Figure 97, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT3 when three coins are bet are shown in Figure 98, and the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when two coins are bet are shown in Figure 99. Explanations of each figure are omitted as they are the same as those in Figure 95. Note that the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT1 and RT2 when two coins are bet are omitted as they are the same as the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when two coins are bet, where the number of 1st type BB-A placed is 0 and the number of replay-A placed is 21638 (8978 + 12660).

In Specification 1, 3-coin play in RT1 is the normal way to play. In other words, when the gaming machine is shipped from the factory (initial state), 2-coin play is played in non-RT, and if the 1-type BB01 symbol combination does not stop during a game in which a 1-type BB-A is won, the machine transitions to RT1, where 3-coin play is played. Note that it is possible to play in ways other than 3-coin play in RT1, but since 2-coin play does not involve an AT lottery and the probability of winning the AT is lower in 3-coin play in RTs other than RT1 than in RT1, 3-coin play in RT1 is the way to play with the highest payout rate.

The stop control in Specification 1 will be explained using Figure 100. The places marked "X" in Figure 100 indicate that the condition device does not draw a lottery in that game state. Also, "123: Winning 01 (PB8000)" in the "Winning-A1 Condition Device" in Figure 100 indicates that if the left, middle, and right buttons are pressed when a winning-A1 win occurs, winning 01 will be displayed. "(PB8000)" indicates that since 20 symbols are drawn on each of the three reels, the total number of all symbol combinations is 20 x 20 x 20 = 8000, and if the left, middle, and right buttons are pressed, there is a 100% (8000/8000 x 100) probability that winning 01 will stop. If this is "132: Winning 11 (PB4000)," it indicates that if the left, right, and center buttons are pressed in the order shown, there is a 50% (4000/8000 x 100) probability that the winning 11 will stop, and a 50% probability that it will be missed. This is the same for other condition devices, so an explanation will be omitted. Also, the places in Figure 100 marked with a "-" indicate that the condition device will always stop regardless of the button press order. Also, the "Notes" section describes the symbol combination that will appear when the correct button press is used. For example, the "Notes" section of the "Winning - A1 Condition Device" states "Lemon Down Right," which indicates that if the device is pressed in the order shown, left, center, and right, a lemon will stop on the top row of the left reel, a lemon on the middle row of the middle reel, and a lemon on the bottom row of the right reel.

In Specification 1, the push order roles are Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C1 to C12, and Winning-D1 to D12. When the push order is correct, the lemon or hat symbols line up in a straight line.

Here, in conventional so-called accelerator AT machines, when a push order bell with six options (left-center-right, left-right-center, center-left-right, center-right-left, center-right-left, right-left-center, right-center-left) is provided, it is necessary to stop a different winning symbol with each push order. Therefore, in the most common gaming machine with three reels and three reel stop areas in the upper, middle, and lower rows, there are only five straight lines: the upper row line, the middle row line, the lower row line, the upper right upward line, and the right downward line. Therefore, it is necessary to include a curved line (for example, a so-called small V line in the upper row, middle row, and upper row, or a so-called small hill line in the lower row, middle row, and lower row) in the line where the winning symbol stops when the push order bell is correct. However, the curved line makes it difficult to know the winning symbol combination, making it difficult for the player to know whether or not the push order is correct, and even if the push order is correct, the player cannot feel a sense of elation.

An accelerator AT machine refers to a machine in which the number of winning-P (winning 01-10, 53-63) placed (6,200) during a 3-coin bet during a type 1 BB (when RB-A is operating when type 1 BB-A is operating, or when RB-B is operating when type 1 BB-B is operating) is set to be more than the number of winning-A1-A12 and winning-B1-B12 placed (923) during a 3-coin bet during a game state other than a type 1 BB (non-RT, RT1, or RT2), and is less than the total number of winning-A1-A12 and the total number of winning-B1-B12 placed (11,076) as shown in Figures 95 to 98. In other words, a machine in which the number of predetermined winning roles that can be obtained in a predetermined number (for example, 13 coins) during a Type 1 BB is set to be greater than the number of each of the predetermined push order roles (for example, winning-A1 to A12) that can be obtained in a predetermined number (the same number as the predetermined number during a Type 1 BB) if the answer is correct, but less than the total number of the predetermined push order roles is called an accelerator AT machine.

In contrast, Specification 1 has two types of symbol combinations that line up in a straight line when the button presses are correct: lemon symbol combinations and hat symbol combinations. This makes it possible to line up all symbol combinations that line up in a straight line when the button presses are correct, even on an accelerator AT machine, without using curved lines.

For example, as described in the notes for Winning - A1 to A12 in Figure 101, when you win Winning - A1 and A2, pressing left, middle and right in this order will produce lemons going down to the right, when you win Winning - A3 and A4, pressing left, middle and left in this order will produce lemons on the top row, when you win Winning - A5 and A6, pressing middle, left and right in this order will produce lemons on the middle row, when you win Winning - A7 and A8, pressing middle, right and left in this order will produce upper hats, when you win Winning - A9 and A10, pressing right, left and middle in this order will produce lower hats, and when you win Winning - A11 and A12, pressing right, middle and left in this order will produce hats going down to the right. When the pressing order is correct, all the lemons or hats will line up in a straight line.

This configuration makes it possible to improve ball output performance with the accelerator AT while also increasing the player's interest in the numbers that come out.

Also, as described in the notes for Winning-B1 to B12 in Fig. 102, when you win Winning-B1 and B2, pressing left, center, and right will produce a top row lemon, when you win Winning-B3 and B4, pressing left, center, and right will produce a bottom row lemon, when you win Winning-B5 and B6, pressing center, left, and right will produce a middle row lemon, when you win Winning-B7 and B8, pressing center, right, and left will produce a top row hat, when you win Winning-B9 and B10, pressing right, left, and right will produce a bottom row hat, when you win Winning-B11 and B12, pressing right, center, and left will produce a bottom row hat, and when you win Winning-B11 and B12, pressing right, center, and left will produce a bottom row hat, so that when the pressing order is correct, all the lemons or hats line up in a straight line. Furthermore, compared to Winning-A1 to A12, when you win Winning-A1 and A2, pressing left, center, and right will produce a bottom row lemon, but when you win Winning-B1 and B2, pressing left, center, and right will produce a top row lemon. Similarly, when you win A3 or A4, the upper lemon will stop if you press left, center, and right in that order, but when you win B3 or B4, the lower right lemon will stop if you press left, center, and right in that order.

With this configuration, when the player presses the left stop switch for the first time, the middle stop switch for the second time, and the right stop switch for the third time (so-called "sequential pressing"), the right-down lemon and the top lemon may stop, so different numbers will appear even when playing with the same pressing order, which can increase the interest of the game. Furthermore, when the player presses the left stop switch for the first time, the right stop switch for the second time, and the middle stop switch for the third time (so-called "sequential pressing"), the right-down lemon and the top lemon may stop, so the same number will appear when playing with multiple pressing orders, which can diversify the numbers and increase the interest of the game.

Also, as noted in the notes for Winning-C1 to C12 in Figure 103, when you win Winning-C1 and C2, pressing left, middle, and right in this order will produce a top right hat, when you win Winning-C3 and C4, pressing left, middle, and right in this order will produce a bottom hat, when you win Winning-C5 and C6, pressing middle, left, and right in this order will produce a top hat, when you win Winning-C7 and C8, pressing middle, right, and left in this order will produce a top right lemon, when you win Winning-C9 and C10, pressing right, left, and middle in this order will produce a middle lemon, and when you win Winning-C11 and C12, pressing right, middle, and left in this order will produce a bottom right hat, and when the pressing order is correct, all the lemons or hats will line up in a straight line.

Also, as noted in the notes for Winning - D1 to D12 in Figure 104, when you win Winning - D1 and D2, pressing left, middle and right in that order will produce the bottom hat, when you win Winning - D3 and D4, pressing left, middle and left in that order will produce the top right hat, when you win Winning - D5 and D6, pressing middle, left and right in that order will produce the top hat, when you win Winning - D7 and D8, pressing middle, right and left in that order will produce the top right lemon, when you win Winning - D9 and D10, pressing right, left and middle in that order will produce the middle lemon, and when you win Winning - D11 and D12, pressing right, middle and left in that order will produce the bottom right hat, and when the pressing order is correct, all the lemons or hats will line up in a straight line.

This configuration makes it possible to further diversify the numbers that will come out when pressing the buttons in order. Also, the probability of winning prize-C1, C2 and prize-D1, D2 is set lower than the probability of winning prize-A1, A2 and prize-B1, B2, and by setting the probability of winning the AT higher for winning prize-C1, C2 and prize-D1, D2 than for winning prize-A1, A2 and prize-B1, B2, it is possible to diversify the numbers that will come out when pressing the buttons in order and create a sense of expectation for winning the AT.

<Regarding another gaming machine specification (referred to as "specification 2") that can be applied to this embodiment>
Specification 2 applicable to the gaming machine described in this embodiment will be described.

In Specification 2, the number of coins required to start playing is 2 or 3 when the reel is not in operation (inside or outside the BB), and only 3 coins when the RB is in operation.

In Specification 2, the active line consists of one line in the middle of the left reel, the top of the middle reel, and the bottom of the right reel.

In Specification 2, there are 10 types of symbols. They are called Black Bar, Blue Seven, Blank A, Blank B, Upper Ra, Lower Ra, Replay, Bell, Cherry, and Watermelon.

The reel arrangement of Specification 2 will be explained using Figure 106. As shown in Figure 106, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in specification 2 are shown in Figures 107 to 112. The "Winning symbol/Activation symbol/Pattern symbol name" item in the figure shows the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. Also, "Specified number and game state" shows the bonus that will be awarded when the symbol combination stops for each specified number. If "Specified number and game state" item says "1 type BB", it means that 1 type BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if it says "Replay", it means that replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if a number is written, it means the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops, and if it says "-", it means that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game state.

In specification 2, the bonus has three types of Type 1 BB, Type 1 BB01 has the end condition of paying out more than 41 game medals, Type 1 BB02 has the end condition of paying out more than 41 game medals, and Type 1 BB03 has the end condition of paying out more than 1 game medal. In addition, Type 1 BB01 is a type in which RB-A operates continuously, Type 1 BB02 is a type in which RB-A operates continuously, and Type 1 BB03 is a type in which RB-B operates continuously. Both RB-A and RB-B end when either two wins or two games are met, and when the end condition of RB-A or RB-B is met, RB-A or RB-B will automatically operate until the end condition of Type 1 BB01, Type 1 BB02, or Type 1 BB03 is met. During RB-B, the internal lottery may determine a losing ticket.

As shown in FIG. 107, there is only one type of symbol combination for BB01, BB02, and BB03, and the symbol pull rate (probability of symbols related to symbol combinations stopping) for BB01, BB02, and BB03 symbol combinations on each reel is not 100%, so to display BB01, BB02, and BB03 symbol combinations, you need to press each reel carefully.

In Specification 2, the RT transition starts from non-RT (within Type 1 BB01, Type 1 BB02, and Type 1 BB03), and if Type 1 BB-A is won and the Type 1 BB01 symbol combination does not stop during non-RT, or if Type 1 BB-B is won and the Type 1 BB02 symbol combination does not stop, the RT transition starts from the next game (which may be the end of the game) and goes to RT1 (within Type 1 BB-A, or within Type 1 BB-B). When a type 1 BB01 symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and a type 1 BB-A is activated from the next play (also referred to as type 1 BB-A in-between), when a type 1 BB02 symbol combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and a type 1 BB-B is activated from the next play (also referred to as type 1 BB-B in-between), and when the operation of type 1 BB-A or type 1 BB-B ends, the next play transitions to non-RT. In addition, if a type 1 BB-C is won during non-RT and the type 1 BB03 symbol combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of the game) will transition to RT2 (also referred to as being inside type 1 BB-C), and if a type 1 BB03 symbol combination stops during RT2, RT2 will end and type 1 BB-C will operate from the next game (also referred to as being inside type 1 BB-C), and when the operation of type 1 BB-C ends, the next game will transition to non-RT. In addition, when the setting is changed during type 1 BB-C, the type 1 BB-C state will be inherited, and when the setting is changed in a state other than type 1 BB-C (type 1 BB01, type 1 BB02, and non-type 1 BB03, type 1 BB-A, type 1 BB-B, type 1 BB-C, type 1 BB-A, and type 1 BB-B), it will become non-RT. In addition, in the case of a power outage in which the setting change device does not operate (sometimes called a normal power outage), the RT state and Type 1 BB operation state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, the system will start from the state before the power outage.

The condition device in specification 2 is explained in Figure 113. The "Condition Device Number" item in Figure 113 lists the number that corresponds to the winning number. The "Condition Device" item lists the condition device that will be activated. The "Common Name" item lists the simple name of the condition device that will be activated. The "Component" item shows the pattern combination that corresponds to the condition device.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when 3 coins are bet in specification 2 will be explained using Figure 114. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when 3 coins are bet are Type 1 BB-A, Type 1 BB-B, Re-play-A, Re-play-B, Re-play-C, Re-play-D, Re-play-E, Re-play-F, Re-play-G, Re-play-H, Re-play-I, Re-play-J, Re-play-K, Re-play-L, Re-play-M, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-A7, Winning-A8, Winning-A9, Winning-B10, Winning-B11, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-B7, Winning-B8, Winning-B9, Winning-B10, Winning-B11, Winning-B12, Winning-B13, Winning-B14, Winning-B15, Winning-B16, Winning-B17, Winning-B18, Winning-B19, Winning-C20, Winning-C21, Winning-C22, Winning-C23, Winning-C24, Winning-C25, Winning-C26, Winning-C27, Winning-C28, Winning-C29, Winning-C30, Winning-C31, Winning-C32, Winning-C33, Winning-C34, Winning-C35, Winning-C36, Winning-C37, Winning-C38, Winning-C39, Winning-C40, Winning-C41, Winning The possible results are -A7, Winning -A8, Winning -A9, Winning -A10, Winning -A11, Winning -A12, Winning -B1, Winning -B2, Winning -B3, Winning -B4, Winning -B5, Winning -B6, Winning -B7, Winning -B8, Winning -B9, Winning -B10, Winning -B11, Winning -B12, Winning -C, Winning -D, Winning -E, Winning -F, Winning -G, Winning -H, Winning -I, Winning -J, and there are no losing options.

In addition, the "internal lottery" item in FIG. 114 indicates whether or not the internal lottery is applicable for each game state, with "○" indicating that the internal lottery is applicable and "×" indicating that the internal lottery is not applicable. In addition, the "advantageous zone transition" item indicates whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed and "×" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed. In addition, in Specification 2, when the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, it is configured to win 100% and transition to the advantageous zone. In addition, the "R1" to "R6" items indicate the number of winning sets for the internal lottery corresponding to the setting value, and 65536 sets are allocated to each game state. In addition, "R1" corresponds to the setting value "1", "R2" corresponds to the setting value "2", "R3" corresponds to the setting value "3", "R4" corresponds to the setting value "4", "R5" corresponds to the setting value "5", and "R6" corresponds to the setting value "6".

In specification 2, the internal drawing results that can be determined by the internal drawing means in RT1 when three tickets are bet are shown in Figure 115, the internal drawing results that can be determined by the internal drawing means in RT2 when three tickets are bet are shown in Figure 116, the internal drawing results that can be determined by the internal drawing means when RB-A is in operation when 1st type BB-A or 1st type BB-B is in operation when three tickets are bet are shown in Figure 117, the internal drawing results that can be determined by the internal drawing means when RB-B is in operation when 1st type BB-C is in operation when three tickets are bet are shown in Figure 118, and the internal drawing results that can be determined by the internal drawing means in non-RT when two tickets are bet are shown in Figure 119. The explanation of each figure is the same as that of Figure 114, so it will be omitted. In addition, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT1 when two coins are bet are the same as the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when two coins are bet, where the number of Type 1 BB-C placed is 0, the number of Replay-A placed is 15,000 (8,978 + 6,022), and the number of losing places is 7,970 (13,992 - 6,022), and the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in RT2 when two coins are bet are omitted because they are the same as the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means in non-RT when two coins are bet, where the number of Type 1 BB-C placed is 0, and the number of Replay-A placed is 22,970 (8,978 + 13,992).

In specification 2, 3-coin play in RT2 is the normal way to play. In other words, when the gaming machine is shipped from the factory (initial state), 2-coin play is played in non-RT, and if the 1-type BB03 symbol combination does not stop during a game in which a 1-type BB-C is won, the machine transitions to RT2, where 3-coin play is played. Note that it is possible to play in ways other than 3-coin play in RT2, but since AT lottery is not held in the case of 2-coin play, and the probability of winning the AT is lower in 3-coin play in RTs other than RT2 than in RT2, 3-coin play in RT2 is the way to play with the highest payout rate.

The stop control in Specification 2 will be explained using Figures 120 and 121. The places marked with "X" in Figures 120 and 121 indicate that the condition device does not draw a lottery in that game state. Also, "123:1/1 with Winning 01" in the "Winning-A1 Condition Device" in Figures 120 and 121 indicates that if the left, middle, and right buttons are pressed when the Winning-A1 win is won, Winning 01 will be displayed. Also, "132:1/2 with Winning 17, Winning 18" in the "Winning-A1 Condition Device" indicates that if the left, middle, and right buttons are pressed, there is a 50% chance that Winning 17 or Winning 18 will stop, and a 50% chance that it will be missed. The same is true for other condition devices, so explanations will be omitted. Also, "2--: 1/4 chance of winning 21" in "Winning - A1 Condition Device" indicates that whether you press center left/right or center right/left, there is a 25% chance that the winning 21 will stop, and a 75% chance that you will miss it. Also, the "Notes" section lists the apparent symbol combination. For example, the "Notes" section for "No Condition Device" states "3--: Blue 7 Fake," indicating that whether you press right/left center or right/center/left, the Blue 7 symbol combination will not appear to stop.

In addition, in Figures 120 and 121, "double line" means that the symbol combination stops on what appears to be multiple straight lines, "single line" means that the symbol combination stops on what appears to be a single straight line, "left dragon" means that the upper and lower dragons stop on the left reel, and "left center dragon" means that the upper and lower dragons stop on the left and center reels. Other details are omitted as they can be explained above.

In specification 2, as shown in Figures 120 and 121, all of the replay-A to M condition devices allow the blue seven symbol combination to stop on a single line or double lines. However, if the left first stop is operated, the blue seven symbol combination cannot stop on a single line or double line. In specification 2, if the left reel is not stopped first in a game other than the game for which the push order is specified, a penalty occurs, lowering the AT lottery for that game or not holding the AT lottery. As a result, if any of the replay-A to M condition devices is determined in a game for which the push order is not specified, the blue seven symbol combination will not stop by having the player stop the left reel first (making the left stop switch the first stop).

In specification 2, it is decided whether the Blue Seven symbol combination will stop on a single line or on a double line when the sub-bonus is won. Since stopping the Blue Seven symbol combination on a double line favors the AT lottery during the sub-bonus (the probability of winning the AT is higher, or the amount of added bonus is larger when an added bonus is won) rather than stopping the Blue Seven symbol combination on a single line, it is more advantageous for the player to stop the Blue Seven symbol combination on a double line. Then, depending on the stop line of the Blue Seven symbol combination decided when the sub-bonus is won, the push order navigation is executed when the replay-A to M condition device is won.

For example, if it is decided to stop the blue seven symbol combination on a single line when a sub-bonus is won in a certain game, and if replay-A is won in a game after that game, the LCD will display "Aim for the blue seven symbol with the first right stop" and the player will stop the blue seven symbol combination on a single line by stopping the right stop switch first. At this time, the instructions may or may not be displayed on the instruction monitor. If the player stops the right stop switch first and is able to stop the blue seven symbol combination, the sub-bonus will start. Also, if the player ignores the push order and stops the middle stop switch first, the blue seven symbol combination may stop on a double line, but even if the blue seven symbol combination stops on a double line, the sub-bonus will start. However, during the sub-bonus, the same contents (AT winning probability, etc.) will be implemented as when the blue seven symbol combination is stopped on a single line.

This configuration eliminates the tricky element of players intentionally ignoring the push order and stopping the blue seven symbol combination on a double line, ensuring fair play and allowing the sub-bonus to start quickly.

For example, if it is decided that the Blue Seven symbol combination will stop on a single line when a sub-bonus is won in a certain game, and if Replay-A is won in a game after that game, the LCD will display "Aim for the Blue Seven symbol with the first right stop" and the player will be prompted to stop the right stop switch first to stop the Blue Seven symbol combination on a single line, but if the Blue Seven symbol combination does not stop on a single or double line due to a player's mistake in pressing the buttons or pressing the buttons in the wrong order, the sub-bonus will not start. If the sub-bonus is not started, when Replay-A to -M is won in the next game or later, a button order navigation is displayed that can stop the Blue Seven symbol combination on a single line again, and the Blue Seven symbol combination is stopped on a single line.

In specification 2, since the Blue Seven symbol combination can stop on a single or double line for all of Replay-A to M, even if the player makes an operation mistake and cannot start the sub-bonus, if any of Replay-A to M is won in the next or subsequent play, the sub-bonus can start again, so the sub-bonus can start quickly. If there were cases where only a single line stopped or only a double line stopped depending on the replay role, push order navigation would not be possible when a replay role other than the line to be stopped was won, and the player would have to play until the replay role corresponding to the line to be stopped was won, which would make the disadvantage of failing to start the sub-bonus more apparent and would lead to a decrease in interest in the game.

The configuration of Specification 2 allows for appropriate technical intervention when the sub-bonus starts, making the game more interesting, and also provides a chance to start the sub-bonus quickly even if the sub-bonus cannot start, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

<About the gameplay of the AT in this embodiment>
A description will be given of the game properties of the AT applicable to this embodiment, specifications 1, and specifications 2. The following description will be based on specification 2.

First, when the specified conditions for winning the AT are met (winning the specified condition device and winning the AT lottery, reaching the specified number of games and winning the AT lottery, etc.), the AT start screen is displayed on the LCD.

Next, a lottery is held to determine the initial difference in the number of coins for this AT from the next game in which the AT start screen is displayed until a specified end condition is met. Hereinafter, the period during which the lottery to determine the initial difference in the number of coins for this AT is held is referred to as the introduction period.

<<Lottery to determine the initial difference in the number of sheets for this AT>>
The initial difference in the number of sheets of this AT indicates the period during which this AT can be executed, and can be updated every time a game is played. For example, if the initial difference is 500 sheets, and the result of the internal lottery for a 3-sheet game is a winning -A1, and 7 sheets are paid out by stopping the left, center, or right, the remaining difference in the number of sheets will be 500 - (7 - 3) = 496 sheets. In this way, the increment is subtracted, and when the difference in the number of sheets becomes 0 or less, this AT is terminated.

The lottery that determines the initial difference in number of coins for this AT is a lottery to determine how many coins the initial difference will be, and the larger the initial difference in number of coins, the more medals you can aim to win. Note that even after the initial difference in number of coins is determined, the difference in number of coins can increase if you win an additional lottery, so even if the initial difference in number of coins is small, there is still a chance to win a large number of medals.

The lottery method for determining the initial difference in number of coins for this AT will be explained with reference to Figure 122.

The LCD screen in Figure 122 will be explained. The initial difference in number of coins (left), initial difference in number of coins (middle), and initial difference in number of coins (right) at the bottom of Figure 122 indicate the accumulated initial difference in number of coins. The initial difference in number of coins (left), initial difference in number of coins (middle), and initial difference in number of coins (right) correspond to the left reel (left stop switch), middle reel (middle stop switch), and right reel (right stop switch), respectively, and each value corresponding to the initial difference in number of coins is stored in each RWM memory area indicated by a different RWM address.

The reserved ball (corresponding) and the three reserved balls on the right side of FIG. 122 indicate which initial difference number among the initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right) to add to the additional difference number to the initial difference number. For example, the reserved ball (corresponding) has the number "+100" written on the right arrow, which indicates that +100 will be added to the initial difference number (right). Also, the three reserved balls with the number "+500" written on the left arrow indicate that +500 will be added to the initial difference number (left). Also, the three reserved balls with the number "+50" written on the up arrow indicate that +50 will be added to the initial difference number (middle). The proportion of whether or not to add to which initial difference number among the initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right) is evenly distributed.

The introduction period continues until a specific end condition is met. One example of the specific end condition is winning the end lottery that is held for each game. However, if the end lottery is won at the start of the introduction period and the introduction period ends, interest in playing the game will decrease significantly, so a period is set during which the end lottery is not held, and the end lottery is not held for five games from the start of the introduction period. Note that the period during which the end lottery is not held is not limited to five games, and can be set to any number of games. It is also not necessary to set a period during which the end lottery is not held.

The reserved ball (relevant) and the three reserved balls on the right side of Fig. 122 are updated for each game. For example, the state in Fig. 122 is the state in which all reels are spinning (after the start switch has been operated or an internal lottery has been executed), and the reserved ball (relevant) indicates whether or not the initial difference in number of sheets is to be added by 100, and the three reserved balls are to be used in the next game and thereafter. In other words, the reserved ball in the reserved ball (relevant) is a reserved ball that has the right to add to the initial difference in number of sheets in the game.

Whether or not this reserved ball (applicable) is added to the initial difference in number of sheets depends on the result of the internal lottery and the order in which the stop switches are stopped. The reserved ball (applicable) may be added to the initial difference in number when the result of the internal lottery is Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H; under other internal lottery results, the reserved ball (applicable) is not added to the initial difference in number of sheets. In addition, when the internal lottery results are replay-H, replay-I, replay-J, replay-K, replay-L, replay-M, prize-C, prize-D, prize-E, prize-F, prize-G, or prize-H, the reserved balls (relevant) are always added to the initial difference number, but in the case of prize-A1 to A12 and prize-B1 to B12, the reserved balls (relevant) are not added to the initial difference number unless the correct push order is followed. For example, when the prize-A1 is won, if the stop switch is operated in the order of left, center, and right, the reserved balls (relevant) are added to the initial difference number, and if the stop switch is operated in an order other than left, center, and right, the reserved balls (relevant) are not added to the initial difference number. In other words, when a rare role, a common bell, and a push order bell are won, there is a chance that the initial difference number will be added. During the introductory period, the push order will not be announced, so players will have to guess the order based on their intuition. Also, during the introductory period, there will be no penalty for the order in which the buttons are pressed, so players can freely choose the order in which they press buttons.

With this configuration, the game can be designed so that the fluctuations in the number of balls dispensed are turbulent because there are cases where no additional balls are added, and the fluctuations in the number of balls dispensed change according to the player's intuition, which increases the excitement of the game.

Note that it is not necessary to add the additional value in the reserved ball (relevant) when a rare role is won, and it may be configured to be added when the addition lottery is won. Also, when a rare role is won, the reserved ball (relevant) displayed on the LCD and all three reserved balls, or any multiple of them, may be acquired. Also, when a rare role is won, a value obtained by adding an additional value to the additional value in the reserved ball (relevant) may be added to the initial difference number, and in this case the additional value may be determined by lottery, may be a predetermined value, or may be an integer multiple of the additional value.

After all the reels have stopped and the process of adding the initial difference in the number of reserved balls (relevant) has been completed, the next reserved ball (reserved ball "+500" in FIG. 122) moves to the location of the reserved ball (relevant) as shown in FIG. 123a), and the next reserved ball becomes the reserved ball (relevant), and can be won depending on the results of the internal lottery for the next game. In addition, of the three reserved balls, the two reserved balls excluding the reserved ball that became the reserved ball (relevant) (reserved balls "+50" and "+200") move to the upper locations, and a new reserved ball (reserved ball "+10") is added to the vacant location. In addition, if the result of the internal lottery is that a condition device other than Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Win-A1 to A12, Win-B1 to B12, Win-C, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, or Win-H wins, or if it loses, the reserved ball (relevant) disappears without adding the added value indicated by the reserved ball (relevant) to the initial difference number (including adding 0), and the next reserved ball moves to the location of the reserved ball (relevant). In other words, even if the added value of the reserved ball in the reserved ball (relevant) cannot be obtained, it will be replaced by the next reserved ball at the end of the game, so the gameplay that makes the player look forward to whether or not they can obtain a reserved ball each time they play can increase the player's interest.

When you win a rare combination, if you win the reserved ball (in question) displayed on the LCD and all three reserved balls, or multiple of any of them, you will need to replenish the reserved balls you have used with new reserved balls.

With this configuration, it becomes possible to play the game of whether or not to acquire reserved balls each time until the end condition of the introduction period is met.

As shown in FIG. 123b), if the player wins the end lottery, which is the end condition for the introduction period, an icon with the word "Judgment" written on it (hereinafter referred to as the "Judgment Ball") is displayed instead of the reserved balls. Even if the Judgement Ball is displayed, the game does not end immediately, but ends when it moves to the reserved ball (relevant) position. In the case of FIG. 123b), the Judgement Ball moves to the reserved ball (relevant) position in the fourth game, so the chance to add the initial difference in number of sheets continues for the three games in between. Then, when the fourth game ends, the introduction period ends, and the acquisition period (hereinafter referred to as the "Judgment Period") for determining the initial difference in number of sheets of this AT begins. Note that the lottery and display of reserved balls after the Judgement Ball is displayed may or may not be performed.

It is not necessary to end the introduction period with a game in which the referee ball is consumed, and the introduction period may continue but the referee ball may be displayed (hereinafter, the referee ball with the introduction period continuing is referred to as a "fake referee ball"). With this configuration, even if the referee ball appears, it is not clear whether the game will end or not, which increases the interest of the game. In addition, the referee ball and the fake referee ball are displayed so that they look the same, so it is not clear by appearance whether the introduction period will end or not. In addition, since it is not possible to distinguish between referee balls and fake referee balls by appearance, the game after the referee ball and the fake referee ball are displayed also involves drawing and displaying reserved balls to determine the additional value of the initial difference number. In addition, in the case of a fake referee ball, if the initial difference number is not added when continuing, the interest of the game may decrease, so when continuing with a fake referee ball, a lottery for the additional value of reserved balls may be performed at the same time, and the determined additional value may be added to one of the determined initial difference number locations.

In addition, if the game proceeds without winning the lottery to end the introduction period, the introduction period may be ended when a specified number of games have been played during the introduction period. For example, if 50 games have been played during the introduction period, the introduction period ends and the judgment period begins even if the lottery to end the introduction period has not been won. If the introduction period ends with the specified number of games, an icon different from the judgment ball (hereinafter referred to as a "blessing ball") is displayed. If the blessing ball is displayed in the reserved ball area, the player can visually recognize that the introduction period has ended (because the introduction period always ends when the blessing ball is displayed), so the reserved ball lottery and display are not performed in the game after the blessing ball is displayed. Then, in the game in which the blessing ball moves to the reserved ball (relevant) position and is executed, a special blessing image is displayed to notify the player that the introduction period has ended.

During the introduction period, an example was described in which the push order is not announced when any of the condition devices, Winning-A1 to A12 and Winning-B1 to B12, is determined, but it may also be an aspect in which a part of the correct push order is announced. For example, if only the first stop is announced, the push order accuracy rate can be 50%. In addition, it may be determined by lottery whether the correct push order is not announced or announced. For example, if the correct push order is not announced, the accuracy rate of the push order bell is about 17%, but if the correct push order is announced, the accuracy rate of the push order bell is 100%. In addition, it may be determined by lottery whether the correct push order is not announced or announced partially.

In the implementation period of the above embodiment, the proportion of whether or not to add to the initial difference number among the initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right) was evenly allocated, but this is not limited, and there may be a separate implementation period in which the proportion is unevenly allocated. Hereinafter, an implementation period in which the proportion of whether or not to add to the initial difference number is evenly allocated will be referred to as the "first implementation period," and an implementation period in which the proportion of whether or not to add to the initial difference number is unevenly allocated will be referred to as the "second implementation period," but when simply referred to as the "implementation period," it means that either implementation period is applicable.

For example, the second introduction period may be set to initial difference in number of sheets (left): initial difference in number of sheets (middle): initial difference in number of sheets (right) = 8:2:0. In this case, 80% is added to the initial difference in number of sheets (left) during the second introduction period, so it is designed to have a large added value for the initial difference in number of sheets (left). Also, since the initial difference in number of sheets (right) is not allocated, the initial difference in number of sheets (right) will remain at its initial value (0 sheets) as the second introduction period ends and the trial period begins.

Whether the introduction period will be the first or second introduction period may be determined by a lottery when the transition of the introduction period is decided, or whether the introduction period will be the first or second introduction period may be determined by the player's operation at the start of the introduction period. When the introduction period is started by the player's operation, the player may select the introduction period by pressing the stop switch in the start game of the introduction period, or the player may decide during game standby immediately before the start of the introduction period, during the freeze at the start of the introduction period, or after all reels have stopped at the start of the introduction period, depending on the operation of a switch connected to the main control means, such as a max bet switch, start switch, or stop switch.

By having a second introduction period, the amount of balls dispensed will be more volatile, making the game more exciting.

<<About the trial period>>
The judgment period is a period in which it is determined whether or not the initial difference in number of sheets (left), the initial difference in number of sheets (middle), or the initial difference in number of sheets (right) added during the introduction period will be the initial difference in number of sheets for this AT.

For example, if the result of executing the introductory period is that the initial difference in number of sheets (left) is displayed as "+1000 sheets", the initial difference in number of sheets (middle) is displayed as "+200 sheets", and the initial difference in number of sheets (right) is displayed as "+500 sheets", then as a result of executing the arbitration period, if the initial difference in number of sheets (left) is determined, the initial difference in number of sheets of the AT will start at 1000 sheets, if the initial difference in number of sheets (middle) is determined, the initial difference in number of sheets of the AT will start at 200 sheets, and if the initial difference in number of sheets (right) is determined, the initial difference in number of sheets of the AT will start at 500 sheets.

This configuration allows players to play by determining which of the initial difference numbers added during the introductory period they can win, which increases the fun of the game.

Whether or not a player can obtain an initial difference in number of coins during the arbitration period is determined when, as a result of an internal lottery during the arbitration period, one of the following condition devices is determined: Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H.If, as a result of the internal lottery, a condition device other than Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H is determined, or a loss is determined, the arbitration period will continue. In other words, the arbitration period continues from the start of the arbitration period until one of the condition devices Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H is determined, and the initial difference in the number of sheets for this AT is determined in the first game in which one of the condition devices Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H is determined during the arbitration period, and the arbitration period ends.

As a method of determining the initial difference in number of sheets during the judgment period, in a game in which either Winning-A1 to -A12 or Winning-B1 to -B12 is won during the judgment period, the initial difference in number of sheets corresponding to the first correct reel (the first correct stop switch) can be obtained. For example, if the initial difference in number of sheets (left) is displayed as "+1000 sheets," the initial difference in number of sheets (middle) as "+200 sheets," and the initial difference in number of sheets (right) as "+500 sheets," and Winning-A1 (left-center-right correct bell) is determined by internal lottery, then the initial difference in number of sheets for this AT will be 1000 sheets, which corresponds to the initial difference in number of sheets (left). Also, for example, if the initial difference number (left) is displayed as "+1000", the initial difference number (middle) is displayed as "+200", and the initial difference number (right) is displayed as "+500", and if the winning -A5 (center left right correct bell) is determined by internal lottery, the initial difference number of this AT will be 200 corresponding to the initial difference number (middle). Also, for example, if the initial difference number (left) is displayed as "+1000", the initial difference number (middle) is displayed as "+200", and the initial difference number (right) is displayed as "+500", and if the winning -A9 (right left center correct bell) is determined by internal lottery, the initial difference number of this AT will be 500 corresponding to the initial difference number (right).

As a method of determining the initial difference in number of sheets during the adjudication period, in a game in which any of Replay-H, Replay-I, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H is won during the adjudication period (a game in which a weak rare role is won), any of the initial difference numbers can be acquired by lottery (processing related to the instruction function). For example, if the initial difference number (left) is displayed as "+1000 sheets," the initial difference number (middle) as "+200 sheets," and the initial difference number (right) as "+500 sheets," and Replay-H is determined by an internal lottery and the initial difference number (left) is determined by lottery, then the initial difference number of sheets for this AT will be 1000 sheets, which corresponds to the initial difference number (left). Also, for example, if the initial difference number (left) is displayed as "+1000", the initial difference number (middle) is displayed as "+200", and the initial difference number (right) is displayed as "+500", and if replay -H is determined by an internal lottery and the initial difference number (middle) is determined by lottery, the initial difference number of this AT will be 200, which corresponds to the initial difference number (middle). Also, for example, if the initial difference number (left) is displayed as "+1000", the initial difference number (middle) is displayed as "+200", and the initial difference number (right) is displayed as "+500", and if replay -H is determined by an internal lottery and the initial difference number (right) is determined by lottery, the initial difference number of this AT will be 500, which corresponds to the initial difference number (right).

As a method of determining the initial difference number during the adjudication period, in a game in which any of Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, or Winning-C is won during the adjudication period (a game in which a strong rare role is won), all of the initial difference numbers can be acquired. For example, if the initial difference number (left) is displayed as "+1000", the initial difference number (middle) is displayed as "+200", and the initial difference number (right) is displayed as "+500", and Winning-C is determined by internal lottery, the initial difference number of this AT will be 1700, which is the sum of the 1000 corresponding to the initial difference number (left), the 200 corresponding to the initial difference number (middle), and the 500 corresponding to the initial difference number (right). Note that even if a strong rare role is won, it may be determined by lottery whether any of the initial difference numbers can be acquired or all of the initial difference numbers can be acquired. Also, a strong rare role is one that has a lower probability of winning in the internal lottery than a weak rare role.

With this configuration, the result of the internal lottery during the judgment period will affect the initial number difference of this AT, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the result of the internal lottery for each game, increasing the interest of the game.

When the result of the internal lottery during the adjudication period is that any of the condition devices Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Winning-A1 to A12, Winning-B1 to B12, Winning-C, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, or Winning-H is determined, a freeze is executed for a specified period before spinning all the reels, and the reel corresponding to the initial difference in number of coins acquired during the freeze is rotated.

For example, if the internal lottery determines that the player wins the prize -A1 (left, center, right correct bell), the system executes a freeze before displaying the correct push order on the LCD screen, and during the freeze, the left reel is spun to notify the player that the initial difference in number of coins (left) has been won. After the freeze ends, the system displays the correct push order corresponding to the left, center, right correct answers on the LCD screen, allowing the player to win the correct bell.
The correct button press sequence may be displayed on the LCD screen before the freeze ends, but in this case it can be made easier for the player to recognize the correct button press sequence by displaying the sequence after notifying the player that the initial difference in number of coins (left) has been achieved.

This configuration allows players to visually see how they will obtain the initial difference in number of coins, ensuring fairness in the game and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The freeze period may also be changed depending on the amount of initial difference in number of coins that can be obtained. For example, if the initial difference in number of coins (left) is displayed as "+1000 coins," the initial difference in number of coins (middle) as "+200 coins," and the initial difference in number of coins (right) as "+500 coins," and the internal lottery determines the winning combination -A1 (left, middle, right correct bell), the freeze period is set to 5 seconds; if the winning combination -A5 (middle, left, right correct bell) is determined, the freeze period is set to 2 seconds; and if the winning combination -A9 (right, left, middle correct bell) is determined, the freeze period is set to 3 seconds.

With this configuration, the longer the freeze, the greater the initial difference in number of coins, which can build up a sense of anticipation for the trial period.

Note that if the result of the internal lottery during the judgment period is a condition device other than Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Replay-K, Replay-L, Replay-M, Win-A1-A12, Win-B1-B12, Win-C, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, or Win-H, or a loss is determined, no lottery or freeze will be executed, but a freeze may be determined by a freeze lottery and a freeze may be executed. In this case, the freeze period will be a relatively short period (for example, 2 seconds), and after the freeze, a notice will be displayed that the judgment period will continue, or no effect will be given.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the initial difference in number of coins was determined during the introductory period and the judgment period, but this is not limited to this, and the initial number of games and the initial number of navigations (number of times correct button presses are announced) may also be determined. Also, while the description was given with three reels, left, center, and right, there may be four reels, in which case there is a display area for the initial difference in number of coins corresponding to the four reels.

<<How to manage reserved balls>>
In FIG. 122, four reserved balls (including reserved ball (subject)) are displayed. The reserved balls are stored in the RWM memory area of the corresponding main control means, and in the situation of FIG. 122, the first memory area corresponding to reserved ball (subject), the second memory area corresponding to reserved ball 1, the third memory area corresponding to reserved ball 2, the fourth memory area corresponding to reserved ball 3, and the fifth memory area corresponding to reserved balls not displayed on the liquid crystal (hereinafter referred to as "reserved ball (reserve)"). The following description is based on the assumption that "30" is stored in the fifth memory area in the situation of FIG. 122. Note that the additional value, or the additional value and the additional location, are determined by lottery at the start of the introduction period, and the determined values are stored in the first to fifth memory areas.

As a method of managing reserved balls, the correspondence between the position of reserved balls and the memory area is changed. In other words, "500" is stored in the second memory area as +500 corresponding to reserved ball 1 in FIG. 122, but even if the game ends and reserved ball 2 moves to reserved ball 1 as the LCD display, "500" remains stored in the second memory area as the value corresponding to +500. Similarly, "50" is stored in the third memory area as +50 corresponding to reserved ball 2 in FIG. 122, but even if the game ends and reserved ball 3 moves to reserved ball 2 as the LCD display, "50" remains stored in the third memory area as the value corresponding to +50. Similarly, "200" is stored in the fourth memory area as +200 corresponding to reserved ball 3 in FIG. 122, but even if the game ends and a new reserved ball is displayed at the position of reserved ball 3 as the LCD display, "200" remains stored in the fourth memory area as the value corresponding to +200. Similarly, "30" is stored in the fifth memory area as +30 corresponding to reserved ball (reserve) in FIG. 122, but even when the game ends and all reserved balls are moved as the LCD display, "30" remains stored in the fifth memory area as the value corresponding to +30. Also, "100" is stored in the first memory area as +100 corresponding to reserved ball (subject) in FIG. 122, but when the game ends, the added value of reserved ball (subject) is either converted to the initial difference number or discarded, so when reserved ball 1 is moved to reserved ball (subject) as the LCD display, a new added value is determined by lottery in the first memory area, and the new added value is stored.

In this case, the main control means processes the counter values corresponding to each memory area, and a memory area for storing the counter values, and transmits information (addition location information) to the sub-control means as to which initial difference number the counter values, the values of the first through fifth memory areas, and the values corresponding to the first through fifth memory areas are to be added to, thereby adjusting the consistency on the LCD.

For example, the counter value corresponding to the first storage area is "1", the counter value corresponding to the second storage area is "2", the counter value corresponding to the third storage area is "3", the counter value corresponding to the fourth storage area is "4", and the counter value corresponding to the fifth storage area is "5". In other words, a counter value of "1" indicates the first storage area, a counter value of "2" indicates the second storage area, a counter value of "3" indicates the third storage area, a counter value of "4" indicates the fourth storage area, and a counter value of "5" indicates the fifth storage area.

The value of the memory area indicated by the counter value will correspond to the added value of the reserved ball (in question).

For example, in the case of FIG. 122, the counter stores a value of "1", which is the value indicating the first memory area. Note that the first memory area at this time stores "100".

When the game shown in FIG. 122 ends (all reels stop), the value stored in the first memory area is initialized (cleared to 0), a new added value is drawn and stored in the first memory area, the counter value is updated to "2" indicating the second memory area, and information is sent to the sub-control means regarding the added value stored in each memory area, the counter value, and information regarding which initial difference number the value corresponding to the first to fifth memory areas is to be added to. In other words, at the start of the introduction period, the added value determined by lottery is stored in each of the first to fifth memory areas, but thereafter, the added value determined by lottery is stored in one of the first to fifth memory areas in sequence for each game.

Then, when the sub-control means receives information about the added value and the counter value stored in each memory area transmitted from the main control means, it moves the display of "+500" related to the "500" defined in the second memory area indicated by the counter value on the liquid crystal display to the position of the reserved ball (corresponding), and displays the other reserved balls moving to fill the vacant space.

The above process is executed every time a game is played during the introduction period. The counter value is incremented every time a game is played, and when the counter value is "5", the next value becomes "1". In other words, the counter value cycles between 1 and 5.

With this configuration, the display on the LCD screen can be instructed simply by changing the counter value, making it possible to reduce the program capacity of the main control means.

In the above explanation, the first to fifth memory areas were used to store additional values, but this is not limited to this and the information may include the additional value and information regarding which initial difference number the value is to be added to. For example, the first to fifth memory areas each have a value of "0" to "13" that can be stored, "0" indicates "empty (addition value 0)", "1" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (left) + 10 sheets", "2" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (left) + 50 sheets", "3" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (left) + 100 sheets", "4" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (middle) + 10 sheets", "5" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (middle) + 50 sheets", "6" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (middle) + 100 sheets", "7" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (right) + 10 sheets", "8" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (right) + 50 sheets", "9" indicates "initial difference in number of sheets (right) + 100 sheets", and "10" indicates "Judgment ball".

With this configuration, the information for the first through fifth memory areas can be stored in one byte, and since it also contains information about which initial difference number is to be added, there is no need to provide a new memory area, which allows for further compression of the program capacity of the main control means.

The range of values that can be stored in each of the first to fifth memory areas is not limited to "0" to "13" and may be increased according to the specifications. For example, "14" indicates "double the value of the initial difference number (left)", "15" indicates "double the value of the initial difference number (middle)", "16" indicates "double the value of the initial difference number (right)", and "17" indicates "double the values of the initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right)".

In addition, if an additional value is to be added to the additional value determined in advance by lottery when a rare combination is won, a sixth memory area is provided for storing the additional value. For example, if a rare combination is won in the game shown in FIG. 122 and it is determined that +50 is to be added to the initial difference number (left), after storing "2" in the sixth memory area, the "9" stored in the first memory area and the "2" stored in the sixth memory area are sent to the sub-control means (the values of the other memory areas are also sent), and when the sub-control means receives the "9" stored in the first memory area and the "2" stored in the sixth memory area, "+50" is displayed in the initial difference number (left) and "+100" is displayed in the initial difference number (right).

In this way, adding to a predefined additional value can be achieved with a simple program, and the program capacity of the main control means can be reduced.

As another embodiment of the method of managing reserved balls, the correspondence between the position of reserved balls and the memory area may be fixed. In other words, "100" is stored in the first memory area as +100 corresponding to reserved ball (relevant) in FIG. 122, but when the game ends and reserved ball 1 moves to reserved ball (relevant) as the LCD display, "500" is stored in the first memory area as a value corresponding to +500. In other words, a value corresponding to the position of reserved ball (relevant) is always stored in the first memory area. Similarly, "500" is stored in the second memory area as +500 corresponding to reserved ball 1 in FIG. 122, but when the game ends and reserved ball 2 moves to reserved ball 1 as the LCD display, "50" is stored in the second memory area as a value corresponding to +50. In other words, a value corresponding to the position of reserved ball 1 is always stored in the second memory area. Similarly, "50" is stored in the third memory area as +50 corresponding to reserved ball 2 in FIG. 122, but when the game ends and reserved ball 3 moves to reserved ball 2 as the LCD display, "200" is stored in the third memory area as a value corresponding to +200. In other words, a value corresponding to the position of reserved ball 2 is always stored in the third memory area. Similarly, "200" is stored in the fourth memory area as +200 corresponding to reserved ball 3 in FIG. 122, but when the game ends and a new reserved ball is displayed at the position of reserved ball 3 as the LCD display, "30" is stored in the fourth memory area as a value corresponding to +30. In other words, a value corresponding to the position of reserved ball 3 is always stored in the fourth memory area. Also, when the game ends and all reserved balls move as the LCD display, a new added value is determined by lottery and the determined new added value is stored in the fifth memory area.

With this configuration, the relationship between the memory area of the main control means and the apparent number of reserved balls does not change, so the method of displaying the reserved balls of the sub-control means can be realized with a simple program.

When the introductory period ends and the trial period begins, the added values stored in the first through fifth memory areas are initialized (cleared to 0), so that the added values will not be carried over even if the introductory period starts again after playing after the introductory period has ended.

<<Other Contents>>
The initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right) have upper limit values on display, and when the upper limit values are exceeded, a special display is made. For example, the upper limit values on display for the initial difference number (left), initial difference number (middle), and initial difference number (right) are set to "+2400", and when "2500" is stored in the memory area for the initial difference number (left), "Congratulations" is displayed on the liquid crystal display for the initial difference number (left). In this way, when the upper limit value is exceeded, by notifying only the information indicating that 2400 coins have been exceeded without clearly notifying how many coins can be won, it is possible to suppress gambling and prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, during the judging period, if a strong rare role is won and the total value of the initial difference in number of coins stored in the initial difference in number of coins (left), initial difference in number of coins (center), and initial difference in number of coins (right) exceeds 2,400, "Congratulations" will be displayed instead of the number of coins won.

If an initial difference of 2,400 or more is obtained during the judgment period, a special effect (the so-called ending effect) will be executed when the AT begins.

The upper limit of 2400 mentioned above may be any value, and since it is possible to win more than 2400 coins in the same favorable zone, particularly when the upper limit of the difference is 2400, the upper limit may be changed depending on the situation, or may be fixed at 5000 coins. For example, if the difference from the start of the favorable zone during the arbitration period is -1000 coins, the upper limit may be set to 3400 coins, and if the difference from the start of the favorable zone during the arbitration period is +400 coins, the upper limit may be set to 2000 coins.

With this configuration, the number of coins that can be won changes flexibly depending on the progress of the game, making the game more interesting.

<Control of other performance aspects using the performance switch according to this embodiment>
In this embodiment, the device is equipped with an effect in which the effect switch is continuously pressed (a so-called "long press effect"), and the long press effect can be used to announce the number of added bonuses or to announce that the right to an AT or a higher level AT has been obtained.

The timing of execution (start timing) of the long press effect is either after the start switch operation or after the third stop operation (after all reels have stopped), and it is not executed after the first stop operation or the second stop operation. Since the first stop operation is mostly an operation to prevent missing small roles, and the second stop operation is mostly an operation to prevent missing small roles and whether the pattern is tenpai or not, if the long press effect is executed after the first stop operation or the second stop operation, the long press effect will be executed when the result desired by the player is not achieved (if the small role is missed or the pattern is not tenpai), and it may not be possible to enjoy the long press effect. In addition, if the long press effect is executed after the first stop operation or the second stop operation, the player may be more likely to miss small roles by focusing on the long press effect. In order to prevent such a situation, the timing is set to either after the start switch operation or after the third stop operation (after all reels have stopped). However, this is not limited to the above, and the timing for executing the long press effect may be any of the following: after the start switch operation, after the first stop operation, after the second stop operation, or after the third stop operation (after all reels have stopped). If the timing for executing the long press effect is not specified, this means that the long press effect may be started at any time.

In the following embodiment, an example will be described in which the AT is managed by the number of plays. For example, the AT ends when the number of plays reaches a predetermined number from the start of the AT. However, this is not limited to this example, and the AT may be managed by the difference in number of coins, the number of points, or the number of push order navigations. The unit of the added number in these cases will be the unit according to each management method.

The long press effect when announcing the number of added items will be explained with reference to FIG. 124. In FIG. 124a), an image of "0000", which is the initial value of the number of added items, and an image of the effect switch are displayed on the LCD. In FIG. 124b), the effect switch is pressed once from FIG. 124a), and the number of added items is incremented by +1, displaying "0001". Note that even if the effect switch is not pressed for a long time, the number of added items is incremented by +1 when the effect switch is detected as being pressed, so the number of added items is incremented by +1 even if the effect switch is pressed and released repeatedly. Also, since the number of added items is predetermined when the long press effect starts, the long press effect ends when the effect switch is pressed continuously until the predetermined number of added items is reached. For example, if an additional 300 plays is determined by a lottery for additional play during play before the long press effect begins, or during play at the start of the long press effect, the long press effect will end when the long press effect reaches +300 (the image shows "0300").

In addition, the device is configured so that the final result of the addition is clearly notified to the player as the presentation mode when the presentation switch is continuously pressed in the long press presentation and a predetermined number of added-on bonuses is reached. For example, the presentation mode is changed between when the presentation switch is released while the number of added-on bonuses is being added and the update of the number of added-on bonuses is stopped, and when the number of added-on bonuses is reached and the update of the number of added-on bonuses is stopped. Specifically, when the presentation switch is released while the number of added-on bonuses is being added and the update of the number of added-on bonuses is stopped, the number of added-on bonuses is displayed as if it is fluctuating up and down finely, and when the number of added-on bonuses is reached and the update of the number of added-on bonuses is stopped, the number of added-on bonuses is displayed as if it is stopped. In addition, the number of added-on bonuses is displayed larger when the number of added-on bonuses is reached and the update of the number of added-on bonuses is stopped than when the presentation switch is released while the number of added-on bonuses is being added and the update of the number of added-on bonuses is stopped. In addition, a special sound effect is output when the number of added-on bonuses is reached and the update of the number of added-on bonuses is stopped.

When the number to be added is added, only the digits to be added may be displayed in a variable manner, or the digits not to be added may also be displayed in a variable manner. For example, when changing from 0 to 1, only the number corresponding to the rightmost digit of 0000 may be displayed in a variable manner, or the 0s corresponding to the second digit from the right, the third digit from the right, and the fourth digit from the right may be displayed in a rotating manner. A configuration in which only the digits to be added are displayed in a variable manner makes it easier for the player to recognize that the digits displayed in a variable manner are being added by the addition. A configuration in which the digits not to be added are also displayed in a variable manner causes all digits to be displayed in a variable manner, making it unclear how much the number to be added will be, creating a sense of anticipation for the player.

In addition, the display mode when the additional number is added may be such that the time it takes to change from n (a positive integer) to n+1 is shorter than the time it takes to change from 0 to 1. By configuring it in this way, the player can focus on whether or not 1 is added first, and whether or not the digit goes up, which increases the player's interest.

In FIG. 124, the number is four digits, and the upper limit of the added number is "9999", but if the actual added number exceeds 9999, the display of the added number may be switched to the text "Congratulations". Also, the upper limit of the added number may be set to an arbitrary value such as "2400", and if the added number exceeds the arbitrary value such as 2400, the display of the added number may be switched to the text "Congratulations".

Note that, although an example has been described in which pressing the performance switch once or pressing and holding the performance switch increases the added number by +1, the present invention is not limited to this example, and pressing the performance switch once or pressing and holding the performance switch may display the added number as +2 or +3. In addition, when the performance switch is pressed, a command indicating that the performance switch has been pressed is sent from the sub-control means to the performance control means.

In addition, when the effect switch is pressed during the long press effect, the frame lamp on the front door lights up in a special lighting pattern, a special sound effect is played, and the LED built into the effect switch lights up in a special lighting pattern to add to the excitement of the effect.

As a method for determining whether the performance switch is pressed for a long time, a timer for the long press of the performance switch (hereinafter referred to as the "long press timer") is provided in a predetermined memory area of the sub-control means. For example, if the timer interrupt period of the sub-control means is 1 ms and the long press timer is managed by the interrupt process of the sub-control means, the long press timer is set to "0" (initialized) when the operation of the performance switch is accepted. At this time, the LCD displays the number of added points increased by +1. In other words, regardless of whether the performance switch is a short press (an operation method in which the performance switch is released before 500 ms has elapsed since the operation of the performance switch is accepted) or a long press, the display of the number of added points is increased by +1 when the performance switch is pressed. Then, while the operation of the performance switch continues to be detected, the long press timer is increased by +1 for each interrupt process. Then, when the long press timer reaches "500" (when 500 ms have elapsed since the switch for effect was pressed), it is determined that the switch for effect was pressed for a long press, and a long press flag is stored in a certain storage area (for example, "1" is stored in a certain storage area). Even after it is determined that the switch for effect was pressed for a long press, the long press timer continues to be updated, and the number of additions is increased by +1 and displayed on the liquid crystal every time the long press timer is updated 100 times (every time 100 ms has elapsed since it was determined that the switch for effect was pressed for a long press) (every time 100 ms has elapsed since it was determined that the switch for effect was pressed for a long press, the sub-control means transmits a command to the performance control means indicating that the long press timer has been incremented by 100). Also, if the operation of the switch for effect is released while the long press timer is counting, the long press timer and the long press flag are initialized. Also, after the long press timer reaches "500" and sets the long press flag, the tap interval timer (stored in a specific memory area) is set to 100, and the tap interval timer is incremented by -1 for each interrupt process of the sub-control means, and when the tap interval timer reaches "0", the added number is incremented by +1 and displayed on the LCD. Also, the period from when the effect switch is pressed until it is determined that a long press has occurred may be the same as the tap interval period.

When executing a long press effect, a feedback command (hereinafter referred to as "FB") is sent from the effect control means to the sub-control means. FB is a command sent from the effect control means to the sub-control means, and is used to specify the timing for executing the effect of the sub-control means. In a long press effect, FB is sent from the effect control means to the sub-control means when the timing is right to press the effect switch.

For example, if an image prompting the user to press the performance switch is displayed one second after the start of a long press performance, when the timing arrives to display the image prompting the user to press the performance switch after the start of the long press performance, the performance control means transmits an FB to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means executes a process to enable the pressing of the performance switch. Note that "enabling the pressing of the performance switch" means that even if the performance switch is pressed before one second has elapsed since the start of the long press performance, a performance corresponding to the pressing of the performance switch is not executed, but if the performance switch is pressed one second after the start of the long press performance, a performance corresponding to the pressing of the performance switch is executed. Also, the timing at which the performance control means transmits an FB to the sub-control means is a predetermined timing, and is associated with the timing at which the image prompting the user to press the performance switch is displayed.

In other words, by using the FB without using a timer to manage the elapsed time of the performance when the performance switch is pressed, the relationship between the performance and the control of the performance switch can be appropriately controlled.

With this configuration, the timing for enabling the effect switch and the timing for executing the effect that prompts the user to press the effect switch coincide, so the effect switch will not be enabled before the effect that prompts the user to press the effect switch is executed.

When the effect switch is pressed and held during a long press effect, causing the added number to repeatedly display +1, if the effect switch is then released, the addition of the added number will be temporarily suspended at the added number display at the time of release. For example, if the effect switch is released when the added number display shows "0100," the added number display will pause at "0100." If the effect switch is then pressed again, the added number display will change to "0101," and the added number will be displayed in +1 increments until the long press effect ends.

If the performance switch is released during a long press performance, the sub-control means transmits a command to the performance control means indicating that the performance switch has been released, and when the performance control means receives a command indicating that the performance switch has been released while a long press performance is being executed, the sub-control means can execute a process to pause the long press performance being executed. In other words, the sub-control means does not periodically transmit information indicating that the performance switch is pressed during a long press performance to the performance control means, but transmits information indicating that the performance switch has been pressed when the performance switch is pressed, and information indicating that the performance switch has been released when the performance switch is released to the performance control means, thereby linking the operation of the performance switch and the performance mode of the long press performance, and therefore the number of commands transmitted by the sub-control means to the performance control means can be reduced.

With this configuration, even if a player leaves their seat during a long press effect, they can continue enjoying the long press effect when they return to their seat. If the long press effect starts after all reels have stopped, the display can be prevented from transitioning to a demo screen during the long press effect, allowing players to continue enjoying the effect even if they are away for a longer period of time.

During the long press effect, in addition to an image encouraging the user to press the effect switch and an image showing the number of bonuses added, a series of moving images with a story-like nature are displayed. If the effect switch is released while a moving image is being displayed, the moving image will pause as will the display of the number of bonuses added.

This configuration allows the long press effect to be paused at the player's discretion, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when a video image is paused during a long press effect, only some layers may be stopped while other layers continue playing. For example, a layer displaying a character may be paused while a layer displaying a background may continue playing without pausing. Another example is a layer displaying the number of added items may be stopped while surrounding layers, such as a concentrated line display to emphasize the number of added items, continue playing.

This configuration makes it visually easier to see that the long press effect is continuing, which increases the excitement of the game.

In addition, if a layer for overlay display is incorporated into some of the moving images, the sub-control means can issue an instruction to display the part of the moving images and the overlay display with a single command when executing the part of the moving images and the overlay display (an instruction to play the part of the moving images and the overlay display, or an instruction to pause the part of the moving images and the overlay display). This makes it possible to reduce the number of performance commands even when the long press performance is interrupted and resumed, thereby reducing program capacity and improving processing speed. For example, by configuring the display of the number of overlays and the convergent line display for highlighting the number of overlays on the same layer, it becomes possible to control the update of the number of overlays and the highlighting of the number of overlays with the same performance command.

When the effect during a long press effect is paused, it may be paused immediately even while the effect is changing, or it may be paused after progressing to a certain extent. For example, in the case of a display mode in which the numbers 1 to 9 arranged in a ring are rotated and updated as an update display of the added number as shown in FIG. 125, it is possible to pause the effect after rotating the numbers to the correct position as shown in FIG. 125a), or to pause the effect at a position where the numbers are not in the correct position as the timing for pausing the long press effect, as shown in FIG. 125b). Also, not limited to the example of FIG. 125, if the effect switch is released while the effect during a long press effect is changing, a special effect may be generated to indicate that the effect is in the process of changing.

When the effect switch is pressed and the added number is added to the first stage value (when the first period has passed since the effect switch was pressed), the long press effect switches to the second stage video (before switching to the second stage video, the first stage video is displayed). When the effect switch is pressed and the added number is added to the second stage value (when the second period has passed since the effect switch was pressed), the long press effect switches to the third stage video (before switching to the third stage video, the second stage video is displayed).

When switching between stages of the long press performance, the performance control means sends an FB to the sub-control means at the timing of switching stages, and the sub-control means then sends an execution command for the next stage of performance to the performance control means.

The length of the first period and the second period (the size of the added number) may be the same, or the first period may be longer than the second period, or the first period may be shorter than the second period.

The length of the period during which the effect switch is repeatedly pressed during the long press effect in the first and second periods may be changed. For example, the effect switch may be repeatedly pressed every 100 ms during the long press in the first period, but may be repeatedly pressed every 50 ms during the long press in the second period.

The length of the period during which the video images are switched (the magnitude of the added number) may be wider in the latter half, and the period during which the performance switch is repeatedly pressed may be shorter. For example, the added number for switching from the first period to the second period may be 100, and the period of repeated taps may be 100 ms, the added number for switching from the second period to the third period may be 300, and the period of repeated taps may be 50 ms, the added number for switching from the third period to the fourth period may be 1000, and the period of repeated taps may be 30 ms, and from the fourth period onwards, there may be no upper limit on the added number, and the period of repeated taps may be 10 ms.

In addition, if the length of the continuous pressing period of the effect switch in the long press effect of the first period and the second period changes, when the effect switch is released during the second period and pressed again, it may be possible to restart from the continuous pressing period of the second period, or it may be possible to display the moving image of the second period from when the effect switch is pressed again until the first period has elapsed, and the continuous pressing period may correspond to the first period.

With this configuration, the video image changes depending on the progress at the time the effect switch is pressed, so the player's interest in the game increases even when the effect switch is pressed and held down. In particular, the update speed of the added number increases as the added amount increases, giving the player a sense of anticipation.

In addition, the long press effect can be continued even if the front door is opened during the long press effect. For example, if the front door is opened during the long press effect (if a door open error occurs) while the effect switch is pressed and the added number is being added, the added number based on the pressing of the effect switch continues to be displayed. At this time, the lighting pattern of the LED built into the effect switch changes to the door open lighting pattern. Also, the front door frame lamp changes to the door open lighting pattern. Also, the message "Door is open" is displayed in a part of the display area of the LCD screen. Also, the voice "Door is open" is output from the speaker. Even if the effect switch is pressed and held, the door open error can be released when the front door is closed. In addition, when the front door is opened (when a door open error occurs) during a long press performance in which the performance switch is pressed and the added number is being added, a door open error display saying "Door is open" may be displayed superimposed on part of the added number display based on the pressing of the performance switch, or may be displayed in a separate display area (non-superimposed display area). When the door open error is released (when the door is closed, or when the error release switch is operated after the door is closed), or when a predetermined period of time has passed since the door open error was released (the door open error notification mode in various devices continues during the predetermined period), the lighting patterns of various LEDs, the liquid crystal display, and the sound output from the speaker are controlled to a display mode corresponding to the added performance.

With this configuration, even if the front door is opened during the long press effect, the long press effect can be continued, and the fact that the door is open can be notified by the lighting patterns of various lamps, the display content on the LCD screen, and the sound output from the speaker.

In addition, for example, when the front door is opened during a long press performance, the performance switch is pressed, and the additional number is being added, the process of adding the additional number based on the pressing of the performance switch continues, but information about the door opening error may be displayed on the entire LCD screen. In this case, the lighting pattern of the LED built into the performance switch is switched to the door opening lighting pattern, the front door frame lamp is switched to the door opening lighting pattern, and the speaker outputs a voice saying "The door is open." Note that even if the performance switch is pressed for a long time, the door opening error can be released when the front door is closed. Then, when the door opening error is released (when the door is closed, or when the error release switch is operated after the door is closed), or when a predetermined period has passed since the door opening error was released (the door opening error notification mode in various devices continues during the predetermined period), the lighting patterns of the various LEDs, the LCD display, and the voice output from the speaker are controlled to a display mode corresponding to the additional performance. In this case, the LCD will display the additional number of times the effect switch was pressed and held while the front door was open. If the effect switch was pressed and held while the front door was open and a predetermined additional number was reached, the additional number will be displayed after the door open error is cleared.

With this configuration, the door open display can be displayed with priority, while processing based on the operation of the effect switch can also proceed, and the progress or result of the long press effect can be notified after the door is closed.

In addition, if a specified error occurs during the long press effect (while all reels are spinning) that began after the start switch operation was accepted, and game progress is continued (if game progress is stopped due to a specified error at the end of game play after the third stop), the long press effect can be executed even if a specified error has occurred.

Furthermore, if a specified error (a recoverable error such as a selector error or hopper error) occurs during the long press effect that started after the third stop, game progress is halted due to the occurrence of the specified error, the LCD displays an error, various lamps and speakers are controlled to notify the user of the error, and the long press effect cannot be executed. At this time, the long press effect may be restarted from where it left off after the specified error is cleared, or it may be made impossible to resume the long press effect after the specified error is cleared. Even if the long press effect cannot be resumed, an extra bonus is added internally before the long press effect starts, so no damage is done to the player. Note that the specified error can be cleared by operating the reset switch, even if the effect switch is pressed and held.

If a predetermined error (a recoverable error such as a selector error or a hopper error) occurs during the long press performance that started after the third stop, and the game progress is stopped due to the occurrence of the predetermined error, the LCD displays an error, various lamps and speakers perform error notification control, and the long press performance cannot be executed, and the long press performance cannot be resumed after the predetermined error is released, the result of the addition may be notified at a predetermined timing. Examples of the predetermined timing include the reception of an operation of the MAX BET switch for the next game, the reception of an operation of the 1 BET switch, or the detection of an inserted medal, the reception of an operation of the start switch for the start of the next game, and the start of the reel rotation for the next game. As a mode of notifying the result of the addition, a mode of displaying the remaining number of games in a state where the addition amount has already been added to the remaining number of games displayed before the start of the long press performance is considered. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated performance pattern when the predetermined error is recovered, so that the number of performances can be optimized and the program capacity can be reduced. Another possible mode of notifying the result of the additional addition is to notify the player of the result of the additional addition by notifying the player during the long press effect, but by displaying the remaining number of plays that was displayed before the long press effect started, and then incrementing the display to add to the additional number. With this configuration, even if the long press effect is interrupted by a specific error, the remaining number of plays is displayed when the game returns from the specific error, allowing the player to recognize how much has been added.

In addition, if a power outage occurs during a long press effect, the long press effect may be resumed when the power is restored, or it may not be resumed. If the long press effect is resumed, it may be resumed from the beginning of the long press effect, from the timing when the long press effect was interrupted, or from the timing of the end of the long press effect (for example, when the power is restored during the second period, it may be resumed from the beginning of the second period).

In addition, if a power outage occurs during a long press performance and the long press performance is not resumed when the power outage is restored, the notification of the number of added-on numbers may be executed at a predetermined timing. The predetermined timing may be the acceptance of operation of various switches connected to the main control means (for example, the acceptance of operation of the start switch of the next game after the long press performance is executed, the acceptance of operation of the first stop, second stop, and third stop of the game after the long press performance is executed, and the acceptance of operation of the settlement switch after the game after the long press performance is executed is finished), or the timing when the AT executed after the long press performance ends (because the amount that was supposed to be added in the long press performance remains internally), or it may be when the power outage is restored. In addition, the amount that was added up until halfway may be added up and the amount that was not added up from halfway may be displayed at a predetermined timing, or even if the amount was added up until halfway, it may be displayed all at the predetermined timing as if there was no added display.

In addition, if the front door is opened and the setting key is turned ON during the long press effect that occurs after the third stop, and the setting confirmation mode is entered, the long press effect is not executed during the setting confirmation mode, and the additional number is not added even if the effect switch is operated. However, the long press effect may be resumed when the setting confirmation mode ends and the operation acceptance of the effect switch is enabled, or the long press effect may be resumed and the operation acceptance of the effect switch is enabled when the setting confirmation mode ends and the front door is closed.

The long press effect that begins after the third stop is accepted ends when the MAX BET switch is operated, the 1 BET switch is operated, a game medal is inserted, or the start switch for the next game is accepted. In other words, the long press effect can be canceled, and the display mode of the added number when canceled may announce the total added number at the time of cancellation, or may not announce the added number at the time of cancellation, but may announce it at a specified timing.

The FB may also be used in a stage change performance. For example, the performance control means transmits an FB to the sub-control means when the stage change performance ends, and the sub-control means transmits a performance command for the post-stage change performance to the performance control means when it receives the FB. With this configuration, the performance after the stage change performance can be executed immediately after the end of the stage change performance, so that the stage change performance and the performance after the stage change performance can be displayed appropriately without any misalignment in execution timing.

In this embodiment, a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) is used as an example of the gaming machine, but the invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, jankyu gaming machines, Parrot, or casino machines.

The technical details of the present embodiment described above for the purpose of explaining the present invention can be combined as appropriate.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Center reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Center stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal insertion slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation indicator lamp 24a: Left operation indicator lamp 24b: Center operation indicator lamp 24c: Right operation indicator lamp 25: Number of bets display lamp 25a: 1 bet lamp 25b: 2 bet lamp 25c: 3 bet lamp 26: Number of credits display 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Acquired coin number display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Sticker storage section 32 : Display device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply unit 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal payout outlet 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal board

Claims (1)

A predetermined switch;
and a predetermined switch lamp;
A long press effect is provided that continuously changes the display mode while a predetermined switch is being pressed, and the long press effect is composed of a plurality of moving images.
The predetermined switch lamp can be lit in a lighting pattern corresponding to the long press performance during the long press performance,
When a display state changed based on pressing a predetermined switch during display of a first moving image of a long press performance satisfies a predetermined condition, a second moving image of a long press performance is displayed;
When the pressing of the predetermined switch is interrupted during the display of the predetermined moving image for the long press effect, the display of the predetermined moving image is temporarily stopped;
When the predetermined switch continues to be pressed and the front door is opened during the display of the predetermined moving image for the long press performance, the predetermined switch lamp lights up in a lighting pattern corresponding to the opening of the front door, but the display of the predetermined moving image is continued without interruption , and the pressing of the predetermined switch continues to be validly accepted , and when the setting key switch reaches a predetermined state and transitions to a setting confirmation mode, the display of the predetermined moving image is interrupted even if the pressing of the predetermined switch continues.
Amusement machine.

Images